Sony Switch 8000Sf Users Manual MVS 8000/8000SF System

MVS-8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 1 MVS-8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 1

MVS8000 to the manual 2d50f0db-1fb0-49c7-882a-92ef3c362be8

2015-01-23

: Sony Sony-Sony-Switch-8000Sf-Users-Manual-298401 sony-sony-switch-8000sf-users-manual-298401 sony pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 591 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Multi Format
Switcher System
MVS-8000/8000SF System (With CCP-8000 Series)
Multi Format
Switcher System
MVS-8000/8000SF System
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)
User’s Guide [English]
Volume 1
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
3-206-016-12 (1)
User’s Guide
Volume 1
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
[ English ]
MVS-8000/8000SF System
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)
User’s Guide
Multi Format Switcher System
Volume 1 [English]
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
Software Version 7.20 and Later
NOTICE TO USERS
© 2001 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This
manual or the software described herein, in whole or in
part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to
any machine readable form without prior written approval
from Sony Corporation.
SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY
WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE
OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND
HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO
THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER
INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY
CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE
THEREOF.
Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any
modification to this manual or the information contained
herein at any time without notice.
The software described herein may also be governed by
the terms of a separate user license agreement.
3
Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20
The functions newly supported in the MVS-8000 system version 7.20 are as
follows.
Functions relating to switcher processor
Classification Functions supported Menu No. See page
Vol. 1 Vol. 2
System 1080P/59.94 and 1080P/50 formats
and dual link support a)
7313 245 -
Transition Preset color mix with an image
selected on the utility 2 bus in place of
a color matte b)
1171 342 -
Key Fixing key fill and key source in key
drop off mode (frame delay mode) c)
1112.4 55, 393 -
Frame memory Clip transition b) 1176.1 42, 93 -
Recording and playback of ancillary
data b)
2525, 7316.8 92 314
Recording and recalling of extended
clip d)
2521, 2522,
2523
87 -
DME Applying DME effects to a maximum of
three keys on the SDI interface in
combination with a dedicated
interface b)
7337.7 - 423
Files • File operations of extended clips d)
• Converting between frame memory
clips and extended clips d)
• Importing extended clips d)
7151, 7151.1,
7162
205 468, 476,
482
Macros Creating and editing macro timelines 5441, 5441.1 216 546
Macro take operation using a GPI input 7325.1, 7352 - 369, 436
Setting a macro attachment without
changing cross-points
7326.6 - 381, 530
Recalling frame memory clips - 212 -
Recording with external devices - 212 -
Changing the registers for saving
macros
7142.3 - 502
Color corrector All the internal signals of the switcher
can be selected for color correction c)
7335 - 410
4
a) For MVS-8000G only
b) For other than MVS-8000
c) For MVS-8000G/8000GSF only
d) For MVS-8000A or MVS-8000G only
Functions relating to operability
Functions relating to external devices
Multi program 2 Re-entry between the main and sub
sides of the same M/E bank b)
7331 240 -
When recalling snapshot, keys on main
or sub side can be recalled
independently. b)
- 239 -
Diagnosis Displaying communication status b) 7431 - 567
Classification Functions supported Menu No. See page
Vol. 1 Vol. 2
Classification Functions supported Menu No. See page
Vol. 1 Vol. 2
Control panel Inhibiting cross-point button operations 7321.12,
7324
31 334
Distinguishable color of the shifted
button numbers in the Xpt Assign menu
7322.x1 - 346
External devices Making the USB primary setting
automatic
7317 - 316
Macros Holding down [PRE MCRO] and [POST
MCRO] buttons together makes it
possible to set a macro attachment in
macro only mode
- 218, 259 531
Files 40 or more directories can be created 71xx - 485
Snapshot Wipe and DME wipe snapshot
operations with menu
1157, 1167 182 -
Classification Functions supported Menu No. See page
Vol. 1 Vol. 2
Audio mixer Selection of signals linked with the
audio mixer
7322,
7322.11
33, 342 350
GPI output Addition of “Device Recording” to the
actions triggered by control panel or
DCU GPI output
7325.3, 7354 - 370, 439
5Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20 ..........................................3
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Introduction ..................................................................................................19
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System......................22
Video Processing Flow .................................................................................24
Signal Selection .............................................................................................25
Basics of Signal Selection .....................................................................26
Bus Selection.........................................................................................26
Signal Assignment and Selection ..........................................................29
Signal Name Display.............................................................................33
Transitions.....................................................................................................34
Selecting the Next Transition ................................................................34
Independent Key Transitions.................................................................37
Transition Types....................................................................................41
Executing a Transition...........................................................................44
Keys................................................................................................................48
Key Types..............................................................................................48
Key Modifiers........................................................................................52
Key Memory..........................................................................................56
Key Snapshots .......................................................................................57
Blink ......................................................................................................57
Key Default ...........................................................................................57
Key Modify Clear..................................................................................58
Resizer ...................................................................................................58
Wipes .............................................................................................................60
Types of Wipe Pattern...........................................................................60
Pattern Mix ............................................................................................61
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ..................................................63
Wipe Snapshots .....................................................................................71
Wipe Modify Clear................................................................................71
DME Wipes ...................................................................................................72
Types of DME Wipe Pattern .................................................................72
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers.........................................80
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ................................81
6Table of Contents
DME Wipe Snapshots ...........................................................................82
DME Wipe Modify Clear......................................................................83
Resizer DME wipes...............................................................................83
Frame Memory .............................................................................................85
Overview ...............................................................................................85
Still Image File Functions .....................................................................89
Frame Memory Clip Function...............................................................92
Image Data Management.......................................................................94
Image Data Transfer..............................................................................94
External Hard Disk Drive Access..........................................................96
Color Backgrounds.......................................................................................97
Copy and Swap .............................................................................................98
Side Flags.....................................................................................................102
Overview .............................................................................................102
Side Flag Settings................................................................................102
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ............................................103
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ..............................104
Video Process ..............................................................................................107
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .......................107
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus .................................107
Video Process Memory .......................................................................108
Digital Multi Effects (DME) ......................................................................109
Three-Dimensional Transformations...................................................110
Transformation Operation Modes .......................................................116
Graphics Display .................................................................................120
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display ...............................................122
DME Special Effects...........................................................................122
Interpolation ........................................................................................151
Key Density Adjustment .....................................................................152
Key Source Selection ..........................................................................152
Global Effects......................................................................................152
External Devices .........................................................................................158
Shared Functions for External Device Control ...................................158
Control of P-Bus Devices....................................................................159
Control of GPI Devices .......................................................................160
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ......................................161
Regions and Registers ................................................................................165
Regions................................................................................................165
Registers ..............................................................................................166
7Table of Contents
Keyframes ...................................................................................................168
Effects..................................................................................................168
Saving and Recalling Effects ..............................................................169
Effect Attributes ..................................................................................169
Effect Editing ......................................................................................169
Time Settings.......................................................................................171
Paths ....................................................................................................174
Effect Execution ..................................................................................180
Master Timelines.................................................................................181
Snapshots.....................................................................................................182
Snapshot Types....................................................................................182
Snapshot Attributes .............................................................................183
Utility ...........................................................................................................185
Shotbox ........................................................................................................186
Setup ............................................................................................................187
Overview of Setup...............................................................................187
System Setup .......................................................................................187
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ........................................................194
Panel Setup ..........................................................................................195
Switcher Setup.....................................................................................198
DME Setup ..........................................................................................202
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ..................................................202
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface.................203
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
(Option)....................................................................................204
Files ..............................................................................................................205
Macros .........................................................................................................210
Overview .............................................................................................210
Macro Creation and Editing ................................................................212
Macro Execution .................................................................................215
Macro Timeline ...................................................................................216
Macro Editing Using Menus ...............................................................218
Macro Attachment...............................................................................218
Menu Macros.......................................................................................222
Color Corrector ..........................................................................................223
Simple P/P Software ...................................................................................227
Overview .............................................................................................227
Restrictions on Use..............................................................................227
Multi Program 2 .........................................................................................230
8Table of Contents
Overview .............................................................................................230
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 .......................................232
Basic Operations (Required) ...............................................................232
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a
Switcher Bank).........................................................................237
Optional Operations ............................................................................237
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .......................................241
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode .....242
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ....................................243
Dual Link Support......................................................................................245
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel ...............................251
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1
(With Standard Transition Modules) .......................................251
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2
(With Simple Transition Modules) ..........................................252
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3
(With Compact Transition Modules) .......................................255
Cross-Point Control Block ..................................................................256
Transition Control Block (Standard Type)..........................................260
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) ...........................................264
Key Control Block...............................................................................267
Device Control Block (Trackball).......................................................271
Device Control Block (Joystick) .........................................................277
Device Control Block (Search Dial)....................................................278
Keyframe Control Block .....................................................................281
Numeric Keypad Control Block..........................................................284
Fade to Black Control Block ...............................................................287
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ..................................288
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) .............................291
Menu Control Block............................................................................294
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block.....................................................295
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ..........................................296
Utility/Shotbox Control Block ............................................................298
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type)....
299
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ................304
Downstream Key Control Block .........................................................306
9Table of Contents
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block .................................308
Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .........................................310
Basic Menu Operations..............................................................................313
Menu Organization..............................................................................313
About the Top Menu List ....................................................................313
Accessing Menus.................................................................................314
Displaying a Menu ..............................................................................321
Interpreting the Menu Screen ..............................................................322
Menu Operations .................................................................................323
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site ..335
Shortcut Menu .....................................................................................335
Chapter 3 Transitions
Basic Operating Procedure........................................................................340
Key Priority Setting....................................................................................343
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block....................343
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation....................................345
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................346
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ..............................348
Super Mix Settings .....................................................................................349
Color Matte Settings...................................................................................350
Executing a Transition ...............................................................................351
Transition Indicator Function..............................................................351
Setting the Transition Rate..................................................................352
Pattern Limit........................................................................................355
Executing an Auto Transition..............................................................359
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition)....359
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ..................................360
Non-Sync State....................................................................................360
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode.........................................361
Transition Preview .....................................................................................363
Independent Key Transitions ....................................................................364
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations....................................364
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation..365
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate......................................366
Fade to Black...............................................................................................369
Fade to Black Operation......................................................................369
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate...........................................369
Simple Transition .......................................................................................371
10 Table of Contents
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions.............................................371
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................373
Split Fader ...........................................................................................373
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module........374
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Setting Operations Using Menus.......................................................378
Key Setting Menus ..............................................................................378
Key Type Setting.................................................................................379
Chroma Key Composition...................................................................381
Chroma Key Adjustments ...................................................................382
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source .....................................................387
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................390
Masks...................................................................................................397
Applying a DME Effect to a Key........................................................400
Specifying the Key Output Destination...............................................403
Key Modify Clear................................................................................404
Blink Function.....................................................................................404
Video Processing.................................................................................405
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block .............................406
Operations in the Key Control Block ..................................................406
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................410
Masks...................................................................................................414
Applying a DME Effect to a Key........................................................415
Other Key Setting Operations .............................................................417
Resizer .........................................................................................................419
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys.......................................419
Resizer Interpolation Settings .............................................................424
Resizer Crop/Border Settings..............................................................424
Applying Resizer Effects.....................................................................427
Key Snapshots.............................................................................................433
Key Snapshot Operations ....................................................................433
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module............435
Chapter 5 Wipes
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ...........................................................438
Wipe Settings Menu ............................................................................438
Wipe Pattern Selection ........................................................................438
Pattern Mix ..........................................................................................441
11Table of Contents
Setting Wipe Modifiers .......................................................................443
Wipe Modify Clear..............................................................................454
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .....................................455
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings........455
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .........................456
Wipe Snapshots...........................................................................................460
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad ...................................460
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................463
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings .................................................466
DME Wipe Settings Menu ..................................................................466
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ..............................................................466
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers .............................................................469
DME Wipe Modify Clear....................................................................476
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...........................477
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings....
477
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers................478
Resizer DME Wipe Setting ........................................................................481
DME Wipe Snapshots ................................................................................482
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .........................482
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................482
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .........................................483
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .......................................483
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Still Image Operations ...............................................................................490
Preparations .........................................................................................490
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu................................................490
Selecting an Input Image.....................................................................494
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ....................................495
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze)......................................................496
Recalling Still Images .........................................................................500
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field Invert Function)
501
Image Processing.................................................................................502
Image Output.......................................................................................507
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) ...................................508
12 Table of Contents
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation)..........509
Frame Memory Clip Operations...............................................................512
Preparations for Operation ..................................................................512
Recalling Clips ....................................................................................512
Clip Playback ......................................................................................514
Clip Creation .......................................................................................518
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders..................................520
Clip Output..........................................................................................521
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data.........................................522
Clip Transition Operations........................................................................524
Image Data Management...........................................................................527
Pair File Processing .............................................................................527
Moving Files........................................................................................528
Deleting Files ......................................................................................529
Renaming Files....................................................................................530
File Backups ........................................................................................531
Restoring Files.....................................................................................531
External Hard Disk Drive Access .............................................................532
Hard Disk Formatting..........................................................................533
Saving Files .........................................................................................533
Recalling Files.....................................................................................535
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
Color Background Setting Operations .....................................................538
Color Background Settings Menu .......................................................538
Basic Color Background Setting Operations.......................................538
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap
Basic Copy and Swap Operations.............................................................544
Copy and Swap Menu Operations.......................................................544
Copy by Button Operation ..................................................................545
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Misc Menu Operations...............................................................................548
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ............................548
Editing Keyboard Settings...................................................................549
Side Flag Settings................................................................................550
Safe Title Settings ...............................................................................552
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings.......553
13Table of Contents
AUX Menu Operations ..............................................................................555
AUX Bus Settings ...............................................................................555
Status Menu ................................................................................................556
Video Process Settings................................................................................557
Appendix (Volume 1)
Wipe Pattern List .......................................................................................560
Standard Wipes....................................................................................560
Enhanced Wipes ..................................................................................561
Rotary Wipes.......................................................................................562
Mosaic Wipes......................................................................................563
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes............................................................565
DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................................566
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .......................566
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode.......................575
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode.....................579
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ...............................................................580
Index ............................................................................................................582
14 Table of Contents
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Introduction ................................................................................................19
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System ....................22
Video Processing Flow ...............................................................................24
Signal Selection ...........................................................................................25
Basics of Signal Selection ...................................................................26
Bus Selection .......................................................................................26
Signal Assignment and Selection ........................................................29
Signal Name Display ...........................................................................33
Transitions ...................................................................................................34
Selecting the Next Transition ..............................................................34
Independent Key Transitions ...............................................................37
Transition Types ..................................................................................41
Executing a Transition .........................................................................44
Keys ..............................................................................................................48
Key Types ............................................................................................48
Key Modifiers ......................................................................................52
Key Memory ........................................................................................56
Key Snapshots .....................................................................................57
Blink ....................................................................................................57
Key Default .........................................................................................57
Key Modify Clear ................................................................................58
Resizer .................................................................................................58
Wipes ...........................................................................................................60
Types of Wipe Pattern .........................................................................60
Pattern Mix ..........................................................................................61
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ................................................63
Wipe Snapshots ...................................................................................71
Wipe Modify Clear ..............................................................................71
DME Wipes .................................................................................................72
Types of DME Wipe Pattern ...............................................................72
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers .......................................80
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ..............................81
DME Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................82
DME Wipe Modify Clear ....................................................................83
Resizer DME wipes .............................................................................83
Frame Memory ...........................................................................................85
Overview .............................................................................................85
Still Image File Functions ...................................................................89
Frame Memory Clip Function .............................................................92
Image Data Management .....................................................................94
Image Data Transfer ............................................................................94
External Hard Disk Drive Access ........................................................96
Color Backgrounds .....................................................................................97
Copy and Swap ...........................................................................................98
Side Flags ...................................................................................................102
Overview ...........................................................................................102
Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................102
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ..........................................103
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ............................104
Video Process ............................................................................................107
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .....................107
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus ...............................107
Video Process Memory .....................................................................108
Digital Multi Effects (DME) ....................................................................109
Three-Dimensional Transformations .................................................110
Transformation Operation Modes .....................................................116
Graphics Display ...............................................................................120
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display .............................................122
DME Special Effects .........................................................................122
Interpolation ......................................................................................151
Key Density Adjustment ...................................................................152
Key Source Selection ........................................................................152
Global Effects ....................................................................................152
External Devices .......................................................................................158
Shared Functions for External Device Control .................................158
Control of P-Bus Devices ..................................................................159
Control of GPI Devices .....................................................................160
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ....................................161
Regions and Registers ..............................................................................165
Regions ..............................................................................................165
Registers ............................................................................................166
Keyframes .................................................................................................168
Effects ................................................................................................168
Saving and Recalling Effects ............................................................169
Effect Attributes ................................................................................169
Effect Editing ....................................................................................169
Time Settings .....................................................................................171
Paths ..................................................................................................174
Effect Execution ................................................................................180
Master Timelines ...............................................................................181
Snapshots ...................................................................................................182
Snapshot Types ..................................................................................182
Snapshot Attributes ...........................................................................183
Utility .........................................................................................................185
Shotbox ......................................................................................................186
Setup ..........................................................................................................187
Overview of Setup .............................................................................187
System Setup .....................................................................................187
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ......................................................194
Panel Setup ........................................................................................195
Switcher Setup ...................................................................................198
DME Setup ........................................................................................202
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ................................................202
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface ...............203
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
(Option) ..................................................................................204
Files ............................................................................................................205
Macros .......................................................................................................210
Overview ...........................................................................................210
Macro Creation and Editing ..............................................................212
Macro Execution ...............................................................................215
Macro Timeline .................................................................................216
Macro Editing Using Menus .............................................................218
Macro Attachment .............................................................................218
Menu Macros .....................................................................................222
Color Corrector ........................................................................................223
Simple P/P Software .................................................................................227
Overview ...........................................................................................227
Restrictions on Use ............................................................................227
Multi Program 2 .......................................................................................230
Overview ...........................................................................................230
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 .....................................232
Basic Operations (Required) .............................................................232
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a
Switcher Bank) .......................................................................237
Optional Operations ..........................................................................237
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .....................................241
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode ...242
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ..................................243
Dual Link Support ....................................................................................245
19Introduction
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Introduction
This manual is the User’s Guide for the MVS-8000/8000SF Multi Format
Switcher system. The MVS-8000 and MVS-8000SF have different numbers of
M/E banks and input/output signals, but are otherwise functionally identical.
This manual refers to these generically as the “MVS-8000 system,” and
describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP-8000 series of
center control panels.
The User’s Guide for this system comprises two volumes.
Contents of Volume 1
Overview of functions of the MVS-8000 system, and basic switcher operations
including transitions, keys, and wipes.
Contents of Volume 2
DME effects, snapshots, keyframes, and various operations such as setup
which affect the overall system.
Devices and system nomenclature
In this manual, when discussing the principal components of the MVS-8000
system, in place of the formal product names, abbreviated names
characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used. When
distinctions between system configurations must be drawn, the terms in the
following table are used.
Principal components and naming
The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS-8000
system, and the terms used in this manual are as follows.
Formal product name Term used in this manual
MVS-8000/8000SF/8000A/8000ASF/8000G/
8000GSF Multi Format Switcher Processor a) Switcher or switcher processor
MVE-8000 (MKS-8800)/8000A Multi Format
DME Processor
DME or DME processor or MVE-8000/
8000A
MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor DME or DME processor or MVE-9000
CCP-8000-series Center Control Panel Control panel or center control panel
DCU-8000 (MKS-8700) Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-8700
DCU-2000 (MKS-2700) Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-2700
20 Introduction
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) Where there are differences among the MVS-8000/8000SF system, MVS-8000A/8000ASF
system, and MVS-8000G/8000GSF system, these may be noted specifically in the relevant
place.
System nomenclature
The following terms are used for systems, depending on the combination of
installed options, and the signal format.
Related manuals
The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the MVS-
8000 Multi Format Switcher system.
MVS-8400/8300/8200 Switcher Processor Pack
• MVS-8400/8300/8200 Operation Manual
• MVS-8400/8300/8200 Installation Manual
MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Switcher Processor Pack
• MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Operation Manual
• MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Installation Manual
MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Switcher Processor Pack
• MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Operation Manual
• MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Installation Manual
MVS-8000SF-C Switcher Processor Pack
• MVS-8000SF-C Operation Manual
• MVS-8000SF-C Installation Manual
MVE-8000-C DME Processor Pack
• MVE-8000-C Operation Manual
• MVE-8000-C Installation Manual
MVE-8000A DME Processor Pack
System configuration and features Term for system
System with installed option boards and
settings to support HDTV format
HD system
System with installed option boards and
settings to support SDTV format
SD system
A system in which the center control panel has
four M/E banks
4M/E system
A system in which the center control panel has
three M/E banks
3M/E system
A system in which the center control panel has
two M/E banks
2M/E system
21Introduction
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• MVE-8000A Operation Manual
• MVE-8000A Installation Manual
MVE-9000-C DME Processor Pack
• MVE-9000-C Operation Manual
• MVE-9000-C Installation Manual
CCP-8000 Center Control Panel Pack
• CCP-8000 Operation Manual
• CCP-8000 Installation Manual
DCU-8000 Device Control Unit Pack
• DCU-8000 Operation Manual
• DCU-8000 Installation Manual
DCU-2000 Device Control Unit Pack
• DCU-2000-C Operation Manual
• DCU-2000-C Installation Manual
22 Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format
Switcher System
The MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher system boasts extensible high
performance and multifunctionality. The following are some of the principal
features of this system.
System configuration flexibility
Multiformat support
This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats. The format
selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation. The MVS-
8000G supports either the HDTV or SDTV signal format, depending on the
software option selection.
Extensible system configuration
By suitable combination of options, the switcher can be configured with
various inputs and outputs, and different numbers of M/E banks. The system
offers the flexibility to change and expand as required.
You can connect up to two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 extensible DME
processors, each of which provides any number from one to four channels, for
a maximum of eight channels of DME functionality.
Powerful external device interfaces
By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar, a large system can be
built. From the control panel, it is also possible to operate other equipment,
including VTRs and disk recorders.
Powerful tally system
The complete system including routing switcher provides an all-inclusive tally
system. The system can be adapted to different applications and settings, using
multiple tally outputs, including both on-air and recording tallies.
Comprehensive video manipulation
M/E banks
Each mix/effects bank (M/E bank) is equipped with four keyers, and each
keyer is capable not only of chroma keying, but also independent key
transitions separate from the background transitions. The four keys can be
freely combined, to carry out four different program outputs.
23Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Powerful frame memory functions
In an MVS-8000 system, an HDTV system can hold 58 still image frames (88
frames in 720P/59.94 format), and an SDTV system can store 222 frames in
memory, while up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously.
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, an HDTV system can
hold approximately 1,000 still image frames or 2,000 frames in 720P/59.94
format, and an SDTV system can hold approximately 5,000 frames in 480i/
59.94 format or 4,000 frames in 576i/50 format in memory, and up to eight
frames can be recalled and used simultaneously.
Link operation with DME
By means of the dedicated DME interface, a range of DME functions including
DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher functions.
By connecting two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 units, in any
combination, you can interface to a maximum of eight DME channels.
Note that the MVE-8000A and MVE-9000 can also be used with this system
by connecting through an SDI interface.
Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment
Flexible control panel layout
Because of its modular design, the various sections of the control panel can be
laid out as required. This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system
operation.
High-performance user interface
The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel, with rapid touch-
panel menu selection.
The source name displays and buttons in the Flexi PadTM and shotbox control
blocks have color backlit LCD displays. The signal names, and graphical
representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive
feedback, and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live
operating environment.
24 Video Processing Flow
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Video Processing Flow
The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a
transition on an M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank.
Select next transition (page 34)
Make key settings (page 48)
Keys 1 to 4
Select new background video (page 25)
Select transition type (page 41)
Select current background video
(page 25)
Background
Cut Mix Super
mix
Preset color
mix
Wipe DME wipe
Make wipe
settings (page 60)
Make DME wipe settings
(page 72)
Preview the effect of transition (page 46)
Execute the transition (page 44)
NAM
25Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Signal Selection
You carry out signal selection with the cross-point buttons in the cross-point
control block of each M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank, and the buttons in the
auxiliary bus control block.
The number of buttons in each cross-point row may be 16, 24, or 32, but here
the description is of the 32-button case as an example.
Cross-point control block
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
SHIFT XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
MCRO
ENBL
KEY3
KEY4
MCRO
ASGN
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
AUTO
RUN
UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
Source name displays
Key 2 row
Key 1 row Reentry buttons
KEY4 button
KEY3 button
Cross-point buttons
Background A row
Background B row
SHIFT button
Reentry buttons
UTIL button
26 Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Basics of Signal Selection
Each of the M/E banks, PGM/PST bank and auxiliary bus control block has 32
cross-point buttons and three reentry buttons (four in the case of the auxiliary
bus control block).
These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block,
and a signal is assigned to each number.
The basis of signal selection is to select, in a cross-point button row, the cross-
point button to which is assigned the desired signal.
Reentry buttons
To use the output of one M/E bank as background input to another bank, use
the reentry buttons [M/E1], [M/E2], and [M/E3] (on the auxiliary bus control
block, [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], and [PGM]) in the cross-point control block
of the destination bank.
For example, to feed the output from the M/E-1 bank as the background B input
to M/E-2, in the M/E-2 cross-point control block, press the [M/E1] button in
the background B row.
Bus Selection
Each row of 32 cross-point buttons is shared by multiple buses.
For example, in the M/E-1 bank, the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either
to the key 1 bus or to the key 3 bus. The [KEY3] button switches between these
two assignments.
To assign a bus to the cross-point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block,
press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus.
The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and cross-
point button rows, and the delegation operations.
Bank Bus name Cross-point
button row
Delegation operation
M/E-1,
M/E-2,
M/E-3
Background A bus a) Background A
row
–
Background B bus a) Background B
row
–
Key 1 bus Key 1 row Turn off the [KEY3] button
Key 2 bus Key 2 row Turn off the [KEY4] button
Key 3 bus Key 1 row Turn on the [KEY3] button
Key 4 bus Key 2 row Turn on the [KEY4] button
27Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
PGM/PST Program bus a) Program row –
Preset bus a) Preset row –
DSK 1 bus DSK1 row Turn off the [DSK3] button
DSK 2 bus DSK2 row Turn off the [DSK4] button
DSK 3 bus DSK1 row Turn on the [DSK3] button
DSK 4 bus DSK2 row Turn on the [DSK4] button
M/E-1,
M/E-2,
M/E-3,
PGM/PST
Utility 1 bus Background A
row
When [UTIL] button mode
is Hold, hold down the
[UTIL] button
Utility 2 bus Background B
row
DME external video bus Key 1 row Hold down the [UTIL]
button
DME utility 1 bus Key 2 row Hold down the [UTIL]
button, and press the
[KEY4] button, turning it
off
DME utility 2 bus Hold down the [UTIL]
button, and press the
[KEY4] button, turning it
on
Bank Bus name Cross-point
button row
Delegation operation
28 Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Auxiliary
bus control
block
AUX1 to AUX48 buses 1st row, 2nd row Turn on the appropriate
buttons in accordance with
the signal assignment
made in the Setup menu.
MONITOR 1 to
MONITOR 8 buses
Frame memory source 1
and frame memory
source 2 buses
DME 1 to DME 8 video
buses
DME 1 to DME 8 key
buses
Edit preview bus
M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and
M/E-1 UTILITY 2 buses
M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and
M/E-2 UTILITY 2 buses
M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and
M/E-3 UTILITY 2 buses
P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P
UTILITY 2 buses
M/E-1 Key 1 fill to M/E-1
Key 4 fill buses
M/E-1 Key 1 source to M/
E-1 Key 4 source buses
M/E-2 Key 1 fill to M/E-2
Key 4 fill buses
M/E-2 Key 1 source to M/
E-2 Key 4 source buses
M/E-3 Key 1 fill to M/E-3
Key 4 fill buses
M/E-3 Key 1 source to
M/E-3 Key 4 source
buses
DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill
buses
DSK 1 source to DSK 4
source buses
M/E-1 external DME bus
M/E-2 external DME bus
M/E-3 external DME bus
P/P external DME bus
DME UTILITY 1 and
DME UTILITY 2 buses
Bank Bus name Cross-point
button row
Delegation operation
29Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) Dual background bus mode (see below) can be selected.
Dual background bus mode
In this mode, the shifted signal on the background A row can be selected on the
key 1 row, and the shifted signal on the background B row can be selected on
the key 2 row.
To switch this mode on and off, it is necessary to assign this function to the
[PRE MCRO] button in the cross-point control block.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Overall Control Panel Settings
(Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Note
For the following switcher banks, dual background bus mode is not available.
• When set to “Dual M/E Assign”
• When M/E Config is set to “DSK”
Signal Assignment and Selection
Assigning signals to buttons
Each of the 32 cross-point buttons and reentry buttons has a corresponding
button number, to which you assign a signal.
In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 80 connectors
(1 to 34 connectors for the MVS-8000SF/8000ASF/8000GSF) on the rear
panel of the switcher, you can also select signals generated within the switcher.
Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal, forming a pair.
You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu.
For details of Setup menu operations, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
30 Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Cross-point button control block button numbers
On each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank, each cross-point button and reentry
button has two button numbers, and you use the shift button to switch between
these numbers.
In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows.
Note
On the MVS-8000A/8000G, you can use the rightmost button (number 32) as
a [SIDE FLAG] button. In this case, the shift button moves one to the left, to
number 31, and the button numbers are offset by one.
For details of the [SIDE FLAG] button, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Switching button numbers
The rightmost (32nd) button functions as a shift button.
(The shift button function can be disabled in a Setup menu.)
When selecting the signals of button numbers 1 to 31, press the cross-point
button for the desired signal.
To select button numbers 32 to 62, hold down the shift button, and press the
cross-point button for the desired signal.
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
MCRO
ENBL
DSK3
KSK4
MCRO
ASGN
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
AUTO
RUN
UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
1, 2, 3, 4, ....... ....... 29, 30, 31 121 123
32, 33, 34, 35, ....... ....... 60, 61, 62 125 127
(first button numbers)
(second button numbers)
Shift button
Shift button
Cross-point control block button numbers
Button Number when the shift
button is not pressed
Number when the shift
button is pressed
From the left end to the 31st
button
1 to 31 32 to 62
Reentry buttons 121 to 123 125 to 127
31Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Button numbers in the auxiliary bus control block
When the [2ND] button is unlit
The cross-point buttons and reentry buttons in the auxiliary bus control block
have separate upper (1st row) and lower (2nd row) numbers.
In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows.
When the [2ND] button is lit
Different buses can be assigned to the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row buttons.
When the 32nd button is set as a shift button, the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row
buttons both have the following button numbers.
Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button lit)
Inhibiting cross-point button operations
For each cross-point button, you can temporarily inhibit operations.
LEVEL
1
DEST
SHIFT
RTR
2ND
KEY
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
M/E
1
M/E
1
LEVEL
2
MCRO
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
LEVEL
3
MCRO
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
LEVEL
4
MCRO
3
P/P
P/P
EDIT
PVW
AUX
1
AUX
2
AUX
3
AUX
4
AUX
5
AUX
6
AUX
7
AUX
8
AUX
9
AUX
10
AUX
11
AUX
12
AUX
13
AUX
14
AUX
15
AUX
16
AUX
17
AUX
18
AUX
19
AUX
20
AUX
21
AUX
22
AUX
23
AUX
24
AUX
25
AUX
26
AUX
27
DME
UTIL1
DME
UTIL2
FM
1
FM
2
1, 2, 3, 4, ....... ....... 29, 30, 31 121 124
32, 33, 34, 35, ....... ....... 60, 61, 62 125 128
(1st row)
(2nd row)
2ND button
Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button unlit)
Button Button Button numbers
1st row From the left end to the 31st button 1 to 31
Reentry buttons 121 to 124
2nd row From the left end to the 31st button 32 to 62
Reentry buttons 125 to 128
Button Number when the shift
button is not pressed
Number when the shift
button is pressed
From the left end to the 31st
button
1 to 31 32 to 62
Reentry buttons 121 to 124 125 to 128
32 Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel.
Assigning a button to the function of disabling cross-point button
operation
You can assign the button to be used for the operation to the [PRE MCRO]
button, in setup. (See Chapter 16, “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config
Menu)” (Volume 2))
You can also use the [Inhibit Set] and [Inhibit All Clear] functions, assigned to
user preference buttons. (See Chapter 16, “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/
Utility Menu)” (Volume 2))
Buses for which operations can be inhibited
This setting applies to the AUX control block and switcher bank cross-point
buttons.
For example, if you make the setting for one cross-point button in a switcher
bank, this inhibits operation of all cross-point buttons with the same number in
the following buses.
The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display.
• Background A, background B
•Keys 1 to 4
• Utility 1, utility 2
• DME utility 1, DME utility 2
• External DME
To inhibit operation of a cross-point button
Hold down the button which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the cross-point
button whose operation you want to inhibit.
The button you pressed flashes amber, and this makes the operation inhibited.
Note
Even when you inhibit operation of a cross-point button, macro attachment
settings are still possible (see page 218).
To clear a cross-point button operation inhibit setting
Hold down the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the button
whose operation is inhibited (flashing amber).
This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed.
To clear all operation inhibit settings
Press the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned and the button to which
“Inhibit All Clear” is assigned simultaneously.
33Signal Selection
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer
When you select a signal in a switcher bank background A row or AUX bus
control block which is set to be linked with the audio mixer, the program output
of the audio mixer follows the signal selection.
For details of the setting, see Chapter 16, “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
menu)” (Volume 2).
Note
• For details of audio mixers that can be connected, contact your Sony service
or sales representative.
• When the signal is switched with a snapshot, keyframe, and so on, the audio
mixer is not linked.
• When bus fixed mode is selected in setup (see page 45), the audio mixer
program output is linked to the bus output as the background.
Signal Name Display
You can attach a name (source name) to each signal assigned to a cross-point
button, with a maximum of 16 characters.
• The source name displays in the cross-point control block and auxiliary bus
control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to
numbers 1 to 31.
• To display the source names for numbers 32 to 62, press the [SHIFT] button
to the right of the source name displays.
• To display the source names of the key signals assigned to buttons, hold
down the [SPLIT] button in the key control block or the [KEY] button in the
auxiliary bus control block.
Colors of lit cross-point buttons
In a particular row of cross-point buttons, only the last pressed button is
effective, and lights amber or red. The amber indicates the “low tally” state,
and the red indicates the “high tally” state, to indicate whether or not the
selected signal appears in the final output video.
Significance of colors of lit cross-point buttons
Color State Significance
Amber Low tally Does not appear in final output video
Red High tally Appears in final output video
34 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Transitions
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, the switch from the current video stream
(appearing on the corresponding program monitor) to a new video stream is
referred to as a transition.
Selecting the Next Transition
To execute a transition, it is first necessary to decide how the image will be
changed as a result of the transition. This selection is carried out using the next
transition selection buttons (see page 261) in the transition control block of
each M/E or PGM/PST bank.
For details of operations, “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340).
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can change one of the images, the
background, and keys 1 to 4 (downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM/PST bank),
and also vary combinations of these simultaneously.
The following are examples of transition.
Changing the background
A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the
background A bus (the current video) to the video selected on the background
B bus (the new video).
In the default selection of flip-flop mode (see page 45), the background always
switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus. When the transition
completes, the cross-point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged.
Background BBackground A
Transition
35Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Inserting and deleting a key
You can insert one or more of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/
PST bank).
If you select a key which is already inserted, the transition will delete the key.
A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible.
Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2
Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2
Delete
Insert
Key 1
Key 2
Key 1
Key 2
Transition
36 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Simultaneously changing the background and keys
You can change any of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/PST bank)
and the background at the same time.
Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously
Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously
Selecting the key priority
If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video, you can check or
change the key priority, that is to say, the order in which the keys are overlaid.
When a key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) is selected as the next transition, you can
also change the key priority in the new video.
For details of this operation, see “Key Priority Setting” (page 343).
Key 1
Key 2
Transition
Key 1
Key 2 Key 3 Key 4
Transition
37Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The key priority values go from 1 to 4, with a higher priority key being “in
front” as seen on the screen.
Priority sequence on the screen
Independent Key Transitions
What is an independent key transition?
In addition to common transitions, it is possible to carry out independent
transitions on the keyers of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank. These are
called “independent key transitions.”
By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common
transition, different transition types can be used for the background and keys.
It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key
deletion by means of a Setup menu setting.
For details of this operation, see “Basic Independent Key Transition
Operations” (page 364).
The following description compares the independent key transition with a
common transition, taking a simultaneous change of the background and key
as an example.
Video used in the transition
4321
Background A Background B Key to insert
38 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Effect of a common transition
In the case shown in the previous illustration, carrying out a common transition
produces the following change in the image.
Effect of a common transition
Effect of use with an independent key transition
The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background
changes with a common transition, providing the following result.
Effect of a background transition and independent key transition
Combining other transitions with independent key transitions
When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the
same key, you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix (dissolve)
(see page 41) to the key simultaneously.
When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key
as auto transitions (see page 45), the result depends on the timing of pressing
the respective [AUTO TRANS] buttons.
Same wipe is applied to
background and key.
Transition type: wipe
Different wipe patterns are applied to
the background and key transitions.
Transition type:
wipe
Independent key
transition type:
wipe
39Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Simultaneous execution
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed
simultaneously, the following is the result.
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent
key transition is a mix (dissolve).
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key inserted, it is
deleted simultaneously with the two transitions.
When the common transition completes, even if the independent key
transition is still not completed, the two end simultaneously.
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key not inserted, it
is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions. If the common
transition or independent key transition ends first, the other continues to
completion.
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions
Time offset execution
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time
offset, the following is the result.
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent
key transition is a mix (dissolve).
Wipe and mix
(dissolve) are
carried out
simultaneously.
The key is deleted,
even if the
independent key
transition has not
completed.
Wipe and mix
(dissolve) are
carried out
simultaneously.
The transitions
continue until both
are completed.
40 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Time offset execution with the key inserted: With the key inserted, it is
deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset.
Whichever button is pressed first, when the common transition completes,
even if the independent key transition is still not completed, the two end
simultaneously.
Example: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS] button
is pressed later
Time offset execution with the key inserted
Time offset execution with the key not inserted: With the key not inserted,
it is inserted with the transition whose [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed
first.
Since the key is then in the inserted state, with the transition whose [AUTO
TRANS] button is pressed later, the key is deleted. When the key is
completely deleted, both transitions complete.
Common transition
(wipe) start
Independent key
transition (mix) start
The key is deleted,
even if the
independent key
transition has not
completed.
41Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Time offset execution with the key not inserted
Transition Types
Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs.
Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the
transition control block of each M/E or PGM/PST bank.
For details of this operation, see “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340).
The following are the transition types.
Mix
This is a dissolve, in which the new video progressively fades in over the
current video, with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant. At
the mid-point of the transition (when the fader lever is in the center position),
the output of each is 50%.
This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition. In
this case, the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly, with the
progress of the transition.
Common transition
(wipe) start
Independent key
transition (mix)
start
The transition
completes with the
key deleted.
Example 1: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS]
button is pressed later
Common
transition (wipe)
start
Independent
key transition
(mix) start
The transition
completes with the
key deleted.
Example 2: When the common transition [AUTO TRANS] button is
pressed later
42 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
NAM (non-additive mix)
In this dissolve, the current video and new video signals are compared, and the
signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The
current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as
the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is
progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half with the new video
maintained at 100% output.
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
Super mix
In this dissolve, the current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half
of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to
100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the
second half with the new video maintained at 100% output.
Note that you can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at
the mid-point of the transition, in the range 0 to 100%. (See “Super Mix
Settings” (page 349).)
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
Preset color mix
This is a two-stage dissolve, comprising two transitions, the first a dissolve to
a color matte, and the second from the color matte to the new video.
In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix
(dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new
video also in a mix (dissolve). You can specify the color matte by luminance,
saturation, and hue values. (See “Color Matte Settings” (page 350).)
Also, in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility 2
bus.
Notes
• This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
• In the multi-program mode, you can use a preset color mix only when
selecting the background for the next transition.
One-stroke mode and one-time mode
• You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single
transition. This is called “one-stroke mode.”
43Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting, a preset color
mix is always carried out in the one-stroke mode.
• You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed,
the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically.
This is called “one-time mode.”
When only the background is changed
Preset color mix (changing background only)
When a key is inserted
Preset color mix (transition including key)
By means of a Setup menu setting, it is possible to preserve the key state while
carrying out the color matte mix.
Current video Color matte New video
Key fades out
Key
When a key is
selected as the next
transition
When no key is selected
Key fades in
44 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
When, with a key inserted, a key is selected in the next transition
Preset color mix (when set to preserve key state)
Wipe
A wipe replaces the current video by the new video according to a
predetermined pattern. This transition type can also be selected for an
independent key transition.
For details, see “Wipes” (page 60) and Chapter 5 “Wipes” (page 437).
DME wipe
Using a DME effect, it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from
the current image, as in a wipe. You can also use this transition type as an
independent key transition.
For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 72) and Chapter 6 “DME Wipes” (page
465).
Clip transitions
Linked to a mix (dissolve) or wipe transition, a frame memory clip (movie) is
played back.
Note
The clip transition function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.
Cut
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.
Executing a Transition
There are two modes of executing a transition: an auto transition by button
operation or a manual transition using the fader lever.
Key
Key state preserved
Key gradually
removed
45Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
It is also possible to combine both methods, taking control with the fader lever
of an auto transition which has partly completed, or complete a transition
started with the fader lever as an auto transition.
By combining common transitions with independent key transitions, different
transition types can be applied to the background and keys, for example
allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve. (See “Executing a
Transition” (page 351).)
When the audio mixer is linked in setup, you can carry out an auto transition,
and also switch the sound with the audio mixer. (See “Transition linked to the
audio mixer” (page 342).)
Auto transitions
Cut
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.
Auto transition
The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out
automatically at a constant rate, using the transition effect selected as the
transition type.
You can set the transition rate in advance. (See “Setting the Transition Rate”
(page 352).)
Manual transitions
Using the fader lever, you can manually control the progress of the transition.
Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the
transition.
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode
The following describes the difference between flip-flop mode and bus fixed
mode, taking an M/E bank as an example; the functionality is the same,
however, on the PGM/PST bank.
Normally, when a background transition is carried out on an M/E bank, the
signals selected on the A and B rows of cross-point buttons are interchanged at
the end of the transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the
background output is always from the background A bus. This is called “flip-
flop mode.”
The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which there is no bus
interchange. In this mode, when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the
output from the A bus is always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom
of its travel the output from the B bus is 100%.
46 Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode
For details of fader lever operation in bus fixed mode, see page 361.
Transition preview
With the preview output of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can check
the effect of a transition in advance. To carry out a transition preview, press the
[TRANS PVW] button in the transition control block. (See “Transition
Preview” (page 363).)
Note
In multi-program mode, DSK mode (page 199) or bus fixed mode (page 45),
it is not possible to carry out a transition preview.
Pattern limit
When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition, you can
specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the
transition, for each bank independently.
When the pattern limit function is enabled, carrying out a transition results in
the following effect for example settings.
• When the limit value is set to 50%, the effect at the end of the transition is
the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case
(with the pattern limit function disabled); the wipe pattern does not complete.
• When the limit value is set to 0%, the wipe effect is completely disabled, and
carrying out the transition produces no change in the image.
A
B
BLACK
BLACK
A
B
BLACK
BLACK
A
B
BLACK
BLACK
Buttons lit
Fader
lever
Flip-flop mode
Bus fixed mode
47Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• When the limit value is set to the maximum 100%, the image changes in
exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off, but when the
transition is completed, the cross-point selections on the background A and
B buses do not interchange.
You can specify the limit value either by entering a numeric value in the menu,
or by operating the fader lever to set the fader lever position. (See “Pattern
Limit” (page 355).)
Note
The pattern limit function is not available in an independent key transition.
Fade to black
The PGM/PST bank provides a fade-to-black function, controlled with the
[FTB] button in the fade to black control block. (See “Fade to Black” (page
369).)
Note
In multi-program mode or DSK mode, it is possible to carry out a fade-to-black
on a number of programs simultaneously.
You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade-to-black does not
apply to particular programs.
For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
48 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Keys
A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an
image or superimposed text. The signal determining how the background is cut
out is termed “key source,” and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is
termed “key fill.” The system component responsible for processing a key is
referred to as a keyer.
Each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank has four keyers, and all of these keyers
provide the same functions.
Key Types
The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut
out the background. In each bank, you can use the following key types. You
can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control
block, or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer. (See “Key Type Setting”
(page 379).)
• Luminance key
• Linear key
• Color vector key
• Chroma key
• Wipe pattern key
• Key wipe pattern key
Luminance key
The background is cut out according to the luminance (Y) of the key source
signal, and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the
background signal.
Linear key
This is a type of luminance key, but there is a reduced variability in gain,
allowing more precise adjustment.
Color vector key
The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and
chrominance components of the key source signal. When perfect keying is not
possible with a luminance key, this allows a key signal to be created even if the
luminance level is low, provided that the colors have high saturation.
49Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Clean mode
In a luminance key, linear key or color vector key, you can enable the clean
mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not affect the key fill,
which is added unchanged to the background. This improves the keyed image
quality, but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted
must be completely black, or it will color the background. You set the clean
mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer. (See “Setting the key type in
a menu” (page 379).)
Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes off, and cannot be
turned on.
• When the key type is a pattern key
• When key inversion is on
• When the key fill is a matte
• When the key edge is an outline
• When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on
• When fine key is on
• When the key positioner is on
Chroma key
A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background, and
the key fill is then inserted. The inserted signal is also referred to as the
foreground, and the composite image is called a chroma key image.
Normal mix and additive mix
In creating a chroma key image, either a normal mix or an additive mix can be
used. To select which, use the Type >Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer. (See
“Chroma Key Composition” (page 381).)
Foreground Background
Chroma key image
50 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Normal mix: The foreground is cut out with the key signal, and then combined
with the background, which has also been cut out with the key signal.
Additive mix: The background, which has been cut out with the key signal, is
combined with the unshaped foreground. This is effective for a natural-
looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent
objects.
Plane function
In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key signal, and
variations in the (blue) background appear in the composite image. To prevent
this, it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background, and
any parts below this level are cut forcibly.
Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include
automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function, and manual
adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately. The optimum
results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma
key function, then making any fine adjustments as required.
The following manual adjustments are possible.
Key active
When this function is off, only the foreground is output and you can make
adjustments of color cancel (see the next paragraph).
Color cancel
If the foreground image includes shades of the background color, turn this
function on to remove the color from the foreground image.
Chroma key window
You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching
the specified hue. When this adjustment is off the default ranges are used.
Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color (reference
color) in the foreground (typically a plain blue background), and the “window”
refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified
reference color to create the key signal.
As seen on a vectorscope (that is, in the hue-saturation color space), the range
for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector. This range is specified by
two parameters: the “Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue
parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines the degree of
truncation (see the following figure).
51Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Window adjustment
Y balance
In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the chrominance
component only, and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are
replaced by the background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify a
luminance level range within which the key is active, and replace the specified
part by the background.
You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the
composition and the key signal for the color cancel function. When applied to
the key signal for the composition, this produces the foreground with the color
cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to provide an impression of
smoke, for example.
When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key, the relevant
part is output in its original color without canceling, and therefore it is possible
to combine colors which are the same color as the background (i.e. typically
blue) in the foreground.
Chroma key shadow
This function provides a more realistic treatment when the shadow of an object
in the field of view falls on the blue background. Since parts of the blue
background darker than a specified intensity are treated as shadows, there is no
effect on cutting out of the foreground.
Video signal adjustment
You can vary the foreground signal gain, or change the hue. There are separate
adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal, and Y and C components.
Reference color
specified by Hue
setting
Range of colors creating the key signal
(to be replaced by background signal)
Range of colors remaining
as foreground
a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if
you use the auto chroma key function.
Angle a)
Crop a)
52 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items, see
“Chroma Key Adjustments” (page 382).
Wipe pattern key
This uses the wipe pattern selected for a transition as the key source.
Key wipe pattern key
This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key
source.
Note on wipe pattern modifiers
In a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key, you can apply various
modifications, depending on the pattern used, and the modifiers in common
with a wipe.
However, modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not
reflected.
Key Modifiers
Edge modifiers
You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key. (See “Key Edge
Modifications” (pages 390 and 410).)
Normal
This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied.
53Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Border
This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key. You can adjust the
border width and density. You can also enable the separate edge function, and
adjust the top, bottom, left, and right border widths separately.
Drop border
This applies a border below and to the right for example, of the key. You can
adjust the border width, position, and density.
Shadow
This applies a shadow below and to the right for example, of the key. You can
adjust the shadow width, position, and density.
54 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Outline
This uses the outline of the original key as the key. You can adjust the width
and density of the outline. You can also enable the separate edge function, and
adjust the top, bottom, left, and right outline widths separately.
Emboss
This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key. You can adjust the
width and position of the embossing, and the density. You can adjust the
density separately for key fill and key edge. When embossing is on, the Fine
Key and zabton functions go off.
Soft edge
This softens the edge of the key.
Zabton
This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key. You can adjust the pattern size,
softness, density and color.
Edge type and key fill/key source position
The key edge modification function has two modes: a mode (“key drop ON
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position moves downward, and a mode
(“key drop OFF mode”) in which it does not move downward.
Key drop ON mode: The key fill/key source position moves downward by
eight scan lines or four scan lines. When a drop border or shadow is
selected, it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key.
Key drop OFF mode: The key fill/key source position does not move. When
a drop border or shadow is selected, it is not possible to apply a border to
the top edge of the key.
In the key drop ON mode, a menu setting selects between the mode (“4H
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered by four scan lines,
and the mode (“8H mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered
by eight scan lines.
When Fine Key is on, the edge width is forced to the range 0.00 to 4.00.
Note that in the following situations, the key drop mode is forcibly turned on.
55Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• When the edge type is border, outline, or emboss
• When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on
• When Fine Key is on
To fix key fill / key source in key drop off mode
In the Edge menu, switch frame delay mode on (see page 393).
Regardless of the fine key and edge type settings, key fill and key source are
fixed in key drop off mode. In this mode key image has a one-frame delay.
Notes
• This function is only valid on the MVS-8000G/8000GSF.
• This function uses the resizer, and therefore the normal effect of the setting
is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer.
Edge fill
When a border, drop border, or shadow modifier is selected, you can select a
signal to fill these edge effects.
The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator,
or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus.
In the case of an outline, there is no edge fill signal selection, because the key
fill signal fills the outline, and the rest of the image remains as the background.
For the emboss effect, in place of the edge fill signal, the emboss fill matte 1
and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used.
Masks
A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image. This
allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be
protected, or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape.
For details of masking operations, see “Masks” (pages 397 and 414).
Key mask and background mask
There are two types of mask: a key mask and a background mask.
Key mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the
background appearing.
56 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Background mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result
in the key fill appearing.
Main mask and subsidiary (“sub”) mask
Each keyer allows two masks to be used simultaneously, and these are referred
to as the main mask and the sub mask. The signal that determines the mask
shape and size is termed the mask source, and different sources are used for the
main mask and sub mask.
Main mask: This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided
on each keyer, or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the
mask source.
When the box generator is selected, a rectangular mask is formed. You can
adjust the positions of the four sides of the box separately.
When the pattern generator is selected, you can select the pattern and apply
modifiers.
Sub mask: This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the
utility 1 bus, as the mask source.
When the wipe generator is selected, the patterns and the pattern modifiers
are the same as in a wipe transition.
Key Memory
The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross-point button
to be automatically stored, so that the next time the same cross-point button is
selected these settings are recalled automatically.
There are two modes for key memory: simple mode and full mode.
The parameters stored in each mode are as follows.
Simple mode: key type, clean mode (including the plane setting for chroma
keying), key position, key inversion, and adjustment values for the
particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter, etc. This includes color
vector key, wipe pattern key, key wipe pattern key, and chroma key.
However, in the case of a chroma key, it excludes color cancel, Y balance,
foreground CCR, window, and shadow.)
Key mask
Masked area (box)
Background mask
57Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Full mode: All settings except transition (the same parameters as simple mode,
Fine Key, key modifiers, main and sub mask settings, chroma key detailed
settings, and so on)
For the settings for these modes, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and
Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Key Snapshots
Key settings other than the key on/off status and the key priority can all be
instantaneously saved in a dedicated register, for recall when required. A key
snapshot comprises three values: a cross-point button number, key memory full
mode, and independent key transition, and can be called in any combination.
There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer.
For details of key snapshot operations, see “Key Snapshots” (page 433).
Blink
The blink function provides the following effects.
Key blink: The key is inserted and deleted at the specified frequency.
You can also set the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which
the key is inserted.
Edge blink: Key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at the specified
frequency. You can specify both the frequency and the proportion of the
cycle for which the interchange occurs.
The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key. (See “Blink
Function” (page 404).)
Key Default
With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their
defaults.
The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as
follows.
• Adjustment values for the particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter,
etc.)
In the case of chroma keying, all adjustment values return to their default
values.
• Key position
• Key inversion
58 Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• Clean mode
For details, see “Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults” (page
418).
For the menu operation to return the key adjustment values to their defaults,
see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).
Key Modify Clear
A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the
initial status settings.
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status, see
“Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).
Resizer
Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking,
magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the
processed key.
The following functions are available.
• Two-dimensional transformations of keys
• Resizer interpolation settings
• Resizer crop/border settings
• Resizer effect settings
(wide key border, drop shadow, edge enhance, mosaic, defocus, mask)
Notes
• The resizer function is supported on the MVS-8000G only.
• The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay.
• Some effects of resizer are different from what you would expect of DME
effects.
Restrictions on the use of effects
There are restrictions on combined use of resizer effects themselves and that
with DME wipes.
For details, see “Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer”
(page 432).
59Keys
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Relation between resizer and other effects
You cannot apply DME effects to a key for which the resizer function is
enabled. When one of the three functions – resizer, DME wipe and DME
effects – is enabled, the other two are disabled.
60 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Wipes
A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream,
using a wipe pattern.
Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a “background
wipe,” and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a “key wipe.”
There are two types of wipe: those that can be selected in a common transition,
and those that can be selected in an independent key transition.
For details of independent key transitions, see page 37.
Types of Wipe Pattern
The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into a number of groups,
as follows. Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an
independent key transition.
For wipe patterns, see “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
560).
Standard wipe patterns
Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically, horizontally, or diagonally, and
circular patterns.
Enhanced wipes
More complex shapes such as hearts, stars, and round corners.
Rotary wipes
These patterns involve rotation of the image about a point.
Mosaic wipe pattern
This divides the image into small tiles.
Random and diamond dust wipe patterns
These patterns consist of small random tiles, or fine particles.
61Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Pattern Mix
You can create a new pattern by combining two selected patterns (main and
“sub”).
Note
It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition.
For details, see “Pattern Mix” (page 441).
Types of pattern mix
There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix, as
follows.
Mix: The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern, modifying the
outline or nature of the main pattern.
Positive NAM (+Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all
points within the outlines of either of the main pattern and the sub pattern.
Negative NAM (–Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all
points within the outlines of both of the main pattern and the sub pattern.
Morphing: As the transition progresses, the pattern morphs from the main
pattern, through the “mix” combination, to the sub pattern.
Mix Positive NAM Negative NAM
62 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• A value of 0.00 corresponds to the beginning of the transition, and a value of
100.00 to the end of the transition.
• A negative Start value signifies that the main and sub patterns are already
combined when the transition starts.
• An End value of 100.00 or more signifies that the main and sub patterns are
still combined when the transition complete.
• If the Start and End values are the same, the main and sub patterns are
interchanged instantaneously at the corresponding point in the transition.
• If End is less than Start, as the transition proceeds, it changes from the sub
pattern to the main pattern.
Dust mix
You can apply the effect of a diamond dust wipe to a selected pattern. You can
also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern
mix. (See “Pattern Mix” (page 441).)
When the pattern mix function is off, turning dust mix on results in the main
pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed. This state is the same as a
pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern.
10.00
0.00
–10.00
110.00
100.00
0.00 100.00
90.00
Mix ends during
transition, which
ends with sub
pattern at 100%
Main pattern at 100%
Sub pattern at 100%
Parameter settings
Start: Point in the course of the
transition at which the main pattern
is at 100%
End: Point in the course of the transition
at which the sub pattern is at 100%
Transition (0.00 - 100.00)
Start
value
End
value
Mix combination of
main and sub
patterns already
begun
Ends with sub
pattern at 100%
Begins with main
pattern at 100%
Transition ends
with main and
sub patterns
still in mix
combination
Mix begins after
transition starts
63Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Main and sub modifier link function
When carrying out a pattern mix, it is possible to link the modifier settings for
the main pattern and sub pattern. There are two modes for this function.
FULL LINK (fully linked) mode
In this mode, all modifier settings are the same for the main pattern and sub
pattern.
Changing the modifier settings for one pattern automatically changes the
settings for the other.
SEMI LINK (semi-linked) mode
Only the parameter settings of the modifiers are linked. The modifier on/off
settings are not linked. When the parameter values for the modifiers of the main
pattern and sub pattern are different, then after this link mode is selected,
changing the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the
parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the
two.
Note
When carrying out a wipe transition using a pattern mix, it is recommended that
you set the modifier link function to “FULL LINK” mode.
If the link function is off, or SEMI LINK mode is selected, the desired effect
may not be obtained at the start or end of the transition.
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers
You can carry out a wipe with the following variations and modifications to the
selected pattern.
For details, see “Setting Wipe Modifiers” (page 443).
64 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Direction
You can specify the direction of the wipe: the regular direction is referred to as
“normal,” and the other direction as “reverse.” You can also select alternating
directions each time the transition is completed (normal/reverse mode).
Split
This splits the pattern, making the parts of the wipe move in opposite
directions.
The parameter Split No specifies the number of splits.
The parameter Spacing specifies the spacing between adjacent patterns.
Normal Reverse
Split onSplit off
65Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Edge
You can apply a border to the pattern, soften the edges, or soften the applied
border.
In an independent key transition, only the “Soft” setting is available.
Border: You can adjust the border width.
Soft: You can adjust the edge softness.
Soft border: You can adjust the border width, and the softness of the inner and
outer edges of the border.
When a border or soft border is selected, the signal filling the border is called
edge fill. For the edge fill, you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color
matte generator, or the signal selected on the utility 2 bus. A matte can include
color 1 and color 2, and a combination of the two colors (a “color mix”).
Positioner
You can move the wipe pattern to any position.
• The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern.
A negative value moves the pattern to the left, and a positive value moves the
pattern to the right.
• The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern.
A negative value moves the pattern down, and a positive value moves the
pattern up.
Rotation
You can rotate the pattern. There are three rotation modes, as follows.
Border Soft Soft border
Positioner onPositioner off
66 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Angle
This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle.
The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation.
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one whole turn
clockwise.
With a value of 0.00 there is no rotation.
Speed
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified
speed.
The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation.
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one turn per second
clockwise. With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
Magnitude
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the
specified angle.
Angle off Angle on
67Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the
beginning of the transition.
• A value of –100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn
counterclockwise.
• A value of +100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn
clockwise.
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the
course of the transition.
• A value of –200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise.
• A value of +200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise.
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
Aspect ratio
You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern.
A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically; a
positive value stretches the pattern horizontally.
Pattern replication (“Multi”)
The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both, up to 63
times. You can also change the orientation of alternate copies, or change the
position.
Aspect off Aspect on
“Multi” off “Multi” on
68 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications
horizontally, and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern
replications vertically.
• The parameter Shift determines the manner of replication.
At a value of –100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on
the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally.
At a value of +100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on
the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally.
For an independent key transition wipe, you can use the “Invert Type”
parameter to select from the following four types of replication pattern.
1: All replications in the same orientation
2: Even-numbered rows staggered
3: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted
4: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted, and even-numbered rows
staggered
Pairing
This slits the pattern into multiple strips, making it like a venetian blind.
H: Create slits in the horizontal direction.
V: Create slits in the vertical direction.
• The parameter Width determines the width of the slits.
• The parameter H Offset determines the spacing in the horizontal direction.
If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to
the left, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the right. The value –100.00
represents the maximum movement.
If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to
1234
Pairing off Pairing on
69Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
the right, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the left. The value +100.00
represents the maximum movement.
• The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction.
If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move
upward, and the odd-numbered pairs move downward. The value –100.00
represents the maximum movement.
If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move
downward, and the odd-numbered pairs move upward. The value +100.00
represents the maximum movement.
Modulation
The pattern signal can be modulated, giving waves on the horizontal or vertical
edges, or radially.
The parameter Shape determines the form of the modulation.
1: sine wave, 2: triangular wave, 3: rectangular wave
Note
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is not
available.
Horizontal modulation
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the horizontal direction to
edges.
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves, and a
value of +100.00 the maximum upward speed.
70 Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Vertical modulation
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the vertical direction to
edges.
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum leftward speed of waves, and a
value of +100.00 the maximum rightward speed.
Fringe
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the radial direction to edges.
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum counterclockwise speed of waves,
and a value of +100.00 the maximum clockwise speed.
Spring
As the transition progresses, the edge of the pattern is subjected to barrel or
pincushion distortion.
Spring off Spring on
71Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
A negative parameter value produces pincushion distortion, and a positive
value produces barrel distortion.
Spiral
This deforms the pattern spirally.
• The parameter Magnitude determines the size and direction of the spiral.
A value of –100.00 represents the maximum movement in the
counterclockwise direction, and a value of +100.00 represents the maximum
movement in the clockwise direction.
• The parameter Wave Speed determines the speed of the lateral waves.
A value of –100.00 represents the maximum speed to the left, and a value of
+100.00 represents the maximum speed to the right.
Wipe Snapshots
You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of
its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required.
There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST
bank.
Use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control
block to save and recall wipe snapshots. (For details, see “Wipe Snapshots”
(page 460).)
For simple transitions (see page 371), there are eight wipe snapshot registers
on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank.
Wipe Modify Clear
By a simple operation, you can return the wipe state to that set in initial status.
For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial
status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).
Spiral off Spiral on
72 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME Wipes
A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one
video image to the next.
There are two types of DME wipe: those which can be selected for a normal
transition, and those which can be selected for an independent key transition.
For independent key transitions, see page 37.
Note
On the MVS-8000G, it is also possible to carry out a DME wipe on a key using
the resizer (see page 58).
Types of DME Wipe Pattern
The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes.
Preset patterns: predetermined fixed patterns
User programmable DME patterns: patterns which you can create using
keyframe effects
DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used
There are three DME wipe execution modes, depending on the number of
DME channels available: one-channel mode, two-channel mode and three-
channel mode. The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as
follows.
DME wipe pattern groups
The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups.
For each group (excluding user programmable DMEs), for schematic patterns
and numbers, see “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
566). The black part of the pattern represents the old video, and the white part
the new video, with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow.
Execution mode Preset pattern numbers
that can be used
User programmable DME pattern
numbers that can be used
One-channel mode 1000 series 1901 to 1999
Two-channel mode 2000 series 2901 to 2999
Three-channel mode 3000 series 3901 to 3999
73DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Slide: The new video slides in over the old video.
(Pattern numbers: 1001 to 1008 (one-channel mode), 2601 to 2608 (two-
channel mode))
Squeeze: The new video appears squeezed over the old video, and
progressively expands to cover it.
(Pattern numbers: 1021 to 1031 (one-channel mode), 2621 to 2628 (two-
channel mode))
Split: The old video splits, and the new video appears in the gap.
(Pattern numbers: 1011 to 1013 (one-channel mode))
Door: The new video moves like a door closing, and progressively covers the
old video.
(Pattern numbers: 1041 to 1048 (one-channel mode))
Flip tumble: The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new
video. During the transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E
bank appears as the background.
(Pattern numbers: 1101 to 1104, 1109, 1110, 1121, 1122, 1124, 1131 to
1133, 1135 (one-channel mode))
Mirror: The new video appears over the old video as a mirror effect slides in
all four directions.
(Pattern numbers: 1355 to 1358 (one-channel mode))
Sphere: The new video appears wrapped around a sphere over the old video,
then returns to the original video while unwrapping.
(Pattern number: 1365 (one-channel mode))
Character trail: The new video appears with a trail over the old video. Next
this gradually returns to the original from the periphery.
(Pattern numbers: 1371, 1372 (one-channel mode))
Wave: The new video appears with a wave-like effect over the old video. Next
this returns to the original video as the effect reduces.
(Pattern numbers: 1378, 1379 (one-channel mode))
Ripple: The new video appears over the old video like outwardly moving
ripples.
(Pattern number: 1381 (one-channel mode))
Page turn: The old video moves like a page turning, and the new video appears
behind it.
(Pattern numbers: 1301 to 1313, 1315 to 1318, 1341 to 1345 (one-channel
mode), 2701 to 2713, 2715 to 2718, 2741 to 2745 (two-channel mode))
Page roll: The new video unrolls like a scroll over the old video. This is a type
of page turn.
(Pattern numbers: 1321 to 1333, 1335 to 1338, 1346 to 1350 (one-channel
mode), 2721 to 2733, 2735 to 2738, 2746 to 2750 (two-channel mode))
Frame in-out: Completed in two transitions. In the first transition, the new
video appears, then on the second transition the new video goes out and the
old video returns.
(Pattern numbers: 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224 (one-channel mode), 2851
to 2854, 2861 to 2864 (two-channel mode))
74 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Picture-in-picture: The one-channel mode and two-channel mode differ as
follows.
In one-channel mode, this completes in two transitions. In the first
transition, the old video shrinks, and the new video appears behind it.
In the second transition, the old video expands again until it is its original
size.
(Pattern number: 1251 (one-channel mode))
In two-channel mode, in the first half of the transition, the old video
shrinks, and the new video appears. In the second half of the transition, the
new video expands, and the old video disappears. You can move the
pattern from the current position by a relative amount. During the
transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E bank appears as the
background.
(Pattern numbers: 2651 and 2652 (two-channel mode))
2D trans: The new video appears over the old video, while undergoing
expansion, two-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 1051 to 1058, 1061 to 1064, 1068 (one-channel mode))
3D trans: In one-channel mode, the new video appears over the old video,
while undergoing expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 1071, 1072, 1074, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1091 to 1094 (one-
channel mode))
In two-channel mode, the old video changes to the new video while both
undergo expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 2631 to 2634, 2642, 2644 (two-channel mode))
Sparkle: The new video appears over the old video with a nonlinear effect
applied, such as broken glass, explosion, or melt. Next this returns to the
original video as the effect gradually reduces.
(Pattern numbers: 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396, 1398, 1399 (one-channel
mode))
Split slide: The new video appears in strip form while sliding interleaved in the
opposite direction over the old video.
(Pattern numbers: 1384 to 1389 (one-channel mode))
Mosaic: In the first half of the transition, a mosaic is gradually applied to the
old video, then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video.
In the second half, the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced,
returning to the original image at 100%.
(Pattern number: 1701 (one-channel mode))
Defocus: In the first half of the transition, the old video is gradually defocused,
then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video. In the
second half, the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced,
returning to the original image at 100%.
(Pattern number: 1702 (one-channel mode))
Brick: In two-channel mode, a brick such that the side surface is visible slides
in over the old video, then rotates so that the new video can be seen.
(Pattern numbers: 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814 (two-channel mode))
75DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
In three-channel mode, a brick appears over the old video as the image is
expanding and rotating, and switches to the new video.
(Pattern number: 3601 (three-channel mode))
User programmable DME: Using a DME keyframe effect created with a
keyframe operation, this executes a DME wipe.
(Pattern numbers: 1901 to 1999 (one-channel mode), 2901 to 2999 (two-
channel mode), 3901 to 3999 (three-channel mode))
For details of creating keyframe effects, see “Creating User
Programmable DME Patterns” (page 483).
Notes
• To use the Split, Page Turn, and Page Roll effects on the MVE-8000 requires
the optional MKS-8830M Nonlinear Effect Board.
• In an independent key transition, the following patterns can be used.
User programmable DME in transition mode
For the transition mode set when creating a keyframe effect for a user
programmable DME pattern, the following can be used.
•Single: single transition mode
•Flip tumble (Flip Tumble): flip tumble transition mode
•Dual: dual transition mode
•Picture-in-picture (PinP): one-channel and two-channel picture-in-picture
transition mode
•Compress: a type of picture-in-picture, in which the new image is the
background, and the currently visible image shrinks, and then expands to its
original size. (See example in the next item.)
•Frame in-out (Frame I/O): frame in-out transition mode. When the first
transition completes, if you move the position of the image, you can move it
both horizontally and vertically.
•Frame in-out H (Frame I/O H): a type of frame in-out mode, which is
specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction.
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end
point. (See page 77.)
The operation is carried out according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or
1204.
•Frame in-out V (Frame I/O V): a type of frame in-out mode, which is
specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction.
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end
point. (See page 78.)
Execution mode DME wipe patterns that can be used
One-channel mode Slide, split, squeeze, door, 2D trans, 3D trans, frame in-out,
page turn, page roll, mirror, sphere, character trail, wave, ripple,
split slide, sparkle, user programmable DME
Two-channel mode Page turn, page roll
76 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Transition mode “Compress”
The change in the image when the transition mode is set to “Compress” is as
follows, in comparison to the case of “Picture-in-picture.”
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Picture-in-
picture” (one-channel mode)
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Compress”
Transition mode “frame in-out”
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions, but the image
position at the transition start point and end point does not change.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
Second strokeFirst stroke
First stroke Second stroke
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Effect execution
77DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
Transition mode “frame in-out H”
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal
direction.
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image at the
transition start point and end point also moves.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
State before
modification
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Effect execution
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Effect execution
78 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Transition mode “frame in-out V”
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical
direction.
In this mode, in the state at completion of the first transition, you can move the
image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image
at the transition start point and end point also moves.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
State before
modification
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Effect execution
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Effect execution
79DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe
For a two-channel mode page turn, page roll, brick, frame in-out, and so on, the
part of the pattern shown in gray (see Appendix (Volume 2)) is filled with the
signal selected on the DME external video bus.
For three-channel mode brick, the part of the pattern shown in dark gray is
filled with the DME external video signal, and the light gray portion with the
signal selected as follows.
For a DME dedicated interface
When the DME channel used is 3 or 4, the signal selected on the DME utility
1 bus. For channel 7 or 8, the signal selected on the DME utility 2 bus.
For an MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 SDI interface
Signal selected on the AUX bus assigned in the Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >DME Type Setting >DME SDI interface menu. (The AUX
bus is determined by which DME channel is being used.)
State before
modification
Image created
by interpolation
Background B
Background A
Transition start Transition end
First transition
completion point
Effect execution
80 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
For the SDI interface on the MVE-8000A or MVE-9000, in some cases the
AUX bus is used in place of the DME external bus.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”
in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2).
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers
You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary
wipe pattern, as follows.
For the setting operations, see “Setting DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 469).
Direction: You can set the DME wipe direction to normal, reverse, or
alternating normal/reverse (page 64), except for a key transition, which is
always in normal/reverse mode. However, a key transition can only be
specified when the following patterns are selected, and when other patterns
are selected, this is fixed, as normal/reverse.
Patterns: 1204, 1207, 1221 to 1224
Edge: You can apply a border or soft border (see page 65).
In the case of those user programmable DME patterns for keys in which an
edge has already been applied to the effect, the bahavior is as follows.
• When the DME wipe edge setting is on, only part of the edge applied in
the effect is enabled, and that portion can be adjusted (page 470).
• When the DME wipe edge setting is off, the edge applied in the effect is
enabled as is.
Note
In an MVS-8000 system, edge cannot be used for a key DME wipe.
Positioner: You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an
arbitrary position. Using the position select function, you can also
instantaneously move the pattern.
• 1031
When this pattern number is selected, with the progress of the transition
the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position
toward the center of the screen (see page 65). In other words, the effect
obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to
“AUTO CENTER”.
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position
when the first transition completes.
81DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• 1381, 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the center of the
transition effect.
• 2651, 2652
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can move the pattern for
each channel, or with values relative to the current position the two
channels simultaneously.
• 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814
When the these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the vertical
position as the brick slides in.
• 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position
for each channel setting when the first transition completes.
Pattern limit: You can restrict the range of the transition as desired. However,
this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition
control block.
For more details, see “Pattern Limit” (page 355).
Size: This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is
selected.
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251
• 2651, 2652, 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864
You can set the size of the image.
Crop: You can crop the image. It is also possible in 16:9 mode to crop both
sides, to convert the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio. For the execution of a
DME wipe crop transition, you can select from the following three
possibilities.
•Cut
•Last 5%
• Linear
When [Last 5%] is selected, you can set the [Release Transition] as
follows.
•Last 30%
•Last 5%
•Off
Notes
• When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.
• The MVS-8000 does not support the [Last 5%] setting for [Release
Transition].
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects
The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows.
82 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Relation to ordinary wipes
• DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher. Therefore,
during the execution of a DME wipe, you can still use a pattern produced by
the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask.
• A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask.
Relation to processed keys
When using the DME for a processed key, if you select a DME wipe, an
available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe. If all of the DME
channels are in use, then it is not possible to select a DME wipe.
If in a Setup menu a setting has been made for DME allocation, that Setup
menu setting takes precedence (see “Setting the assignments of DME channels
to use on the individual M/E banks” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Relation to resizer (for MVS-8000G only)
When resizer is enabled, it is not possible to select a DME wipe.
For the key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4 combinations, if one is used for a
dual resizer effect, the other key cannot be used for a DME wipe.
Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a
single M/E bank
DME wipes can be used in five places, including the four independent key
transitions. When the DME dedicated interface is used, a maximum of two
DME wipes can be used simultaneously, and when the SDI interface is used,
only one DME wipe can be used at one time.
Note
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, it may be
possible to use up to three wipes simultaneously.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”
in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2).
DME Wipe Snapshots
You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current
settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when
required.
There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M/E and P/P banks.
83DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
To save and recall these registers, use the Flexi Pad control block in each
switcher bank or the Menu control block. (See “DME Wipe Snapshots” (page
482).)
In the case of a simple transition system, there are eight DME wipe snapshot
registers for each switcher bank.
DME Wipe Modify Clear
By a simple operation, you can return the DME wipe state to that set in initial
status.
For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in
initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page
324).
Resizer DME wipes
Using the resizer, you can carry out key DME wipes.
Note
This function is supported by the MVS-8000G.
DME wipe patterns available for resizer DME wipe
You can use the following patterns of the DME wipe pattern one-channel mode
that can be used in a resizer DME wipe. (7000-series numbers)
• Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)
• Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)
• frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)
Relation between resizer DME wipes and other effects
The following relations hold between resizer DME wipes and other effects.
Relation with processed keys
It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key for which processed
key is enabled.
Relation with resizer
A resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key for which resizer is enabled.
Additionally, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key paired with a key
for which the dual resizer effect is enabled. Paired keys refer to the
84 DME Wipes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
combinations of key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4. For example, when a dual
resizer effect is enabled for key 1, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for key 2.
85Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Frame Memory
Overview
Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and
written to memory, for further use as material for editing.
You can also play recorded frame memory clips (movies).
Frame capacity
The maximum number of images that can be written to memory is as follows.
MVS-8000 system
HD system: 58 frames (88 frames in 720P/59.94 format)
SD system: 222 frames
MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system
HD system:
(Without ancillary data)
(With ancillary data)
Video format Memory capacity
1080i/50 Approx. 1000 frames
1080i/59.94 Approx. 1000 frames
1080i/60 Approx. 1000 frames
1080PsF/24 Approx. 1000 frames
1080PsF/25 Approx. 1000 frames
1080PsF/29.97 Approx. 1000 frames
1080PsF/30 Approx. 1000 frames
720P/50 Approx. 2300 frames
720P/59.94 Approx. 2300 frames
Video format Memory capacity
1080i/50 Approx. 700 frames
1080i/59.94 Approx. 800 frames
1080i/60 Approx. 800 frames
1080PsF/23.976 Approx. 600 frames
1080PsF/24 Approx. 600 frames
1080PsF/25 Approx. 700 frames
86 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
SD system:
(Without ancillary data)
(With ancillary data)
Note
For the MVS-8000A and MVS-8000G, up to two frame memory boards can be
installed (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS-8442G for the MVS-
8000G). The above-stated maximum number applies when one frame memory
board is installed.
When two boards are installed, the figures are doubled, but of the two boards
only one can be used for frame memory clips.
Note that for the MVS-8000/8000SF, MVS-8000ASF and MVS-8000GSF, it
is not possible to install two frame memory boards.
For details of operations, see “Still Image Operations” (page 490).
Types of image and terminology used
The following types of image are handled in frame memory.
Freeze image: An input image that has been frozen, but not saved to memory.
Still image: A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file. Each file
(still file) holds just one still image.
Frame memory clip: A clip consists of a sequence of still images, which
appears as a movie on playback. In this manual this is also referred to
simply as a “clip.” The files (still files) constituting clips are referred to as
a “clip file.”
When the above distinctions are not being made, an image is simply referred
to as an “image.”
1080PsF/29.97 Approx. 800 frames
1080PsF/30 Approx. 800 frames
720P/50 Approx. 1400 frames
720P/59.94 Approx. 1700 frames
Video format Memory capacity
480i/59.94 Approx. 5600 frames
576i/50 Approx. 4800 frames
Video format Memory capacity
480i/59.94 Approx. 4700 frames
576i/50 Approx. 3900 frames
Video format Memory capacity
87Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
About extended clips
When two frame memory boards (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS-
8442G for the MVS-8000G) are installed, one is dedicated to clips. Such clips
held in a frame memory board are called “extended clips.”
Use of frame memory
There are eight frame memory channels, FM1 to FM8, and each channel
independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled.
By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross-point buttons you can use the still image
output or clip output from each channel as input material.
Note
On the MVS-8000A, an extended clip can only be recalled from FM1 or FM2.
It is not possible to recall from FM3 to FM8. Note that this restriction does not
apply to the MVS-8000G.
Correspondence between input and output
There are two buses for capturing frame memory material: the frame memory
source 1 bus and the frame memory source 2 bus.
These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output, FM1&2,
FM3&4, FM5&6, and FM7&8. You can freeze a frame in each channel
separately, or freeze in the two channels simultaneously.
The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows.
Pair mode
By enabling the pair mode, you can link FM1 and FM2, FM3 and FM4, FM5
and FM6, and FM7 and FM8. For example, when a freeze or image processing
is carried out on FM1, the same operation is carried out on FM2. The same
applies to the other pairs. When a pair of images are captured in pair mode, the
image frozen in FM1 (3, 5, or 7) is referred to as the main file and the other
frozen in FM2 (4, 6, or 8) is referred to as the sub file.
Input Frame memory source bus 1 Frame memory source bus 2
Output FM1 FM2
FM3 FM4
FM5 FM6
FM7 FM8
88 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Pair files and single files
A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a “pair file.” A pair file can
be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the
coupling function (see page 94) to combine two single files.
A file other than a pair file is termed a “single file.” A single file can be created
by switching off pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the separation
function (see page 94) to split a pair file.
Operation modes
The frame memory has the following operation mode.
V/K mode: When the pair mode is active, the key signal is automatically
selected on frame memory source bus 2. This is convenient for handling
the video and key signals together in frame memory. For example, when
you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1, the key signal
assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2. You
can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus
2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1.
To change the pair mode or operation mode, use the Frame Memory menu.
Frame memory folders
Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups.
Such a group is called a “frame memory folder.” Folders can be added or
deleted, and can be given a name of up to 8 characters.
Notes
• This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.
• When the system is powered off, the folder names are deleted. The folder
names need to be saved on media.
• The following names cannot be used for folders.
Flash1, Flash2
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
A folder named “Default” is provided, and this folder cannot be renamed or
deleted.
• Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the
same name.
89Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Still Image File Functions
The frame memory functions provides the following still image file functions.
• Freezing an input image
• Saving a still image
• Recalling a still image
• Processing an image
• Image output
• Continuously capturing images (record)
• Recalling a continuous sequence of images (animation)
Capturing an input image (freeze)
As the input material for the frame memory, you can use the signal selected on
the frame memory source bus. For this signal you can use video processing
(video levels or hue value adjustment) or masking.
Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8, then
carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory
output image, and saves it in temporary memory.
For a freeze, an image can be captured either as video frame (a “frame freeze”)
or a video field (“field freeze”).
Note
When the system is powered off, any freeze images written to temporary
memory are lost.
Saving a still image (store)
You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the
freeze function as a file in memory. You can save a single image in a single file
and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file.
Note
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
When the system is powered off, all the files saved in memory are erased.
Freeze and store mode
When this mode is set to On, the freeze and store operations occur
simultaneously. You can set it to On in the Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
menu (see page 498).
This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.
90 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Recalling a still image (recall)
You can recall an image file saved in memory, and allocate to any of the FM1
to FM8 outputs.
Processing an image
You can combine the background image (a still image file allocated to any of
FM1 to FM8, a freeze image written to temporary memory, or a black signal)
and the input signal.
The following types of processing are available.
Pattern key: Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator, you can cut
out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame
memory source bus or a color matte signal. You can adjust the size and
position of the pattern, and add modifiers.
External key: When processing an image in FM1 (3, 5, 7), you can use the
signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the
background image, and fill with the signal selected on the frame memory
source bus 1, or a color matte signal.
When processing an image in FM2 (4, 6, 8), you can use the signal selected
on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image, and
fill with a color matte signal (always white).
Note
An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled (see page
87).
MIX: Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory
source bus or color matte signal. The mix ratio can be set.
NAM: Non-additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the
frame memory source bus or color matte signal.
Image output
Moving the output image (reposition function)
For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 (one from FM1, FM3, FM5 and FM7
and the other from FM2, FM4, FM6 and FM8), you can move the output image
with respect to the screen. The area of the screen around the image that has
been moved is filled with black. There are two ways of carrying out this
repositioning.
Normal mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in two-pixel
increments.
Black and white mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in one-pixel
increments, and for each pixel moved the color is inverted.
91Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly
to frame memory.
Fixing the output image selection (lock function)
For the output of each of FM1 to FM8, this fixes the image at the current
output. When this lock is enabled, even if the output is recalled in a snapshot
or keyframe, the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved.
Continuously capturing still images (record)
You can continuously capture (freeze) a sequence of input video frames and
store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval.
The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string
followed by a second string.
First character string: A common part of name assigned to all the still images
captured in one record operation. This string includes a maximum of four
characters, which can be specified using a menu before carrying out the
capture. The first string is automatically used as the clip name when the
images are treated as a frame memory clip.
Second character string: A four-digit number (0000 or greater), which is
incremented each time a still image is captured.
Notes
• When using the record function to continuously capture frames, it is not
possible to use the mask function.
• On the MVS-8000, the image file name is “anmxxyyy” (“anm” is constant,
“xx” is a two-digit number from 00 to 99 incremented by 1 for ever recording
operation, and “yyy” is a three-digit number from 000 to 999, incremented
by 1 for each captured image).
Recalling a continuous sequence of still images (animation)
You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function
as keyframes to create an effect. By executing this effect you can recall the
continuous sequence (animation).
Notes
• For example, to create an effect using FM1, FM1 must be assigned to a user
region. (For details of user region settings, see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
• To execute the effect, you must assign the user region to which FM1 is
assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block.
(For details of assigning to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
92 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
control block, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
In the Frame Memory menu, effect creation follows the image file names. Of
the eight characters in the file names, if files have the same characters except
for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group, and the
effect is created with the last three (numeric) characters in sequence.
Note
When creating the effect in pair mode (see page 87), the files used must be
main files and sub files with the same last three (numeric) characters in the file
name.
Frame Memory Clip Function
The frame memory clip function is not supported on the MVS-8000.
What is a “frame memory clip”?
Movies can be read into frame memory, and recalled and played back. A movie
held in frame memory is called a “frame memory clip.”
A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters. (For details of
frame memory clip names, see “Continuously capturing still images (record)”
(page 91).)
Ancillary data
In a frame memory clip, in addition to the video image, you can also record and
play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio (MVS-8000A
and MVS-8000G only).
To record the ancillary data, in the Setup menu the frame memory saving mode
must be set to “save with ancillary data” (see “Saving a frame memory clip
including ancillary data” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).
Notes
• With this setting, the saving mode for still images also changes to “save with
ancillary data,” but when playing back a still image the ancillary data is never
played.
• When you change the saving mode, the frame memory is initialized, and any
existing recorded frame memory data is lost.
When the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” the
following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip.
93Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• Disable(d)
In this state the ancillary data is not played. This is the status when the
[Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu is set to Off.
• Enable(d)
In this state, ancillary data is present, and can be played back. This is the
status when the [Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu
is set to On. This is the status after a clip recording operation.
This status information is saved in a file, and is followed when the file is
recalled.
Frame memory clip settings
For frame memory clips, you can make the following settings using a menu or
device control block (trackball/search dial/joystick).
• Start point
• Stop point
• Loop On/Off
The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes,
and recalled.
Note
On the MVS-8000A, it is only possible to replay extended clips as output from
FM1 or FM2.
Clip transitions
A frame memory clip (movie) is played back, linked to a transition using a mix
(dissolve) or wipe.
Note
The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS-8000A/8000G.
The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition.
• Key frame capture is not possible.
• It is not possible to apply a pattern limit.
• Transitions executed in two strokes, such as a preset color mix with the
stroke mode set to Normal, or a DME wipe with a picture-in-picture pattern,
will not execute correctly.
• It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition.
• Transition preview cannot be used.
• The clip transition settings cannot be copied or swapped among the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
• No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot.
94 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during executing
another clip transition, the follow-on transition does not operate properly. Be
sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot.
Image Data Management
Frame memory folder editing
Create: Create a new folder.
Delete: Specify a folder and delete it. You can also delete all folders together
in a single operation.
Rename folder: Rename a specified folder.
File management
The following operations are possible on files created to hold images.
Delete: Specify a file to be deleted. It is also possible to delete all files
simultaneously in a single operation.
Rename file: Change the name of the specified file.
Move file: Move a file from one folder to another.
Backup: Save all files to hard disk in a single operation.
Restore: Restore the files which have been backed up.
Pair file processing
Couple: You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files.
Separate: You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or
clip files.
Note
This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.
Image Data Transfer
Files, including ancillary data, can be transferred between such devices as a
hard disk and memory card.
In the File menu, files can be saved and recalled.
It is possible to import images such as BMP files or convert frame memory files
into a different format and save them in an external device.
For details, see Chapter 17 “Files” (Volume 2).
95Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Notes on transferring multiple still images together
• Transferring all of the still image files within frame memory together fails if
the capacity of the memory card is too small to hold all of the images. In this
case, replace with a larger capacity memory card, or delete still images until
saving is possible.
The following table roughly shows the relation between memory card
capacity and number of images that can be saved.
a) For all available signal formats except 720P
Note that when transferring to the hard disk, there is ample capacity, so that
problems such as this do not occur.
• If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and
hard disk or memory card, then an image which was not completely
transferred will not be reproducible. Avoid canceling such operations.
• When loading a still image file from hard disk or memory card, if [Freeze
Enable] in the Freeze menu is on, the loaded still image file may sometimes
be overwritten by the frame memory input image.
To avoid this when loading a file, ensure that [Freeze Enable] is turned off.
Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by
a snapshot/keyframe
• The saving and recalling of frame memory images for snapshots and
keyframes is restricted to the still images or clips on the eight frame memory
outputs. The settings made for frame memory images in the Freeze menu,
Composite menu or other menus do not apply to snapshots or keyframes.
• To reproduce a frame memory still image or a clip of them by recalling a
snapshot or keyframe, you must have the same images that were present in
the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe. Therefore,
when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory, you must also
save the images to a storage media such as the hard disk.
Note on transferring ancillary data
Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save
with ancillary data,” and can be saved to an external storage device such as a
hard disk or memory card, and recalled. However, the ancillary data can only
be saved or recalled when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with
ancillary data,” and when ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled
frame memory file, and moreover when the system signal format is the same
as the signal format in the file.
Memory card capacity Number of images that can be saved
SD system HD system a)
256 MB 214 46
96 Frame Memory
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
External Hard Disk Drive Access
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, you can connect a hard
disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor, to carry out the
following operations.
Format: Format the hard disk.
Backup: Batch saving of files from frame memory to the hard disk.
Restore: Restoring frame memory from files saved on the hard disk.
97Color Backgrounds
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Color Backgrounds
The dedicated generators generate color signals, and these can be used as color
backgrounds in video effects.
Color background selection
There are two color backgrounds, color background 1 and color background 2,
which you use by assigning to cross-point buttons.
Color combinations (“color mix”)
The color generators can output the result of combining two colors, which are
color 1 and color 2.
Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator, color 1 and color 2 can be
combined in the boundary region, forming a color gradation. This is referred to
in the menu system as “color mix.”
You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern.
When the “color mix” function is not used, the result is a flat color, and color
1 is always output.
For details of operations, see “Color Background Setting Operations” (page
538).
98 Copy and Swap
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Copy and Swap
You can copy and swap the settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST
banks or between keyers.
The following settings can be copied or swapped.
• Overall settings for the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks
• Keyer settings
• Wipe settings in a transition control block
• Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• DME wipe settings in a transition control block
• DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• Matte data (color 1, color 2, and how to compose them)
• Color settings
• DME channel settings
• Format converter input settings (copy only)
• Format converter output settings (copy only)
You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation. Swap
operations, and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu
operation.
For details of the operations, see Chapter 9 “Copy and Swap” (page 543) and
for color correction settings, “Copy and Swap Operations” in Chapter 19
(Volume 2).
M/E copy and M/E swap
You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3,
and PGM/PST banks.
Note
If a DME is being used on the source M/E bank, then if for example there are
insufficient DME channels, it may not be possible to select the DME.
There are no such restrictions on a swap.
Target bank Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
PGM/PST
Bank settings excluding the following data items:
• Setup data
• Flexi Pad settings
• Snapshots
• Keyframe effects
• Key snapshots
•Key memory
99Copy and Swap
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Keyer copy and keyer swap
You can carry out copy and swap operations among the 16 keyers listed in the
following table.
Note
If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a
swap, then if for example there are insufficient DME channels, or the limit on
using DME channels within an M/E bank is exceeded, it may not be possible
to select the DME.
Wipe copy and wipe swap
You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks listed in the
following table.
Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition
control block
You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the
following table.
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks listed in the
following table.
Target bank Target keyer Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
Keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding the following data
items:
• Setup data
• Key snapshots
•Key memory
PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4
Target bank Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
PGM/PST
Wipe settings.
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving
independent key transition wipe settings.
Target bank Target keyer Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
Keys 1 to 4 Wipe settings in the independent key
transition control block.
It is not, however, possible to copy or
swap wipe settings to or from an external
downstream keyer.
PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4
100 Copy and Swap
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key
transition control block
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in
the following table.
Matte data copy and swap
You can copy or swap the matte data among the 38 color generators listed in
the following table.
Color data copy and swap
You can copy or swap the color data among the 152 color generators listed in
the following table.
Target bank Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
PGM/PST
DME wipe settings.
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving
independent key transition DME wipe settings.
Target bank Target keyer Target data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
Keys 1 to 4 DME wipe settings in the independent
key transition control block.
PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4
Target bank Target keyer and data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
PGM/PST
• Keys 1 to 4
• Downstream keys 1 to 4
• Matte data for key fill
• Matte data for key edge fill
Matte data for wipe border edge
Color background • Matte data for color background 1
• Matte data for color background 2
Target bank Target keyer and data
M/E-1
M/E-2
M/E-3
PGM/PST
• Keys 1 to 4
• Downstream keys 1 to 4
• Colors 1 and 2 for key fill
• Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill
• “Zabton” color data
Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border
Color data for preset color mix
Color background • Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1
• Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2
Frame memory • FM1 color
• FM2 color
101Copy and Swap
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME channel copy and swap
You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 4 or DME
channels 5 to 8.
It is not possible to copy or swap the channel data between DME channels 1 to
4 and DME channels 5 to 8.
Copying format converter data
On the MVS-8000G, you can copy data from one format converter input to
another or from one output to another.
DME ch1 to ch8 • Background
•Border
• Sepia
• Light
• Shade
• Drop shadow (other than DME ch4 and DME ch8)
•Trail
Target bank Target keyer and data
102 Side Flags
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Side Flags
Overview
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a
separate image selected from the utility 1 bus. (See following figure.)
You can adjust the width of the side flag area.
Note
The side flag function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.
Side Flag Settings
To use the side flags, the following settings are required.
Input source with aspect ratioImage to fill the side flag
areas (selected from utility 1
bus) Turn the side flag
function on
Side flag area Side flag area
103Side Flags
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Input source aspect ratio, auto side flags, and auto crop settings
Aspect ratio 4:3 setting
Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4:3. If set to 16:9, the side flags are disabled.
Auto side flag setting
This function automatically applies side flags when a 4:3 signal is selected in
the cross-point control block.
Auto crop setting
When carrying out a DME wipe, this function automatically crops the image
during transition to 4:3.
Adjusting the width of the side flag area
You can set the left and right sides separately.
For the operation for the above setting, see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Side flag enable/disable setting
Using the Misc menu or a button operation, you can enable or disable the side
flags for the background bus of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks.
For more details, see “Side Flag Settings” (page 550).
Assigning the side flag function to a cross-point button
To switch the side flags on and off with a button operation, it is first necessary
to assign [SIDE FLAG] to the rightmost cross-point buttons.
For more details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags
When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns can
be used.
The following illustration shows the action in a wipe.
104 Side Flags
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image
Wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags are
on for both images)
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags
When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns
can be used.
Depending on the setting (On/Off) of [Auto Crop] in the Engineering Setup
>Switcher >Config menu, the appearance of the 4:3 image changes.
Notes
• When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface with [Auto
Crop] being off, side flags are not added to the new image during DME wipe.
• For signals with the following DME wipe pattern selected on the DME
external video bus (gray part shown in the pattern illustration), side flags are
not applied when auto side flags are set to Off.
– Two-channel page turn
– Two-channel page roll
Side flag areas
4:3 image (Side flags on)
16:9 image
Side flag areas
4:3 image (Side flags on) The circles indicate the
position of the wipe pattern
edge when the transition is
half finished.
Side flag areas
105Side Flags
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
– Two-channel frame in-out
– Two-channel brick
– Three-channel brick
The following illustration shows the action in a DME wipe.
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image
Wipe action using slide (No. 1001)
Auto crop on
4:3 image (Side flags on)
Auto crop off
Side flag area
16:9 image
Side flag areas
106 Side Flags
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags
are on for both images)
Wipe action using squeeze (No. 1031)
a) When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface, side flags are not added during
a DME wipe.
Auto crop on
4:3 image (Side flags on)
Auto crop off
Side flag areas a)
4:3 image (Side flags on)
Side flag areas
Side flag areas
107Video Process
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Video Process
The term “video process” is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue
of the input video signal.
There are two types of adjustment, depending on the application:
• Adjustment of an individual primary input signal
• Image effects on a particular bus
Note
These types of adjustment may be carried out independently. However, since
they are implemented by the same hardware, if the same signal is subjected to
processing twice, there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in
the final result.
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal
For each of primary inputs 1 to 80, you can switch video process adjustments
on or off, and can adjust the parameters (Video Gain, Y Gain, C Gain, Hue
Delay, and Black Level) in the Setup menu. The adjustments do not, however,
apply to the output video on the MON (monitor) bus.
For details of the settings, see “Signal Input Settings” in Chapter 16 (Volume
2).
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus
Buses to which the adjustments apply
For each of the following buses, you can switch video process adjustments on
or off, and adjust the parameters.
• Following buses in the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks
– Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4
– Background A and background B buses
– Utility 1 and utility 2 buses
• Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses
• Aux 1 to 48 buses
These settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots.
108 Video Process
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Making the adjustments
Adjust VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, and HUE DELAY
in the following menus.
Video Process Memory
When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus, this
function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals. The video
process on/off setting is not saved.
When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved, and
these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected.
In other words, by switching video process memory on, regardless of the video
process information for each bus, you can carry out video process adjustments
for each input signal.
The parameters saved are as follows.
VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, HUE DELAY
Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu.
For details of setting operations, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and
Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Applicable bus Menu used for operation See page
M/E-1 to M/E-3
banks
Key fill buses for keys
1 to 4
M/E-1 to M/E-3 menus page 405
Background A and B
buses
Video Process menu page 557
Utility 1 and 2 buses
PGM/PST bank Key fill buses for
DSK1 to DSK4
PGM/PST menu page 405
Background A and B
buses
Video Process menu page 557
Utility 1 and 2 buses
Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses Frame Memory menu page 498
Aux 1 to 48 buses AUX/MON menu page 555
109Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Digital Multi Effects (DME)
DME allows you to add three-dimensional effects such as image movement,
rotation, magnification and shrinking, as well as a wide variety of special
effects. DME is the general name for all of these effects.
You can use up to eight channels as dedicated DME channels. Each channel
can be used on its own or in combination with other channels, which allows
you to create advanced effects with more complexity.
Functions that can be used differ with the models of DME. For details, see
“Functional Differences With Models of DME” in the Appendix (Volume 2).
MVE-8000A Multi Format DME Processor
The MVE-8000A is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support.
For the MVE-8000A, a dedicated interface (MKE-9020M) is available to
enable the MVE-8000A to be used in an MVS-8000 series switcher.
Installation of an optional MKE-8021A Input/Output Board in the MVE-
8000A provides an SDI interface.
Note
When using the SDI interface, the following operations are required.
• Setting the interface between the MVE-8000A and the switcher.
See “Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
• Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-8000A (AUX bus
outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry
inputs). However, “Ext In” cannot be set for the DME channel.
See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume
2).
• Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the
Global Effect menu.
See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor
The MVE-9000 is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support.
Two interfaces are available for the MVE-9000: a dedicated interface (MKE-
9020M) for use in an MVS-8000 series switcher, and an SDI interface (MKE-
9021M).
110 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
When using the SDI interface, the following operations are different from
when using the dedicated interface.
• Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-9000 (AUX bus
outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry
inputs).
See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume
2).
• Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the
Global Effect menu.
See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Three-Dimensional Transformations
Transformation is the process of placing a video image in a three-dimensional
DME coordinate space and subjecting it to manipulations such as movement,
rotation, magnification or shrinking.
Three-dimensional coordinate space
Source coordinate space and target coordinate space
Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space: source coordinate
space and target coordinate space.
• The source coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with
reference to the image itself. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel to the
plane of the image, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the
image. When you move the image, the coordinate axes also move.
• The target coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with
reference to the output monitor screen. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel
to the plane of the monitor screen, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to
the plane of the monitor screen. The coordinates do not move even if the
image moves.
111Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Source coordinate space and target coordinate space
For example, as shown in the following figure, the image moves in a different
direction when you move it along the x-axis of the source coordinate space and
along the x-axis of the target coordinate space.
Movement along the x-axes of the source
coordinate space and target coordinate space
Local coordinate space and global coordinate space
The coordinates of an individual DME channel are called its local coordinate
space. The coordinates common to all channels are called the global coordinate
space.
By switching from local to global coordinate space, you can add new
movement to the movement of images in individual channels, and also apply
transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global
effects (page 152).
ZY
XX
Y
Z
Source coordinate space Target coordinate space
Source coordinate space Target coordinate space
112 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Local coordinate space and global coordinate space
Three-dimensional parameters
Three-dimensional parameters are x, y, and z values which define the position
of an image, its axis of rotation, the position of an imaginary point of view on
the image, and so on.
The standard values of parameters are as follows, depending on the aspect ratio
of your monitor (4:3 or 16:9).
Values for 4:3 mode
•Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor
(target coordinate space)
x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00
•Upper right corner of image or monitor
When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 3.00, z = 0.00
When using HD format signals: x = 12.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00
Rotation around y-axis in
local coordinate space
Rotation around y-axis in
global coordinate space
113Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Lower left corner of image or monitor
When using SD format signals: x = –4.00, y = –3.00, z = 0.00
When using HD format signals: x = –12.00, y = –9.00, z = 0.00
Values for x-, y-, and z-axes (4:3 mode)
Values for 16:9 mode
•Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor
(target coordinate space)
x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00
•Upper right corner of image or monitor
When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 2.25, z = 0.00
When using HD format signals: x = 16.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00
–4(–12)
a)
+4(+12)
a)
+3(+9)
a)
–3(–9)
a)
x-axis
z-axis – y-axis
y-axis
z-axis +
The plus direction on the
z-axis is depth into the
image or monitor screen.
a) The value in parentheses is for HD format.
x-axis
114 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Lower left corner of image or monitor
When using SD format signals: x = −4.00, y = −2.25, z = 0.00
When using HD format signals: x = −16.00, y = −9.00, z = 0.00
Values for x-, y- and z-axes (16:9 mode)
Limits of three-dimensional parameters
The following table shows the limits of three-dimensional transformation
parameters.
The three-dimensional parameters of an image change when you use the
trackball or Z-ring to execute a transformation. You can also execute a
transformation by entering parameter values from the numeric keypad control
block.
Operation mode Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters
Location XYZ HD format: –999.9999 to +999.9999
SD
format:
4:3 –333.3333 to +333.3333
16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000
Rotation, Spin –999.9999 to +999.9999
Axis Location HD format: –999.9999 to +999.9999
SD
format:
4:3 –333.3333 to +333.3333
16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000
Location Size 0.0000 to +999.9999
Aspect 0.0000 to +2.0000
Perspective (x, y) HD format: –999.9999 to +999.9999
SD
format:
4:3 –333.3333 to +333.3333
16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000
Perspective (z) 0.0000 to 999.9999
–4.00 (–16.00)a)
+4.00 (+16.00)a)
+2.25 (+9.00)a)
–2.25 (–9.00)a)
x-axis
z-axis –
y-axis
y-axis
z-axis +
The plus direction on the z-axis is depth
into the image or monitor screen.
x-axis
a) The value in parentheses is for HD format.
115Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Detents
The system defines points called detents at regular intervals on the three-
dimensional space. Pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block sets
the current three-dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points.
(For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations” in Chapter
11 (Volume 2).)
The following table shows the interval between successive detents for each
transformation operation mode (see page 116).
a) When a value is smaller than 1, 1/Aspect or 1/Perspective (z) is adjusted to an integral value.
Three-dimensional parameter default values
Each of the transformation operation modes has default values for three-
dimensional parameters. If required, you can return the current value to the
defaults by pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block twice in rapid
succession. (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation
Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)
The following table shows the default parameter values for each
transformation operation mode.
Skew –9.9999 to +9.9999
Operation mode Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters
Operation mode Detent interval
Location XYZ 1.0000
Rotation, Spin 0.2500
Axis Location 1.0000
Location Size 0.2500
Aspect 1.0000 a)
Perspective (x, y)
Perspective (z)
1.0000
1.0000 a)
Skew 0.1000
Operation mode Default value
Location XYZ 0.0000
Rotation, Spin 0.0000
Axis Location 0.0000
Location Size 1.0000
Aspect 1.0000
116 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Resetting of parameter values set in the source coordinate space
In some transformation operation modes, if you switch to the target coordinate
space after setting up a three-dimensional transformation in the source
coordinate space, the setting values in the source coordinate space (three-
dimensional parameter values) are converted to values in the target coordinate
space (source/target conversion).
Once a conversion has taken place, the original source coordinate space
parameters do not return to their original values when you switch back to the
source coordinate space. They are reset to zeros.
Source/target conversion occurs in the following operation modes:
• Location XYZ
• Rotation
Transformation Operation Modes
The following operation modes are available for three-dimensional DME
transformations. These operations are carried out in the device control block
(trackball or joystick). (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation
Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)
Location XYZ
Moves the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The direction of movement
differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source
coordinate space or the target coordinate space.
Image movement in the source coordinate space
Perspective (x, y)
Perspective (z)
0.0000
1.0000
Skew 0.0000
Operation mode Default value
Movement on the x-axis Movement on the y-axis Movement on the z-axis
117Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Image movement in the target coordinate space
Rotation
Rotates the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The type of rotation differs
depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate
space or the target coordinate space.
Image rotation in the source coordinate space
Image rotation in the target coordinate space
Spin
When rotating the image in Rotation mode, it may not always be possible to
achieve the kind of rotation around an axis that you want. Combining Rotation
mode with Spin mode creates an effect that rotates the image around a specified
axis. The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating
Movement on the x-axis Movement on the y-axis Movement on the z-axis
Rotation around the y-axis Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis
Rotation around the y-axis Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis
118 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space. (The
way the image rotates around an axis is the same as in Rotation mode.)
Axis Location
Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space.
Axis movement
Location Size
Changes the size of the whole image.
• Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the source coordinate
space is done in three-dimensional space, magnifying the image emphasizes
the sense of perspective.
• Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the target coordinate
space is a conversion of the two-dimensional image displayed on the
monitor, shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the
image.
Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space
Z Y Z' Y' Z
X
Z'
X'
YX
Y' X'
Movement on the x-axis Movement on the y-axis Movement on the z-axis
119Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space
Aspect
In the source coordinate space, changes the aspect ratio in the x-axis direction
and y-axis direction, either independently or simultaneously.
Perspective
In the target coordinate space, changes the perspective on the image by
changing an imaginary view point, without changing the position of the image.
The x-axis and y-axis values define the position of the view point. The z-axis
value defines its distance from the image.
Change of aspect ratio in
x-axis direction
Change of aspect ratio in
y-axis direction
Simultaneous change
aspect ratio in x-axis
direction and y-axis direction
Change of view point on
x-axis
Change of view point on y-
axis
Change of distance from
view point to image
120 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Skew
In the source coordinate space, change the skew of the image on the x-axis or
y-axis.
Graphics Display
Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames,
coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image, to make it easier to
create effects in three-dimensional coordinate space.
Graphics displayed by this function can also be output to the monitor output
connector.
Note
On the MVE-8000 and the MVE-8000A (when using the DME dedicated
interface), these graphics cannot be output to the monitor output connector.
To make graphics display settings, use the DME menu. (For details, see
“Graphics Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)
You can display the following kinds of graphics.
Wire frames
A wire frame displays an image enclosed in a frames, so that you can check the
position and size of the image. If there is a shadow (see page 157), a frame is
shown for the shadow as well.
Coordinate axes
This is a three-dimensional display of coordinates in local or global coordinate
space. You can check the origin of the axes and the directions of the x-, y-, and
z-axes.
Change of skew on x-axis Change of skew on y-axis
121Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Channel ID
This displays the channel number so that you can check which channel you are
using, a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels.
Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space.
• In local coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “F” or
“B” to indicate whether you are looking at the front (F) or back (B) of the
current wire frame. For example, “1F” means the front of the wire frame on
channel 1 in local coordinate space.
• In global coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “G”
to indicate global. For example, “G2” means channel 2 in global coordinate
space.
Wire frame, local coordinate space axes, and channel ID
Grid
This is a grid pattern representing the whole of the monitor screen. The grid
makes it easy to set the position of an image in two-dimensional coordinates.
Grid (SD format, 4:3 mode)
Shrinking the graphics display
You can shrink the graphics display so that you can see beyond the range
displayed on the normal monitor screen. This makes it possible to visually set
the location of images in a larger space. The range displayed on a normal
monitor screen is indicated by a frame.
Wire frame
Local coordinate space axes
Channel ID
Y
X
Z
1F
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4+3
+2
+1
0
–1
–2
–3
122 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
To automatically erase the graphic display
Turn Auto Erase on. The graphic display is erased automatically whenever a
keyframe is executed. It is displayed again after the keyframe ends, after the
time set in Recovery Time.
Flex Shadow center axis
When using the Flex Shadow function (see page 125), turn Flex Shadow Axis
on to display the Flex Shadow center axis. This is an effective aid in making
settings for this function.
Note
The Flex Shadow center axis function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display
You can display a three-dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled
image. When more than one DME channel is selected, the status of the
reference channel is displayed.
For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display, see
“Three-Dimensional Parameter Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
DME Special Effects
You can use DME to add a variety of special effects. To add effects, use the
DME menu. (See “DME Special Effect Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume
2).)
Range displayed
on normal monitor
screen
Wire frame
123Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Border
This effect adds a border to the image frame. You can adjust the width (or
thickness) of the border, its color, and the softness of the border edges.
Crop
This effect crops away the edges of the image. You can crop the top, bottom,
left, and right sides individually or all together. You can also soften the cropped
edges.
Defocus
Defocuses the whole image. The degree of defocusing can be set
simultaneously or separately for video and key signals. (However, when the
DME dedicated interface is used, the degree of defocusing can be set for video
signals only.) You can also cancel the black level leaking that occurs at the
edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is used.
124 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Blur
Applies a rounded blurring to the whole image.
Beveled Edge
This gives an image a beveled edge. You can set the edge width and color. The
inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set.
Key Border
This effect adds borders to keys or gives a key consisting of an outline only.
Note
The Key Border function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Art Edge
Adds edges to the inner and outer side of the input image.
The following items can be set.
• Art edge width and position
• Separate softening of the art edge inner and outer sides
• Color of art edges
Light Color
125Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Examples of Art Edge source
Example effect using Art Edge source [Rainbow Matte]
Note
The Art Edge function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Flex Shadow
This effect allows a shadow to be added to the image using only one DME
channel.
The following settings can be made for the shadow.
• The signal to use for the shadow
–External: Generate shadow using input key signal.
Gradation Matte Radial Gradation
Rainbow Matte Radial Rainbow
126 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
–Internal: Generate shadow using an internally generated, full-size DME
key signal.
• Shadow shrinking and magnification
• Shadow position
• Shadow color and density
• Center axis of deformation
• Shadow slant and perspective
Note
The Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Wipe crop
This effect crops the video image to be visible inside or outside a wipe pattern.
Note
The Wipe Crop function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
External Internal
Video image
Background
When Invert is On
127Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Color mix
This is a combination of two colors with a pattern generator. This color mix
signal can be used to fill parts such as a background or border.
Note
The Color Mix function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Multi Move
Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally.
You can specify the center point of the shrinking, the shrinking ratio, and the
aspect ratio of the image screen.
Sepia
Overlays a specified color onto the image. You can adjust the sepia color that
is overlaid, and specify the degree of mixing between the original image and
the sepia image.
Mono
Converts the image into a monochrome image.
Color 2
Color 1
128 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Posterization
Coarsens the luminance gradations of the image, for a painting-like effect. You
can specify the degree of luminance coarsening.
Solarization
Like the Posterization effect, creates a painting-like effect, but does so by
coarsening the chroma gradations of the image. You can specify the degree of
chroma coarsening.
Nega
Reverses the luminance and/or chroma of the image.
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the luminance and/or chroma of the image.
Mosaic
Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic. You can specify
the size and aspect ratio of the tiles.
129Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Sketch
Provides a sketch-like effect based on the outlines of the image, using different
touches such as sketch, edge color, drawing, relief, and sharp.
Note
The Sketch function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Metal
Provides a metallic gloss like that from gold, silver, or a rainbow colored
surface. A metallic gloss can also be given to a freely selected color.
Note
The Metal function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Sketch
130 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Dim and Fade
Dim makes the picture progressively dimmer into its depths. Fade
progressively makes the depths of the picture fade into the background.
Note
The Dim and Fade functions are not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Glow
Softens the edges of highlights, giving an effect like being struck by a soft light.
Note
The Glow function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Mask
Masks part of the image so that special effects are applied only inside a selected
pattern.
The mask function is applied in units made up of the following groups.
The Mask effect can be applied using effect group 1 and effect group 2
simultaneously.
Effect group 1: Posterization, Solarization, Nega, Sepia, Mono, Contrast,
Mosaic, Sketch, Metal
Effect group 2: Defocus, Blur, Glow
Fade
131Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Notes
• The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
• On the MVE-8000A, the Mask function cannot be applied to both effect
group 1 and effect group 2 simultaneously.
Freeze
Freezes the input video. The following types are available:
Hard Freeze: Freezes the input video at an arbitrary timing.
Time Strobe: Freezes the input video at specified intervals for a specified
length.
Film: Slows the apparent frame rate, for an effect like film. You can specify
the ratio of advancement.
For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe, you can select the first field or the frame as
the freeze timing.
Nonlinear Effects
You can add a variety of effects, including effects that change the shape of the
image as a whole.
The following nonlinear effects are available.
For more information about settings and operations with nonlinear effects, see
“Nonlinear Effect Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Note
It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time.
Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other nonlinear effects
off.
Wave
Produces a wave-like effect in the image.
Video image
Effect video
image (Mosaic) Video image
Effect video
image (Mosaic)
Mask (normal) Mask (invert)
132 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of the
waves, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the range. In H&V
mode, you can also set the wave angle.
Note
When 720P/59.94 signal format is used, the wave effect is not supported on the
MVE-8000.
Mosaic Glass
Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval.
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of
waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the
range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle.
.
Flag
Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind.
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of
waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the
range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle.
133Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Twist
Twists the image.
You can twist the image in the horizontal or vertical direction.
You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image, the wave form, the
amount of wave movement, and other parameters.
Ripple
Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image.
There are four modes: Radial, Angular, Both, and Shape. The direction of
modulation differs depending on the mode. You can set the size and frequency
of the ripples, their direction and speed, their center point, and other
parameters. In Shape mode, you can select ripple shapes other than circles
(stars, etc.).
Rings
Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction.
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance
moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the
degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle,
and other parameters.
134 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Broken Glass
Partitions the image like broken glass, with shards flying outward.
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance
moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the
degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle,
and other parameters.
You can also fix the direction in which shards scatter.
Flying Bar
Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move.
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance
moved by each block, the direction of movement, the width of the partitions,
the degree of randomness in partition width, the partition angle, and other
parameters.
Blind
Divides the image into bars or wedges, with blocks rotating like the slats of
venetian blinds.
There are two modes: Bar and Wedge. You can set the number of rotations by
blocks, the perspective, the width and position of blocks, the direction, the
center position, and other parameters.
135Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Split
Splits the image upper and lower, left and right.
You can set the degree to which the image is split, the split positions, and other
parameters.
Split Slide
Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directions.
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance
moved by each block, the degree of sliding, block width, block angle, and other
parameters.
Mirror
Partitions the image vertically and horizontally, creating an image like a
reflection in a mirror.
You can choose to reflect in the directions left to right, right to left, bottom to
top, top to bottom, or any combination of directions. You can also set the
position of the border between original and reflections.
Multi Mirror
Divides the image into originals and reflections, lining them up vertically and
horizontally.
136 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can set the width of the original, the center position of the original, the
offset of the image with fixed mirrors, the direction of the mirrors, and other
parameters.
Kaleidoscope
Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope.
You can set the number of blocks, the partition reference point and angle,
horizontal and vertical offsets, a reflection position, and other parameters.
Lens
Creates an image like a view through a lens.
You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens, the angle, the magnification
ratio, the curve ratio, the size, the center position, and other parameters.
You can also choose to display only the portion of the image that is seen
through the lens.
Circle
Makes a circle with the image.
137Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can set the size of the circle, and make the axis of modulation vertical.
Panorama
Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of
perspective.
You can set the horizontal and vertical curve ratio, and the curve center
position.
Page Turn
Turns the image like a turning page.
There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position,
the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input
video for the front and back pages.
Roll
Rolls the image up.
138 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position,
the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input
video for the front and back pages.
Cylinder
Winds the whole image onto a cylinder.
You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder, the radius, the horizontal
position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image.
Sphere
Winds the whole image onto a sphere.
You can set the degree of winding onto the sphere, the radius, the horizontal
position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image.
Note
You cannot monitor the part of a rotating sphere that corresponds to its axis on
the monitor screen.
Explosion
Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out.
139Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio, the center position, the amount
of movement by fragments, the curvature of the transition path, and other
parameters.
Swirl
Swirls the image.
You can set the amount of swirl, the swirl region, the amount of rotation, and
the swirl center position.
Melt
Melts the image away from a specified part.
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of extension in the image, the
jaggedness of the melting sections, and the amplitude, frequency, amount of
movement, and speed of the melting sections. You can also set the slant of the
borders, the shape of the sections that begin to melt, and other parameters.
Character Trail
Extends the edge of the image like a trail.
140 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can set the effect starting position, the degree of expansion, the slant angle
of the effect region, and trail direction, the degree to which the image
disappears, the trail type and amount of stardust, and other parameters.
Lighting
Provides the effect of light striking the image. You can specify the intensity and
color of the light and the lighting pattern. The following lighting patterns are
available:
Plane: Illumination of the entire screen.
Bar: Bar illumination. You can specify the width and angle of the bar, and its
softness.
Preset: Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects.
When Bar is selected, the following modes can be selected.
Normal: Emphasizes the bar highlight area.
Specular: An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections.
Mat: An effect like light striking paper, cloth, or another diffusively reflective
surface.
Note
The function for setting the bar mode of the lighting area is not supported on
the MVE-8000/8000A.
Normal Specular Mat
141Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Combine Shadow
When there are several images, adds a flex shadow in the depth of an image or
overlays multiple flex shadows.
Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under
Video Video
Example 1: When Flex Shadow is enabled on both of two channels.
Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under
Combine shadow is enabled.
Density is set to 100.00.
Combine shadow is enabled.
Density is set to 0.00.
Shadow Shadow
No combine shadow is set.
142 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Trail
Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of
afterimages is created. You can make the afterimages stardust trails.
Note
Of the three effects of trail, motion decay and keyframe strobe, only one can be
on at a time. When one of them is on, turning another of them on automatically
turns off the one that has been on.
Motion Decay
Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving
video. (See “Note” in the preceding section “Trail.”)
Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under
Video Video
Example 2: Flex Shadow is enabled on one channel only.
Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under Over
Over
Under
Under
Over Under
Combine shadow is enabled.
Density is set to 100.00.
Combine shadow is enabled.
Density is set to 0.00.
Shadow
No combine shadow is set.
143Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can make the afterimages stardust trails.
Keyframe Strobe
Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe. (See “Note” in the
section “Trail.”)
You can make the afterimages stardust trails.
Wind
This effect strobes the image at regular intervals, and moves the frozen image
in a fixed direction, leaving an afterimage.
Note
The Wind function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Spotlighting
Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image.
You can set up to three light sources (lights 1 to 3).
Notes
• The Spotlighting function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• The BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000) is required to
set lights 2 and 3.
144 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Adjustments to the image surface
The following adjustments can be made to the image surface struck by the
light.
• Adjusting the brightness of the whole image
• Selecting the image surface effect
Flat: The image surface is unchanged, causing the selected light source to
appear as the effect.
Texture: A texture appears on the surface of the image. Textures can be
selected from among 30 patterns.
See the appendix “Texture Patterns” (Volume 2) for the texture
patterns.
Non Linear: Spotlighting effect is applied to an area to which a DME
nonlinear effect is applied.
Note
The BZDM-9050 is required to enable Texture and Non Linear settings.
•Test sphere function
A test sphere is a translucent sphere virtually embedded in the center of the
input picture to provide an intuitive way for you to check the position and
direction of the spotlight. When you change the position or direction of a
light source, the side of the sphere closest to the light source grows brighter.
You can easily check the position and direction of the light source by
viewing the test sphere.
For more information about test sphere, see “Relation between test spheres
and parallel rays” (page 148).
• Adjusting the bumpiness of the image surface
•Coordinate axis on surface of image
Specify where to apply the texture or test sphere on the image surface.
Move: The texture moves together with the DME image.
Fix: The texture does not move, even if the DME image moves.
Image before movement Coordinate axis = Move
Texture moves together
with DME image.
145Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Texture deformations
You can change the texture pattern, position, and size, and use the repetition
function.
The following figure shows examples of a texture pattern repeated in the X
and Y directions.
Setting lights
•Light source types
The following type of light sources are available (see figure).
Parallel: Parallel light source
Point: Point light source. As the light source is placed further away, the
illuminated range becomes wider and the light become weaker.
Line: Line light source
Whole: Non-directional light source which illuminates the whole image.
Image before movement Coordinate axis = Fix
Texture does not move, even
if DME image moves.
Original image
Repetition in X
direction
Repetition in Y
direction
Repetition in X and Y
directions
146 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Linking and unlinking image and spotlight
The spotlight can move together with a DME image, or be fixed in place.
Source: Place the light source in source coordinate space. The spotlight is
linked and moves when the image moves.
Target: Place the light source in target coordinate space. The spotlight
does not move, even when the image moves.
•Selecting the lighted area
You can select the area lit by the spotlight.
FRGD: The light strikes the image foreground.
BKGD: The light strikes the image background.
Both: The light strikes both foreground and background.
Light source Light source Light source
Parallel Point Line Whole
Spotlight
Image before movement Coordinate axis = Source
Spotlight moves together
with DME image.
Coordinate axis = Target
Spotlight does not move,
even if DME image
moves.
147Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Surface Flat
For the currently selected light source only, you can forcibly make the image
surface effect flat.
This is effective when you have selected texture as image surface effect and
want a flat effect for one light source only.
•Light shape
Creates the light shape.
– Select the shape pattern
For shape patterns, see the appendix “Shape Patterns” (Volume 2).
– Set the size, degree of deformation, softness, and rotation.
•Ring settings
Shines the light with a hole in the middle, like a doughnut. Adjust the
following parameters.
Offset: Distance to move the center of the ring from the initial position (the
position set when selecting the light source in the <Spot Mode>
group).
Radius: Inner side radius of the ring.
Angle: When an Offset is set, the rotation angle of the ring around the
initial center position.
No effect
Background
Foreground Spotlight
FRGD selected BKGD selected Both selected
Radius
Angle
Offset
Angle: Rotation angle
Initial center position
148 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Fill blending modes
Specifies the way in which the light is blended with the image.
Mix: Light as if reflected from a mirror. The light can be given a color.
Multiply: Light as if reflected from a dull surface (diffuse reflection).
Relation between test spheres and parallel rays
The following figure shows an example of the effect of parallel rays on a test
sphere.
The direction of a ray is defined by longitude and latitude.
• Longitude: A direction (angle), expressed as a plus value for clockwise
rotation in the plus direction with respect to the X axis of the input picture.
• Latitude: Latitude
The following figure shows the relationships between the longitude and
latitude of parallel rays, input picture, and test sphere.
Test sphere
Ray
0.00
0.00
Parallel rays
Input picture
Z-axis
Latitude=+0.25
Latitude=−0.25
X-axis
Y-axis
Longitude
Test sphere
Latitude
149Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The unit of these direction parameters is the number of rotations, with 360°
(1 rotation) expressed as 1.00, in the same way as 3D rotation parameters.
The following relationships apply in the example shown in the figure.
The fractional part of the setting after the decimal point corresponds to an angle
0 to 360°. If the fractional parts of two setting values are the same, the effect is
the same even if the integral parts are different.
The integral part of a setting value is used when moving a light source with
keyframes.
For example, when the longitude of a light source rotates in the clockwise
direction from 0.88 (315°) to 0.12 (45°), it rotates in the counterclockwise
direction (the angle grows smaller) if the above values are used. In this case,
the value of the second keyframe can be set to 1.12 (330° + 45°).
Keyframe trajectory
User texture pattern
In the spotlighting function, a user generated texture pattern can now be
selected for the pattern with which the light falls on the image surface.
To add a texture pattern, create a texture package from a bitmap file, and install
it.
The installed texture pattern can be selected in the same way as the texture
patterns provided by default.
Parameter Setting Angle
Longitude 0.12 45°
Latitude 0.12 45°
KF2 = 1.12
KF2 = 0.12
KF1 = 0.88
Test sphere
150 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
The user texture pattern function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
For details of spotlighting, see page 143.
For details of how to create a user texture pattern, see “Adding user texture
patterns” in Chpater 16 (Volume 2) , and for how to select a pattern once
created, see “To select a texture pattern” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Background
Adds a color or inputs an external signal to the background of the image.
Note
Signal selection for this purpose is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Separate Sides
Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the
image.
Front and back sides
Shaped Video
For each of the front and back sides of the image, specifies whether to handle
input video from the switcher as shaped video (key processed signals).
Note
The shaped video function can only be used with the MVE-8000A/9000 (SDI
interface).
Front Back
151Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Invert
Inverts the input video signal and/or key signal horizontally or vertically. You
can make separate settings for the front and back.
Inversion of input signal
Interpolation
Specifies the methods used for interpolation processing of input video signals
and input key signals.
For input video signals, you can select from the following four methods.
• Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance signals separately, and
switch automatically between fields and frames. You can select the degree of
change detection.
• Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically
between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection.
• Do interpolation in field units.
• Do interpolation in frame units.
For input key signals, you can select from the following three methods.
• Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically
between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection.
• Do interpolation in field units.
• Do interpolation in frame units.
You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing, and
select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded.
Further, you can apply an anti-moire filter to reduce the moire patterns created
by interpolation.
Notes
• Interpolation processing is possible for the following signal formats and
DME systems.
Horizontal inversion Input signal Vertical inversion
152 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
– MVE-8000/8000A: 480i/59.94, 576i/50
– MVE-9000: 480i/59.94, 576i/50, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080i/60
• The anti-moire filter function is only effective when the MVE-8000/8000A
is used in an HD system.
Key Density Adjustment
You can adjust the key density for the key signal input to the DME.
Key Source Selection
You can select either the key signals received from the switcher or the key
signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image
(see page 150).
Global Effects
Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of
successive channels. The Global Effect menu is used to add these effects.
For details of this menu, see “Global Effect Operations” in Chapter 11
(Volume 2).
The following types of global effects are available.
Combiner
When multiple channels are selected on one keyer or for one transition, the
Combiner automatically combines the selected images. Up to four channels
can be combined.
You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out, as a mix
or an overlap with priority set automatically. For a mix, you can control the
relative amounts of each channel.
Images can also be crossed in three dimensions.
Note
Three-dimensional image crossing is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
153Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Combination of channel 1 (Ch1) and channel 2 (Ch2)
Combination of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3
Ch1
Ch2
Ch1
Ch3
Ch4
Ch3
Ch4
1
21
2
3
4
3
4
Combiner
Ch1
Ch2
Ch1
Ch4
Ch4
1
2
Ch3 3
23
1
4
4
Combiner
154 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 / combination of Ch3 and Ch4
Combination of Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4
Mixing Ch1 and Ch2
If the Mix1 setting is 70, the proportion of the channels in the mixed portion in
the previous illustration is as shown in the following table.
Ch1
Ch2
Ch1
Ch3
Ch4
1
211
2
Ch3
243
3
4
Combiner
Combiner
Ch1
Ch1
1
Ch4 4
Ch2 2
Ch3 3
23
1
4
Combiner
Ch1
Ch2
1
2
Mix1
Ch1
Ch2
155Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Mixing Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3
If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the
channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the
following table.
Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2, and Ch3 and Ch4
Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2
Ch1 and Ch2 30% 70%
Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
Ch1 and Ch2 30% 70% –
Ch2 and Ch3 – 60% 40%
Ch1 and Ch3 30% – 70%
Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3 30% 42% 28%
Ch1
Ch2
1
2
Mix1
Ch3 3
Mix2
Ch2
Ch1
Ch3
Ch1
Ch2
1
2
Mix1
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch4
3
4
Mix2
Ch3
Ch4
156 Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the
channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the
following table.
Ch1 crossed with Ch2
Brick
This effect creates a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels.
The Brick effect can combine Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3, or combine Ch2, Ch3, and
Ch4. The three images are displayed as shown in the following figure.
An example of the Brick effect
Combinations of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3
Upper side: Ch1 image
Side V: Ch2 image
Side H: Ch3 image
Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
Ch1 and Ch2 30% 70% – –
Ch3 and Ch4 – – 60% 40%
Ch1
Ch2
1
2
Depth
X
Y
Z
Side V Side H
Height
Upper side
157Digital Multi Effects (DME)
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Combinations of Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4
Upper side: Ch2 image
Side V: Ch3 image
Side H: Ch4 image
You can adjust the height of the brick, the overlap between the three images
and the way to insert the side images.
Shadow
This effect gives the image a shadow. The effect uses two successive channels.
You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the
image, and the color of the shadow. The channel with the largest number (for
example, Ch2 in the case of Ch1 and Ch2) becomes the shadow.
158 External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
External Devices
In this system, you can operate while controlling the following types of
external device:
• Devices supporting P-Bus (Peripheral II protocol) (referred to as “P-Bus
devices” in the manual)
• Devices supporting GPI
•VTRs
• Disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol and video disk communications
protocol)
• Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol)
The following is an outline of external device control.
For external device control operations, see Chapter 12 “External Devices”
(Volume 2).
For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony
representative.
Shared Functions for External Device Control
Keyframe functions
There are 99 registers, numbered 1 to 99, holding external device control data
as keyframe data.
The following are the keyframe functions that can be used.
• RECALL (1-99), STORE (1-99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO, empty
register search, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL, RECALL &
REWIND)
• EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO
• CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE,
INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE
AFTER, FROM TO, ALL
• PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP
NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER
Note
Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is
executed in the normal direction. Take care when executing simultaneously
with a switcher or DME keyframe effect, since the actions are not executed in
the reverse direction.
159External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The following keyframe functions cannot be used.
• KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE
•PATH
Saving to registers
Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu. You can save
the set data in keyframe, snapshot, or shotbox registers. You can recall the
register in which the data is saved, and carry out operations on it with the
keyframe control block.
For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2).
Editing registers
You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data
for controlling external devices is saved.
•Copy
•Move
•Swap
• Merge (this cannot be carried out for registers holding VTR, disk recorder,
or Extended VTR control data.)
•Lock
•Name
File related functions
As effect data, you can save and recall, using the File menu.
Control of P-Bus Devices
You can control P-Bus devices from this system through the 9-pin serial port
of a DCU.
P-Bus device control modes
There are two modes of P-Bus device control, as follows.
P-Bus trigger mode: Operating a previously specified button outputs the
command for an action assigned to that button.
P-Bus timeline mode: Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the
center control panel controls external devices.
In the setup, select which of P-Bus trigger mode and P-Bus timeline mode to
use.
160 External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
P-Bus trigger mode actions
The actions that can be used in P-Bus trigger mode are as follows.
•Store
• Recall
• Trigger
For details of the buttons assigned to each action, see Chapter 12, “External
Devices” (Volume 2).
P-Bus timeline
At a keyframe point on the P-Bus timeline, you can set an action (setting what
action command is output to which device). At any single keyframe point you
can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices.
P-Bus timeline mode actions
The actions that can be used in P-Bus timeline mode are as follows.
•Store
• Recall
• Trigger
For the action setting (or P-Bus timeline editing), use the Device menu.
You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers.
Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect, and when this
reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set, action commands are
output to external devices through the 9-pin serial port assigned to P-Bus.
For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2).
Control of GPI Devices
You can control GPI devices from the control panel of this system, or through
the GPI output port of a DCU.
GPI timeline
For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the GPI timeline
allows you to set an action (setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output
port) at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline. At any keyframe point, you can
make a maximum of eight GPI output port settings.
GPI timeline actions
The actions that can be used on the GPI timeline are as follows.
• Control panel GPI output port
• DCU GPI output port
For the GPI output settings (keyframe editing), use the Device menu.
161External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When
you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance
the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set, a trigger pulse
is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port.
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control
In this system, for up to 12 VTRs, disk recorders or Extended VTRs connected
to a DCU, you can carry out the following manual operations and timeline
settings.
• Controlling manually from the device control block (trackball or search dial)
• Saving a start point, stop point, start delay time, variable speed and so on in
a data register, then recalling the register to control automatically from the
keyframe control block. (Cueup & Play and VTR/disk recorder/Extended
VTR timeline)
• In the Device menu, you can check the following VTR, disk recorder and
Extended VTR information:
– Device name
– Register number
– VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR status
– Current time
– Start point
– Stop point
– Variable speed
– Start delay time
– Loop setting
– Recue setting
Manual operation
In the device control block, you can carry out the following operations
manually.
• VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR selection
•Tape transport and disk drive control: You can use the following tape
transport and disk drive control buttons:
REC, REW, PLAY, FF, CUE UP, VAR PLAY, SHTL, JOG, STANDBY
OFF, STOP, and ALL STOP. (For details of the operation of the buttons,
see “Device Control Block (Trackball)” (page 271), “Device Control
Block (Joystick)” (page 277) and “Device Control Block (Search Dial)”
(page 278).)
Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu, the CUE UP, PLAY and
STOP operations can be carried out from the transition control block. (For
details of the operation of the buttons, see “Transition Control Block
162 External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
(Standard Type)” (page 260) and “Transition Control Block (Compact
Type)” (page 310).
•Setting a start point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR
you can set the start point timecode value as keyframe data.
•Setting a stop point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR
you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data.
•Setting a start delay time: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended
VTR you can set the start delay as key frame data.
•Recording to VTR or disk recorder: Record video to the selected VTR/
disk recorder.
•Loop/recue 1) setting: You can select loop or recue as the playback mode.
These operate as follows.
When loop is selected: Playback repeats from the start to the end of the
currently recalled file.
When recue is selected: When playback reaches the stop point,
automatically cue up to the start point.
1) EVS XT server (EVS Broadcast Equipment) dedicated function
Cueup & Play
By saving the start point timecode, stop point timecode, start delay time, and
so on for a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR in an effect register, and
recalling this register, you can operate the following buttons in the keyframe
control block to automatically control the VTR, disk recorder or Extended
VTR.
[REWIND] button: Cue up to the start point timecode
[RUN] button: Play
With this function you can also stop the VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR
used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register.
Disk recorder (video disk communications protocol) operation
when loop /recue is set
When loop is set: playback repeatedly between the start point and stop point.
When recue is set: when playback reaches the stop point, automatically cue
up to the start point.
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline
For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the timeline
allows you to set a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR action at a keyframe
point on the timeline.
Timeline actions
The actions that can be used on the timeline are as follows.
•Start
163External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Stop
•Cue up
• Variable speed
Notes
• For a disk recorder, the maximum number of files for a single register is
eight.
• The timeline does not support loop and recue.
For the action settings (VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline editing),
use the Device menu.
The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When
you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance
the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set, an action command
is output to the external device through the 9-pin serial port assigned to the
VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR.
Recalling disk recorder/Extended VTR files
Material held on a disk recorder/Extended VTR is managed in units of files.
You can recall a file to play it back. (In the case of an Extended VTR, the
register number is recalled.)
Accessing the file list
Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder/Extended VTR, it
is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU. The file
list includes the following information.
• File name
• Date of last update 1)
• Duration of recorded material 1)
To recall the file list, use the Device menu.
1) Not displayed in the case of an Extended VTR
Recalling a file
In the recalled list of files, select the file you want to play back, and open the file.
File list sharing
You can connect multiple DCU serial ports to a single disk recorder/Extended
VTR.
You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the
same disk recorder/Extended VTR.
For settings relating to file list sharing, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port
Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
164 External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
File creation
To record a new file on the disk recorder, use the Device menu to create a new
file.
Note
In the case of an Extended VTR, it is not possible to record a new file.
165Regions and Registers
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Regions and Registers
Regions
The term “region” refers to some sort of functional block of the system.
When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers, or creating or
editing effects, you first select the region to which the operation applies. You
can also select multiple regions simultaneously.
Classification of the regions
The regions are classified as follows.
• Master region
• The following 36 regions
– Switcher: M/E1 to M/E3, PGM/PST, User1 to User8
– DME: DME ch1 to DME ch8 (inclusive of Global)
– External devices: P-Bus, Router, Device 1 to Device 12, GPI, Macro
Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of the numeric keypad
control block can be used simultaneously.
For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons, see
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Regions applicable to keyframe operations
Thirty-five regions, that is, the above 36 regions less the Router region.
Regions applicable to snapshot operations
Twenty-one regions, that is, the above regions less the external devices’
regions (P-Bus, Device 1 to Device 12, and GPI) and the Macro region.
“User” regions
You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions User1 to User8.
The User regions shown in parenthesis are the default assignments.
• Color backgrounds 1 and 2 (User1)
• AUX1 to AUX48 (User2)
• Monitor 1 to 8 (User3)
• Frame Memory 1 to 8 (User4)
• Color correctors 1 and 2
For details of the User1 to User8 region assignment, see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
166 Regions and Registers
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Reference region
When multiple regions are selected, only one region appears in the displays for
menu and numeric keypad operations. This is called the “reference region.”
The reference region is determined according to the following precedence.
M/E1 >M/E2 >M/E3 >P/P >User1 > User2 > User3 >User4 >User5
>User6 >User7 >User8 >DME ch1>DME ch2 >DME ch3 >DME ch4
>DME ch5 >DME ch6 >DME ch7 >DME ch8 >Device1 >Device2
>Device3 >Device4 >Device5 >Device6 >Device7 >Device8 >Device9
>Device10 >Device11 >Device12 >P-Bus >GPI >Router >Macro
Master region
The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and
the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the
master region.
The master region can be saved or recalled using the numeric keypad control
block.
Registers
A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot, keyframe,
macro, and so on.
For details of macros, see page 210.
Keyframe effect registers
Dedicated effect registers
There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region, numbered
1 to 99.
Shared user-programmable DME registers
In addition to the 99 DME registers for each region (i.e. each channel), there
are also shared registers for each processor as shown in the following table.
These are used for user-programmable DME.
Note
When operating with these shared registers, be sure to select the appropriate
regions depending on the number of channels. When recalling registers in the
Register number Register allocation
101 to 199 Shared register for one-channel effects
201 to 299 Shared register for two-channel effects
301 to 399 Shared register for three-channel effects
167Regions and Registers
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
200 range, select two consecutive channels for the regions, as for example
[DME1] and [DME2]. Similarly, for registers in the 300 range, select three
consecutive registers.
Work register
This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes.
When you recall an effect, it is read from the effect register into the work
register, and when you save, the contents of the work register are written to the
effect register.
Master timeline registers
There are 99 master timeline registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control
panel. They store keyframe effect regions and the register numbers saved in the
regions.
Snapshot registers
These are registers for snapshots, and there are 99, numbered 1 to 99 for each
region.
Master snapshot registers
There are 99 master snapshot registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control
panel. They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the
regions.
168 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Keyframes
A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image; it can be saved and
recalled for reuse.
Effects
By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis, and interpolating
between successive keyframes, you can create an effect in which there is a
continuous change from each keyframe to the next.
The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern (the
circle) in different positions. This is interpolated to create the effect shown.
Example of keyframes and effect execution
You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a
register. Then by recalling this register, you can replay the same effect.
For details of keyframe effect registers, see “Regions and Registers” (page
165).
Background A
Background B
Interpolated images
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3
Effect execution
169Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Saving and Recalling Effects
To create a new effect, first recall an empty register, then create the keyframes
one at a time in this register. To run an effect, it is also necessary to set the time
and the path.
To edit an existing effect, recall the register holding the effect, then make the
changes.
When you have finished creating or editing the effect, save it in the recalled
register or another specified register.
Auto save function
When you recall an effect, the currently recalled effect is automatically saved
in a register. This is called the auto save function. You can disable this function
in a Setup menu.
Effect Attributes
An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to
switcher or DME operation when the effect is recalled.
These conditions are called “attributes” of the effect, and can be added when
the keyframe effect is saved or recalled.
Type of attribute
The attribute that can be attached to an effect is as follows.
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state
at the effect start point is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve
duration can be set in the Effect menu.
Temporary attributes
When a keyframe is recalled, independently of the attributes held in the
register, you can also enable or disable temporary attributes. These temporary
attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled.
Effect Editing
For editing operations such as to insert, delete, or modify a keyframe, it is
necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis. This is
termed an “edit point.”
170 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect, or at any point between
keyframes.
Insert: Insert the current image as a keyframe. Inserting a keyframe in an
existing effect may change the duration of the effect (see page 172).
Modify: Modify a keyframe. You can modify a single keyframe or a range of
keyframes in the effect together.
Delete: Delete a keyframe. You can delete a single keyframe or a range of
keyframes in the effect together. Deleting keyframes from an effect
reduces the duration of the effect (see page 173).
After deleting a keyframe, you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste
operation.
Copy: Copy a keyframe. You can copy a single keyframe or a range of
keyframes in the effect together.
Paste: Paste the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect.
Pause: You can set a pause on a particular keyframe, so that when the effect is
run it pauses on this keyframe. You can make this setting on any number
of keyframes. To restart the paused effect, repeat the operation to run the
effect.
KF Loop: Execute the effect the specified number of times through the
keyframes in the specified range.
Undo an edit operation: Undo the effect of the last operation to insert,
modify, delete, or paste a keyframe.
Duration modes
In keyframe editing, there are two duration modes; switch between them in the
keyframe operation section. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)
Variable duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe
increases or reduces the duration.
Constant duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe does
not change the duration. This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect
with a fixed duration.
In the variable and constant duration modes, the keyframes to which a modify
operation applies, and the effect of a paste operation are different.
Difference in keyframes to which a modify operation applies
a) A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position.
Effect position Variable duration mode Constant duration mode
On a keyframe Applies to currently
selected keyframe
Applies to currently selected keyframe
Between two
keyframes
Applies to previous
keyframe Modify operation not possible a)
171Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Difference in the effect of a paste operation
Variable duration mode: The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified
position.
Constant duration mode: The copied keyframe is written over the specified
position.
Transition mode
You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the
switcher. In this case, it is necessary to set the transition mode (the way in
which the effect behaves).
For details of the setting, see “User Programmable DME Transition Mode”
(page 483).
Time Settings
Keyframe duration and effect duration
You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the
keyframe durations or the effect duration.
Keyframe duration: This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe.
You can set this time in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings”
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)
In constant duration mode (see page 170), it is not possible to change the
keyframe duration setting.
Effect duration: This is the total execution time of the effect, from the first
keyframe to the last. You can set this time in the keyframe control block.
(See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)
When you change the effect duration, the keyframe duration for each
keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally.
Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration
12345
Keyframe duration
Keyframe number
Effect duration
172 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes.
Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe
• When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, inserting a keyframe increases the
effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe.
• When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, inserting a keyframe
does not change the effect duration.
Note
In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the current keyframe
is reduced to zero, and the new keyframe is inserted with the previous duration
of the current keyframe. Thus the effect duration does not change.
Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration
Insertion position Change in effect duration
Insertion before the first
keyframe
Insertion between two
keyframes
Insertion at an existing
keyframe
Insertion at the last
keyframe
01234
12345
1234
12345
1234
12 34
5
1234
123 45
173Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe
• When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, a delete operation deletes the
keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted
keyframe.
• When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, a delete operation
deletes the preceding keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the
duration of the deleted keyframe.
Note
In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the keyframe before
the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe. Thus
the effect duration does not change.
Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration
Deletion position Change in effect duration
Deletion of the first
keyframe
Deletion of an
intermediate keyframe
Deletion between two
keyframes
Deletion of the last
keyframe
1234
123
1234
12 3
1234
12 3
1234
12 3
174 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Delay setting
You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect,
and the effect actually starting (that is, the delay until the first keyframe). You
can make this setting in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings” in
Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)
Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect.
Paths
The term “path” refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out
from one keyframe to the next.
For details of the path setting procedure, see “Path Settings” in Chapter 13
(Volume 2).
Switcher path settings
Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu.
For each menu, the following settings are available.
M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P menus
Item Paths that can be set
M/E1 to M/E3, P/P All For each M/E and PGM/PST, path settings for
the following items are made simultaneously.
Key1 to Key4 Overall path settings for items relating to keys
1 to 4 are made simultaneously.
Key 1 All to Key 4 All
Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4
Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4
Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4
Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4
Bkgd/Util Overall path settings for items relating to
backgrounds and utility buses are made
simultaneously.
Bkgd/Util All
Bkgd A Path for background A
Bkgd B Path for background B
Util 1 Path for utility 1
Util 2 Path for utility 2
DME 2nd Video Path for video to be used for second DME
channel
175Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
User1 to User8 menus
The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
Wipe/DME Wipe Overall path settings for items relating to wipes
and DME wipes are made simultaneously.
Wipe Wipe/DME
Wipe All
Wipe Path for wipes
DME Wipe Path for DME wipes
Trans – Transition path for each M/E and P/P bank
Item Paths that can be set
User1 All to User8 All Overall path settings for the following items for
each “User” are made simultaneously.
FM All Overall path settings for frame memory items
are made simultaneously.
FM Src Overall path settings for frame memory source
items are made simultaneously.
FM Src All
FM Src1 Path for frame memory source 1 and video
process
FM Src2 Path for frame memory source 2 and video
process
FM Proc Overall path settings relating to the signal
processing other than frame memory source
and frame memory freeze outputs are made
simultaneously.
FM Proc All
FM Proc1 Path for frame memory signal processing 1
FM Proc2 Path for frame memory signal processing 2
FM Still Store Overall path settings for frame memory freeze
image output are made simultaneously.
FM Still Store All
FM Still Store 1 to 8 Paths for frame memory freeze image outputs
1 to 8
Aux Overall path settings for AUX buses are made
simultaneously.
Aux All
Aux 1 to 48 Paths for Aux 1 to 48
Mon Overall path settings for monitor buses are
made simultaneously.
Mon All
Mon 1 to 8 Paths for monitor buses 1 to 8
Item Paths that can be set
176 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Paths relating to DME
DME 3D Trans Local menu
Color Bkgd Overall path settings for color backgrounds are
made simultaneously.
Color Bkgd All
Color Bkgd 1 Paths for color background 1
Color Bkgd 2 Paths for color background 2
CCR Overall path settings for color corrector
CCR All
CCR 1 Path for color corrector 1
CCR 2 Path for color corrector 2
Item Paths that can be set
Item Paths that can be set
3D Trans Local All Overall path settings for local channel three-
dimensional transform items are made
simultaneously.
Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to
image size changes and movement are made
simultaneously.
Loc Size All
Size Path for image size
Post Loc X, Post Loc
Y
Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes
Post Size Path for size
Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to
image movement are made simultaneously.
Loc XYZ All
Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Rot Overall path settings for items relating to
image rotation are made simultaneously.
Rot All
Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin
are made simultaneously.
Spin All
Spin Src X, Spin Src
Y, Spin Src Z
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Spin X, Spin Y, Spin
Z
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Asp Overall path settings for items relating to
aspect ratio are made simultaneously.
Asp All
Rate X, Rate Y Paths for the x- and y-axes
177Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME 3D Trans Global menu
Skew Overall path settings for items relating to skew
are made simultaneously.
Skew All
Skew X, Skew Y Paths for the x- and y-axes
Aspect Path for aspect ratio
Pers Overall path settings for items relating to
perspective are made simultaneously.
Pers All
Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to
image rotation axis are made simultaneously.
Axis All
Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Item Paths that can be set
3D Trans Global All Overall path settings for three-dimensional
transform items in the global channel are made
simultaneously.
Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to
image size changes and movement are made
simultaneously.
Loc Size All
Size Path for image size
Post Loc X, Post Loc
Y
Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes
Post Size Path for size
Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to
image movement are made simultaneously.
Loc XYZ All
Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Rot Overall path settings for items relating to
image rotation are made simultaneously.
Rot All
Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin
are made simultaneously.
Spin All
Spin Src X, Spin Src
Y, Spin Src Z
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Spin X, Spin Y, Spin
Z
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Pers Overall path settings for items relating to
perspective are made simultaneously.
Pers All
Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Item Paths that can be set
178 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME Effect menu
Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to
image rotation axis are made simultaneously.
Axis All
Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes
Item Paths that can be set
Effect All Overall path settings for DME effect items are
made simultaneously.
Edge Overall path settings for edge items are made
simultaneously.
Edge All
Border Path for border
Crop/Edge Soft Path for crop/edge softness
Beveled Edge Path for beveled edge
Key Border Path for key border a)
Art Edge Path for art edge a)
Flex Shadow Path for flex shadow a)
Wipe Crop Path for wipe crop a)
Color Mix Path for color mix a)
Video Modify Overall path settings for video modify items are
made simultaneously.
Video Modify All
Defocus/Blur Path for defocus/blur
Multi Move Path for “multi-move”
Color Modify Path for color modify
Mosaic Path for mosaic
Mask Path for mask b)
Sketch Path for sketch b)
Metal Path for metal b)
Dim/Fade Path for dim/fade a)
Glow Path for glow b)
Freeze Path for freeze
Non-Linear Path for nonlinear effects
Item Paths that can be set
179Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000/8000A.
b) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000.
DME Global Effect menu
Types of path
Path types for Curve
There are five types, as follows.
OFF: Executing the effect causes no change.
Step: There is no interpolation between keyframes, so that the effect
parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed.
Linear: Linear interpolation between keyframes, resulting in constant
speed movement.
S-Curve: The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and
after a keyframe, so that the rate of change is maximum midway
between two keyframes.
Spline: The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to
the next.
Path types for Hue
There are four types, as follows.
Light Overall path settings for lighting items are
made simultaneously.
Light All
Lighting Path for lighting
Spot Lighting Path for spotlighting a)
Trail Path for trails
In/Out Overall path settings for items relating to input/
output are made simultaneously.
In/Out All
Bkgd Path for background
Video/Key Path for video/key
Item Paths that can be set
Global Effect All Overall path settings for DME global effect
items are made simultaneously.
Combine Path for combiner
Shadow Path for shadow
Brick Path for brick
Item Paths that can be set
180 Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
CW: The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a
Vectorscope.
CCW: The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a
Vectorscope.
Short: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions is shorter.
Long: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions is longer.
Path types for Xpt
There are two types, as follows.
Xpt Hold off: When replaying a keyframe, change the inputs to the
settings saved in memory.
Xpt Hold on: When replaying a keyframe, do not change the inputs.
Effect Execution
By pressing the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block, you can replay
the effect as a continuous sequence of images. This is referred to as effect
execution.
It is also possible to execute effects from the device control block (see page
271), the Flexi Pad control block (see page 264) or the transition control block
(see page 260).
Range of execution
Each time the [RUN] button is pressed, the range of execution of the effect is
from timecode 01:00:00:00 or the current time (the position at which the
current effect is stopped) to the end point of the effect. However, if there is a
pause set on a keyframe, the execution range is up to that point. Pressing the
[RUN] button again resumes the effect, which then runs to the next pause point
or the end of the effect.
Run mode setting
You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed.
DIRECTION: Specify the effect execution direction.
STOP NEXT KF: Run the effect, and stop at the next keyframe.
EFFECT LOOP: Repeat the effect in an endless loop.
Make these settings in the keyframe control block. (See “Run Mode Setting”
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)
181Keyframes
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Master Timelines
You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register
numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can
be applied to two or more regions at a time.
To save master timeline registers, use the numeric keypad control block or
menu; to recall them you can use the numeric keypad control block, menu, or
the Flexi Pad control block.
For more details, see “Creating and Saving a Master Timeline” in Chapter 13
(Volume 2).
182 Snapshots
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Snapshots
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the various settings required
to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data, for
recall as required, to recover the original state.
You can carry out snapshot operations using the numeric keypad control block,
the Flexi Pad control block in each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, and the Snapshot menu.
Note
If the M/E bank has the Inhibit setting (see “Overall Control Panel Settings
(Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), it is not possible to recall a
snapshot on that M/E bank.
For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2).
Snapshot Types
Snapshots are divided as follows.
Snapshots applying to a particular region (functional block of the
switcher or DME)
The term “snapshot” alone usually refers to this type of snapshot. This only
applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
control block.
Master snapshot: This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers
saved in the regions. A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the
numeric keypad control block.
Snapshots applying only to particular functions
This type of snapshot includes the following.
Key snapshot: This includes the key on/off state and all key settings other than
key priority for each keyer. (See “Key Snapshots” (page 57).)
Wipe snapshot: This includes the wipe settings of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-
3 and PGM/PST banks. (See “Wipe Snapshots” (page 71).)
DME wipe snapshot: This includes the DME wipe settings of each of the M/
E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.
The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region
or regions.
183Snapshots
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Snapshot Attributes
An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to
switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled.
These conditions are called “attributes” of the snapshot, and can be added when
the snapshot is saved or recalled.
Types of attribute
There are five snapshot attributes, as follows.
Cross-point hold: When the snapshot is recalled, the cross-point button
selection remains unchanged. This can be set independently for each bus.
Key disable: When the snapshot is recalled, the key settings remain
unchanged. This can be set independently for each keyer. A Setup menu
allows you to select whether or not the key on/off state should also remain
unchanged.
For details of the setting operation, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes
and Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in the Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the
snapshot settings is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve
duration can be set in the Snapshot menu.
Auto transition: An auto transition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled.
The auto transition setting is valid only for M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and
PGM/PST.
Note
If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes, the auto
transition takes precedence.
GPI output: A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the
snapshot is recalled.
The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output settings made in the
Setup menu.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)” under “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
Clip event: Recall a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is
recalled.
184 Snapshots
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Note
Clip events are not supported on the MVS-8000.
Auto play: Play a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is
recalled.
Table of available attributes
The attributes that can be used depend on the region, as follows.
Yes: Can be used No: Cannot be used
Attribute display
You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu.
For more details, see “Snapshot Operations in the Menus” in Chapter 14
(Volume 2).
Temporary attributes
When recalling a snapshot, you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from
the attributes set for each register. These are called “temporary attributes.”
You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot.
For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2).
Bus override
If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button, the selection
of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled.
This function is called “bus override.”
This function is effective when cross-point hold is off, and you want to
temporarily maintain the cross-point setting. When cross-point hold is on, the
above operation is not necessary.
Attribute Region
M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and
PGM/PST
User 1 to User 8 DME ch 1 to
DME ch 8
Cross-point hold Yes Yes Yes
Key disable Yes No No
Effect dissolve Yes Yes Yes
Auto transition Yes No No
GPI outputs Yes Yes No
Clip event No Yes No
Auto play No Yes No
185Utility
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Utility
The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary
action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button, then
instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button.
The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts, enabling/disabling
functions (recalling utility commands), and recalling (shotbox registers or
macro registers).
Carry out the button assignment in the Setup menu.
For details of the operation, see “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
You can carry out the utility function in the utility/shotbox control block (see
page 298), in the cross-point control block (see page 256), or using the user
preference buttons in the menu control block (see page 294).
186 Shotbox
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Shotbox
The term “shotbox” refers to a function whereby for each specified region any
snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously.
The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names, snapshot numbers
and keyframe effect numbers are stored in “registers.” There are 99 registers
for each control panel.
The previous figure shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox
registers.
Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register
applies, with the snapshots or effects to be recalled.
The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register. When
this is set to On, an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run.
• When register 1 is executed, this recalls M/E-1 snapshot 1, User2 effect 5,
and DME ch3 effect 1. For register 1, auto run is On, and therefore the User2
and DME ch3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled.
• When register 3 is executed, M/E-1 effect 1, P/P effect 90, and User1 effect
1 are recalled. For register 3, auto run is off, and therefore to run the recalled
effects, press the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block.
Shotbox settings and execution
Carry out shotbox register settings from the Shotbox menu or using the
numeric keypad control block.
You can carry out shotbox execution using the numeric keypad control block,
the Flexi Pad control block, the utility/shotbox control block, or the cross-point
control block buttons.
For details of operation, see Chapter 15 “Shotbox” (Volume 2).
Register #1
M/E-1: Snapshot #1
User2: Effect #5
DME ch3: Effect #1
Auto Run: On
Register #2
M/E-1: Snapshot #1
DME ch1: Snapshot #15
GPI: Effect #1
Auto Run: Off
Register #3
M/E-1: Effect #1
P/P: Effect #90
User1: Effect #1
Auto Run: Off
Register #99
P/P: Effect #2
DME ch1: Snapshot #1
Auto Run: On
Shotbox registers
187Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Setup
Overview of Setup
Various settings are required, in order to operate the switcher, control panel,
DME, external devices, and so on, connected together in a single system.
This is referred to as “setup,” and you can carry out the setup operations from
the Engineering Setup menu.
For details of the operations, see Chapter 16 “Engineering Setup” (Volume 2).
The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following
headings.
•System setup (System): Settings relating to the whole system (see the
following section “System Setup.”)
•Panel setup (Panel): Settings particular to the control panel (see page 195)
•Switcher setup (Switcher): Settings particular to the switcher processor
(see page 198)
•DME setup (DME): Settings particular to the DME processor (see page
202)
•DCU setup (DCU): DCU input and output settings (see page 202)
•Router/tally setup (Router/Tally): Router interface and tally settings (see
page 203)
System Setup
The system setup settings apply to the whole system. Here the “whole system”
refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN.
The DCU is connected through the control panel, but is also included in the
“whole system.”
You can make the following settings.
Network configuration (Network Config)
This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data
LAN (excluding the DCU), and displays a list of them.
System configuration (System Config)
Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of
the devices.
188 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Operation mode setting
•Single Proc mode: The control panel controls a single switcher and up to
two DMEs.
•Single Simul mode: See “Special system setting (Single Processor Simul
mode)” (page 188).
•Dual Simul mode: The control panel controls two switchers and DMEs
simultaneously.
Device hierarchical relationship setting
•Panel Assign: Specify the switcher controlled by a control panel.
•Switcher Assign: Specify the DME connected to a switcher.
Special system setting (Single Processor Simul mode)
When using a combination of a 4M/E switcher processor and a 4-channel DME
processor in an HD system, the Single Processor Simul mode is available. In
this mode, M/E-1 on the switcher processor is linked to M/E-3, and M/E-2 is
linked to P/P. As a result, the M/E-1 and M/E-2 panel buttons go off, and
cannot be operated.
In this mode, the screen aspect ratio is fixed, as follows.
Relation between switcher and DME: Operations are linked with the screen
aspect ratios the same.
Notes
• The waveforms for wipe pattern numbers 23, 24, 26, and 27 are the same
in 4:3 and 16:9 modes.
• Color backgrounds, frame memory, and other functions used on the
whole switcher operate at 16:9.
Note on creating a user programmable DME: The keyframe registers used
for creating a user programmable DME are divided by screen aspect ratio
as shown in the following table.
Processor Bank or channel Screen aspect ratio
Switcher processor M/E-3 and P/P 16:9
M/E-1 and M/E-2 4:3
DME processor Channels 1 and 2 16:9
Channels 3 and 4 4:3
Register
numbers
Screen aspect
ratio
Switcher bank Channel
101 to 149,
201 to 249,
301 to 349
16:9 M/E-3 P/P Ch1 Ch2
189Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The actual operation is linked between the top and bottom rows of the table
(e.g. M/E-3 and M/E-1), but the common setting values cannot be used
between the two screen aspect ratios. The edges of the screen, for example,
differ between 16:9 and 4:3.
For image operations in the device control block, first make the settings
separately on the different channels.
Recalling a user programmable DME: When recalling a user programmable
DME, select pattern numbers 1901 to 1949, 2901 to 2949, or 3901 to 3949.
The effects for the 16:9 and 4:3 screen aspect ratios will be recalled linked
together.
Signal format settings (Format)
Make the following settings.
Signal format
Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices.
The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows.
Software options for multi-format
To use the MVS-8000G with multi-format support requires the following
software options.
151 to 199,
251 to 299,
351 to 399
4:3 M/E-1 M/E-2 Ch3 Ch4
Register
numbers
Screen aspect
ratio
Switcher bank Channel
System Field frequency Effective number of scan lines
HD system 50 1080i
59.94
60
23.976 1080PsF
24
25
29.97
30
50 720P
59.94
SD system 59.94 480i
50 576i
190 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The following software options are also required depending on the number of
M/E banks.
To use the software, you are required to input an install key.
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Format converter (for MVS-8000G only)
Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the switcher enables the
following signal video format conversions.
• Up-conversion: from SD (4:3) to HD (16:9)
• Down-conversion: from HD (16:9) to SD (4:3)
• Cross-conversion: from HD (720P) to HD (1080i), or from HD (1080i) to
HD (720P)
The maximum number of input signals for which format conversion is possible
is 16 (or 8 when only one MKS-8450G board is installed), and the maximum
number of output signals is 4 (2 for output on the MVS-8000GSF).
Notes
• After format conversion, input and output signals have one-frame delays
with respect to the reference signals.
• It is not possible to apply the safe title function to output signals subjected to
format conversion.
• When the input reference signal for HD system is set to Tri Sync, the format
converter function is not available.
For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
Format combinations allowing conversion
The supported combinations of switcher signal format and format converter
(inputs 1 to 8 and inputs 9 to 16) are as follows.
Product name Model No. Switcher
Switcher Upgrade
Software
BZS-8500M MVS-8000G
BZS-8510M MVS-8000GSF
Product name Model No. Switcher
Mix/Effect
Upgrade Software
BZS-8520M MVS-8000GSF 2M/E system or
MVS-8000G 3M/E system
BZS-8520M and BZS-8530M MVS-8000G 4M/E system
191Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Screen aspect ratio
Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9.
Changing the input reference signal in an HD system
This changes the input reference signal.
•Tri Sync: tri-level sync for an HD system
•BB (Black Burst): black burst or sync for an SD system
The following table shows the relation between signal format and the
frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal.
a) Interlock mode
Switcher
signal format
setting
Format converter signal format setting
FC Input 1-8 FC Input 9-16 FC Output 1-4
480i/59.94 720P/59.94
1080i/59.94
1080PsF/29.97
720P/59.94
1080i/59.94
1080PsF/29.97
Format selected for
FC Input 1-8
576i/50 720P/50
1080i/50
1080PsF/25
720P/50
1080i/50
1080PsF/25
720P/50 576i/501080i/50 576i/501080i/50
720P/59.94 480i/59.94
1080i/59.94
480i/59.94
1080i/59.94
1080i/50 576i/50
720P/50
576i/50
720P/50
1080i/59.94 480i/59.94
720P/59.94
480i/59.94
720P/59.94
1080PsF/25 576i/50 576i/50
1080PsF/
29.97
480i/59.94 480i/59.94
Signal format Input reference signal
Tri Sync Black burst
1080PsF/29.97,
1080i/59.94
59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94
1080PsF/25, 1080i/50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50
1080PsF/23.976 47.952 Black Burst 59.94 a) Sync 59.94 a)
1080PsF/30, 1080i/60 60 –
1080PsF/24 48 –
720P/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94
720P/50 – Black Burst 50 Sync 50
192 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Selecting the start up state (Start Up)
Set the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on.
For each device, you can select Resume mode or Custom mode.
Resume mode
This resumes the setting state at the previous power-off operation. This setting
is only available for the switcher processor and panel.
Custom mode
This uses the settings saved in non-volatile memory or ROM within the device.
In this mode, there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set
separately.
•Setup mode: Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the
following.
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Setup Define].
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.
•Initial status mode: Select the state of each device after powering on
(excluding the settings to which “setup” applies).
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Initial Status
Define]. For the control panel, this applies to the key bus delegation
buttons only.
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.
For details of saving and recalling setup data, see “Saving and Recalling Setup
Data” (page 194) and the appendix “Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial
Setup Define]” (Volume 2).
Autoload function
Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data
or frame memory image data at power on. Set the data to be read in the File
menu.
System reset and memory initialization (Initialize)
•Reset: Reset to state after powering on.
•All Clear: Clear the memory, and carry out initialization. The Network
Config, System Config, Format, and Start Up setup values are set by
reference to data stored in non-volatile memory, and the system
automatically starts up. It is not necessary to reset the Date/Time settings.
For more details, see “Saving and Recalling Setup Data” (page 194).
Installation and device settings (Install/Unit Config)
This installs the software and firmware in all devices (including the DCU)
connected to the Data LAN.
193Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Install: Automatically detects the software that can be installed on each device,
and installs the selected software.
There are also the following functions.
Detail Information: Gives details of the software and firmware installed in
each device.
Unit Config: Carries out device settings. Switches the color corrector function
of the switcher processor between secondary color correction and spot
color adjustment, sets the field polarity of frame memory images, and so
on.
License: Makes the license valid or invalid.
Device management (Maintenance)
• Date and time setting
• Formatting a memory card
• Primary settings for USB external storage device
• Reloading a USB driver
• Formatting the hard disk
• Locking setup menu operations
– For each VF button group, selecting a set of candidate menus to be locked,
then locking all of the candidates using a password. Except for list
scrolling, moving menus, and similar operations, menu operations for all
settings can be locked.
– Changing the password
194 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Saving and Recalling Setup Data
Concept of saving and recalling setup data
Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data
in RAM in each device.
• In Resume mode (see page 192), even if devices are reset or powered off, the
data is preserved in RAM, and recalled when the power is turned back on.
Note
The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs.
• In Custom mode (see page 192), the user-defined settings (user setup data)
saved in non-volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in
Hard disk / memory card
User setup data
Load Save
File menu:
[Load]
File menu:
[Save]
Current setup data
(If in Resume mode, settings data is saved.)
Store In Custom mode, power on
or reset
Initialize
User setup data Factory default setup data
Setup menu:
[Setup Define]
Setup
menu:
[All Clear]
RAM
ROM Non-volatile memory
195Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on.
(See “Selecting the start up state (Start Up)” (page 192).)
Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk
or memory card.
Panel Setup
In panel setup, you carry out settings particular to the control panel.
You can make the following settings.
For details of the operations, see “Setup Relating to Operations From the
Control Panel” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Panel settings (Config)
•M/E Assign: Set the logical configuration of the M/E and P/P banks.
•M/E Operation: For each of the M/E and P/P banks, make operations
possible, not possible, or disabled (Enable/Disable/Inhibit).
•Dual M/E Assign: Using two M/E banks, assign the shift and non-shift
button rows of a single M/E bank.
•Dual M/E Xpt Swap: When a setting has been made for Dual M/E Assign,
swap the shift and non-shift button rows.
•DSK Fader Assign: Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation
for the key delegation buttons, in each of the maximum of four downstream
key control blocks.
• External Bus Link: Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to
routing switcher destinations.
•Key Trans Link: Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers,
and if so which keyer to link to. You can set the links between keyers for each
M/E bank separately.
•Reference Module: When a trackball module and a joystick module are both
connected as device control blocks, select which is used as the reference.
•10 Key Region Assign: Assign any regions to the region selection buttons
in the numeric keypad control block. Also used for setting the regions
included in the selection when the [All] button is pressed.
•Program Button: Make assignments for buttons of some control blocks
such as assigning the buttons in a transition control block for controlling a
VTR and assigning the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.
•Compact Key Module Assign: You can select which keys can be operated
with an independent key transition control block (simple type).
•M/E Operation Inhibit: For each M/E or P/P bank, enable or inhibit utility
2 bus and key-related operations.
196 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Cross-point button settings (Xpt Assign)
•Xpt Assign: For each control block or bus, display and set the assignments
to the main table and tables 1 to 14. You can also carry out settings to link
switcher signal selection to the audio mixer.
•Main, V/K Pair Assign: Make cross-point settings for the main table.
– Assign video/key sources for button numbers 1 to 128.
– For each table, specify whether the rightmost cross-point button in each
row is used as a shift button, and the operation mode when it is used as a
shift button.
– For the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control block and for each table,
select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name
displays, or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses.
– Disable cross-point buttons to work.
•Mixer Xpt Assign: Assign audio mixer cross-points to cross-point buttons
in the main table.
•Table Button Assign: Create tables 1 to 14 in the same way as the main
table.
•Src Name: Set source names of up to 16 characters.
•LCD Color: Set the LCD color for source name display.
•Table Copy: Copy table contents from the main table to tables 1 to 14 or
between tables 1 to 14 (it is not possible to copy tables 1 to 14 to the main
table).
•Name Export: This function sends the source name and destination name to
the S-Bus.
•Side Flags Button Assign: Assign the rightmost button in the background
A/B row to the side flag function (inserting a selected image on both sides of
a 4:3 image).
Auxiliary bus control block settings (Aux Assign)
•Aux Assign: Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control
block to any bus.
•Shift Mode: Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation
buttons is used as a shift button, and when it is used as a shift button, the
operation mode.
•RTR Mode Setting: Carry out the following settings for using the auxiliary
bus control block for router control.
– Assigning destinations
– Setting the shift operation in the destination selection button rows
– Source table settings
– Setting the shift operation in the source selection button rows
– Assigning levels to the level selection buttons
– Setting destination selection buttons to be used for snapshots
197Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Button assignment settings (Prefs/Utility)
Assign the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons in the menu control block, the
utility/shotbox control block buttons, and the cross-Point control block.
This assigns recalling frequently used menus (menu shortcuts), enabling/
disabling functions (recalling utility commands) and recalling shotbox
registers or macro registers.
•User Preference: Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the
menu control block.
•Utility Module Assign: Make the utility/shotbox control block settings.
•KEY 2/4 Bus Button Assign: Make the settings for the key 2 row buttons in
the cross-point control block.
External device connections (Device Interface)
•GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger type, and make the action
settings.
•GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger type, and make the action
settings.
•P-Bus Control: Set the control mode for P-Bus devices.
•DCU Serial Port Assign: Assign the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended
VTR) connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the
[DEV1] to [DEV12] buttons which become operative when you press the
[DEV] button on the device control block. For a disk recorder or Extended
VTR, you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists. Further, you
can make settings for devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR) operable
from an editing keyboard.
•Editor Port Assign: When the BZS-8050 license is valid, make settings for
the SCU editor panel port.
Operation settings (Operation)
•Button Tally: Set whether or not the system tally generation results are
reflected in the panel tally.
•Trans Rate Display: Select whether the transition rate display mode is in
frames or timecode units.
•S-Bus Name Link: Copy the S-Bus description name to the source name.
•Effect: For keyframe effects, you can make the following settings. (See
Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2).)
– Recall mode
– Automatically turning off the [EDIT ENBL] button when an effect is
recalled
– Automatic insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled
– Effect Auto Save
– Default KF Duration
– Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI/
P-Bus/disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR/Macro effect
198 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Source/Dest Name: For the Source/Dest (source/destination) names used by
the system, select one of the following:
– Source name set by cross-point assignment or fixed bus name
– Description name set on routing switcher
– “Type + Num” name set on routing switcher
Names assigned with Xpt Assign can be replaced later with description
names.
•Name Display: Specify the number of characters for display of the names
selected in Source/Dest Name above, as two characters, four characters, or
Auto.
•Flexi Pad: Carry out Flexi Pad settings. Specify the delegation selection
coupling, and display mode for the LCD buttons. You can also make menu
settings for wipe snapshots.
•Custom Button: Set the following button operation modes.
– [ALL] button for next transition selection
– [AUTO TRANS], [TAKE] or [FTB] button during auto transition
execution
– [RUN] button during keyframe execution
– [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] button replacement
– [TRANS PVW] button
– [UTIL] button
– [XPT HOLD] button in key rows
– Selection of signal assigned to the auxiliary bus control block key source
bus (either key signal only, or either video signal or key signal selectable)
•Sensitivity: Adjust trackball, joystick and double-click sensitivity, or set the
relationship between the angle of the search dial and the playback speed.
•Main Split Fader: When the split fader is active, specify whether the fader
to control other than mix is the left side or the right side.
•Macro: Set the macro execution mode and the mode in which to edit macros
using the standard type Flexi Pad control block.
Screen saver and other settings (Maintenance)
•Screen Saver: Make the menu screen saver settings.
•LCD Brightness: Adjust the LCD brightness.
•LED Brightness: Adjust the LED brightness.
•Switch Brightness: Adjust the switch brightness.
•Touch Beep: Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation
is carried out.
•Touch Panel Calibration: Calibrate the touch panel.
•Initial Menu Set: Specify the menu to be displayed at menu startup.
Switcher Setup
In switcher setup, make settings particular to the switcher processor.
199Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
You can make the following settings.
Settings relating to overall switcher configuration (Config)
•System Phase: Adjust the switcher internal reference phase.
•Switch Timing: Specify the timing of video switching.
•M/E Config: Set the program configuration for the M/E and P/P outputs.
–Standard mode: Fix the maximum of four outputs (Out1 to 4) and
program output configuration as follows.
Out1: Program output
Out2: Preview output
Out3: Clean output
Out4: Key preview output
Program output: Clean output + key 1 + key 2 + key 3 + key 4
– Multi-program mode: Increase the number of M/E or P/P programs, and
assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs (Out1 to 6). (M/
E Output Assign)
Program outputs 1 to 4, preview output, key preview outputs 1 and 2,
clean output.
Further, you can select the program background from Clean or Utility2,
and change the combination of signals from which it is configured. (PGM
Config)
–DSK mode: Treat P/P as four DSKs, with no background transitions. Of
backgrounds 1 to 4, set one to configure the program output. (PGM
Config) The signals which can be selected as the background are limited
to Out1 to 6 from M/E-1 to M/E-3.
Regardless of the current M/E Config mode, you can set the key preview
configuration to be video mode or key mode. In key mode, select whether
to link the key state to the on/off operation, or have it always on. (K-PVW
Config)
•User 1 to 8 Config: Assign the User regions, being color backgrounds 1 and
2, AUX1 to 48, monitor 1 to 8, frame memory 1 to 8, and color correctors 1
and 2, to any of User1 to User8.
•Logical M/E Assign: Make settings for handling PGM/PST hardware
logically as an M/E.
•DME Config: Set the DME channel assignments used on the individual
M/E and PGM/PST banks.
•Side Flags: Make settings relating to the side flag function (inserting a
selected image on both sides of a 4:3 image).
Input signal settings (Input)
•Input Phase Adjust: Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input.
•Through Mode: Set through mode for the input side. This applies only to
the primary inputs, and can be set independently for each primary input.
200 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Video Process: Switch video processing on or off for each input signal, and
adjust the brightness, hue and so forth.
•Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal
generated by the switcher internal matte generator.
•FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter inputs.
Output signal settings (Output)
•Output Assign: Assign the signals output from the Output1 to 48 ports.
•Video Clip: Adjust the clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, and Chroma Clip)
for the output signals from each of the Output1 to 48 ports.
•V Blank: Adjust the vertical blanking width for the output signals from each
of the Output1 to 48 ports. The setting is the number of scan lines from the
reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should
be masked.
•Through Mode: Enable or disable through mode. Through mode can be
enabled for AUX1 to 48 outputs, M/E and PGM/PST program outputs, and
clean output.
•Safe Title: Enable or disable safe title, and carry out settings for box 1 and
2, cross and grid (for the MVS-8000G only).
•Ref. Output Phase: Set the reference output mode and phase adjustment
(for the MVS-8000/8000A only).
•4:3 Crop: Set the actual video image to be cropped to a 4:3 aspect ratio when
an HD system has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.
•FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter outputs.
Settings relating to video switching (Transition)
•Transition Preview: Specify the operation mode for transition preview for
each of the M/E and P/P banks.
•Key Transition: Specify the operation mode for independent key
transitions.
•Bus Toggle: Switch the bus toggle for each of the M/E and P/P banks on or
off.
•Split Fader: When the bus toggle is off, the split fader settings are enabled.
For each of the M/E and P/P banks, select enable or disable.
•Fade To Black: Enable or disable fade-to-black for each final program
output.
•Preset Color Mix: Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix, the key status
for a transition including a key, and the mode in which the transition type
after a transition ends returns to the previous setting.
•Transition Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a transition,
between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition.
Key, wipe and frame memory settings (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR)
•Key Memory: Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M/E and
P/P banks.
201Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
•Video Proc Memory: Enable or disable video process memory.
•Show Key: Enable or disable show key for edit preview, M/E and P/P Pvw/
K-Pvw.
•Key Auto Drop: For each switcher bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3, PGM/PST),
specify a key to be turned off automatically when you press a cross-point
button for the bus to be output as the background.
•Mask/Border Process: Set the processing order of masks and borders for
each M/E or P/P bank.
•Key Priority: Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M/E and
P/P banks. In DSK mode, the key priority is fixed.
•Xpt Hold mode: Set the operation mode for the cross-point hold button
provided on the key bus for each of the M/E and P/P banks.
•Pattern Limit Transition: Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is
released for each of the M/E and P/P banks.
•Wipe Edge Default: Adjust the wipe edge softness for each of the M/E and
P/P banks.
•CCR Internal Signal Enable: Select whether signals generated internally to
the switcher can be select as input material to the color corrector. (MVS-
8000G/8000GSF only)
•FM Auto Store: Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name
and save in frame memory.
Link settings (Link)
•Internal Bus Link: Make a setting of the bus link function that links
together two buses internal to the switcher.
•GPI Link: Make settings for linking any cross-point buttons or [CUT] and
[AUTO TRANS] buttons in the cross-point control block and GPI output
ports.
•M/E Link: Make settings to link together two M/E banks.
•Key Trans Link: Make settings to link key transitions.
External device connections (Device Interface)
•Remote Assign: Set the use of the four 9-pin ports.
•GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
•GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
•Aux Control: Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the four 9-pin
ports are inhibited.
•DME Type Setting: When the DME is an MVE-9000 or MVE-8000A, carry
out interface settings, and for an SDI interface set the AUX bus outputs and
reentry inputs.
202 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
DME Setup
In DME setup, carry out settings particular to the DME processor.
You can make the following settings.
Input signal settings (Input)
•Initial Crop: Make the initial crop setting.
•Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated
by the DME internal matte generator on or off.
•System Phase: Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect
to the reference signal.
•TBC Center: Set the TBC window center position.
Output signal settings (Output)
These settings are possible only when the DME is an MVE-9000 or SDI-
interfaced MVE-8000A.
•Monitor Output: Set the signals output from the four monitor output
connectors.
•Clip Adjust: Adjust the clip levels of DME1 and DME2 outputs.
Interface with external devices (Device Interface)
•Editor Protocol: Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port.
•Editor Port Setting: Make settings relating to the control of the four editor
ports installed in the DME.
•GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
•GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output
In DCU setup, carry out settings particular to the DCU.
You can make the following settings.
•Input Config: Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports.
•GPI Input Assign: Make GPI input settings.
•Output Config: Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an
option slot.
•GPI Output Assign: Make GPI output settings.
•Serial Port Assign: Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9-
pin serial port. You can also select the control panel used to control each
device.
203Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally
Interface
Carry out settings relating to the interface with the routing switcher, and
settings relating to the tally interface.
You can make the following settings.
Router interface setup (Router)
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.
•Matrix Size: Assign the switcher matrix of each switcher processor to S-Bus
space, and select the matrix size and positioning level, source address
settings, and so on.
•External Box: To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with
a parallel input, assign a matrix as an external selector in the S-Bus space.
Make the matrix size, assignment level, source address, and other settings.
•Alias Name Gp: Set the group number for an S-Bus description name to be
displayed in the source name displays for a cross-point operation.
Tally interface setup (Tally)
Group tally settings (Group Tally)
•Tally Group: Select the group tally (Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8) which can be
used. (For the parallel tally, all groups can be used regardless of this setting.)
•S-Bus Tally Enable: Specify S-Bus tally enabled or disabled.
Wiring information input (Wiring)
Input the information which specifies the physical wiring between switcher
and routing switcher or between two routing switchers.
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.
Tally enable settings (Tally Enable)
Specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation, and make
various settings.
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.
•Tally Type: Specify the tally type.
•Destination: Specify the address and level.
•Tally Enable: Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled.
Enable: Always enabled.
Disable: Always disabled.
Tally Input: Follow the tally input status.
204 Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Copy (Tally Copy)
Copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different
source.
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.
Parallel port settings (Parallel Tally)
Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to
sources and destinations.
For each of the tally output terminal numbers, specify the tally type, and source
address or destination level and address.
Serial tally settings (Serial Tally)
Make the serial tally settings, including tally type and source address for each
serial tally port.
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel (Option)
To connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP-8000
Center Control Panel using an S-Bus data link requires a BKPF-R70A Routing
Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for
connection.
However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus data link primary
station is avoided, and direct connection to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.
A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met:
• There are no devices other than the CCP-8000 and MKS-8080/8082
connected on the S-Bus data link.
• There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units connected on the S-Bus
data link.
For details of the connection procedure, see “Procedure for Simple
Connection” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
205Files
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Files
You can save register data, including setup information and snapshot
information, as a file on a hard disk or memory card, and recall it as required.
You can operate on individual files or registers, or together in a batch.
Regarding frame memory, it is possible to capture image data stored in an
external device into frame memory. You can also convert the format of image
data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device.
Files that can be manipulated
The following files can be saved and recalled.
• Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices
• Device status data for system startup
• Key memory setting data
• Video process memory setting data
• Keyframe effect setting data
• Snapshot setting data
• Wipe snapshot setting data
• DME wipe snapshot setting data
• Key snapshot setting data
• Shotbox setting data
• Macro setting data
• Macro attachment data
• Menu macro setting data
• Frame memory image data
File operations
You can carry out the following file operations.
When operating on individual files or registers
Save: Save the data in a register to the hard disk or memory card.
Load: Load a file from the hard disk or memory card.
Copy: Copy a file within a directory or from one directory to another. When a
remote panel is used, this function applies to it, too.
Rename: Rename a file on the hard disk or memory card.
Delete: Delete a file from the hard disk or memory card.
When operating on files or registers in a batch
The Save, Load, Copy and Delete operations are performable.
206 Files
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory
Import: Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into
frame memory after changing its format.
Export: Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing
its format.
You can import TIFF, BMP, and TARGA files as follows into frame memory.
a) Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Note
This functionality has been tested and confirmed to work with TIFF files
created by Photoshop, but it may not be possible to use TIFF files created
with some other software. (Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.)
About import image size
Pay attention to the following, depending on the signal format which you use.
SDTV (480i)
Images 720 × 487 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen.
The following figure shows how an import image is processed when the 480i/
59.94 format is used.
Images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin.
When an image is smaller than the screen, the remainder of the screen is filled
with black. When it is larger, parts which extend beyond the screen are
discarded.
File type Format File name Notes
TIFF file RGB
uncompressed
format
Maximum eight
characters, plus
extension .tif required
• Layers cannot be used.
• If an alpha channel is
present, two files are
created as a pair.
BMP file Windows a) 24-
bit format
Maximum eight
characters, plus
extension .bmp required
–
TARGA file RGB
uncompressed/
compressed
format
Maximum eight
characters, plus
extension .tga required
• Layers cannot be used.
• If an alpha channel is
present, two files are
created as a pair.
207Files
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the
SDTV format. When the signal format is 480i/59.94, if you create an image
with a size of 720 × 540 on a computer and then import it just as it is, the image
will be too tall. To maintain the shape of the image, first create it as a 720 × 540
image and then use computer software tools to compress the vertical dimension
to 487 pixels before importing it.
HDTV (1080i)
Images of 1920 × 1080 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full
screen.
Like SDTV, images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin.
When an image is smaller or larger than the screen, processing is the same as
for SDTV.
Since the pixel ratio of the HDTV format is 1:1, files created on computers are
imported in their original shapes.
The following table shows the image sizes which exactly fill the full screen for
the various signal formats.
Signal format Image size (H × V)
480i/59.94 720 × 487
576i/50 720 × 576
720 pixels
487 pixels
Position of small picture
Section filled with black for
a small picture
Parts discarded when
image is too large
208 Files
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Importing 720P movie material
To import movie material in 720P format, it is necessary to treat each frame as
a separate image file.
Directory operations
You can create a new directory within a hard disk or memory card, and carry
out other operations, such as renaming and deleting.
For details of operations, see “Directory Operations” in Chapter 17 (Volume
2).
File copying between different unit IDs
Switcher and DME files within the hard disk or memory card are managed by
unit ID.
To copy files between different unit IDs, use the Unit ID Copy menu.
For details of operations, see “Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs” in
Chapter 17 (Volume 2).
Saving data recalled by autoload
At power on, you can automatically recall data previously stored on the hard
disk. (Autoload function)
The following data can be loaded by the autoload function.
• Keyframe effect setting data
• Snapshot setting data
• Wipe snapshot setting data
• DME wipe snapshot setting data
• Key snapshot setting data
• Shotbox setting data
• Macro setting data
• Macro attachment data
1080i/50 1920 × 1080
1080i/59.94
1080PsF/23.976
1080PsF/24
1080PsF/25
1080PsF/29.97
720P/50 1280 × 720
720P/59.94
Signal format Image size (H × V)
209Files
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• Frame memory image data
To use the autoload function, the data required must first be saved.
For the on/off setting of the autoload function, see “Selecting the State After
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
For details of saving operations, see “Saving Files Recalled by Autoload” in
Chapter 17 (Volume 2).
210 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Macros
Overview
The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal
selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory,
so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same
sequence of operations.
To record menu operations in memory, use a menu macro (see page 222).
For details of macro operations, see “Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume 2).
Macro registers
The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a “macro register.” For each
control panel there are 99 macro registers, numbered 1 to 99.
Events
The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed
“events.” One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events.
The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control
panel that can be saved as events in a macro.
Control block Event
Auxiliary bus control block Cross-point selection
Cross-point selection in router control mode
Cross-point control block • Cross-point selection
• Recalling a function assigned to a key 2 row button
211Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Transition
control block
standard type • Auto transition and cut for the transition execution
section
• Auto transition and key on/off for the independent
key transition execution section a)
• Next transition setting
• Transition type selection
• Pattern limit on/off
• Key snapshot recall
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips playback b)
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips stop b)
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips cue-up b)
simple type • Transition execution section take
• Tansition type selection
• Pattern limit on/off
compact type • Transition execution section auto transition and cut
• Independent key transition execution section auto
transition a)
• Next transition setting
• Transition type selection
• Pattern limit on/off
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips playback b)
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips stop b)
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory
clips cue-up b)
Independent key transition
control block
(simple type)
• Independent key transition execution section take
and key on/off a)
• Key snapshot recall
• Selection of independent key transition type
Flexi Pad
control block
standard type Recalling the following data
• Snapshots
• Wipe snapshots
• DME wipe snapshots
simple type Recalling the following data
• Snapshots
• Wipe snapshots
• DME wipe snapshots
Numeric keypad control block Recalling the following data
• Effects
• Snapshots
• Shotbox
• Master snapshots
• Master timeline
Control block Event
212 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key, the key state at the time of event registration
(inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the macro is executed, the event is
only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that
deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but otherwise
nothing occurs as concerns keying.)
b) Function valid only when [PLAY], [STOP], and [CUEUP] have been set in the Setup menu.
c) When using the device control block (search dial), this operates as a reference module. When
not used, this operates on the module selected in the Panel >Config menu.
For details of reference module selection, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)”
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Macro Creation and Editing
You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register.
To create a new macro, recall an empty macro register, and create the desired
sequence of events (by executing the sequence of operations on the control
panel that you want to save as events in the macro).
Keyframe control block • Effect rewind
• Effect execution
• Effect fast forward
• Selection of effect execution direction
Device control block
(trackball)
(joystick)
(search dial) c)
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips start point setting
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips playback
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips stop
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips cue-up
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips fast forward
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips rewind
• VTR/disk recorder record
• Frame memory clip loop setting
Downstream key control block • Independent key transition execution section auto
transition and cut a)
• Key snapshot recall
Fade to black control block Execution of fade to black transition
Menu control block • Disk recorder/Extended VTR file recalling
• Recalling the functions assigned to [PREFS 1] to
[PREFS 16] buttons
• Execution of a menu macro
• Recalling frame memory clips
Utility/Shotbox control block Recalling the functions assigned to memory recall
buttons
Control block Event
213Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
To add an event to an existing macro, recall the register holding the macro, and
create the event you want to add.
Note
While editing a macro, it is not possible to execute another macro.
Creating a macro
To include all information associated with an operation when
registering a macro event
When registering an auto transition operation as an event, you can register the
auto transition event to include the transition rate and background A/B bus
selection status. When registering an effect execution, rewind, or fast forward
as an event, you can also save the region to which this applies.
To use this capability, assign the following functions to user preference buttons
in the menu control block or buttons in the utility/shotbox control block, and
turn the relevant button on before you start an event to register.
Macro AT with Rate (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without Rate): When
registering an auto transition macro event in one of the M/E banks or the
PGM/PST bank, include the transition rate.
Macro AT with A/B Bus (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without A/B Bus):
When registering an auto transition macro event in the transition control
block, include the background A/B bus cross-point.
Macro TL with Region (Macro Timeline with Region): When registering an
effect execution, rewind, or fast forward as a macro event, save the
affected region together in the macro.
For details of the method of assigning these functions to buttons, see “Setting
Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro
The following events require time for execution to complete, and therefore
when executed within a macro sequence, a pause event must be inserted to
adjust the timing.
• Rewinding effects involving external device control
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR cue-up
For example, create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows.
214 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Auto insert mode on/off setting
You can switch on or off the mode (auto insert mode) in which at the same time
that a control panel operation is carried out, the event is automatically saved in
a macro.
Editing a macro
You can carry out the following macro editing operations.
Event insertion
Insert the control panel operation as an event in a macro.
Event modification
Modify any event. You can modify all events within a macro, or events within
a specified range in a single operation.
Event deletion
Delete any one event. You can delete all events within a macro, or events
within a specified range in a single operation. You can then paste the deleted
event using the paste function.
Event copy
Copy any one event. You can copy all events within a macro, or events within
a specified range in a single operation.
Event paste
Paste a copied or deleted event at a desired position within a macro.
Undoing an editing operation
You can undo the last event insertion, modification, deletion, or paste
operation.
Macro merging
During macro editing, you can recall and copy another register to merge it with
the macro being edited.
For example, while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1
to merge it as shown in the following figure.
Macro event execution order:
Macro events:
215Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Macro Execution
To execute a macro, recall the register in which the macro is held.
Simultaneous with the register recall, all events stored in the macro are played
back (executed) in sequence without pause.
Pausing and restarting macro execution
It is also possible to execute a macro in the following ways.
Pause event
To adjust the execution timing of a particular event (to delay the start of
execution of the event by a particular time interval), you can store a special
event which pauses macro execution. This event is called a “pause event.”
When you store a pause event, you can set the interval for which the macro is
paused (the pause length) to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames. When the
set time has elapsed, the macro is automatically executed.
Pause zero event
By including a pause event with the time set to zero, you can make macro
execution pause at the pause event.
4123 123
123
1234567
Recall macro register 2, and
move to another event. Recall register 1.
Macro being edited (register 2) Newly recalled macro (register 1)
Copy contents of
register 1 and add
after current event
(register 2).
Contents of
register 1 remain
unchanged.
216 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Step execution (requires a Setup menu setting)
By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu, you can make macro
execution pause every time an event is executed.
Take operation
When a paused macro is restarted, this is referred to as a “Take” operation.
Macro take operation using a GPI input
You can carry out a macro take operation using a GPI input on the control panel
and DCU.
For GPI input settings, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device
Interface Menu” and “GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
Macro Timeline
By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline, in the same way as
for key frames in an effect, you can automatically execute them in a sequence.
This timeline is called a “macro timeline,” and one macro timeline can have up
to 99 macros being executed simultaneously in parallel.
There are 99 registers in the Macro region that can be recorded on the macro
timeline, numbered 1 to 99. These registers are distinct from the registers
where individual macros are stored.
Note
If you use a macro timeline to superimpose more than one macro, the macros
may not be executed according to the timing information registered in the
timeline.
Available key frame functions
The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro
timeline.
• RECALL(1 to 99), STORE(1 to 99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO,
search for empty register, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL,
RECALL & REWIND)
• EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO
• CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE,
INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE
AFTER, FROM TO, ALL
• PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP
NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER
217Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
The following key frame functions cannot be used
• KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE
•PATH
Saving to a register
Set the recall and execute actions for the macros to be registered in the timeline,
using the Macro Timeline menu. The setting data can be saved in a register as
key frame data. You can manipulate this data by recalling the register in which
it is saved, and using the key frame control block.
For details, see Chapter 18, “Macros” (Volume 2).
Note
An action set for a key frame is only executed when the key frame effect is
executed in the forward direction. It is important to remember that the action is
not executed in the reverse direction when executing simultaneously with
switcher and DME key frame effects.
Forcibly ending a macro timeline
• If the timeline has completed but a macro is still executing, press the
[REWIND] or [RUN] button in the key frame control block to forcibly end
the macro timeline.
• In a macro timeline, since a take operation is not possible, if a macro included
in the timeline has a pause event with a pause time of zero, the remainder of
the timeline after the pause is ignored, and the macro timeline ends at that
point.
Register editing functions
You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro
timeline is stored.
•Copy
•Move
•Swap
•Merge
•Lock
•Name
• Delete
File-related functions
You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data, in the File
menu.
218 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Macro Editing Using Menus
Macro Register Editing
You can lock, copy, and delete the contents of macro registers, and rename
macro registers.
Lock: Write-protect the contents of a macro register.
Copy: Copy the contents of a macro register to another macro register.
Delete: Delete the contents of a macro register.
Rename: Rename a macro register.
Online editing of macro events
Using the On Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing
operations while checking the control panel operation sequence. You can also
carry out editing using the panel and menu.
Insert: Insert a macro event.
Delete: Delete a macro event.
Modify: Modify a macro event.
Offline editing of macro events
Using the Off Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing
operations in the menu only, unrelated to operation of the control panel.
Insert: Insert a macro event.
Add: Add a macro event.
Delete: Delete a macro event.
You can also create a new macro.
Macro Attachment
Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a
control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever, linking the
execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro
execution.
Setting a macro attachment to a button
Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro attachment.
Pre-macro: Mode in which the button function is executed after macro
execution has completed
219Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Post-macro: Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button
function
Macro only: Mode in which the button function is not executed, and the macro
only is executed
The selection of pre- or post-macro mode is carried out in the cross-point
control block of the PGM/PST bank or the M/E banks. For the macro-only
mode, assign the selection function to a utility/shotbox control block button or
user preference button, and make the selection by pressing the button.
Alternatively, without pressing the button, you can make the selection simply,
by simultaneously pressing the pre-macro and post-macro selection buttons in
the cross-point control block.
You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a button.
For a button whose function is switched by delegation, you can make a separate
macro attachment for each function.
For each control panel, you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings.
The macro attachment setting is possible for the following bus buttons. For
button locations, see pages in parentheses.
Block Button
PGM/PST or M/E bank • Background A row cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Background B row cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Key 1 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Key 2 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Key 3 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Key 4 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Utility 1 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• Utility 2 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• DME external video bus cross-point buttons
(page
256)
• DME utility 1 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• DME utility 2 bus cross-point buttons
(page 256)
• [AUTO TRANS] button a)
(page 260)
• [CUT] button
(page 260)
• [KEY1 ON] to [KEY4 ON] buttons a)
(pages
260
,
304)
• The button to which the same function as that of
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips play, cue, and stop buttons
(page 260)
• Memory recall buttons i)
• Buttons set to “Inhibit”
(page 256)
Auxiliary bus control block • Cross-point button1st row b)
(page 288)
• Cross-point button 2nd row b)
(page 288)
Keyframe control block • [RUN], [REWIND] and [FF] buttons
(page 281)
• [NORM], [REV], and [NORM/REV] buttons
(page
281)
220 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key by an independent key transition, the key state
at the time of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the
macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example:
For a macro with an event that deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted
it is deleted, but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.)
b) Cross-point buttons of the bus assigned by AUX delegation setting.
c) Macro attachment can be set with these buttons only when they are assigned to [Play/Stop/Cue]
in the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >Program Button >Transition Module menu and when
the [DEV] button in the device control block is lit.
d) Buttons on the standard type module only.
e) Buttons on the standard type module and compact type module only.
f) Independent key transition control block (simple type only).
g) “KEYx” refers to any of KEY1 to KEY4 and DSK1 to DSK4, depending on the key assigned in
setup.
h) When there are a number of control blocks on the control panel, and the keys assigned to them
in setup are the same, then the macro attachment settings for the above buttons are the same.
The keys being the same includes cases such as “Key1,2” assigned to PGM/PST being the same
as “DSK1,2”, “Key1,2” assigned to M/E-1 being the same as “M/E-1 Key1,2”, and so on.
i) Only when key row is operated in the utility/shotbox mode
Device control block (trackball,
joystick)
The buttons to which the same functions as those of
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory
clips play, cue, stop, and start tc buttons
(page 271)
Device control block (search
dial)
[PLAY], [CUE], [STOP] and [START TC] buttons
Downstream key control block • [DSK1 ON] to [DSK4 ON] buttons a)
(page 306)
• [TAKE] button a)
(page 306)
• [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons
(page
306)
Transition control block • [PTN LIMIT] button c) d)
(page 260)
• [LIMIT SET] and [KF] buttons c) d)
(page 260)
• [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] buttons c) e)
(pages 260, 310)
• [MIX], [NAM], [SUPER MIX], [PST COLOR MIX],
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons
(pages 260, 299, 310)
• [MIX], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons d)
(page 260)
• [ALL], [KEY PRIOR], [BKGD], and [KEY1] to
[KEY4] buttons
(pages 260, 299, 310)
•[CUT] button
f)
(page 304)
Fade to black control block [FTB] button
(pages 287, 308)
Downstream key/fade to black
control block
• [DSK1 ON] and [DSK2 ON] buttons
•[AUTO TRANS] button
• [FTB] button
Utility/shotbox control block Memory recall buttons
(page 298)
Menu control block [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons
(page 294)
Independent key transition
control block (simple type) h) • [KEYx ON] button a) g)
• [TAKE] button a)
• [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons
Block Button
221Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Notes
• After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the auxiliary bus
control block, if in the Setup menu you change the assignment of buses to the
AUX delegation buttons, the macro attachment setting disappears.
• After setting a macro attachment to a button for which you can perform
function replacement or function assignment, if you change the function
assignment to the button, the macro attachment setting disappears.
• After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the cross-point
control block, if you change the function assignment to the button, the macro
attachment setting disappears.
Enabling and disabling macro attachment
You can temporarily disable the macro attachment settings. When a macro
attachment is disabled, pressing the button does not cause execution of the
assigned macro.
You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM/PST bank and M/
E banks individually.
Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever
You can set a macro attachment to any particular position of a fader lever in the
transition control block.
Notes
• In macro-only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment.
• It is not possible to set a macro attachment to a fader lever in the keyframe
control block or downstream key control block.
• For a split fader, you can set a macro attachment to the main split fader.
For details of a split fader, see “Split Fader” (page 373).
Clearing the macro attachments
You can clear all of the macro attachments in a single operation.
Displaying the macro attachment list
You can display the macro attachment settings in the form of a list in the menu
display to check them.
222 Macros
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Menu Macros
The term “menu macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu
operations is saved as data in memory, so that it can be recalled as required to
automatically execute the same sequence of operations.
For more details of menu macros, see “Menu Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume
2).
Menu macro registers
The area of memory that holds a menu macro is termed a “menu macro
register.” For each control panel there are 99 menu macro registers, numbered
1 to 99. You can manipulate these in the menu macro register menu.
Menu macro events
The events that can be recorded in a menu macro are operations carried out in
a menu.
For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros, see the
appendix, “Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro” (Volume 2).
Menu macro creation and editing
Carry out menu macro creation and editing in the menu.
Executing menu macros
You execute a menu macro after recalling a menu macro register.
You can recall and execute simultaneously. You can also recall and execute a
menu macro from a macro recalled on the control panel.
223Color Corrector
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Color Corrector
The color corrector enables video signal color correction (black balance/white
balance adjustment, gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).
Note
To use the color corrector function on the MVS-8000/8000A requires the
MKS-8420M Color Corrector Board. To use the color corrector function on the
MVS-8000G requires the MKS-8442G Frame Memory Board and BZS-8420
Color Corrector Software. To use the software, you are required to input an
install key.
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
The color corrector includes the following functions.
Input video processing
Carrying out the following corrections to a YUV signal before conversion to
an RGB signal.
• Overall gain adjustment of the video signal
• Gain adjustment of the Y signal
• Gain adjustment of the C signal
•Hue delay
• Black level adjustment
Primary color correction
Carrying out the following corrections to each of the R, G, and B signals.
Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 0% level input signal.
White balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 100% level input
signal.
Gamma correction: adjusting the curvature of the gamma curve.
Knee correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the gamma
curve.
224 Color Corrector
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.
Secondary color correction
For the six colors R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), C (cyan), and M
(magenta), adjust the luminance and saturation, and also the hue within a range
of ±30 degrees of the center value for each color.
You can mask a part of the region to be corrected.
Note
This function is disabled when spot CCR is enabled with a setup setting. For
details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
On the MVS-8000G, this function and spot CCR can be enabled at the same
time.
RGB clip
For each of the R, G, and B signals, you can make dark clip and white clip
adjustments.
Luminance processing
After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a
YUV signal, dividing the luminance levels into three regions, referred to as
Output level
Black balance adjustment
White balance adjustment
Input level
Unadjusted signal
Input level
Output level
Knee correction
Gamma
correction
Adjusted signal
225Color Corrector
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Dark, Middle, and Bright, and applying video signal adjustments to these
regions.
There are three modes for luminance processing, as follows.
Tint mode: adding a specified color to the original video signal.
Color Modify mode: adjusting the original video signal.
Y Modify mode: adjusting the output levels of the input luminance signal.
• White balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input
luminance signal at the 100% level.
• Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input
luminance signal at the 0% level.
• Y lift correction: adjusting the curvature of the curve.
• Y dark correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the
curve.
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.
Under Dark point Middle/Dark point Bright/Middle point Over Bright point
Dark Middle Bright
Input signal
luminance level
Output signal
luminance level
Black balance adjustment
White balance adjustment
Input signal
luminance
level
Unadjusted signal
Input signal
luminance
level
Output signal luminance level
Y Dark
Adjusted signal
Y Lift
226 Color Corrector
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Spot color adjustment
You can change the color of a specified color region to a different color,
without affecting other regions. You can also mask part of such a region.
Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed, you
can make the following corrections.
• Video signal overall gain adjustment
• Y signal gain adjustment
• Y signal offset adjustment
• C signal gain adjustment
• C signal hue adjustment
Note
This function is disabled when secondary CCR is enabled with a setup setting.
For details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
On the MVS-8000G, this function and secondary CCR can be enabled at the
same time.
Output video processing
Carrying out the following corrections on the YUV signal.
• Video signal overall gain adjustment
• Y signal gain adjustment
• Y signal offset adjustment
• C signal gain adjustment
• C signal hue adjustment
YUV clip
For each of the luminance and color difference signals, the following
processing.
White clip: setting the maximum level of the luminance signal.
Dark clip: setting the minimum level of the luminance signal.
Positive clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the positive direction of the
color difference signal.
Negative clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the negative direction of the
color difference signal.
Copy and swap
Copying or swapping data between two color correctors (CCR1 and CCR2).
227Simple P/P Software
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Simple P/P Software
Overview
By installing the BZS-8250 Simple P/P Software in the MVS-8000A/
8000ASF/8000G/8000GSF Switcher Processor, you can use a separate
program/preset function without using the M/E hardware.
Getting access to the software
To use the Simple P/P Software, you are required to enter an install key which
validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key
is not required.)
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu
of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16,
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2).
Restrictions on Use
Since this software is a simple version of the program/preset function, there are
some restrictions on use. The following lists the points at which operation is
different from a normal program/preset function. For details of the normal
operations, set the relevant sections of this manual.
Restrictions on using a downstream key
• DSK3 and DSK4 cannot be used.
For the key priority, set priority 1 or priority 2.
• The following downstream key types cannot be used.
– Chroma key
– Color vector key
– Wipe pattern key
– Key wipe pattern key
• When using a matte as the key fill for a downstream key, a mix color cannot
be used.
• It is not possible to modify a downstream key edge. The edge blink also
cannot be used.
• For a downstream key, main mask and sub-mask cannot be used.
228 Simple P/P Software
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• A processed key cannot be used. Therefore, it is not possible to apply a DME
effect to a downstream key.
• As an independent key transition type, wipe and DME wipe cannot be used.
• The resizer cannot be used.
• The key frame delay mode cannot be used.
Restrictions on executing transitions in the transition control
block
• DME wipes cannot be used.
• Wipes can be used, but there are restrictions on use. For details, see the next
item, “Restrictions when using wipes.”
Restrictions when using wipes
• The wipe patterns that can be used are standard wipes (pattern numbers 1 to
24) only.
• A pattern mix cannot be used.
• A split (splitting the wipe pattern) cannot be used.
• When a border or soft border is selected for a wipe edge, the signal to be
inserted in the edge (edge fill) is restricted as follows.
– The utility 2 bus cannot be selected.
– When using a matte, a mix color cannot be used.
– Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for M/E and
Simple P/P, the same image is not obtained.
• The following wipe modifiers cannot be used:
– Replication “Shift” and Multi Adjust menu adjustments
–Pairing
– Modulation
–Spring
–Spiral
• Changing modifier parameter settings changes the wipe pattern size.
Restrictions on utility buses
The utility 1 and utility 2 buses cannot be used.
Assignment of signals to output connectors
Connectors to which the P/P row output signal assignment is fixed
The assignment of the following signals to output connectors OUT17 to
OUT22 is fixed.
229Simple P/P Software
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) In DSK mode, the backgrounds that can be selected in the PGM Config menu are restricted to
background 1 and background 2.
b) Depends on the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu.
OUT5 and OUT6 cannot be used.
Connectors for which a P/P row output signal can be selected
For an edit preview bus or AUX bus assigned to output connector OUT23 or
OUT24, you can select a P/P row output signal.
If these buses are assigned to other than OUT23 or OUT24, then it is not
possible to select a P/P row output signal. (Assigning these buses to the two
connectors is recommended.)
Format converter output restrictions
On the MVS-8000G, the signal output from the format converter output
connectors (FC1, FC2) can be assigned in either of the following ways.
•Out#15-16: Assignment fixed, signals OUT15 (for FC1), and OUT16 (for
FC2).
•Out#17-22: Select from the OUT17 to OUT22 signals. (It is not, however,
possible to select the same signal for FC1 and FC2.)
It is not possible to select FC1 and FC2 differently. For example, it is not
possible to select “Out#15-16” for FC1 and “Out#17-22” for FC2.
FC3 and FC4 always have the same signals assigned: OUT39 and OUT40
respectively, and therefore it is not possible to select OUT17-OUT22.
Logical assignment of the physical PGM/PST
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >Logical M/E Assign menu, it is
not possible to assign the physical PGM/PST as a logical PGM/PST.
In the <Logical M/E to Physical P/P> group, you can select from M/E-1, M/E-
2, and M/E-3.
Output
connector
Fixed assigned outputs
Standard mode Multi-program mode DSK mode a)
OUT17 Program P/P OUT1 b) Program 1
OUT18 Program P/P OUT1 b) Program 2
OUT19 Preview P/P OUT2 b) Key preview 1
OUT20 Clean P/P OUT3 b) Key preview 2
OUT21 Key preview P/P OUT4 b) Clean 1
OUT22 Preset Preset Clean 2
Output connector Assignable bus
OUT23 Edit preview bus
OUT24 AUX bus
230 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Multi Program 2
Overview
What is Multi Program 2?
By operating the switcher in Multi Program 2 mode, a single switcher mix/
effects bank can be used to create two separate video outputs, referred to as
“main” and “sub.” You can set backgrounds, keys, and transitions for each of
main and sub. Keys 2 to 4, however, are common to main and sub.
For example, immediately after a score in baseball two versions of the scene
can be provided as shown below, and switched simultaneously.
Note
The Multi Program 2 function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.
To enable this function requires the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software.
Depending on the CPU module, this function may not be supported. For
details, consult your Sony service representative or sales representative.
Using the software
To use the Multi Program 2 software, you are required to enter an install key
which validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the
install key is not required.)
TEAM A
TEAM B
Background A
Key 1
Program output for “Main”
Background B
Background A
(signal from utility 2 bus)
Key 3
Background B
(signal from utility 3 bus)
Program output for “Sub”
231Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
To obtain a key, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu
of the switcher.
For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit
Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks
For Multi Program 2 operations, a single switcher bank may be shared, and
switched between main and sub, or two separate switcher banks may be used,
each dedicated to main or sub.
Example 1: Assigning M/E-1 main and sub to a single switcher bank, and
switching between them
Example 2: Assigning separate switcher banks as “M/E-1 main dedicated” and
“M/E-1 sub dedicated”
Video creation operations in Multi Program 2 mode
For each of main and sub, there are differences from the operations in standard
mode.
Used switched between M/E-1 main and sub
Used for M/E-1 main operations
Used for M/E-1 sub operations
232 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard
Mode” (page 242).
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2
Basic operation sequence
Enter the BZS-8200 install key (first time only)
↓
Set Multi Program 2 operating mode for each switcher bank
↓
Assign output signals, and set the background configuration, key
configuration, and key preview configuration
↓
For each switcher bank, make a main/sub assignment (one of main dedicated,
sub dedicated, and main and sub shared)
↓
For a switcher bank assigned to main and sub shared, assign the [MAIN] and
[SUB] delegation buttons
↓
Create the main and sub images
↓
Execute the transition
Optional operations
• Making cross-point settings
• Enabling DME wipe operations for sub
• Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection
• Including Multi Program 2 data in keyframes and snapshots
• Changing the key assignment for each output
• Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons in the fade-to-
black control block
• Changing the matrix size to Standard
• Making settings for keyframe timeline operation
Basic Operations (Required)
Entering the BZS-8200 install key (first time only)
After installing the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software in the switcher, carry
out the following procedure.
233Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
1
In the status area of the Engineering Setup >System >Install/Unit Config
menu, select the switcher (SWRx), and press [License].
The License menu appears.
2
In the License menu, enter the BZS-8200 install key.
For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/
Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
3
Shut down the menus. (see page 333.)
4
Power the switcher and SCU off and on again.
Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank
To set a desired switcher bank to Multi Program 2 mode, use the following
procedure.
1
Display the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu.
2
Select the switcher bank from M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P.
3
In the <M/E Config> group, select [Multi Program2].
Note
In the PGM/PST when using the simple P/P software (see page 227),
[Multi Program2] cannot be selected.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to set the operating mode for all desired
switcher banks.
Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode
To assign signals to outputs
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu.
The difference from standard mode is that OUT1 is fixed, set to PGM1 (main
program), and OUT6 is fixed, set to PGM2 (sub program), and that for the
OUT2 to OUT5 signals you can assign any signal selected from the following.
PGM1, PGM2, PGM3, PGM4, PVW1, PVW2, K-PVW1, K-PVW2,
CLEAN, SUB CLEAN
Note
Each of main and sub can use a maximum of four of the six outputs (OUT1 to
OUT6). The outputs can be used within the following limits.
234 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• OUT1, OUT2: main only
• OUT3, OUT4: can be used for either main or sub
• OUT5, OUT6: sub only
For details, see “To assign the output of each bank in Multi Program mode”
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
To set the background and key configuration
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >PGM Config menu.
The following are the differences from standard mode.
Background configuration: Consists of the following combinations.
• For main: Clean, Bkgd A, Bkgd B
• For sub: Sub Clean, Utility 2, Utility 3
Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “Enable” only when the background is
Clean, Bkgd A, or Bkgd B.
For details, see “To set the output configuration for each bank” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
To set the key preview configuration
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >K-PVW Config menu.
The following are the differences from standard mode.
Background configuration: Clean or Sub Clean
Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “On” or “Link” only when the
background is Clean.
For details, see “To set the key preview configuration” in Chapter 16 (Volume
2).
To assign sub outputs to output ports
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Output >Output Assign menu.
You can assign a sub output signal to a switcher output port number.
For details, see “Assigning output signals” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks
For each switcher bank for which Multi Program 2 mode is selected, set
whether this is main dedicated, sub dedicated, or main and sub shared.
To assign main and sub to a single switcher bank
1
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu,
select the switcher bank.
2
In the <Main/Sub Assign> group, select [Main&Sub].
Main: use for main operations.
235Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Sub: use for sub operations.
Main&Sub: use for both main and sub operations.
When “Main&Sub” is selected, it is necessary to assign [MAIN] and
[SUB] delegation buttons to the control panel.
To assign main and sub to two consecutive switcher banks
For example, to assign the first row (first switcher bank) to M/E-1 main, and
the second row (second switcher bank) to M/E-1 sub, use the following
procedure.
1
In the status area of the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/
Sub Assign menu, select 1st Row (M/E-1), then press [Main] in the <Main/
Sub Assign> group.
2
Press [Dual M/E Assign] to assign M/E to two banks.
In this state, both 1st Row and 2nd Row are set to main.
3
Set “2nd Row” to [Sub].
This cancels the shift/non-shift assignment for dual M/E in standard mode.
Note
It is not possible to assign the combinations of Main with Main&Sub, or Sub
with Main&Sub.
Assigning the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to buttons
on the control panel
You can assign the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to any of the
following three places.
To assign to the pattern limit buttons (PTN LIMIT and LIMIT SET) in
the transition control block (standard type)
For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260.
1
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button].
The Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Transition Module].
The Transition Module menu appears.
236 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
3
Select the switcher bank, then in the <PTN LIMIT/LIMIT SET/KF Button
Assign> group, press [Main/Sub].
You can now use the [PTN LIMIT] button as [MAIN], and the [LIMIT
SET] button as [SUB].
To assign to the wipe direction selection buttons (NORM and
NORM REV) in the transition control block
This applies to a standard type and compact type transition control block.
For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260, and
for details of the transition control block (compact type), see page 310.
1
In the Transition Module menu, select the switcher bank.
2
In the <NORM/NORM REV/REV Button Assign> group, press [Main/
Sub].
You can now use the [NORM] button as [MAIN], and the [NORM/REV]
button as [SUB].
To assign to macro buttons in the cross-point control block
For details of the cross-point control block, see page 256.
1
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button].
The Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Xpt Module].
The Xpt Module menu appears.
3
Select the switcher bank, then in the <PRE MCRO/POST MCRO> group,
press [Main Sub].
You can now use the [PRE MCRO] button as [MAIN], and the [POST
MCRO] button as [SUB].
To assign macro operations to different buttons
If in the above operation you assigned a Multi Program 2 function to the macro
buttons, you can assign the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO functions to
different buttons.
For details, see “Assigning functions to user preference buttons” or
“Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility/shotbox control
block” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
237Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode
(When Sharing a Switcher Bank)
To create video on the M/E or PGM/PST bank assigned to both main and sub
operations, use the following procedure.
1
Press the [MAIN] button, turning it on, and turning off the [SUB] button.
2
With the normal operations, create the main video.
3
Press the [SUB] button, turning it on, and turning off the [MAIN] button.
Now you can create the sub video.
4
Create the sub video.
The basic method of operation is the same as for the main video, except
that the utility 2 bus signal is assigned to background A, and the utility 3
bus signal is assigned to background B.
For sub, only keys 2 to 4 can be used, and for wipes, standard wipe patterns
only. There are also other differences in operation from standard mode.
For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and
Standard Mode” (page 242) and “Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2
Mode” (page 243).
5
Press the [MAIN] and [SUB] buttons simultaneously, turning them on.
If both buttons are lit, the control panel shows the status of main.
6
Carry out the transition.
Both main and sub video images are switched.
Optional Operations
Making cross-point settings
Cross-point assign tables can be set not only for main output but also for sub
output.
You can set cross-point assign tables for the following banks.
M/E-1 SUB to M/E-3 SUB
P/P SUB
The table actually used is that for which the control panel delegation button is
lit.
238 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
For details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
Enabling DME wipe operations for sub
By factory default, DME wipe operations are inhibited for sub background. To
enable them, in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [DME
Wipe Sub Enable] to On.
This enables DME wipe operations for sub background.
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST
bank).
Note
If a DME wipe for sub is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe, the image will not
be handled correctly.
Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection
In Multi Program 2 mode, you can inhibit other uses of the utility 2 bus signal
in order to use the signal as the background for sub.
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST
bank).
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu, set
[Util2 Inhibit] to On.
This inhibits operations of selecting from the background B row while holding
down the [UTIL] button in the cross-point control block.
Including Multi Program 2 data in recall operations of keyframes
and snapshots
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [Recall M/E Config] to
On.
When a keyframe or snapshot is stored or recalled, the following data is
included.
M/E Config, PGM Config, M/E Output Assign, and Key PVW Config
For details of the above data, see “Setting the operating mode for each
switcher bank” (page 233) and “Assigning output signals for Multi Program
2 mode” (page 233).
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST
bank).
Note
M/E Config data is saved, even when this setting is Off.
239Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Changing the key assignment for each output (Misc menu)
In Multi Program 2 mode you can change the key assignments independently.
The following describes an example using M/E-1, but the operation is the same
for other banks.
Notes
• This setting is linked to the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >
Config >PGM Config menu.
• It is not possible to make this setting while the above PGM Config menu is
locked, or [Recall M/E Config] (see previous item) is set to Off.
1
In the M/E-1 menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF5 ‘Key Assign.’
The Key Assign menu appears, and the current key assignment is shown
in the status area.
2
Change the setting in “Key Enable” as required.
Keys recalled in a snapshot recall
If a snapshot is recalled independently on main or sub, this only retrieves the
settings for the key assigned to the recalled side. For example, if key 1 and key
2 are assigned on main, and key 3 and key 4 are assigned on sub, then if you
recall a snapshot on main, this only retrieves the settings for key 1 and key 2,
and the state of key 3 and key 4 assigned on sub is not affected.
Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons
You can assign the sub preview output to a preview selection button in the
fade-to-black control block or downstream key/fade-to-black control block.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
When the Multi Program 2 license is valid, by assigning the “Shift” function to
a button, you can assign two preview outputs, “Shift” and “Unshift” to a single
button. To use the shift output, always assign “Shift” to some button.
Changing the matrix size to Standard
When using a router, if the matrix size is set to [Compact (128×128)], it is not
possible to control the utility 3 bus on the S-Bus. When using Multi Program
2, in the <Matrix Size> group of the Engineering Setup >Router/Tally >Router
menu, select [Standard (136×138)].
For details, see “Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to S-Bus space” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
240 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
As for the bus number of the utility 3 bus, a DME Key bus number is used as
follows.
Making settings for timeline-related keyframe operations
To assign sub regions to the region selection buttons in the
numeric keypad control block
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu,
assign regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control
block.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
To make region and reference region selections using a menu
During snapshot or keyframe operations, you can select a region (including
sub) in the Key Frame >Region Select menu. This is convenient for selecting
some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad control block or changing
the reference region.
For details, see “Specifying the Region and Edit Points” in Chapter 13
(Volume 2).
To assign regions shown in the Timeline menu
You can select how regions assigned to region selection buttons appear in the
Key Frame >Timeline menu.
For details, see “Setting the display of regions in the Timeline menu on or off”
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).
Enabling re-entry between the main and sub sides of the same
M/E bank
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, set [MP2 Free Re-Entry] to
On.
Notes
• Re-entry adds a 1H delay to the video. Nested re-entry may lead to problems
in the video.
No. Bus (Standard) Bus (MP2)
70 M/E-1 DME Key M/E-1 Utility3
85 M/E-2 DME Key M/E-2 Utility3
100 M/E-3 DME Key M/E-3 Utility3
115 P/P DME Key P/P Utility3
241Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• A maximum of eight re-entry stages are possible, with the final output having
a delay of 4H.
• The selection order of re-entry signals affects the number of lines by which
the output signal is lowered.
• If a delay occurs in the image, even when the through mode is set, the
ancillary data does not pas through.
• For example, it is possible to select the re-entry of M/E-1 main on M/E-1
main.
Restrictions on Mutual Re-entry When Using Multi Program 2
The snapshot function is affected by this re-entry function.
When the [MP2 Free Re-Entry] button is On, and any of the switcher banks are
in Multi Program 2 mode, then the following restrictions apply.
If you save and recall snapshots simultaneously with more than one region
specified, the recorded state is played back in the order of precedence of
regions (M/E-1 >M/E-2 >M/E-3 >P/P). Therefore, if you save and recall
snapshots with more than one region specified, the cross-point settings may not
be recalled correctly.
To recall the snapshots correctly, press the cross-point button before recalling
the snapshots, to select a signal other than the re-entry signal, then recall the
snapshots.
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode
• You can set video processing for the utility 3 bus signal.
• In the control panel and DCU GPI input settings and switcher GPI link
settings, the actions that can be selected now also include “Sub Cut” and
“Sub Auto Trans.”
• A switcher GPI link can now be set also for the utility 3 bus.
• To the macro event configuration parameters and macro attachment settings,
“Main & Sub” and “Sub” have been added.
• For cross-point button link settings, M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P “Sub
Program,” “Sub Preset,” and “Sub Trans PGM” have been added to the link
source bus.
• Snapshot attributes can now be set independently for main and sub.
• There are additional menus for sub which can be recalled by pressing a
button twice.
• You can set [MP2 Auto Correct] to On or Off in the Effect menu or Snapshot
menu. When this is set to On, for example, copy destination and source data
is automatically recognized as main or sub, and the data interchanged.
242 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and
Standard Mode
The differences from operation in standard mode are as follows.
Item Main Sub
Keys a) Keys 1 to 4 can be used Keys 2 to 4 only can be
used
Wipes
(background)
Patterns Same as standard mode • Only standard patterns
can be used
• Pattern mix is not
possible
Modifiers Same as standard mode • Pairing, modulation,
spring, spiral, and split
cannot be used
• Edge fill mattes are
single-color only
• Replication can be
selected from four
patterns
Wipes (key) Same as wipes (background) for sub
DME wipes Use Can be used Cannot be used (Can be
used, with a setting
change)
Patterns for 1
channel
For a dedicated interface, each of main and sub can be
used.
For the SDI interface, only one of main and sub can be
used.
Patterns for 2
channels
Only one of main and sub can be used
(For each M/E, the number of DMEs that can be used is
the same as in standard mode.)
Patterns for 3
channels
Backgrounds Wipe edge fill matte
(including color mix and
other settings in the Matte
Adjust menu)
Wipe edge fill matte
(single-color only)
Modifiers Same as standard mode Wipe border colors are
single-color only
Transitions Key priority Cannot be used
Transition
preview
Cannot be used
Preset color
mix
Color matte or video signal
selected on the utility 2 bus
Color matte only
Snapshots Cross-point
hold
Utility 2 cannot be set Utility 3 is added. BKGD
A/B and Key1 cannot be
set.
Control from an editor Same as standard mode Cannot be used
243Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
a) Keys 2 to 4 are common to main and sub.
Notes
• Allow a transition to complete before carrying out main and sub delegation
switching.
• The sub background A bus (utility 2 bus) is shared with wipe edge border fill.
Making a change to one affects the other.
• Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for main and
sub, the same image is not obtained.
• Changing the position of the wipe pattern for sub also changes the pattern
size.
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode
• The following functions are not available for sub:
– Data copy and swap
– Default recall (except for parametric recall)
–M/E link
– [TRANS] button function (see page 268)
– [TRACE] button function (see page 270)
– [AUTO] button function (see page 309)
• Re-entry is limited to four levels. Re-entry is not possible for main and sub
of the same M/E.
However, this restriction can be removed. For details, see “Enabling re-
entry between the main and sub sides of the same M/E bank” (page 240).
• In the following cases, a transition using the fader lever may not be
performed correctly:
– When the main and sub bus toggle modes are set differently
– For a pattern mix, preset color mix, and so on
• For an Internal bus link, GPI link, or External bus link, the “Utility 2” bus
cannot be selected.
• Screen aspect, show key, and [MCRO ATTCH ENBL] button settings are
common to main and sub.
• If a snapshot is recalled simultaneously for main and sub, or a keyframe is
executed simultaneously for main and sub, then for the following common
to main and sub the main settings are reflected.
–Key
–M/E Config
– DME external video bus and utility 1 bus
Operation setting for
switcher GPI inputs and
outputs
Same as standard mode Cannot be used
Item Main Sub
244 Multi Program 2
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• When a macro attachment is set on the DME utility 1 bus or DME utility 2
bus, it is not possible to make separate main and sub settings.
• When snapshots with different M/E Config settings are recalled:
– If M/E Config data is not to be included in the snapshot data, the current
system settings are used for snapshot reproduction.
– If M/E Config data is to be included in the snapshot data and if it was
created before Version 5.30, then standard mode is used. If created in
Version 5.30 or later, first M/E Config data is set, and then other snapshot
data is recalled.
• The bus override function is only available on the following buses:
– M/E-1 to M/E-3 Main BKGD A/B buses
– M/E-1 to M/E-3 Sub BKGD A/B buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses)
– P/P Main PGM/PST bus
– P/P Sub PGM/PST buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses)
• When a master snapshot or master timeline is executed with a key being
assigned to both main and sub, it is uncertain which data will be reflected.
• When recalling a master snapshot with different register numbers for main
and sub, the recall timing may differ by one field or more between main and
sub.
• The link state is maintained even when M/E Config is changed. Set the link
setting again, as required.
• Since keys 2 to 4 are shared between main and sub, when the main and sub
fader lever positions are different, if you move the fader lever, the video
changes instantaneously to the value of the most recently moved fader lever.
• When the transition type for main or sub is set to preset color mix, it is not
possible to carry out independent key transition operation (common to main
and sub).
245Dual Link Support
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Dual Link Support
By installing the BZS-8560 switcher upgrade software in the MVS-8000G, or
the BZDM-8560 DME upgrade software in the MVE-8000A, you can switch
the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50. In this case, signal input/output
uses a dual link a).
a) Standard specified by SMPTE 372M-2002. One video signal is carried by two HD-SDI signals,
allowing data with an increased frame rate to be carried.
Getting access to the software
To use the switcher upgrade software and DME upgrade software, you are
required to enter an install key which validates the software. (If the software
has been factory installed, the install key is not required.)
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu
of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16,
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2).
Note
Switching the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 requires the optional
multi-format software.
For details of this software option, see page 189.
An MKS-8110G 17-input board and MKS-8160G 24-output board set are also
required.
Setting the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50
You can switch the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 in setup.
For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
You can also switch the signal format with a GPI input.
For details, see the following sections of Chapter 16 (Volume 2), depending on
the device.
• “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup
Relating to Switcher Processor”
246 Dual Link Support
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
• “Interfacing With External Devices” in “Setup Relating to Operations From
the Control Panel”
• “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup
Relating to DME”
• “GPI Input Settings (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in “Setup Relating to DCU”
• The available input reference signals are as follows.
Switching the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to
a monitor signal
The function for switching the signal type of the monitor output (one channel)
to video or key is assigned to one of the Prefs buttons of the Menu control block
or one of the buttons of the Utility/Shotbox control block (DME MON KEY
command).
For details of the assignment, see “Settings Button Assignment (Prefs/Utility
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
To switch the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to a
monitor signal
Press the DME MON KEY command assigned button and turn it on to assign
DME key output to a monitor signal. Then press the button and turn it off to
assign DME video output to a monitor signal. For selection of the DME
channels to be assigned to a monitor signal, see “Assigning a DME output
signal as a monitor signal” (page 403) under “Applying a DME Effect to a
Key” in Chapter 4.
Selecting the signal output from the DME monitor output
connector
1
Display the Engineering Setup >DME >Output >Monitor Output menu.
2
Press [DME1] or [DME2] to select the DME to operate on.
3
On the left, select MONI OUT#1 or MONI OUT#3.
4
On the right, select the signal.
You can select any of Ch1 Video, Ch1 Key, Ch2 Video, and Ch2 Key.
Signal format Input reference signal
Tri Sync Black burst
1080P/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94
1080P/50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50
247Dual Link Support
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
5
Press [Set].
This assigns the signal.
Restrictions when using a dual link
When using a dual link, the switcher and DME resources are linked in duplex
(link A and link B), resulting in the following restrictions.
a) When the simple P/P software is not installed
b) When the switcher is a 2M/E system only
Restrictions Details
Functions that cannot be
used in the system
Functions of the following items in the Engineering
Setup >Switcher >Config menu
Single Simul, Dual Simul
Functions that cannot be
used in the switcher
• Primary inputs numbers 41 to 80
• Outputs number 25 to 48
• Monitor buses 2/4/6/8
• M/E-2 bank a)
• M/E-3 bank
• DME utility 1 and 2 buses
• Color background 2 b)
• Color corrector 2
• Frame memory
• Format converter
• Functions of the following items in the Engineering
Setup >Switcher >Config menu
Switching Timing, M/E Config excluding Standard, and
Logical M/E Assign
Functions that cannot be
used on the DME
• DME channels 3, 4, 7, and 8
• Freeze in film mode
• “Freeze Timing” in the following effects
Input Freeze, Trail, Decay, KF Strobe (always set to
Frame)
•Brick
• Editor ports 3 and 4 when the editor port operation mode
is set to “Independent.”
Other restrictions • Auto chroma keying operates on the image of link A.
• Tallies are generated for the link A signal.
• Key frames are created in units of two frames.
• It is not possible to change the interpolation method in
the DME.
248 Dual Link Support
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions
Chapter 2 Menus and Control
Panel
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel .............................251
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1
(With Standard Transition Modules) .....................................251
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2
(With Simple Transition Modules) ........................................252
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3
(With Compact Transition Modules) .....................................255
Cross-Point Control Block ................................................................256
Transition Control Block (Standard Type) ........................................260
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) .........................................264
Key Control Block .............................................................................267
Device Control Block (Trackball) .....................................................271
Device Control Block (Joystick) .......................................................277
Device Control Block (Search Dial) ..................................................278
Keyframe Control Block ...................................................................281
Numeric Keypad Control Block ........................................................284
Fade to Black Control Block .............................................................287
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ................................288
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) ...........................291
Menu Control Block ..........................................................................294
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block ...................................................295
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ........................................296
Utility/Shotbox Control Block ..........................................................298
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type) ..
299
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ..............304
Downstream Key Control Block .......................................................306
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block ...............................308
Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .......................................310
Basic Menu Operations ............................................................................313
Menu Organization ............................................................................313
About the Top Menu List ..................................................................313
Accessing Menus ...............................................................................314
Displaying a Menu ............................................................................321
Interpreting the Menu Screen ............................................................322
Menu Operations ...............................................................................323
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site 335
Shortcut Menu ...................................................................................335
251Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Names and Functions of Parts of the
Control Panel
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1
(With Standard Transition Modules)
The MVS-8000 system control panel
comprises a number of modules.
The following illustration shows a typical
32-button, 4-M/E configuration, with
standard transition modules used in the
transition control block.
Control panel configuration 1 (left side)
(with standard transition modules)
Auxiliary bus control block (page 288)
M/E-1 bank
M/E-2 bank
M/E-3 bank
PGM/PST (program/
preset) bank
Cross-point control block (page 256)
252 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Control panel configuration 1 (right side)
(with standard transition modules)
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2
(With Simple Transition Modules)
The following illustration shows a typical
configuration, with simple transition
modules used in the transition control
block.
Memory card/USB adaptor block (page 295)
“Memory Stick”/USB connections block (page 296)
Key control block (page 267)
Keyframe control block (page 281)
Device control block (page 271/page 277)
Menu control block (page 294)
Transition control block
(standard type) (page 260)
Fade to black control block (page 287)
Flexi Pad control block (standard type) (page 264)
Downstream key control block (page 306)
Utility/Shotbox control
block (page 298)
Numeric keypad control block (page 284)
253Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Except for the simple modules, this is the
same configuration as in example
configuration 1.
Control panel configuration 2 (left side)
(with simple transition modules)
254 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Control panel configuration 2 (right side)
(with simple transition modules)
Transition control block and Flexi Pad control
block (simple type) (page 299)
Independent key transition control block
(simple type) (page 304)
255Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3
(With Compact Transition Modules)
The following illustration shows a typical
configuration, with compact transition
modules used in the transition control
block.
Control panel configuration 3
(with compact transition modules)
Transition control block (compact type) (page 310)
256 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Cross-Point Control Block
In the cross-point control block, you can
select the signals to be used in this M/E
bank or PGM/PST bank.
There are also modules without the source
name displays shown in the following
figure.
All operations except those of the [SHIFT]
button are the same as for a module with
source name displays.
aCross-point buttons
These buttons select the signals used for
video creation on this M/E bank or PGM/
PST bank. Each row of buttons corresponds
to one or more signal buses within the
switcher.
Key 1 row: The buttons in this row select
the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
SHIFT XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
PRE
MCRO
KEY3
KEY4
POST
MCRO
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
1 Cross-point buttons
5 Source name displays
7 M/E bank display
3 Key bus selection buttons
4 UTIL button
8 Macro buttons
2 XPT HOLD buttons
6 SHIFT button
Key 1 row
Key 2 row
Reentry buttons
Reentry buttons
Background A row
Background B row
257Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
into the video on this M/E bank or
PGM/PST bank.
To select the key 1 fill signal, check
that the right-hand [KEY3] button in
the M/E bank (or the [DSK3] button in
the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press
the button assigned to the desired
signal. To select the key 3 fill signal,
press the [KEY3] button, turning it on.
While the [UTIL] button on the right
hand side is held down, these buttons
are assigned to the DME external video
bus allowing you to select the signal on
that bus.
Key 2 row: The buttons in this row select
the key 2 or key 4 signals to be inserted
into the video on this M/E bank or
PGM/PST bank.
To select the key 2 fill signal, check
that the right-hand [KEY4] button in
the M/E bank (or the [DSK4] button in
the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press
the button assigned to the desired
signal. To select the key 4 fill signal,
press the [KEY4] button, turning it on.
While the [UTIL] button on the right
hand side is held down, these buttons
are assigned to the DME utility 1 or 2
bus as follows.
• When the [KEY4] button is off,
holding down the [UTIL] button
assigns these buttons to the DME
utility 1 bus.
• Holding down the [UTIL] button and
pressing the [KEY4] button, turning
it on, assigns these buttons to the
DME utility 2 bus.
Background A row: Press the desired
button to select the signal as the current
background video on this M/E bank or
PGM/PST bank.
While the [UTIL] button on the right
hand side is held down in Hold mode,
these buttons are assigned to the utility
1 bus, and can be used to select the
signal on that bus.
Background B row: Press the desired
button to select the signal as the
background after the next transition on
this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank.
While the [UTIL] button on the right
hand side is held down in Hold mode,
these buttons are assigned to the utility
2 bus, and can be used to select the
signal on that bus.
Reentry buttons: These allow you to select
the video created on another bank as
background A or B or one of the keys 1
to 4. For example, to use the video
created on the M/E-1 bank as
background B on the M/E-2 bank, press
the reentry button [M/E 1] in the
background B row of buttons on the M/
E-2 bank.
Cross-point button numbers
This description applies to the example of a
32-button system.
From the left, the first 31 buttons are
numbered 1, 2, ... 30, 31. When the 32nd
button is set to be a [SHIFT] button, these
buttons can also be switched to select
signals numbered from 32 to 62. While the
[SHIFT] button is held down, these switch
to numbers 32 to 62, or alternatively, every
time the button is pressed, switching is
made between numbers 1 to 31 and 32 to
62. Similarly, the reentry buttons can be
switched between two sets of numbers: 121
to 123, and 125 to 127.
Both the assignment of the 32nd button to a
[SHIFT] button and the selection of the
button operation mode can be done in a
Setup menu.
Assigning signals to button
You can assign a signal to each button using
the Setup menu.
This assignment is common to the cross-
point buttons in the M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3,
and PGM/PST banks, and the auxiliary bus
258 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
control block. According to the settings
made in the menu, the video and key signals
are assigned to the cross-point buttons in
pairs.
You can also make separate signal
assignments for each operating control
block.
Visual indications on cross-point
buttons
The currently selected button in a row (i.e.
the last button pressed) lights amber or red.
Amber (“low tally”): The signal selected
on the bus does not form part of the
program output from the switcher.
Red (“high tally”): The signal selected on
the bus forms part of the program
output from the switcher.
bXPT (cross-point) HOLD buttons
Turning one of these buttons on enables
you to recall a keyframe or snapshot while
keeping the current cross-point selection
unchanged.
When the [XPT HOLD] button in the key 1
or key 2 row is on, then the operation is as
follows, depending on the setting in the
Setup menu.
When the panel setup is “Normal”: The
operation is as follows, depending on
the setting in switcher setup.
Key Disable: The snapshot or
keyframe is recalled without changing
the current key settings.
Key Disable with Status: The
snapshot or key frame is recalled
without changing the current key
settings, including the on/off status.
Xpt Hold: The snapshot or keyframe is
recalled without changing the current
cross-point selection.
When the panel setup is “Protect”: The
cross-point settings cannot be changed
by pressing panel buttons.
cKey bus selection buttons
KEY3 button: Press this button, turning it
on, to assign the key 1 cross-point
buttons to the key 3 fill bus.
KEY4 button: Press this button, turning it
on, to assign the key 2 cross-point
buttons to the key 4 fill bus.
Pressing one of the key delegation buttons
[KEY1] to [KEY4] in the transition control
block (standard type) twice in rapid
succession changes the state of the
corresponding one of these buttons, so that
you can make cross-point selections on the
key bus (see page 263).
dUTIL (utility) button
While this button is held down, the cross-
point buttons are assigned to the following
buses, respectively.
Background A row: utility 1 bus
Background B row: utility 2 bus
Key 1 row: DME external video bus
Key 2 row: DME utility 1 bus when the
[KEY4] button is off, or DME utility 2
bus when the [KEY4] button is lit.
In a Setup menu, you can select either of the
following two modes for these buttons.
• The button takes effect while being held
down.
• Every time the button is pressed, it
toggles between the on and off states for
key 1 and key 2 rows. For background A
and background B rows, utility buses
remain disabled.
eSource name displays
These show the names of the signals which
can be selected on the cross-point buttons,
in two or four characters, or in auto mode.
While the [SHIFT] button on the right hand
side or the [SHIFT] button assigned to the
column of cross-point buttons is enabled,
the source name of the signal assigned to
the column of cross-point buttons in shift
mode appears. You can select green,
orange, or yellow for the background color
259Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
of the source name display, for each source
separately. You can set the source name
display mode and background color in a
Setup menu.
fSHIFT button
When this button is enabled, either the
source name displays show the shifted
signal names, or the shifted signals for all
buses in this M/E (P/P) bank are enabled.
You can select either mode in a Setup
menu.
Each press of the button toggles between
the enabled and disabled states.
In the case of a module without source
name displays, when “Display” is selected
in the Setup menu, this button is invalid.
gM/E bank display
This indicates the notional mix/effect bank
name to which the particular M/E or PGM/
PST bank is assigned, as a four-character
identifier.
hMacro buttons
PRE MCRO (pre macro) button: Use this
button to set a macro attachment in pre
macro mode. For setting in macro only
mode, use this in combination with a
macro only set button assigned to the
utility/shotbox control block or a user
preference button. Alternatively,
without using the button, you can make
the selection simply, by pressing
simultaneously with the [POST
MCRO] button.
When dual background bus mode is
selected in setup, this switches the dual
background bus mode on and off.
When set to utility/shotbox mode, this
enables and disables the use of the key
2 row as a utility/shotbox.
If in setup this is assigned to the
function for disabling cross-point
button operations, then it enables or
disables cross-point button operations.
POST MCRO (post macro) button: Use
this button to set a macro attachment in
post macro mode. For setting in macro
only mode, use this in combination
with a macro only set button assigned
to the utility/shotbox control block or a
user preference button. Alternatively,
without using the button, you can make
the selection simply, by pressing
simultaneously with the [PRE MCRO]
button.
When dual background bus mode or
utility/shotbox mode is selected in
setup, this button is disabled.
If in setup the function for disabling
cross-point button operations is
assigned to the [PRE MCRO] button,
then this button is disabled.
MCRO ATTCH ENBL (macro
attachment enable) button: When
this button is on, the macro attachments
set for the buttons of the M/E bank are
enabled.
260 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Transition Control Block (Standard Type)
In the transition control block, you can
modify the output of the M/E bank or PGM/
PST bank, and perform transitions. Both
common transition and independent key
transition operations are possible.
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 K-MOD
ENBL K-SS
K-TR
ENBL
K-SS
STORE
MIX WIPE DME
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
KEY1
ON
AUTO
TRANS CUT AUTO
TRANS
KEY2
ON
AUTO
TRANS
KEY3
ON
AUTO
TRANS
KEY4
ON
AUTO
TRANS
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
9 PRIOR SET button
1 Next transition selection buttons
8 Key status display
2 Transition type selection buttons
7 KF button
6 Pattern limit buttons
5 TRANS PVW button
3 Transition execution section
4 Wipe direction selection buttons
q; Key delegation buttons
qd Key source name display/key
snapshot buttons
qf Key snapshot setting buttons
qa Independent key transition type
selection buttons
qs Independent key transition
execution section
261Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aNext transition selection buttons
Press these buttons, turning them on, to
determine what the next transition will
apply to.
BKGD: Next transition changes the
background.
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the
PGM/PST bank): Press this button,
turning it on, to make the next
transition insert or remove the
corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a
key is currently inserted it will be
removed, and vice versa.
In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or
removes downstream keys 1 to 4.
KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button
is lit, the setting of the key priority after
the next transition is enabled. The key
priority after the next transition appears
in the key status display.
ALL: Pressing this button turns on a
preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1]
to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons.
Make this setting in a Setup menu.
bTransition type selection buttons
You can assign these buttons in setup to any
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2)).
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
determine the type of the next transition.
When multi-program mode is selected in
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the
following buttons may light.
MIX: In a background transition, the new
video fades in as the current video
fades out. During the transition, the
overall signal level is maintained at
100%.
In a key transition, the key fades in (for
insertion) or out (for removal).
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and
new video signals are compared, and
the signal with the higher luminance
level is given priority in the output.
The current video is maintained at
100% output for the first half of the
transition as the new video increases
progressively to 100%, then the current
video is progressively reduced from
100% to zero in the second half while
the new video is maintained at 100%.
SUPER MIX: The current video is
maintained at 100% output for the first
half of the transition as the new video is
mixed while increasing progressively
to 100%. The current video is then
progressively reduced from 100% to
zero in the second half while the new
video is maintained at 100%.
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first
transition, the current video is replaced
by the color matte in a mix (dissolve),
then in the second transition the color
matte is replaced by the new video also
in a mix (dissolve).
In place of a color matte, you can select
any signal on the utility 2 bus.
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the
new video, using the wipe pattern
selected in the Wipe menu.
DME: A wipe type of transition is carried
out, using the DME effect selected in
the DME Wipe menu.
FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP,
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is
played back together with the
transition. At this point, you can also
carry out a transition (wipe or mix
(dissolve)) simultaneously together
with the clip.
cTransition execution section
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the transition.
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a
manual transition. Pressing the [KF]
262 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
button to turn it on allows you to use
this as a key frame fader.
Transition rate display: This shows the
“transition rate” (the time from the
beginning of a transition to its
completion) set for an auto transition,
in frames.
You can set the transition rate using the
numeric keypad control block, Flexi
Pad control block, or menu.
AUTO TRANS (transition) button:
Pressing this button carries out an auto
transition of the set transition rate
(duration). The transition starts
immediately, and the button lights
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
CUT button: Pressing this button carries
out the transition as a cut (i.e.
instantaneously).
dWipe direction selection buttons
When you have selected a wipe or DME
wipe as the transition type, press one of
these buttons, turning it on, to select the
wipe direction.
NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in
the direction from black to white as
shown on the pattern in the lists of
patterns see “Wipe Pattern List” (page
560) and “DME Wipe Pattern List”
(page 566) in Appendix (Volume 1), or
in the direction of the arrow.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button plays the
tape.
REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the
opposite direction to that when the
[NORM] button is pressed.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button cues the tape
automatically to the start point.
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe
direction alternates between normal
and reverse every time a transition is
executed.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button stops the
tape.
eTRANS PVW (transition preview)
button
When this button is lit, you can check in
advance the video changes during the
transition, on the preview output from the
M/E or PGM/PST bank.
During the preview, you can use the fader
lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT]
button. One of the following functions of
this button can be selected in a Setup mode.
• When the transition completes, the
system returns to the normal mode.
• The transition preview mode is
maintained while this button is pressed.
• Switching is made between the transition
preview mode and normal mode every
time this button is pressed.
fPattern limit buttons
PTN (pattern) LIMIT: Pressing this
button, turning it on, enables the
pattern limit function.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button plays the
tape.
LIMIT SET: Use this button to set a
pattern limit when the [PTN LIMIT]
button is off.
Move the fader lever to the position of
a particular pattern size, and stop it
there, then press this button to set the
pattern limit range.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button stops the
tape.
263Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
gKF (keyframe) button
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button cues the tape
automatically to the start point. When not,
pressing this button to turn it on allows you
to use the fader lever as a key frame fader.
hKey status display
For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding
ON indicator lights when the key is
inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4)
of each key.
iPRIOR (priority) SET button
While this button is held down, you can set
the key priority.
The setting mode when this button is
pressed depends on whether or not the
[KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the
current key priority is set.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the
key priority after the next transition is set.
Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required,
to switch between these two modes.
In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR
SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1]
to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you
want to bring to the front.
The following controls are used as the
independent key transition control block.
jKey delegation buttons
These buttons delegate this independent
key transition control block to a desired
keyer. Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4]
buttons ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/
PST bank), turning it on.
You can press more than one button to
select two or more keyers.
While these buttons are held down, you can
select a key source with the cross-point
buttons for the key bus.
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid
succession changes its state so that you can
make cross-point selections on the
corresponding key bus.
a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the cross-
point control block goes off.
b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the cross-
point control block goes off.
c) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the cross-
point control block lights.
d) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the cross-
point control block lights.
kIndependent key transition type
selection buttons
Press one of the following buttons, turning
it on, to select the independent key
transition type.
MIX: Faded in or out.
WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe.
DME (DME wipe): Inserted or deleted
with a DME wipe.
lIndependent key transition
execution section
KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON (DSK1 ON to
DSK4 ON in the PGM/PST bank)
buttons: Press the corresponding one
of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in
or out instantaneously. When the key
corresponding to the button appears in
the final program output, the button
lights red, and otherwise lights amber.
AUTO TRANS (transition) buttons:
These correspond to keys 1 to 4 from
left to right; press one to carry out an
auto transition. The transition rate for
an independent key transition can be
Key delegation button
(double press)
Corresponding
key bus
[KEY1] key 1 a)
[KEY2] key 2 b)
[KEY3] key 3 c)
[KEY4] key 4 d)
264 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
set in the numeric keypad control
block, in the Flexi Pad control block, or
in a menu.
mKey source name display/key
snapshot buttons
These display the source name selected on
the corresponding keyer. In key snapshot
mode, press these buttons, corresponding to
registers 1 to 4 for the selected keyer, to
save or recall a key snapshot.
nKey snapshot setting buttons
K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key
snapshot mode.
K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To
save a key snapshot, hold down this
button, and press the key source name
display/key snapshot button
corresponding to the register you want
to save.
K-MOD ENBL (key modifier enable): To
recall key adjustment values and key
modifier settings when recalling a key
snapshot, press this button, turning it
on.
K-TR ENBL (key transition enable): To
recall independent key transition
settings when recalling a key snapshot,
press this button, turning it on.
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type)
The Flexi Pad control block is used for
saving and recalling wipe snapshots, DME
wipe snapshots, and snapshots, for recalling
effects, and shotbox content, and for
entering the transition rate.
265Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aMode selection buttons
WIPE: To save or recall a wipe snapshot,
or recall the pattern number of a wipe
pattern, use this in combination with
the buttons of the memory recall
section.
DME: To save or recall a DME wipe
snapshot, or recall the pattern number
of a DME wipe pattern, use this in
combination with the buttons of the
memory recall section.
SNAPSHOT: To save or recall a snapshot,
use this in combination with the
buttons of the memory recall section.
EFF (effect): To recall the master timeline
or run an effect, use this in combination
with the buttons in the memory recall
section.
SHOTBOX: To recall or execute a
shotbox, use this in combination with
the buttons of the memory recall
section.
MCRO (macro): To save, recall or edit a
macro, use this in combination with the
buttons of the memory recall section.
TRANS RATE (transition rate): To enter
the transition rate, press this button,
turning it on. To enter the independent
key transition rate, hold down this
button, and press the key delegation
button in the independent key
transition control block. To select
whether the value is entered in frames
or as a timecode value, switch the [TC]
button in the memory recall section on
or off.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
8 9
456
123
0
AUTO
TRAN
EFF
DISS
1 Mode selection buttons
5 XPT HOLD status display
3 Memory recall section
2 Bank selection buttons
4 UNDO button
6 Numeric display
266 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
bBank selection buttons
BANK0 (bank 0): Assigns the memory
recall section to bank 0, of registers 1 to
10.
BANK1 (bank 1): Assigns the memory
recall section to bank 1, of registers 11
to 20.
BANK SEL (bank selection): After
pressing this button, press a button in
the memory recall section to select
banks 0 to 9.
cMemory recall section
This consists of 12 buttons with LCDs.
These display changes, according to
various operation modes.
dUNDO button
UNDO: After recalling a register, press this
button to return to the state before
recalling the register.
When contents have been saved to a
register, hold down the [STORE
STATS] button and press this button to
return the register to its state before the
save operation.
STORE STATS (store status): When a
save or delete operation has been
carried out on a register, this button
lights amber. After saving to a register,
hold down this button and press the
relevant register button to delete the
data in the register. Again, after a save
operation on a register, hold down this
button and press the [UNDO] button to
restore the register to its state before the
save operation.
eXPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status
display
A bus for which cross-point hold is set
appears as a green light.
fNumeric display
Depending on the operation mode, this
shows the pattern number of a wipe or
DME wipe, a bank number, a register
number, a transition rate, and so on in up to
four digits.
267Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Key Control Block
Each of the M/E banks and the PGM/PST
bank includes four keyers (for keys 1 to 4),
and you can delegate this control block to
any desired keyer. In this control block, you
can adjust and modify keys.
aDelegation buttons
Key delegation: Press one of the [KEY1]
to [KEY4] buttons to delegate the key
control block to the corresponding
keyer.
M/E delegation: Press one of the [M/E 1]
to [M/E 3], and [P/P] buttons to select
the bank (an M/E bank or the PGM/
PST bank) to which the key control
block is delegated.
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
M/E
1
M/E
2
RE
SIZER
M/E
3P/P
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS
LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN
AUTO
SEL SPLIT MATTE
FILL
KEY
DROP
SOFT
EDGE
BDR DROP
BDR SHDW EMBOS
OUT
LINE
SHOW
KEY
MAIN
MASK
SUB
MASK ZABTN MORE
MON FM
FEED
OVER
RIDE TRACE PROC
KEY
AUTO
DELEG
DME
5
DME
6
DME
7
DME
8
3 Key fill/key source selection buttons
2 Key type selection buttons
1 Delegation buttons
4 Key modifier buttons
9 DME channel
selection buttons
7 Knobs
8 Displays
qf AUTO DELEG button
qa Output destination specification
buttons
qd TRACE button
qs OVERRIDE button
5 MORE button
6 SHOW KEY button
q; ON AIR indicators
qg RESIZER button
268 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
TRANS: By pressing this button, you can
check the DME channel used for DME
wipes on the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Also, by pressing this button, then
pressing one of the DME channel
selection buttons, you can preset the
DME channel to be used when a DME
wipe is selected as the transition type
for the next transition.
When presetting the DME channel for
an independent key transition, hold
down this button, then press one of the
[KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons, turning the
two buttons on, beforehand.
bKey type selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the desired key type.
Depending on the selected key type,
various parameters are displayed, and you
can set the values with the knobs.
LUM (luminance key): The background is
cut out according to the luminance (Y)
of the key source signal, and at the
same time the key fill signal is cut out
and then added to the background
signal.
LIN (linear key): This is a type of
luminance key with a reduced variation
in gain and a higher adjustment
precision.
CRK (chroma key): A particular hue
(usually blue) in the key source signal
is used to determine the hole to be cut
in the background and filled with the
key fill signal.
CVK (color vector key): The background
is cut out with a key source created by
adding the luminance and chrominance
components of the key signal. If the
saturation is high, this allows perfect
keying even if the luminance level is
low and the signal is not suitable for
luminance keying.
PTN (wipe pattern key): A hole is cut in
the background by a wipe pattern
selected in the transition, and this is
filled with the key fill signal.
cKey fill/key source selection buttons
AUTO SEL (selection): Use the signal
selected on the key fill bus, and the
paired key source signal. The setting of
key fill and key source pairs is carried
out in a Setup menu.
SPLIT: To use the signal selected on the
key fill bus as key fill, and a signal
separate from the signal assigned in a
pair with key fill for key source, press
this button, turning it on.
To select the signal on the key source
bus, hold down this button, and press a
button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the
cross-point control block.
To use the signal selected on the key fill bus
as key source (self keying), press the
[AUTO SEL] button and [SPLIT] button at
the same time, so that both are off.
MATTE FILL: To use a color matte from
the internal generator as key fill, press
this button, turning it on. You can
adjust the color matte using the knobs.
When this button is off, the signal
selected on the key fill bus is used as
key fill.
dKey modifier buttons
To add an edge modifier to the key, press
one of these buttons, turning it on.
Depending on the edge type selected,
parameters appear in the displays, and you
can set the values with the knobs.
KEY DROP: When drop border or shadow
is selected, turning this button on
lowers the key fill and key source
position by four or eight scan lines as
set in the key menu.
To select 4H or 8H, use the Key menu.
When the selected edge type is
“normal” and soft edge is selected or
when border, outline, or emboss is
269Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
selected, this button lights
automatically.
BDR (border): Apply a border of a
uniform thickness to the whole key.
DROP BDR (drop border): Apply a
border to two sides of the key (for
example, below and to the right, or
below and to the left).
SHDW (shadow): Apply a shadow to two
sides of the key (for example, below
and to the right, or below and to the
left).
OUTLINE: Use the outline of the key.
EMBOS (emboss): Apply an embossing
effect to the periphery of the key.
• To select a “normal” as the edge type
(that is, a plain edge), set all five of the
above buttons off.
• When border, drop border, or shadow is
selected, you can use a special color
matte or a signal selected on the utility 1
bus for the edge.
• When emboss is selected, you can use the
dedicated color matte signal for the
emboss function.
• When outline is selected, the signal
selected on the key fill bus is used to fill
the edge.
MAIN MASK: Press this button, turning it
on, to enable the key mask using the
main pattern. It also enables you to set
the parameters with the knobs.
SUB MASK: Press this button, turning it
on, to enable the key mask using the
sub pattern. It also enables you to set
the parameters with the knobs.
ZABTN (zabton): When this is pressed,
turning it on, a translucent pattern is
inserted behind the key. With the
knobs, you can adjust the color, size,
density, and softness parameters.
SOFT EDGE: Soften the edge of the key.
eMORE button
When there are more than four parameters,
this button lights amber. When it is pressed,
it changes from amber to green and the fifth
and subsequent parameters are assigned to
the knobs, allowing them to be adjusted.
fSHOW KEY button
While this button is held down, a key
processed key source signal is output from
the specified output port. You can make the
output specification independently for each
of edit preview and the preview of each M/
E or PGM/PST bank in a Setup menu.
gKnobs
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter
values.
hDisplays
Each display shows the initial letters of the
parameter name and the parameter value
(maximum three digits including a minus
sign for a negative value).
iDME channel selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
delegate a DME channel to the keyer. The
number of valid DME channel selection
buttons depends on the number of channels
installed in the DME processor.
A maximum of four consecutively
numbered DME channels from the two sets,
DME 1 to 4 and DME 5 to 8, can be
assigned to one keyer. A DME channel
assigned to a keyer cannot be selected on
another keyer. However, using the override
function it is possible to allocate a channel
already allocated to another keyer to the
currently selected keyer. If DME channel
allocations have been made in a Setup
menu, these buttons cannot be used to make
DME channel allocations. Using the trace
function, it is possible to check which keyer
a DME channel is allocated to.
270 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
jON AIR indicators
These light red when the corresponding
DME channels are included in the final
program output.
kOutput destination specification
buttons
MON (DME monitor): Hold down this
button and press the selection button
for the DME channel you want to
assign to the monitor output; you can
then monitor the output signal on the
DME monitor output.
While this button is held down, the
DME channel selection buttons light as
follows, allowing you to check the
monitor assignment.
Lit amber: DME channel that can
currently be monitored
Lit green: DME channel currently
assigned to the monitor output
FM FEED (frame memory feed): When
you press this button, it lights
momentarily amber, then for the
currently selected keyer, the key
processed signals are selected for frame
memory sources 1 and 2. If a DME is
selected on the currently selected
keyer, the key fill and key source
signals to which a DME effect is
applied are assigned to frame memory
sources 1 and 2; otherwise the key fill
and key source are assigned.
Carrying out a frame memory feed
causes the [PROC KEY] button to light
amber.
PROC KEY (processed key): When this
button is on, the key fill/source signal
subjected to key processing or signal
subjected to a DME effect on the
currently selected keyer can be selected
as a reentry signal (PROC V or PROC
K) for the M/E or PGM/PST bank, on
the auxiliary bus or the like.
lOVERRIDE button
To select a DME channel already allocated
to another keyer or transition to the
currently selected keyer (or transition), hold
down this button, and press the DME
channel selection button.
mTRACE button
When a DME channel is already allocated
to another keyer or transition, hold down
this button, and press the corresponding
DME channel selection button, to switch to
the state in which the keyer (or transition) to
which the DME channel is allocated is
currently selected.
nAUTO DELEG (auto delegation)
button
When this button is on, the key delegation
selection state of the key control block is
linked to the key delegation selection state
of the independent key transition control
block.
oRESIZER button
Enables or disables resizer on the MVS-
8000G.
For details on resizer, see page 419.
271Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Device Control Block (Trackball)
The description below of frame memory
clip operations applies only to the MVS-
8000A/8000G.
The device control block is used for three-
dimensional transform operations using a
DME, for wipe pattern position setting, and
for VTR/disk recorder/frame memory clip
operation.
aRegion selection buttons
The operation mode allocated to the device
control block depends on the selection state
of the region selection buttons.
When the [M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], and
[P/P] buttons are selected: This
enables the wipe pattern position
setting (positioner) operation mode in
the device control block. You can
select multiple buttons simultaneously.
When the [USER] button is selected: This
enables pattern position setting used
for color backgrounds.
When the [DME 1] to [DME 8] buttons
are selected: This enables the three-
dimensional transform operation mode
in the device control block.
Press a button, turning it on, to select a
DME channel. You can select multiple
buttons simultaneously.
The number of valid buttons depends
on the number of DME processor
channels installed.
When the [DEV] button is selected: This
enables the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode in the device
DEVUSER
M/E1
DME1
DME5
MENU
SHIFT
M/E2
DME2
DME6
ASP
PERS
SUB
LOC
SIZE
ASP
AXIS
LOC
MAIN
LOCAL
K1
CB1
GLB
K2
CB2
CLR
WORK
BUFR
M/E3
DME3
DME7
LOC
XYZ
LOC
ROT
POS
RSZR
X
P/P
DME4
DME8
Y Z CTR
RUN
CTRL
SRC
K3
TRGT
K4
RSZR
CTRL
1 Region selection buttons
3 Trackball
4 Z-ring
2 Operating buttons
5 MENU button
272 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
control block. In this state, the [M/E 1]
to [M/E 3] buttons, [P/P] button and
[DME1] to [DME8] buttons function
as the device 1 to device 12 allocation
buttons as follows.
[M/E1] (DEV1): device 1
[M/E2] (DEV2): device 2
[M/E3] (DEV3): device 3
[P/P] (DEV4): device 4
[USER] (FM1CLIP): frame memory
clip 1
[Unused] (FM2CLIP): frame memory
clip 2
[DME1] (DEV5): device 5
[DME2] (DEV6): device 6
[DME3] (DEV7): device 7
[DME4] (DEV8): device 8
[Unused] (FM LOOP): frame memory
loop
[DME5] (DEV9): device 9
[DME6] (DEV10): device 10
[DME7] (DEV11): device 11
[DME8] (DEV12): device 12
To exit from this mode, press the
[DEV] button again, turning it off.
When the [RUN CTRL] button is
selected: This enables the effect run
control mode in the device control
block.
When the [RSZR CTRL] button is
selected: This enables the resizer
control mode in the device control
block of the MVS-8000G.
For details on resizer, see page 419.
The functions of the operation buttons,
trackball, and Z-ring vary with the
operation mode as follows.
bOperation buttons
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
K1 CB1: Press this button to enable wipe
pattern position setting for key 1
(DSK1).
When the [USER] button is selected,
pattern position setting for color
background 1 is enabled.
K2 CB2: Press this button to enable wipe
pattern position setting for key 2
(DSK2).
K3: Press this button to enable wipe pattern
position setting for key 3 (DSK3).
K4: Press this button to enable wipe pattern
position setting for key 4 (DSK4).
MAIN: Press this button to enable main
wipe pattern position setting for normal
transitions.
SUB: Press this button to enable sub wipe
pattern position setting for normal
transitions.
Among the [K1 CB1] button, [K2 CB2]
button, [K3] button, [K4] button, [MAIN]
button, and [SUB] button, you can select
multiple buttons.
POS: Press this button to enable pattern
movement in the x-axis and y-axis
directions with the trackball.
When the [USER] button is selected,
this enables the trackball to move the
pattern in the x-axis and y-axis
directions, and the Z-ring to adjust the
size of the pattern.
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.
CTR (center): When this button is pressed,
the pattern position returns to the
center. When the [USER] button is
selected, the pattern size also returns to
50.00.
SHIFT/CLR WORK BUFR: Press this
button twice in rapid succession to
reset all parameters on the target M/E
or PGM/PST to their initial values.
273Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
LOCAL: Enable operations in the DME
local coordinate space.
GLB (global): Enable operations in the
DME global coordinate space.
The [LOCAL] and [GLB] buttons can be
selected at the same time.
SRC (source): Enable operations in the
DME source coordinate space.
TRGT (target): Enable operations in the
DME target coordinate space.
The [SRC] and [TRGT] buttons cannot be
selected at the same time. When these
buttons are held down, trackball and Z-ring
operation is switched to a finer control.
(fine mode)
AXIS LOC (location): When this button is
lit, the trackball moves the rotational
axis of the image in the x-axis and y-
axis directions, and the Z-ring moves
the axis in the z-axis direction.
ASP PERS (aspect/perspective): When
the [SRC] button is lit, pressing this
button enables the trackball to control
the x-axis and y-axis directions
independently, and the Z-ring controls
the x-axis and y-axis directions
together, to vary the aspect ratio. When
the [SHIFT] button is held down and
this button is pressed, the trackball
controls the skew of the image in the x-
axis and y-axis directions.
When the [TRGT] button is lit,
pressing this button enables the
trackball to control the perspective of
the image in the x-axis and y-axis
directions.
The Z-ring controls the distance to the
viewpoint.
LOC (location) SIZE: When this button is
lit, the Z-ring controls the image size.
The trackball moves the image in the x-
axis and y-axis directions.
LOC (location) XYZ: When this button is
lit, the trackball moves the image in the
x-axis and y-axis directions, and the Z-
ring moves the image in the z-axis
direction.
SHIFT: While holding down this button,
pressing the [ASP PERS] button or
[ROT] button switches to the shifted
version of the corresponding function.
CLR WORK BUFR (clear work buffer):
Press this button once to clear only the
three-dimensional transform
parameters of the information held in
the work buffer. Press twice in rapid
succession to clear all of the
parameters, and return to the default
state.
ROT (rotation): When this button is lit, the
trackball rotates the image about the x-
and y-axes, and the Z-ring rotates the
image about the z-axis.
Pressing this while holding down the
[SHIFT] button enables rotation of the
image in the “Spin” mode. The
trackball and Z-ring operate in the
same manner.
X, Y, Z: These restrict which axes the
trackball and Z-ring can control. You
can select more than one.
When one of these buttons is selected,
you can enter the parameter value for
the corresponding axis using the
numeric keypad control block.
CTR (center): Pressing this button
changes the values of the three-
dimensional parameters currently
controlled by the trackball and Z-ring
to the closest detent values.
Pressing twice in rapid succession
returns the parameter values to their
defaults.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled
274 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
LOCAL (DELAY): Press this button,
turning it on, to enter a delay value
from the numeric keypad control block.
GLB (STB OFF: standby off): Press this
button to switch to standby off mode.
This button cannot be used for frame
memory clip operations.
SRC (REC: record): Press this button at
the same time as the [Y] button to start
recording. This button cannot be used
for frame memory clip operations.
TRGT (STOP): Press this button to stop
the tape, disk or frame memory clip.
AXIS LOC (START TC: start
timecode): Press this button to set the
timecode of the start point at that time.
The timecode of the start point is
updated to the current time each time
this button is pressed.
When the device the operation applies
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start
point updated by the setting of the
[MENU] button is as follows.
When the [MENU] button is On:
start point of the timeline
When the [MENU] button is Off:
start point of Cueup & Play
ASP PERS (STOP TC: stop timecode):
Press this button to set the timecode of
the stop point at that time. The
timecode of the stop point is updated to
the current time each time this button is
pressed.
When the device the operation applies
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop
point updated by the setting of the
[MENU] button is as follows.
When the [MENU] button is On: stop
point of the timeline
When the [MENU] button is Off:
stop point of Cueup & Play
LOC SIZE (VAR: variable speed
playback): Pressing this button and
turning the Z-ring plays back the tape,
disk or frame memory clip at a variable
speed and direction proportional to the
rotation angle of the Z-ring. The
variable speed range is –1 to +3 times
normal playback speed.
LOC XYZ (SHTL: shuttle): Pressing this
button and turning the Z-ring plays
back the tape, disk or frame memory
clip at a speed and direction
proportional to the rotation angle of the
Z-ring.
ROT (JOG): Pressing this button and
turning the Z-ring plays back the tape,
disk or frame memory clip at a speed
and direction proportional to the
rotation of the Z-ring.
CLR WORK BUFR (CUE): Pressing this
button cues the tape, disk or frame
memory clip automatically to the start
point.
X (REW: rewind): Press this button to
rewind the tape, disk or frame memory
clip.
Y (PLAY): Press this button to play the
tape, disk or frame memory clip.
Z (FF): Press this button to fast forward the
tape, disk or frame memory clip.
CTR (ALL STOP): Press this button to
stop all tape transport/disk drive/frame
memory operations.
When the resizer control mode is enabled
(for the MVS-8000G only)
LOCAL (K1): Select key 1.
GLB (K2): Select key 2.
SRC (K3): Select key 3.
TRGT (K4): Select key 4.
LOC SIZE (ASP: aspect): Pressing this
button and operating the trackball or Z-
ring changes the aspect ratio of a key to
which the resizer function is applied to.
When this button is held down, the
trackball or Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
LOC XYZ (LOC: location): Pressing this
button and operating the trackball or Z-
275Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
ring moves, shrinks, or magnifies a key
to which the resizer function is applied
to. When this button is held down, the
trackball or Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
ROT (RSZE: resizer): Press this button,
turning it on, to enable the resizer.
CLR WORK BUFR (CLR WORK
BUFR): Pressing this button once
returns the two-dimensional
transformation settings to the defaults.
Pressing twice in rapid succession
returns all resizer parameter values to
the defaults.
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.
CTR (center): Pressing this button once
changes the two-dimensional
transformation settings to the closest
detent values. Pressing twice in rapid
succession returns the two-dimensional
transformation settings to the defaults.
cTrackball
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
By moving this, you can move the pattern
in the x-axis and y-axis directions.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
Move the trackball to control the x- and y-
axes in a three-dimensional transform.
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held
down, the trackball operation is switched to
a finer control. (fine mode)
When the resizer control mode is
enabled (for the MVS-8000G only)
By turning the trackball, you can move in
the x- and y-directions of the key to which
the resizer is applied, and change the aspect
ratio.
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]
button is held down, the trackball operation
is switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
d Z-ring
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
When the [USER] button is selected, by
turning the ring you can adjust the size of
the pattern.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
Turn this ring to control the z-axis in a
three-dimensional transform.
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held
down, the Z-ring operation is switched to a
finer control. (fine mode)
When the effect run control mode is
enabled
By turning the Z-ring, you can run the
keyframe effect, independent of the STOP
NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar settings
in the keyframe control block. Turn
clockwise to run the effect in the normal
direction, and counterclockwise for the
reverse direction.
When the resizer control mode is enabled
(for the MVS-8000G only)
By turning the ring, you can zoom the key
to which the resizer is applied, and change
the aspect ratio.
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]
button is held down, the Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled
Turning the Z-ring controls the tape
transport/disk drive/frame memory clip
operations, at a speed determined by the
operating buttons. Turn clockwise for the
normal direction, and counterclockwise for
the reverse direction.
276 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
e MENU button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable
adjusting the parameters allocated to the
knobs in the menu using the trackball and
Z-ring.
In the case of the DME menu, the operation
applies to the selected DME channel.
In VTR/disk recorder/frame memory
operation mode, press this button, setting it
to On. This makes it possible to carry out
timeline start/stop point setting operation
for the device selected with the device
selection buttons.
277Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Device Control Block (Joystick)
The description below of frame memory
clip operations applies only to the MVS-
8000A/8000G.
All functions of the joystick type device
control block are equivalent to the functions
of the trackball type, except that the
trackball and Z-ring operations are carried
out with the joystick.
aJoystick
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
By moving this, you can move the pattern
in the x-axis and y-axis directions.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
By moving this, you can carry out
operations in the x-, y-, and z-axes.
When the following buttons are held down,
the joystick operation is switched to a finer
control. (fine mode)
• The button on the end of the joystick
• [SRC] button
• [TRGT] button
Depending on the settings made in the
Setup menu, the operation speed multiple
can be changed.
When the effect run control mode is
enabled
By moving the joystick sideways, you can
run the keyframe effect, independent of the
STOP NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar
settings in the keyframe control block.
DEVUSER
M/E1
DME1
DME5
MENU
SHIFT
M/E2
DME2
DME6
ASP
PERS
SUB
AXIS
LOC
MAIN
LOCAL
K1
CB1
GLB
K2
CB2
CLR
WORK
BUFR
M/E3
DME3
DME7
X
P/P
DME4
DME8
Y Z CTR
RUN
CTRL
RSZR
CTRL
LOC
SIZE
ASP
LOC
XYZ
LOC
ROT
POS
RSZR
SRC
K3
TRGT
K4
Operating buttons
1 Joystick
MENU button
Region selection buttons
278 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Move to the right to run the effect in the
normal direction, and to the left for the
reverse direction.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled
Moving the joystick sideways controls the
tape transport/disk drive/frame memory
clip operation, at a speed determined by the
operating buttons.
When the resizer control mode is
enabled (for the MVS-8000G only)
Move for operations in the x-, y-, and z-
axes. Hold down the button on the tip of the
joystick to switch the joystick operation to
a finer control. (fine mode).
Move to the right for the normal direction,
and to the left for the reverse direction.
Device Control Block (Search Dial)
The description below of frame memory
clip operations applies only to the MVS-
8000A/8000G.
Using the device control block (search
dial), you can directly operate an XDCAM,
disk recorder, VTR, other external device,
frame memory clip, or shot box. The device
control block (trackball) and device control
block (joystick) can be used together.
TIME
LINE
DEV
1
CURRENT
START TC
STOP TC
DEV
2
DEV
3
DEV
4
DEV
5
DEV
6
FM1
CLIP
FM2
CLIP
SBOX
1
SBOX
2
SBOX
3
START
TC
STOP
TC
SET
START
TC
SET
STOP
TC
SET
DUR
STB
OFF
ALL
STOP
STOP
REC
PLAY FFREWCUE
DELAY
SHTL JOG VAR ENBL
1 Timecode display
2 Device selection buttons
4 DELAY button
5 Editing
buttons
6External device
operation buttons
7 TIMELINE button
8 STOP button
9 Search dial
3 SBOX buttons
279Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aTimecode display
This shows the current time (CURRENT)
and the start and stop point timecode values
for the current reference device (START
TC, STOP TC). When you press a device
selection button, the button lights, selecting
the assigned device as the reference device,
and displaying its setting value.
In the case of the [SBOX] buttons, the
display does not change. When the
operation applies to a VTR/disk recorder,
the displayed setting value depends on
whether the [TIMELINE] button is on or
off, as follows.
When the [TIMELINE] button is on:
Displays the start and stop points of the
last set keyframe on the timeline. When
the keyframe number is changed and
the last register and keyframe change,
the display also changes. (timeline
setting mode)
When the [TIMELINE] button is off:
Displays the Cueup & Play (rewind
action) start and stop points.
bDevice selection buttons
These buttons are used for selecting
assigned external devices or frame memory
clips. Each button can only be assigned to a
single device. Carry out the assignment in
the Setup menu (see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2)). To select an assigned
device, press the corresponding button,
which lights green. To select more than one
device simultaneously, hold down the
button for the first selection, while pressing
the buttons for the other selections in turn.
The second and subsequent selected
buttons light amber. If you press another
button without holding down the first
selected button, the second button will be
the reference device and light green.
DEV: Assign external devices DEV1 to
DEV12.
FM CLIP: Assign frame memory clips
FM1 to FM8.
Device selection buttons can be set as
SBOX buttons or DELAY button in the
Setup menu.
cSBOX (shotbox) buttons
Assign a shotbox saved in registers 1 to 99.
When you press a button, the assigned
shotbox is selected, and executed. Carry out
the assignment in the Setup menu (see
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).
SBOX buttons can be set as device
selection buttons or DELAY button in the
Setup menu.
dDELAY button
When pressed, this button lights green, the
numeric keypad control block display
changes to DELAY__ : , and you can set
the start delay time for the selected device.
The setting range is from 00:00 to 59:29
(depends on the video format). This button
goes off when another timecode setting
button ([START TC], [STOP TC], [SET
START TC], [SET STOP TC], or [SET
DUR]) is pressed. Carry out the assignment
in the Setup menu (see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2)).
The DELAY button can be set as a device
selection button or an SBOX button in the
Setup menu.
eEditing buttons
These buttons set start and stop points.
These operations are only valid while a
device is selected with the device selection
buttons.
START TC: Press this button to set the
timecode of the start point at that time.
The timecode of the start point is
updated to the current time each time
this button is pressed.
When the device the operation applies
280 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start
point updated by the setting of the
[TIMELINE] button is as follows.
When the [TIMELINE] button is
On: start point of the timeline
When the [TIMELINE] button is
Off: start point of Cueup & Play
STOP TC: Press this button to set the
timecode of the stop point at that time.
The timecode of the stop point is
updated to the current time each time
this button is pressed.
When the device the operation applies
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop
point updated by the setting of the
[TIMELINE] button is as follows.
When the [TIMELINE] button is
On: stop point of the timeline
When the [TIMELINE] button is
Off: stop point of Cueup & Play
SET START TC, SET STOP TC, SET
DUR: When pressed, these buttons
light green, “START TC”, “STOP TC”
or “DUR” appears in the numeric
keypad control block display, and you
can enter a timecode from the numeric
keypad. If you enter a numeric value
and press the [ENTER] button, the
button goes off, whereas if you press
the [ENTER] button without entering a
numeric value the numeric keypad
control block display shows
“--:--:--:--”. To exit the numeric value
entry mode, either repeat pressing the
same button, or press a different
numeric keypad control block linked
button, or a mode selection button such
as the [EFF] and [SNAPSHOT]
buttons in the numeric keypad control
block. If the timecode has been set
correctly, the entered numeric value
appears in the timecode display.
STB (standby) OFF: When pressed, this
button flashes amber, and the device
selected with the device selection
buttons exits from the standby mode.
This button cannot be used for frame
memory clip operations.
CUE: When pressed, this button flashes
amber together with the [ALL STOP]
button, and the device selected with the
device selection button is cued up to the
start point of the material. When more
than one device is selected, the amber
flashing continues until the reference
device is cued up, and when the cueing
up is finished, this button lights green.
REW: When pressed, this button lights
amber, and material of the device
selected with the device selection
buttons is rewound. To stop during the
rewind, press the [STOP] button or
[ALL STOP] button.
PLAY: When pressed, this button lights
amber, and the device selected with the
device selection buttons plays. The
playback stops not only if the [STOP]
button is pressed, but also if any of the
[STB OFF], [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [PLAY], [FF], and [ALL
STOP] buttons is pressed. When the
[VAR] button is pressed while the
device is playing back, the device plays
at one times normal speed in variable
mode.
FF: When pressed, this button lights amber,
and the material of the device selected
with the device selection buttons is fast
forwarded. To stop during the fast-
forward, press the [STOP] button or
[ALL STOP] button.
ALL STOP: When pressed, all device
material playback and other operations
stop. During cueing up of any of the
devices, this button flashes amber, and
when all cueing up operations are
completed, it lights green.
REC: When pressed simultaneously with
the [PLAY] button, this button lights
red (the [PLAY] button lights amber),
281Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
and the image from the selected device
is recorded.
This button cannot be used for frame
memory clip operations.
fExternal device operation buttons
ENBL (enable): When this is pressed,
turning it on, the search dial [VAR],
[JOG], and [SHTL] button operations
are enabled.
VAR (variable): Sets the search dial to
variable mode.
JOG: Sets the search dial to jog mode.
SHTL (shuttle): Sets the search dial to
shuttle mode.
gTIMELINE button
Press to switch the device selected with the
device selection buttons to timeline setting
mode.
hSTOP button
When pressed, this lights amber, and
operation of the device selected with the
device selection buttons stops.
iSearch dial
Use this for search and other operations on
the material of an external device.
For details of the method of use, see
“Controlling Tape/Disk Transport” in
Chapter 12 (Volume 2).
Keyframe Control Block
In the keyframe control block, you can
carry out effect editing and execution.
282 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aEDIT ENBL (edit enable) button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable
effect editing operations with the keyframe
control block.
When macro editing is carried out, this
button lights red.
bEdit point specification buttons
GO TO TC (Go to timecode): Press this
button, turning it on, to enter a numeric
value from the numeric keypad control
block, and move the edit point to the
specified timecode position.
GO TO KF (Go to keyframe): Press this
button, turning it on, to enter a numeric
value from the numeric keypad control
block, and move the edit point to the
specified keyframe.
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
number specified by numeric entry
with the numeric keypad control block.
PREV KF (previous keyframe): When
this button is pressed, the edit point
moves to the keyframe immediately
before the current time (the position
where the effect is currently stopped).
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
immediately before the current event.
NEXT KF (next keyframe): When this
button is pressed, the edit point moves
to the keyframe immediately after the
current time.
During macro editing, pressing this
STOP
NEXT
KF
NORM REV
NORM
/REV
EFF
LOOP
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
DELAY
EFF
DUR
COPY PASTE
DEL
SHIFT INS PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MOD UNDO
CONST
DUR
KF
LOOP
GO TO
TC
AUTO
INS
PAUSE
GO TO
KF
ALL FROM
TO
FF
RE
WIND
RUN
0 EFF LOOP button
1 EDIT ENBL button
2 Edit point
specification
buttons
3 Editing buttons
4 Duration setting buttons
5 KF LOOP button
6 PAUSE button
7 Effect execution section
8 Effect execution direction selection
buttons
9 STOP NEXT KF button
qa AUTO INS button
283Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
button moves the edit point to the event
immediately after the current event.
cEditing buttons
ALL: Press this button, turning it on, to
select all keyframes (during macro
editing, all events) in the effect.
FROM TO: Press this button, turning it on,
to enter numeric values from the
numeric keypad control block, and
select a specified range of keyframes
(during macro editing, the specified
range of events).
INS (insert): When this button is pressed, a
new keyframe is inserted after the
current keyframe. Pressing this button
while holding down the [SHIFT]
button inserts a new keyframe before
the current keyframe.
During macro editing, pressing this
button registers an event after the
current event.
MOD (modify): When this button is
pressed, the selected keyframe is
modified with the values of the current
keyframe. When the edit point is
between two keyframes, the
immediately preceding keyframe is
modified. You can also select multiple
keyframes, and modify them in a single
operation. At this time, pressing this
button while holding down the
[SHIFT] button modifies all selected
keyframes with the changed values
taken as relative values.
During macro editing, pressing this
button amends the selected event.
DEL (delete): When this button is pressed,
the selected keyframe is deleted. When
the edit point is between two
keyframes, the immediately preceding
keyframe is deleted. During macro
editing, pressing this button deletes the
selected event. You can also select
multiple keyframes or macro events,
and delete them in a single operation.
COPY: When this button is pressed, the
selected keyframe (during macro
editing, macro event) is copied. You
can also select multiple keyframes or
macro events, and copy them in a
single operation.
PASTE: When this button is pressed, the
deleted or copied keyframe (during
macro editing, macro event) is inserted
after the current keyframe (during
macro editing, macro event). Pressing
this button while holding down the
[SHIFT] button inserts the deleted or
copied keyframe (during macro
editing, macro event) before the current
keyframe (during macro editing, macro
event).
SHIFT: Hold down this button, and press
the [INS] button, [MOD] button, or
[PASTE] button, to obtain the shifted
function for the button.
UNDO: When this button is pressed, the
last executed keyframe (during macro
editing, macro event) insertion,
modification, or deletion, or paste
operation is canceled.
dDuration setting buttons
KF DUR (keyframe duration): Press this
button, turning it on, to set the
keyframe duration of the selected
keyframe, by numeric value entry from
the numeric keypad control block.
EFF DUR (effect duration): Press this
button, turning it on, to set the effect
duration from the numeric keypad
control block.
DELAY: Press this button, turning it on, to
enter a delay value from the numeric
keypad control block.
CONST DUR (constant duration): Select
the duration mode. When this is lit, the
mode is constant duration mode, and
when off, variable duration mode.
284 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
eKF LOOP (keyframe loop) button
Press this button, turning it on, to execute
the effect the specified number of times
through the keyframes in the specified
range.
fPAUSE button
When this button is pressed, a pause is
applied to the selected keyframe.
When editing a macro, press this button,
turning it on, to include a pause event in the
macro. The pause length can be set in the
numeric keypad control block.
gEffect execution section
RUN: When this button is pressed, the
effect is run from the first keyframe to
the last keyframe. However, if a pause
is set on a keyframe, the effect stops at
that point. Press this button again to
resume execution, and continue to the
next pause point or the end of the
effect.
Effect indicator: This comprises multiple
LEDs, which show the progress of the
effect.
Fader lever: Moving this up or down
manually runs the effect.
REWIND: When this button is pressed, the
currently recalled effect is rewound to
the first keyframe.
FF (fast forward): When this button is
pressed, the currently recalled effect is
advanced to the last keyframe.
hEffect execution direction selection
buttons
NORM (normal): When this button is lit,
effect execution runs from the first
keyframe to the last keyframe.
REV (reverse): When this button is lit,
effect execution runs from the last
keyframe to the first keyframe.
Pressing one of these buttons automatically
turns the other off.
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): Press this
button, turning it on, to reverse the
direction of the effect when it reaches
the last keyframe or first keyframe.
iSTOP NEXT KF (stop next
keyframe) button
When this button is pressed, turning it on,
the effect execution range is from the
current time to the next keyframe.
jEFF LOOP (effect loop) button
When the effect reaches the last keyframe
with this button on, it returns to the first
keyframe and repeats.
kAUTO INS (auto insert) button
When editing a macro, press this button,
turning it on, to enable the auto insert
function, so that every control panel
operation you carry out is added to the
macro as an event.
Numeric Keypad Control Block
The numeric keypad control block is used
for region selection, for saving and
recalling snapshots, effects and shotboxes,
for entering numeric values for trackball
operation and keyframe operation, and for
transition rate entry.
285Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aMode selection buttons
EFF (effect): Press to save or recall an
effect.
SNAPSHOT: Press to save or recall a
snapshot.
SHOTBOX: Press to save or recall a
shotbox.
MCRO (macro): Press to save, recall or
edit a macro.
TRANS RATE (transition rate): Press to
set the transition rate.
Hold down this button, and press one of
the key delegation buttons [KEY1] to
[KEY4] in the transition control block
to set an independent key transition
rate.
bRegion selection buttons
These select the functional block (“region”)
of the control panel to which operations
apply.
You can select more than one region at the
same time.
The first button you press is taken as the
reference region, and lights green, while the
next pressed button lights amber.
With the exception of the [MASTER] and
[ALL] buttons, you can change the region
assignment to the buttons as desired in the
Setup menu.
MASTR: Press this, turning it on, to save
region information in a master
snapshot register or master timeline
register, or to recall such region
information.
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL P-BUS GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
GPI
ENTER
1 Mode selection buttons 5 Display
2 Region selection buttons
3 Function selection buttons
4 Numeric keypad
286 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
ALL: Select all regions. When any region
is already selected, pressing this button
makes all regions unselected.
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P: Select the
corresponding regions, M/E-1, M/E-2,
M/E-3, and PGM/PST.
USER 1 to USER 8: Select a User region.
DME1 to DME8: Select a DME channel.
P-Bus: Select the P-Bus region.
GPI: Select the GPI region.
RTR:Select the router region.
DEV1 to DEV12: Select the Device 1 to
Device 12 regions respectively.
MCRO: Select the macro region.
cFunction selection buttons
UNDO: After recalling a register, press this
button to return to the state before
recalling the register.
STORE STATS (store status): This lights
amber when data is stored in a register.
After saving data to a register, hold
down this button and press the
[UNDO] button to return the register to
the state before the data was saved.
TC (timecode): Press this button, turning it
on, to switch transition rate entry to the
timecode entry mode.
STORE: Press this button to switch to the
mode for saving a snapshot, effect,
shotbox or macro in a register.
RCALL (recall): Press this button to
switch to the mode for recalling a
snapshot, effect, shotbox or macro
from a register.
[STORE] button or [RCALL] button
flashes amber when one or more of the
regions assigned to the Region selection
buttons are not selected by the Region
Select menu.
dNumeric keypad
In addition to the buttons for numeric input,
this includes buttons for adding attributes to
snapshots.
0 to 9: Used to input numeric digits.
. (period): Enters the decimal point.
When the [TRANS RATE] button is lit,
enters “00.” When the [EFF] button,
[SNAPSHOT] button or [SHOTBOX]
button is lit, this is used to find an
empty register.
+/–/ EFF DISS (effect dissolve): Invert the
sign, negative or positive.
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,
applies the effect dissolve attribute to a
snapshot.
CLR/AUTO TRANS (clear/auto
transition): Clear an input value,
returning to the previous state.
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,
applies the auto transition attribute to a
snapshot.
TRIM/GPI ENBL (enable): After
entering a difference value to be added
to an existing setting, press this button
to confirm the change.
ENTER: Confirm an entered value.
eDisplay
This shows the selected region name and
entered numeric values.
287Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Fade to Black Control Block
aFTB (fade to black) button
Press this button to fade to black the
program output of the PGM/PST bank, at
the set transition rate. You can set the fade
to black transition rate in the menu.
bPreview selection buttons
Press one of these buttons to select a signal
on the edit preview bus. Each button can be
assigned to any preview output in setup (see
Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).
PST (preset): When this button is pressed,
the signal selected on the background B
row of the PGM/PST bank is selected
on the edit preview bus.
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P
preview): The preview signal (M/E-1
PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P
PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank
corresponding to the pressed button is
selected on the edit preview bus.
M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E
3, P/P key preview): The key preview
signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 K-
PVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of
the M/E or PGM/PST bank
corresponding to the pressed button is
selected on the edit preview bus.
DME V (DME monitor video): When this
button is pressed, the DME monitor
output video signal (DME MON V) is
selected on the edit preview bus.
DME K (DME monitor key): When this
button is pressed, the DME monitor
output key signal (DME MON K) is
selected on the edit preview bus.
cAUTO button
When this button is pressed, the M/E or
PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on
the edit preview bus is automatically
switched to the program signal depending
on the on-air status.
AUTO PST P/P
FTB
DME
K
DME
V
M/E
3
M/E
2
M/E
1
M/E
3K
M/E
2K
M/E
IK
P/P
K
3 AUTO button 1 FTB button 2 Preview selection buttons
288 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses)
There are also models without the selected
source name displays and source name
displays shown in the following figure.
All operations except those of the [DEST]
button and [SHIFT] button are the same as
for a model with selected source name
displays and source name displays.
aAUX delegation buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the bus to which to assign the cross-
point buttons in the auxiliary bus control
block.
The buses that can be selected are as
follows.
LEVEL
1
DEST
SHIFT
RTR
2ND
KEY
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
M/E
1
M/E
1
LEVEL
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
LEVEL
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
LEVEL
4
PGM
SHIFT
PGM
SHIFT
DME
3K
DME
4V
DME
4K
FMS
1
FMS
2
EDIT
PVW
1 AUX delegation buttons
2 Selected source name displays
3 DEST button
qs Level selection buttons
7 KEY button
8 2ND button
qa RTR button
0 SHIFT button
6 XPT HOLD buttons
4 Selected bus display
5 Cross-point buttons
9 Source name displays
2nd
1st
289Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
• AUX buses 1 to 48
• MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses
• FMS 1 (frame memory source 1) and
FMS 2 buses
• DME 1V to DME 8V buses
• DME 1K to DME 8K buses
• EDIT PVW (preview) bus
• M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and M/E-1 UTILITY
2 buses
• M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and M/E-2 UTILITY
2 buses
• M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and M/E-3 UTILITY
2 buses
• P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P UTILITY 2
buses
• DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses
• DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses
• M/E-1 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses
• M/E-2 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses
• M/E-3 key 1 fill to M/E-3 key 4 fill buses
• M/E-1 Key 1 source to Key 4 source
buses
• M/E-2 Key 1 source to Key 4 source
buses
• M/E-3 key 1 source to M/E-3 key 4
source buses
• M/E-1 external DME bus
• M/E-2 external DME bus
• M/E-3 external DME bus
• P/P external DME bus
• DME UTILITY1 and DME UTILITY2
buses
• CCR (color corrector) 1 and 2 buses
bSelected source name displays
These show the name of the currently
selected signal (source) on the bus
corresponding to the delegation button.
cDEST (destination) button
Press this button, turning it on, to display
the names of buses allocated to the
delegation buttons in the selection source
name displays.
In the case of a module without selected
source name displays, this button is invalid.
dSelected bus display
This shows the name of the bus selected by
the auxiliary bus delegation buttons.
eCross-point buttons
The cross-points in the auxiliary bus control
block are arranged in two rows: an upper
row (1st row) and a lower row (2nd row),
and are allocated to the buses selected with
the AUX delegation buttons. The 1st row
contains the cross-point buttons for
unshifted buses, and the 2nd row contains
the cross-point buttons for shifted buses.
When the DME 1V/K to 8V/K buses are
selected with the AUX delegation buttons,
the 1st row cross-point buttons are for the
currently showing side of DME, and the
2nd row are for the reverse side.
By holding down the [2ND] button and
making an AUX delegation selection, you
can allocate the 2nd row to a different bus
from the 1st row.
In this case, if the 32nd button is set to be a
[SHIFT] button (in a 32-button system), the
cross-point buttons switch to the shifted
allocation while the [SHIFT] button is
enabled.
fXPT HOLD (cross-point hold)
buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
enable cross-point hold.
gKEY button
While this button is held down, you can use
the cross-point row of buttons to select key
signals.
h2ND button
After selecting a bus with an AUX
delegation button, hold down this button,
and select another AUX delegation, thus
allocating a different bus in the 2nd row
from the 1st row.
290 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
iSource name displays
These show the names of the source signals
which can be selected by the cross-point
buttons. While the [SHIFT] button is
enabled, the shifted signal name is
displayed. If a different bus is allocated to
the 2nd row, while the [2ND] button is held
down, the 2nd row signal name is
displayed.
While the [KEY] button is held down, the
source name of the key signal assigned to
the cross-point buttons appears.
jSHIFT button
While this button is enabled, the shifted
signal names appear in the source name
display. Pressing this buttons toggles the
source name display between the shifted
signal names and unshifted signal names.
In the case of a module without source
name displays, this button is invalid.
kRTR (router) button
Press this button, turning it on, to assign the
auxiliary bus control block to router
control.
For details of the names and functions of
parts for router control, see the next
section.
lLevel selection buttons
Used when the auxiliary bus control block
is carrying out router control.
291Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control)
Press the [RTR] button, turning it on, to
assign the auxiliary bus control block to
router control.
aDestination selection buttons
Press a button, turning it on, to select the
destination to which the router source is
assigned.
The button pressed to assign a destination
to a source selection button in the 1st row
lights amber. When another button is
pressed to assign a different destination to a
source selection button in the 2nd row, it
lights green.
bSelected source name displays
These show the source name selected for
the destination.
If the source names and destination names
are set in the Setup menu to “SW’er Local”
LEVEL
1
DEST
SHIFT
RTR
2ND
KEY
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
M/E
1
M/E
1
LEVEL
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
LEVEL
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
LEVEL
4
PGM
SHIFT
PGM
SHIFT
DME
3K
DME
4V
DME
4K
FMS
1
FMS
2
EDIT
PVW
1 Destination selection buttons
2 Selected source name displays
3 DEST button
4 Selected destination display
5 Source selection
button rows
6 XPT HOLD buttons
7 KEY button
qs Level selection buttons
qa RTR button
0 SHIFT button
9 Source name displays
8 2ND button
2nd
1st
292 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
mode, then the description names appear
here.
cDEST (destination) button
Press this button, turning it on, to display
the names of the destinations assigned to
the destination selection buttons in the
selected source name displays.
dSelected destination display
This shows the name of the destination
selected by the destination selection
buttons. If a protected destination is
selected, the indication “PROTECT”
appears.
eSource selection button rows
The destination selected with a destination
selection button is assigned to a source
selection button. Press a source selection
button to select a source. The 1st row of
buttons are source selection buttons for the
unshifted destinations, and the 2nd row are
shifted source selection buttons. By holding
down the [2ND] button, and selecting a
destination, you can assign a different
destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row.
In the 1st row, the button to which a
destination is assigned lights amber. If a
different destination is assigned to a button
in the 2nd row, the button lights green.
When the 32nd button is set as a [SHIFT]
button (in a 32-button system), while the
[SHIFT] button is active, these switch to the
shifted source selection buttons. By using
the [KEY] button, you can expand the
source selection as follows.
fXPT HOLD (cross-point hold)
buttons
Not used in router control mode.
gKEY button
When this button is enabled by a setting in
the Setup menu, by holding it down during
a source selection you can expand the
function of the [SHIFT] button. (See
“Expanding the shift function” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).)
h2ND button
After selecting a destination with the
destination selection buttons, hold down
this button and make another destination
selection to assign a different destination
from the 1st row to the 2nd row.
iSource name displays
These display the names of signals
(sources) that can be selected with the
cross-point buttons. While the [SHIFT]
button is active, the shifted signal names
appear. While the [KEY] button is held
down, the expanded signal names appear.
When a different destination is assigned to
the 2nd row, the 2nd row signal names
Source
selection
[SHIFT] [KEY] Selection
operation
1 to 31 Off Off Press the source
selection button.
32 to 62 On Off Press the
[SHIFT] button,
then press the
source selection
button.
63 to 93 Off On Hold down the
[KEY] button,
and press the
source selection
button.
94 to 124 On On Hold down the
[KEY] button,
and press the
[SHIFT] button,
turning it on (the
[SHIFT] button
locks here, even
when in Hold
mode), then
press the source
selection button.
Source
selection
[SHIFT] [KEY] Selection
operation
293Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
appear only while the [2ND] button is held
down.
jSHIFT button
While this button is active, the source name
displays show the shifted signal names.
Press this button to toggle between the
shifted and unshifted states.
kRTR (router) button
Press this button, turning it on, to assign the
auxiliary bus control block to router
control.
lLevel selection buttons
To each of the four buttons, plural S-Bus
levels are assigned in the Setup menu. Press
a button, turning it on, to make operations
apply to those S-Bus levels.
294 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Menu Control Block
aTop menu selection buttons
These select the menu appearing in the
menu display.
It is also possible to change the assignment
of these buttons in setup.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
bMenu display
This shows the menu currently in use.
cKnobs
These adjust the parameter values
appearing in the menu.
dUser preference buttons
These recall the functions or menus
assigned to them in the Setup menu. In the
default setup, nothing is assigned to the
[PREFS 1] to [PREFS 7] buttons.
It is also possible to change the assignment
of these buttons in setup.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
PREFS 8 button: When this button is on,
control of an editor from the Remote1
port on the rear panel of the switcher is
possible. However, even when it is off,
control of the Edit PVW bus is always
possible.
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3P/P
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
COPY
SWAP MISC
DME GLB
EFF
RTR DEV
KEY
FRAME
SHOT
BOX
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
FILE USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP DIAG
PREFS
1
PREFS
2
PREFS
3
PREFS
4
PREFS
5
PREFS
6
PREFS
7
PREFS
8
HOME
SUB
MENU
SITE
2 Menu display1 Top menu selection buttons
3 Knobs4 User preference buttons
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3P/PHOME
CCR
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
STATS
COPY
SWAP MISC
DME GLB
EFF
RTR DEV
KEY
FRAME
SHOT
BOX
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
FILE USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP DIAG
SUB
MENU
SITE
295Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block
aMemory card slot
This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II
compliant memory card. You can use it in
software installation, and for saving and
reading in data, such as snapshot, keyframe,
effect, and setup data.
bDEVICE connectors
There are three USB connectors.
You can connect a device such as a mouse,
keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is
equipped with a USB interface to any of
these connectors.
For details on the devices that can be
connected, consult your Sony
representative.
1 Memory card slot 2 DEVICE connectors
296 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block
a“Memory Stick” status indicator
Lights in red during access to a “Memory
Stick.”
Note
Do not power the unit off or remove a
“Memory Stick” when the “Memory Stick”
status indicator is lit.
b“Memory Stick” slot
Insert “Memory Sticks.” You can use it in
software installation, and for saving and
reading data, such as snapshot, keyframe,
effect, and setup data.
See the next item, “Memory Sticks” for
more information about the usable
“Memory Sticks” and their handling.
cDEVICE connectors
There are three USB connectors.
You can connect a device such as a mouse,
keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is
equipped with a USB interface to any of
these connectors.
For details on the devices that can be
connected, consult your Sony
representative.
About “Memory Sticks”
Usable “Memory Sticks”
This unit has been confirmed to operate
with those of the following “Memory
Sticks” that have a capacity of 8 GB
(gigabytes) or less. However, operation
with all “Memory Sticks” is not guaranteed.
• “Memory Stick”
1 “Memory Stick” status indicator
2 “Memory Stick” slot
3 DEVICE connectors
297Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
• “Memory Stick PRO”
• “Memory Stick Duo”
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo”
Notes
• When using a “Memory Stick PRO,”
high-rate data transfer using parallel
interface is not supported.
• A “MagicGate Memory Stick” can also
be used, but this system does not support
the MagicGate function.
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be
sure to use it with a “Memory Stick Duo
Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or equivalent). If
you insert a “Memory Stick Duo”
without using the adaptor, there is the
possibility that the stick cannot be
removed, resulting in a serious accident.
Handling “Memory Sticks”
When using “Memory Sticks,” pay
attention to the following points.
• Do not touch the connector of the
“Memory Stick” with anything, including
your finger or metallic objects.
• Do not attach anything other than the
supplied label to the “Memory Stick”
labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick
out beyond the labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its
case.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory
Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify the
“Memory Stick.”
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get
wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick”
in a location that is:
– Extremely hot, such as in a car parked
in the sun
– Under direct sunlight
– Very humid or subject to corrosive
substances
298 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Utility/Shotbox Control Block
aBank selection buttons
Press any of the [BANK1] to [BANK4]
buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall
buttons. The selected button lights amber.
bMemory recall buttons
You can use these buttons to recall
frequently used menus, utility functions,
shotbox registers, or macro registers that
you have assigned.
When a utility function is allocated to a
button, the button lights orange (or green
depending on the status), and the allocated
function name appears. Pressing the button
executes the allocated function. When the
function constitutes a switching on/off
operation, the button lights green;
otherwise, it only momentarily lights green.
When a shotbox register or macro register
recall is assigned to a button, the button
lights orange, and the assigned register
name appears. (If the register is empty, the
button goes off.) In the case of a shotbox
function, pressing the button executes the
assigned shotbox function, and the button
lights yellow. In the case of a macro
register, pressing the button executes the
assigned macro, and the button flashes
yellow.
1
BANK
1
2 3 4
7
BANK
2
BANK
3
BANK
4
56
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
1 Bank selection buttons
2 Memory recall buttons
299Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block
(Simple Type)
The simple versions of the transition
control block and Flexi Pad control block
shown in the following figure is designed to
allow simplified operations than with the
standard type. The transitions carried out
using these simple-type control blocks are
also referred to as “simple transitions” in
this User’s guide.
300 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
KEY1
NORM
/REV
REV
KEY2
LIMIT
SET
PTN
LIMIT
TAKE
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
UNDO
MIX
NAM
WIPE
DME
ON
OVER
ON
OVER
1 2
3 4
5 6
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
78
2 Key transition selection buttons
6 Key status display
1 Transition type selection buttons
3 Transition execution section
5 Pattern limit buttons
4 Wipe direction selection buttons
qa Numeric display
0 XPT HOLD status display
7 Mode selection buttons
9 UNDO button
8 Memory recall section
Shown above is the right-hand type transition control block (with the right-hand fader lever).
301Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (with INH
button)
aTransition type selection buttons
You can assign these buttons in setup to any
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2)). Press any of the following
buttons, turning it on, to select the transition
type.
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
determine the type of the next transition for
a background.
To select the key transition type, hold down
the [KEY1] or [KEY2] button, and press
one of the following buttons, turning it on.
When multi-program mode is selected in
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the
following buttons may light.
MIX: In a background transition, the new
video fades in as the current video
fades out. During the transition, the
overall signal level is maintained at
100%.
In a key transition, the key fades in (for
insertion) or out (for removal).
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and
new video signals are compared, and
the signal with the higher luminance
level is given priority in the output.
The current video is maintained at
100% output for the first half of the
transition as the new video increases
progressively to 100%, then the current
video is progressively reduced from
100% to zero in the second half while
the new video is maintained at 100%.
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the
new video, using the wipe pattern
selected in the Wipe menu.
INH
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
LIMIT
SET
PIN
LIMIT
NORM
/REV
REV
UNDO
MIX
NAM
WIPE
DME
TAKE
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
qs INH button
Memory recall section
UNDO button
302 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
DME: This applies a wipe-like transition,
using the DME effect selected in the
DME Wipe menu.
FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP,
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is
played back together with the
transition. At this point, you can also
carry out a background transition (wipe
or mix (dissolve)) simultaneously
together with the clip.
bKey transition selection buttons
To insert or delete key 1 on the next
transition, hold down the [KEY1] button,
and select the type of transition using the
transition type selection buttons. If the key
is currently not inserted, the transition will
insert it, and if the key is currently inserted,
the transition will delete it. You can use the
[KEY2] button in a similar way.
While these buttons are held down, you can
select a key source with the cross-point
buttons on the key bus.
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid
succession changes the state of the
corresponding key bus so that a cross-point
can be selected.
a) The key bus switching button [KEY3] in the cross-
point control block goes off.
b) The key bus switching button [KEY4] in the cross-
point control block goes off.
cTransition execution section
Fader lever: Move this vertically to carry
out a transition.
When the split fader function is
enabled, by pressing the projection on
the left side of the grip you can release
the lock and separate the two halves of
the fader lever. With the split fader
lever, in a background mix transition,
you can control the background A and
B buses independently.
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the transition.
Transition rate display: This displays the
transition rate (the time from the
beginning of the transition to its
completion) set for an auto transition,
in frames.
You can set the transition rate using the
numeric keypad control block or menu.
TAKE button: Pressing this button carries
out an auto transition of the set
transition rate. The transition starts
immediately, and the button lights
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
dWipe direction selection buttons
REV (reverse): When this button is off, the
wipe proceeds in the normal direction.
When the button is lit, the wipe
proceeds in the reverse direction.
The normal direction refers to the black
to white direction or in the direction of
the arrow as shown in “Wipe Pattern
List” (page 560) and “DME Wipe
Pattern List” (page 566) in Appendix
(Volume 1).
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe
direction alternates between normal
and reverse every time a transition is
executed.
ePattern limit buttons
LIMIT SET: Move the fader lever to the
position of a particular pattern size, and
stop it there, then press this button to
set the pattern limit range. This button
is enabled when the [PTN LIMIT]
button is off.
PTN (pattern) LIMIT: When a wipe or
DME wipe is selected, pressing this
Key delegation button
(double press)
Corresponding
key bus
[KEY1] key 1 a)
[KEY2] key 2 b)
303Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
button, turning it on, enables the
pattern limit function.
fKey status display
For each of keys 1 and 2, when the key is
inserted, the corresponding ON indicator
lights. The OVER indicators show the
priority between keys 1 and 2, by lighting
when the corresponding key is on top. For
example, when key 1 appears over key 2 on
the program monitor, the OVER indicator
for key 1 lights.
The following is the Flexi Pad control
block.
gMode selection buttons
WIPE: When saving or recalling a wipe
snapshot, use this in combination with
the buttons of the memory recall
section.
DME: When saving or recalling a DME
wipe snapshot, use this in combination
with the buttons of the memory recall
section.
SNAPSHOT: When saving or recalling a
snapshot, use this in combination with
the buttons of the memory recall
section.
hMemory recall section
This consists of eight buttons with LCDs,
whose display changes according to the
operation mode. Use these in combination
with the mode selection buttons to save or
recall wipe snapshots, DME wipe
snapshots, or snapshots.
iUNDO button
After recalling a register, press this button
to return to the state before recalling the
register.
With a setup setting, this can be switched to
a mode selection button for macro setting,
and used in combination with the buttons in
the memory recall section for recalling and
executing a macro.
jXPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status
display
A bus for which cross-point hold is set
appears as a green light.
kNumeric display
Depending on the operation mode, this
shows a wipe or DME wipe pattern number,
or a register number in up to four digits.
In macro mode, this provides indications
for macro editing.
lINH (inhibit) button
Pressing this button, turning it on, disables
the buttons in the memory recall section
and the [UNDO] button.
304 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple
Type)
The left side of this control block controls
key 3, and the right side controls key 4.
The control block for key 3 only is
described as an example, but the operations
on the key 4 control block are the same.
In setup you can assign any key to either
side of this control block. For details, see
“Assigning Keys to the Independent Key
Transition Control Block (Simple Type)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
aIndependent key transition type
selection buttons
Press one of the following buttons, turning
it on, to select the independent key
transition type.
MIX: Faded in or out.
WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe.
DME: Switches the key with a DME wipe.
CUT: Inserted or deleted instantaneously.
SHIFT: This has the following functions.
• When setting is made in the Setup
menu to allow a different transition
type for inserting or deleting a key, it
is possible to display and set the
transition type after the next
transition while this button is held
down.
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY3
ON
TAKE
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY4
ON
TAKE
3 K-SS button
4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons
1 Independent key transition type selection buttons
2 Independent key transition execution section
305Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
• While this button is held down, you
can select a key source with the
cross-point buttons for the key bus.
• If you press this button twice in rapid
succession, the key bus selection
button [KEY3] in the cross-point
control block lights, and a key 3 key
bus cross-point can be selected.
• If you press this button, while
holding down [TRANS RATE]
button in the numeric keypad control
block, you can set the independent
key transition rate on the control
block.
bIndependent key transition
execution section
KEY3 ON button: This inserts or deletes
key 3 instantaneously. When key 3 is
present in the final program output
from the switcher, this lights red, and
otherwise lights amber.
TAKE button: This carries out an auto
transition on key 3.
cK-SS (key snapshot) button
This enables key snapshot mode. In key
snapshot mode, it is possible to save and
recall key snapshots.
dKey source name display/key
snapshot buttons
These show the signal name of the key fill
selected for key 3 and the transition rate on
two buttons. In key snapshot mode, these
correspond to registers 1 and 2 for key 3;
press to save or recall a key snapshot.
To save a key snapshot, with the [K-SS]
button lit amber, hold down [SHIFT] button
and press one of the key snapshot buttons.
This saves a key snapshot in the button you
pressed, which lights yellow.
306 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Downstream Key Control Block
aKey delegation buttons
Press one of the [DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons
to delegate this control block to the
corresponding keyer.
Using the Setup menu, it is possible to
delegate this control block to key 1 to key 4
of the M/E bank.
While these buttons are held down, you can
select a key source with the cross-point
buttons for the key bus.
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid
succession changes its state so that you can
make cross-point selections on the
corresponding key bus.
bIndependent key transition type
selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the downstream key transition type.
MIX: Carry out a dissolve with the key
selected with the key delegation
buttons.
WIPE: Carry out a wipe with the key
selected with the key delegation
buttons.
DME: This switches the key selected with
the key delegation buttons, using a
DME wipe.
CUT: Instantaneously insert or delete the
key selected with the key delegation
buttons.
DSK1 DSK2 WIPEUNDO
DSK3 DSK4 SHIFT MIX
K-SS
CUT
DME
K-SS
STORE
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
DSK3
ON
DSK4
ON
TAKETAKETAKETAKE
1 Key delegation buttons
5 Key source name display/key snapshot
buttons 4 Key snapshot setting
buttons
3 Independent key transition execution section
2Independent key transition type
selection buttons
307Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
SHIFT: When setting is made in the Setup
menu to allow a different transition
type for inserting or deleting a key, it is
possible to display and set the
transition after the next transition while
this button is held down.
cIndependent key transition
execution section
DSK1 (downstream key 1) ON to DSK4
ON buttons: Press these to
instantaneously cut the downstream
keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 in or, when the
downstream keys are already inserted,
cut them out. When the key
corresponding to the button appears in
the final program output, the button
lights red, and otherwise lights amber.
TAKE buttons: These correspond to
downstream keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 from
left to right; press to execute an auto
transition. The transition starts
immediately, and the button lights
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a
manual downstream key transition.
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the downstream key
transition.
dKey snapshot setting buttons
K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key
snapshot mode.
K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To
save a key snapshot, hold down this
button, and press the key source name
display/key snapshot button for the
register you want to save.
UNDO (key snapshot recall undo): This
undoes the last key snapshot recall.
eKey source name display/key
snapshot buttons
These display the selected source name for
each corresponding keyer. In snapshot
mode, they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of
the selected keyer, and pressing the button
saves or recalls a key snapshot.
308 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block
aKey delegation buttons
Press DSK1 or DSK2, to select the keyer.
Each button can be assigned to any key in
setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume
2)).
While these buttons are held down, you can
select a key source with the cross-point
buttons on the key bus.
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid
succession changes its state so that you can
make cross-point selections on the
corresponding key bus in the PGM/PST
bank.
a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the P/P
cross-point control block goes off.
b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the P/P
cross-point control block goes off.
bIndependent key transition
execution section
DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON buttons: Press these
to cut in the corresponding downstream
key 1 or 2. When the key is already
inserted, pressing the button cuts it out.
Each button lights red when the
corresponding key is inserted in the
program output (final output from the
AUTO PST P/P
FTB
DME
K
DME
V
M/E
3
M/E
2
M/E
1
M/E
3K
M/E
2K
M/E
IK
P/P
K
DSK1 K-SSDSK2
DSK2
ON
DSK1
ON
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
1 Key delegation
buttons
2 Independent key
transition
execution section
3 K-SS button
4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons
5 FTB button
6 AUTO button
7 Preview selection buttons
Key delegation button
(double press)
Corresponding
key bus
[DSK1] key 1 a)
[DSK2] key 2 b)
Key delegation button
(double press)
Corresponding
key bus
309Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
switcher), and lights amber at other
times.
AUTO TRANS buttons: The left button
applies to DSK1 and the right button to
DSK2; press these buttons to carry out
an auto transition. The transition
immediately starts, and the button
lights amber. When the transition
completes, the button goes off.
cK-SS (key snapshot) button
Pressing this button, turning it on, enables
the key snapshot mode. In this mode, you
can save and recall key snapshots.
dKey source name display/key
snapshot buttons
Each column of two buttons relates to the
corresponding downstream key 1 or 2. The
upper button displays the name of the key
fill signal selected for the key, and the
lower button shows the transition rate.
In key snapshot mode, these buttons
correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the keyer
selected with the key delegation buttons,
and pressing a button recalls the key
snapshot. To save a key snapshot, hold
down the [STORE] button in the numeric
keypad control block, and press the button
for the desired register.
eFTB (fade to black) button
Press this button to fade to black the
program output of the PGM/PST bank, at
the set transition rate. You can set the fade
to black transition rate in the menu.
fAUTO button
When this button is pressed, the M/E or
PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on
the edit preview bus is automatically
switched to the program signal depending
on the on-air status.
gPreview selection buttons
Press one of these buttons to select a signal
on the edit preview bus. Each button can be
assigned to any preview output in setup (see
Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).
PST (preset): When this button is pressed,
the signal selected on the background B
row of the PGM/PST bank is selected
on the edit preview bus.
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P
preview): The preview signal (M/E-1
PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P
PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank
corresponding to the pressed button is
selected on the edit preview bus.
M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E
3, P/P key preview): The key preview
signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 K-
PVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of
the M/E or PGM/PST bank
corresponding to the pressed button is
selected on the edit preview bus.
DME V (DME monitor video): When this
button is pressed, the DME monitor
output video signal (DME MON V) is
selected on the edit preview bus.
DME K (DME monitor key): When this
button is pressed, the DME monitor
output key signal (DME MON K) is
selected on the edit preview bus.
310 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Transition Control Block (Compact Type)
The compact version of the transition
control block shown in the following figure
has fewer buttons than the standard type.
Independent key transition operations can
also be controlled with the compact
transition control block.
aNext transition selection buttons
Press these buttons, turning them on, to
determine what the next transition will
apply to.
BKGD: Next transition changes the
background.
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the
PGM/PST bank): Press this button,
turning it on, to make the next
transition insert or remove the
corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a
key is currently inserted it will be
KEY1
TRANS
KEY2
TRANS
KEY3
TRANS
KEY4
TRANS
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
AUTO
TRANS CUT
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
7 PRIOR SET button
1 Next transition selection buttons
6 Key status display
2 Transition type selection buttons
5 TRANS PVW button
3 Transition execution section
4 Wipe direction selection buttons
8 Independent key transition
execution section
311Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
removed, and if it is not currently
inserted, it will be inserted.
In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or
removes downstream keys 1 to 4.
KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button
is lit, the setting of the key priority after
the next transition is enabled. The key
priority after the next transition appears
in the key status display.
ALL: Pressing this button turns on a
preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1]
to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons.
Make this setting in a Setup menu.
bTransition type selection buttons
You can assign these buttons in setup to any
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2)).
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
determine the type of the next transition.
When multi-program mode is selected in
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the
following buttons may light.
MIX: In a background transition, the new
video fades in as the current video
fades out. During the transition, the
overall signal level is maintained at
100%.
In a key transition, the key fades in (for
insertion) or out (for removal).
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and
new video signals are compared, and
the signal with the higher luminance
level is given priority in the output.
The current video is maintained at
100% output for the first half of the
transition as the new video increases
progressively to 100%, then the current
video is progressively reduced from
100% to zero in the second half while
the new video is maintained at 100%.
SUPER MIX: The current video is
maintained at 100% output for the first
half of the transition as the new video is
mixed while increasing progressively
to 100%. The current video is then
progressively reduced from 100% to
zero in the second half while the new
video is maintained at 100%.
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first
transition, the current video is replaced
by the color matte in a mix (dissolve),
then in the second transition the color
matte is replaced by the new video also
in a mix (dissolve).
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the
new video, using the wipe pattern
selected in the Wipe menu.
DME: A wipe type of transition is carried
out, using the DME effect selected in
the DME Wipe menu.
FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP,
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is
played back together with the
transition. At this point, you can also
carry out a transition (wipe or mix
(dissolve)) simultaneously together
with the clip.
cTransition execution section
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the transition.
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a
manual transition.
Transition rate display: This shows the
“transition rate” (the time from the
beginning of a transition to its
completion) set for an auto transition,
in frames.
You can set the transition rate using the
numeric keypad control block, Flexi
Pad control block, or menu.
AUTO TRANS (transition) button:
Pressing this button carries out an auto
transition of the set transition rate
(duration). The transition starts
immediately, and the button lights
312 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
CUT button: Pressing this button carries
out the transition as a cut (i.e.
instantaneously).
dWipe direction selection buttons
When you have selected a wipe or DME
wipe as the transition type, press one of
these buttons, turning it on, to select the
wipe direction.
NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in
the direction from black to white as
shown on the pattern in the lists of
patterns (see “Wipe Pattern List”
(page 560) and “DME Wipe Pattern
List” (page 566) in Appendix (Volume
1)), or in the direction of the arrow.
When the VTR/disk recorder operation
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this
button plays the tape.
REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the
opposite direction to that when the
[NORM] button is pressed.
When the VTR/disk recorder operation
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this
button cues the tape automatically to
the start point.
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe
direction alternates between normal
and reverse every time a transition is
executed.
When the VTR/disk recorder operation
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this
button stops the tape.
eTRANS PVW (transition preview)
button
When this button is lit, you can check in
advance the video changes during the
transition, on the preview output from the
M/E or PGM/PST bank.
During the preview, you can use the fader
lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT]
button. One of the following functions of
this button can be selected in a Setup menu.
• When the transition completes, the
system returns to the normal mode.
• The transition preview mode is
maintained while this button is pressed.
• Switching is made between the transition
preview mode and normal mode every
time this button is pressed.
fKey status display
For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding
ON indicator lights when the key is
inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4)
of each key.
gPRIOR (priority) SET button
While this button is held down, you can set
the key priority.
The setting mode when this button is
pressed depends on whether or not the
[KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the
current key priority is set.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the
key priority after the next transition is set.
Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required,
to switch between these two modes.
In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR
SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1]
to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you
want to bring to the front.
hIndependent key transition
execution section
KEY1 TRANS (transition) to KEY4
TRANS (DSK1 TRANS to DSK4
TRANS in the PGM/PST block)
buttons: Press the corresponding one
of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in
or out automatically at the set transition
rate. When the key corresponding to
the button appears in the final program
output, the button lights red, and
otherwise lights amber. During a
transition, the button lights green.
313Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Basic Menu Operations
Menu Organization
Operations on the MVS-8000 switcher
system make frequent use of menu
operations.
This section describes the menus and their
interrelationships.
Overview
All detailed settings for basic operations
such as transitions, keys, DME, or wipes,
are made in menus. There are also menus
for carrying out general system control,
managing setting data, and initial setup.
About the Top Menu List
When the control panel is powered on, the
top menu list appears as shown below.
You can also display this by selecting VF1
‘Top Menu List’ after pressing the [HOME]
button at the upper left in the top menu
selection button area of the menu control
block.
To display the top menu
In the same way as for the top menu
selection buttons in the menu control block,
press each button to display the particular
top menu in the menu display.
The top menu list button is the same as the
default layout of the top menu selection
buttons. However, even if the assignment of
the top menu selection buttons is changed,
this does not affect the top menu list.
To shut down the menus
Press the [Shutdown] button at the lower
right.
This operation is the same as the shut down
operation in the top menu window.
For details, “Shutting down the menus”
(page 333).
314 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Accessing Menus
You can use any of the following methods
to access a menu, and the initially displayed
menu page depends on the method used.
• Pressing a top menu selection button in
the menu control block.
This displays the page you last accessed
in the particular menu. After initially
powering on the system, however, the
page of VF1 - HF1 of the particular menu
is always selected.
• Pressing a button other than a top menu
button twice in rapid succession (see
page 316).
Depending on the button, this may
display a fixed page or the page selected
last time you accessed the menu.
• Press the menu page selection button at
the top left of the menu display.
The top menu window appears; press the
top menu selection button for the
particular menu, or enter the menu
number with the numeric keypad, and
press the Enter button.
For details of the VF buttons and HF
buttons, see “Interpreting the Menu
Screen” (page 322).
315Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Menus accessed from a top menu selection button
Buttons Menus Function See
HOME Home Recalling menus using the top
menu list or shortcut menu
Top menu list: page 313
Shortcut menu: page 335
M/E 1 M/E-1 Transition, keys, and wipe
settings for the M/E-1 bank
page 348 (transitions), page
378 (keys), page 438 (wipes)
M/E 2 M/E-2 Transition, keys, and wipe
settings for the M/E-2 bank
M/E 3 M/E-3 Transition, keys, and wipe
settings for the M/E-3 bank
P/P PGM/PST Transition, downstream key, and
wipe settings for the PGM/PST
bank
FRAME
MEM
Frame Memory Frame memory settings page 490
COLOR
BKGD
Color Bkgd Color background settings page 538
AUX/MON Aux/Mon AUX bus settings page 555
CCR CCR Color corrector settings Chapter 19 (Volume2)
COPY
SWAP
Copy/Swap Copy and swap settings page 544
MISC Misc Safe title settings page 548
STATS Status Status display Chapter 11 (Volume2)
DME DME DME special effect settings Chapter 11 (Volume 2)
GLB EFF Global Effect Global effect settings Chapter 11 (Volume 2)
DEV Device Settings for external device
operation
Chapter 12 (Volume 2)
MCRO Macro Macro register settings Chapter 18 (Volume 2)
KEY
FRAME
Key Frame Keyframe settings Chapter 13 (Volume 2)
EFF Effect Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 (Volume 2)
SNAP
SHOT
Snapshot Snapshot register settings Chapter 14 (Volume 2)
SHOTBOX Shotbox Shotbox register settings Chapter 15 (Volume 2)
FILE File File settings Chapter 17 (Volume 2)
ENG
SETUP
Engineering Setup Setup functions Chapter 16 (Volume 2)
DIAG Diagnosis Status information display Chapter 20 (Volume 2)
316 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Menus accessed by pressing a button twice
For relevant buttons other than the top
menu selection buttons, pressing twice in
rapid succession directly recalls a related
menu page. The following table lists these
buttons of each control block, together with
the menus they recall. (XX represents the
HF menu recalled last in the VF menu.)
Cross-point control block
Buttons Menus See
FM1 to 8 signals assigned
buttons
Frame Memory >Still >Recall page 500
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1 page 538
Color Bkgd2 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX Chapter 19
(Volume 2)
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX
Transition control block (standard type, compact type)
Buttons Menus See
KEY1 (DSK1) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 378
KEY2 (DSK2) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
KEY3 (DSK3) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
KEY4 (DSK4) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
WIPE M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern page 438
DME M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX page 467
SUPER MIX M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition page 349
PST COLOR MIX M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition page 350
FM1&2 CLIP,
FM3&4 CLIP,
FM5&6 CLIP,
FM7&8 CLIP
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Clip Transition page 524
PRIOR SET M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Key Priority page 345
KEY PRIOR M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Next Key Priority page 346
WIPE (Independent key
transition type selection
button (standard type))
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 455
317Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) Including the key delegation buttons of the transition control block (standard type).
a) The menu to be recalled depends on the setup of the key assignment.
DME (Independent key
transition type selection
button (standard type))
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select
page 477
K-SS STORE Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
Independent key transition control block (simple type) a)
Buttons Menus See
WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 455
DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select
page 477
SHIFT • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >XX
page 378
Transition control block (standard type, compact type)
Buttons Menus See
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)
Buttons Menus See
WIPE M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern page 438
DME M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX page 467
SNAPSHOT Snapshot >Snapshot >XX Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
EFF Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX Chapter 13
(Volume 2)
SHOTBOX Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall Chapter 15
(Volume 2)
MCRO Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18
(Volume 2)
318 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E delegation buttons and key delegation buttons
are selected in the key control block.
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks and PGM/PST bank the
numeric control block is delegated to.
b) When other than [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.
c) When [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.
d) When the [SNAPSHOT] button or [EFF] button is set to On, or lit green.
Key control block a)
Buttons Menus See
KEY1 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 378
KEY2 • M/E-1, 2, 3 > Key2 > XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
KEY3 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
KEY4 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
LUM • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type
page 379
LIN
CVK
PTN
CRK • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust
page 382
Numeric keypad control block
Buttons Menus See
EFF • Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX b)
• Effect >Master Timeline >Store c)
Chapter 13
(Volume 2)
SNAPSHOT • Snapshot >Snapshot >XX b)
• Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store c)
Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
SHOTBOX Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall Chapter 15
(Volume 2)
MCRO Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18
(Volume 2)
TRANS RATE a) Misc >Transition page 355
STORE RCALL Key Frame >Region Select d) Chapter 13
Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
319Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) The menu recalled depends on which of keyers 1 to 4 the downstream key control block is
delegated to.
b) Recalling is possible only when the [K-SS] button is On.
Downstream key control block a)
Buttons Menus See
DSK1 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 378
DSK2 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
DSK3 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
DSK4 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 455
DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 477
K-SS STORE b) Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
Auxiliary bus control block
Buttons Menus See
FMS1, FMS2 Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store page 496
FM1 to 8 signals assigned
buttons
Frame Memory >Still >Recall page 500
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1 page 538
Color Bkgd2 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX Chapter 19
(Volume 2)
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX
Device control block (trackball or joystick)
Buttons Menus See
DME1 to DME8 a) DME >XX Chapter 11
(Volume 2)
DEV1 to DEV12 assigned
buttons • Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play b)
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline c)
Chapter 12
(Volume 2)
320 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) When the three-dimensional transformation operation mode is enabled.
b) When the [MENU] button is Off.
c) When the [MENU] button is On.
d) For the MVS-8000G in resizer control mode
a) When the [TIMELINE] button is Off.
b) When the [TIMELINE] button is On.
a) When a key other than DSK1 or DSK2 is assigned, the menu for the corresponding key appears.
a) When the button is assigned to macro function in the Setup menu.
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP
assigned buttons
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall –
K1 to K4 d) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key
page 419
Device control block (trackball or joystick)
Buttons Menus See
Device control block (search dial)
Buttons Menus See
DEV1 to DEV12 • Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play a)
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline b)
Chapter 12
(Volume 2)
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP
assigned buttons
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall –
Downstream key/fade-to-black control block
Buttons Menus See
DSK1, DSK2 • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2 >XX a) Chapter 16
(Volume 2)
Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block (simple type)
Buttons Menus See
KEY1 (DSK1) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 378
KEY2 (DSK2) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Wipe >Main Pattern
• PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern
page 438
DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >DME Wipe >XX
• PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX
page 467
SNAPSHOT Snapshot >Snapshot >XX Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
MCRO a) Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18
(Volume 2)
321Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Displaying a Menu
To display, for example, the M/E-1 >Key1
>Type menu, use either of the following
operations.
• Press the top menu selection button [M/E
1], then press the VF1 ‘Key1’ button and
the HF1 ‘Type’ button in that order.
• Press the menu page number button in the
upper left corner of the menu screen to
display the top menu window, then enter
the page number of the M/E-1 >Key1
>Type menu, which is 1111, and press
the [Enter] button.
For details of the menu page numbers, see
the appendix “Menu Tree” (Volume 2).
The M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu appears in
the menu display as follows.
M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu
2Menu page number button
1Menu title button
6Function button area
7Parameter group button
8Knob
parameter
buttons
3VF buttons
4HF buttons
9Previous page button
5Status area
0Keyframe status
qa Default recall button
qs b (previous) button and B (next)
button
322 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Interpreting the Menu
Screen
The menu screen consists of the following
principal parts.
When buttons on the screen are lit or
represented in a depressed state, this
indicates that the corresponding item or
function is selected (set on).
aMenu title button
This shows the title of the menu screen.
You can set different colors for the main
menu site and subsidiary menu site (see
page 335).
bMenu page number button
This shows the menu screen page number.
When you press this button, the top menu
window (see page 332) appears. You can
enter the page number for the desired menu,
or press one of the top menu selection
buttons in the window, to display that
menu.
While the system is accessing the hard disk,
the indicator lights red.
Note
When the indicator is lit, do not power off
the switcher, or disconnect the IEEE1394
cable 1).
1) When an external hard disk drive is connected
cVF buttons
These indicate the larger subdivisions of
this menu.
Depending on the selected item, the menu
screen contents including the HF button
indications change.
dHF buttons
These indicate the items within the menu.
Depending on the selected item, the menu
indications change.
Depending on the function, if any one is on,
the status is shown by an orange bar, as in
the following figure.
eStatus area
This shows the status of the settings items
controlled by the selected menu.
An orange frame appears around the
parameter area relating to the displayed
menu. For each of the twelve areas,
pressing the display jumps to the related
menu.
fFunction button area
This shows the functions which can be
operated in the currently selected menu by
means of buttons.
Each function button corresponds to a
function which can be set in the currently
selected menu. Press it to enable the
function, to display a parameter group and
adjust the parameters with the knobs, or to
execute the function.
These buttons are in groups by function. In
the screen example shown on the previous
page, the [Key Bus] and [Matte] function
buttons constitute the <Key Fill> group.
gParameter group button
This displays parameter group names for
which the knobs can make adjustments, the
current parameter setting page number, and
Indicator for internal hard
disk
Indicator for frame
memory external hard disk
323Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
the total number of the parameter setting
pages. (Example: Color Vector 1/2)
When there are more than five parameters
within the same parameter group, press this
button to display the sixth and subsequent
parameters, which can then be controlled
by the knobs.
hKnob parameter buttons
These show the parameters currently
controlled by the knobs and their values.
Pressing one of these buttons displays the
numeric keypad window (see page 330),
and you can then enter a new value for the
corresponding parameter with the numeric
keypad.
iPrevious page button
This shows the page number of the
previously displayed menu screen. Press it
to go back to that page. When the indication
[Parent] appears, this displays the parent
directory.
jKeyframe status
This shows the keyframe status of the
reference region. Pressing this button
switches the menu screen as follows.
When a menu other than the Key Frame
menu is currently shown: The menu
screen switches to the Key Frame
menu.
When the Key Frame menu is currently
shown: The menu screen switches to
the menu that was on the screen
immediately before the Key Frame
menu.
In some parts of menus such as the File
menu, this functions as a “Region selection
area,” for selecting the region to which
operations apply.
kDefault recall button
This only appears in those menus for which
the default recall function is available. (See
“Menus allowing a return to default
settings” (page 325).)
Press this button, turning it on, then press a
VF button or knob parameter button to
return the settings to their default values, in
the following groupings.
• Function grouping: the functions within
an HF menu under the VF button
• Knob parameters (parameters currently
controlled by the knobs)
lb (previous) button and B (next)
button
The b button returns to the previous menu.
Press the B button to continue to the next
menu.
Menu Operations
Selecting an item
1
Press the VF button (1 to 7) for the
desired group of items.
The HF button (1 to 7) indications
change to show the items within the
selected group.
2
Press the HF button for the desired
item.
The indications in the status area and
function button area change, and you
can now make various changes to the
selected item.
Selecting a function
Press the appropriate function button within
the function button area.
Shape and color of the button
Pressing the button turns it on, and it lights,
showing the state.
324 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Lit pale blue: The function is enabled, and
the parameters can currently be
adjusted with the knobs.
Lit orange: The function is enabled.
Lit purple: Execution button. Pressing the
button immediately executes the
function. (Example: [Auto Start]
button in the Chroma Adjust menu)
Pressing a button of this type displays a
further menu, allowing more detailed
settings. (Example: [Chroma Adjust]
button in the Type menu)
Setting parameters
This marking on a function button indicates
that there are parameters which can be
adjusted with the knobs.
Pressing this function button assigns
parameters to the knobs.
You can set the parameter values by either
of the following methods.
• Turn the knob (1 to 5) corresponding to
the parameter, to adjust the value.
• Press the knob parameter buttons (1 to 5)
corresponding to the parameter. This
displays the numeric keypad window
allowing you to enter the desired value.
In the description of specific setting
procedures, the knob adjustment is
described, as follows.
Example: When wipe pattern key is selected
When the [MENU] button in the device
control block is lit, you can use the trackball
and Z-ring to control the parameters.
• Move the trackball on the x-axis to
control the parameter for knob 1 or on the
y-axis to control the parameter for knob
2. Moving up or to the right increases the
parameter value, and moving down or to
the left decreases the parameter value.
• Use the Z-ring to adjust the parameter for
knob 3. Turning clockwise increases the
parameter value, and turning
counterclockwise decreases the
parameter value.
Going back to the previous menu
To return to the last displayed menu, press
the previous page button.
Returning to default state in function
groupings
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,
turning it on.
This enters the menu default recall
mode.
2
Press the VF button you want to return
to the default state.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
325Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
This returns the settings within the
function grouping to the default state,
and the [Default Recall] button goes
off.
Note
The default state of the settings depends on
the setting of the initial status mode, set in
the Setup menu of system setup, as follows.
User: The state when [Initial Status Define]
is executed.
Factory: Factory default settings
Returning knob parameters to
default state
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,
turning it on.
This enters the menu default recall
mode.
2
Press the knob parameter button you
want to return to the default state.
This returns the knob parameter value
to the default state, and the [Default
Recall] button goes off.
Notes
• In the following table, “Menus allowing a
return to default settings,” the default
recall function does not apply to some
knob parameters. For details, see the
table, “Knob parameters subject to
restriction on default recall” on page 328.
• The default recall function does not
return the horizontal (H) and vertical (V)
position settings to their default state
individually. Returning the horizontal
(H) position to its default state also
returns the vertical (V) position to its
default state automatically, and vice
versa. For details, see the table, “Knob
parameters subject to restriction on
default recall” on page 328.
Menus allowing a return to default settings
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number Menu name
M/E1 VF1 1110-series Key1 a)
VF2 1120-series Key2 a)
VF3 1130-series Key3 a)
VF4 1140-series Key4 a)
VF5 1150-series Wipe a)
VF6 1160-series DME Wipe a)
VF7 1170-series Misc a)
326 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
M/E2 VF1 1210-series Key1 a)
VF2 1220-series Key2 a)
VF3 1230-series Key3 a)
VF4 1240-series Key4 a)
VF5 1250-series Wipe a)
VF6 1260-series DME Wipe a)
VF7 1270-series Misc a)
M/E3 VF1 1310-series Key1 a)
VF2 1320-series Key2 a)
VF3 1330-series Key3 a)
VF4 1340-series Key4 a)
VF5 1350-series Wipe a)
VF6 1360-series DME Wipe a)
VF7 1370-series Misc a)
P/P VF1 1410-series DSK1 a)
VF2 1420-series DSK2 a)
VF3 1430-series DSK3 a)
VF4 1440-series DSK4 a)
VF5 1450-series Wipe a)
VF6 1460-series DME Wipe a)
VF7 1470-series Misc a)
COLOR BKGD VF1 2210 Color Bkgd 1 a)
VF2 2220 Color Bkgd 2 a)
CCR VF1 2410-series CCR1 a)
VF2 2420-series CCR2 a)
FRAME MEM VF1 2510-series Still b)
VF2 2520-series Clip b)
VF3 2530-series Reposition/Lock b)
VF4 2540-series File b)
VF5 2550-series Folder b)
AUX/MON VF1 2311 Aux Bus b)
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number Menu name
327Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) Menu to return to the default settings for particular functions or for particular knob parameters
(for the relevant knob parameters, see page 327)
b) Menu to return to the default settings for particular knob parameters (for the relevant knob
parameters, see page 327)
DME VF1 4110-series Edge b)
VF2 4120-series Video Modify b)
VF3 4131 Freeze b)
VF4 4141 Non-Linear b)
VF5 4150-series Light/Trail b)
VF6 4160-series Input/Output b)
VF7 4170-series Enhanced Video
Modify b)
GLB EFF VF1 4210-series Ch1–Ch4 b)
VF2 4220-series Ch5–Ch8 b)
KEY FRAME (HF3) 6113 Path b)
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number Menu name
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply
Menu number a) Menu name Button name Knob Parameter
1111 Type [Luminance] and [Linear] in
<Key Type> group
4 Filter
[Color Vector] in <Key Type>
group
1
2
(Parameter
group [2/2])
Y Filter,
C Filter
1111.1 Type >CRK Adjust [Key Active] 5 Filter
[Color Cancel] in <Color
Cancel> group
5 Filter
1112.1 Edge >Matte [Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>
group
5 Pattern
[Multi] 3 Invert Type
1113 Main Mask [Pattern] 5 Pattern
[Multi] 3 Invert Type
328 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies for M/E-2,
M/E-3, and P/P. Also, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.
1116 Transition [Wipe] in <ON Transition Type>
group
1
5
Transition
Rate
Pattern
[Wipe] in <OFF Transition Type>
group
1
5
Transition
Rate
Pattern
[Key Blink] and [Edge Blink] in
<Blink> group
1 Blink Rate
[Mix] in <Transition Type> group 1 Transition
Ty p e
[Wipe] in <Transition Type>
group
1
5
Transition
Rate
Pattern
1116.1 Transition >
Wipe Adjust
[Multi] 3 Invert Type
[H] and [V] in <Pairing> group 1 Width
[H], [V], and [Fringe] in
<Modulation> group
4 Shape
1154 Edge/Direction [Split] in <Edge> group 1 Split No
1154.1 Edge/Direction >
Matte Adjust
[Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>
group
3 Pattern
[Multi] 3 Invert Type
1155 Main Modify [H] and [V] in <Pairing> group 1 Width
[H], [V], and [Fringe] in
<Modulation> group
4 Shape
1164 Edge/Direction [Independent Trans Rate] in
<Pattern Limit Release> group
1 Transition
Rate
1171 Transition [Mix], [Nam], [Super Mix],
[Preset Color Mix], [Wipe], [DME
Wipe], and [FTB] in <Transition
Type> group
1 Transition
Rate
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply
Menu number a) Menu name Button name Knob Parameter
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall
Menu number Menu name Button name Knob Parameter
1111.1 a) Type >CRK Adjust [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group 1
2
Position H
Position V
1112.1 a) Edge >Matte
Adjust
[Position]
1113 a) Main Mask [Position]
1116.1 a) Transition >Wipe
Adjust
[Position]
329Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies to M/E-2,
M/E-3, and P/P. Equally, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.
b) The same applies to Color Bkgd2.
c) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for CCR1: the same applies to CCR2.
d) The sample applies to Mask2 Adjust.
1116.3 a) Transition >DME
Wipe Adjust
[Position] 1
2
H
V
1154.1 a) Edge Direction
>Matte Adjust
[Position] 1
2
Position H
Position V
1155 a) Main Modify [Position] in the <Position> group
1155.1 a) Main Modify
>Multi Adjust
[Position]
1156 a) Sub Modify [Position] in the <Position> group
1156.1 a) Sub Modify >Multi
Adjust
[Position]
2122.2 Composite
>Pattern Adjust
[Position] 1
2
Position H
Position V
2131 Reposition [Normal]
[Black&White]
2210 Color Bkgd1 b) [Position]
2412.1 c) Primary CCR
>Mask1 Adjust d)
[Position]
4116 DME >Edge
>Wipe Crop
[Position/Size] 5 Pattern
4127 DME >Video
Modify >Mask
[Position/Size]
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall
Menu number Menu name Button name Knob Parameter
330 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Numeric keypad window
aItem display
This is the name of the parameter being set
in the numeric keypad window.
bMax./min. (maximum/minimum)
value indication
This shows the maximum and minimum
settings of the parameter.
cInput value
This is the value being input into the
numeric keypad window.
dClose button
This closes the numeric keypad window.
eTC (timecode) button
When the numeric keypad window is
opened for a setting requiring a timecode
value to be entered, this button appears in a
depressed state.
You can enter a timecode value in the range
that depends on the signal format (see page
189) as follows:
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:nn,
where nn = (number of frames per
second) – 1.
f – (minus) button
This toggles the sign of the entered value.
When it is pressed, the value is negative.
gClear button
This clears the input. It does not change the
parameter setting.
hTrim button
After entering the difference from the
current value, press this button to confirm
the numeric input.
iEnter button
This confirms the entered value.
If correctly set, the numeric keypad
window closes.
If not correctly set, the input display
changes color.
1Item display
2Max./min. value indication
3Input value
4Close button
5TC (timecode)
button
6– (minus)
button
7Clear button
8Trim button
9Enter button
331Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Keyboard window
Note
Except when changing source names, the
following characters cannot be used. The
same applies to macro file editing.
space, \, /, :, ;, , (comma), . (dot), <, >,
*, ?, ", |
aItem display
This is the name of the parameter being set
in the keyboard window.
bInput string
This is the character string being input in
the keyboard window.
cClose button
This closes the keyboard window.
dBS button
This clears the character immediately
before the cursor in the input string.
eCaps Lock button
This enables input of capital letters only.
Note
You can enter items to be displayed on the
control panel LCD using lowercase letters,
but these will be converted to capitals for
display.
1 Item display 2 Input string
4 BS button
3 Close button
0 Left button
6 Shift button
5 Caps Lock button
7 Space button
8 Clear button
9 Del button
qa Right button
qs Enter button
qd Line feed
button
332 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
MS-DOS does not distinguish case in
filenames, and therefore you are
recommended to enter filenames in capital
letters.
fShift button
This selects the characters on the shift side
of the keys. The shift is released when you
enter a character.
gSpace button
This enters a space character.
hClear button
This clears all of the characters in the input
string.
iDel button
This clears the character immediately after
the cursor in the input string.
jLeft button
This moves the cursor one character to the
left in the input string.
kRight button
This moves the cursor one character to the
right in the input string.
lEnter button
This sets the input string as a parameter
value, and closes the keyboard window if
the value has been entered correctly. If the
value has not been entered correctly, the
display color changes.
mLine feed button
After pressing the Shift button, press this
button to feed a line. The input string shows
“|”.
Function of the top menu window
1 Top menu selection buttons
2 Input display
3 Numeric entry section
6 Close button
4 Clear button
5 Enter button
7 Shut down button
8 Add Favorite button
333Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aTop menu selection buttons
These are the same as the top menu
selection buttons in the menu control block.
Pressing one of these buttons closes the top
menu window and displays the selected
menu in the menu display.
bInput display
This shows the page number entered with
the numeric entry section.
cNumeric entry section
Enter a page number.
dClear button
Press this to clear the input display.
eEnter button
Pressing this button without entering a page
number closes the top menu window with
the current menu remaining in the menu
display.
If you enter a page number then press this
button, this confirms the value in the input
display. If it is a correct page number, the
top menu window closes, and the menu
display shows the new menu. If it is not
correctly set, the input display changes
color.
fClose button
Press this to close the top menu window.
gShut down button
Shuts down the menus.
Note
Be sure to shut down the menus before
powering off the control panel.
Shutting down the menus
1
In the menu screen, press the menu
page number button to open the top
menu window.
For details of the top menu window, see
“Function of the top menu window”
(page 332).
2
Press [Shut down].
A confirmation message appears.
3
Press [Yes].
This shuts down the menu system after
a while, and the menu display changes
to black. Now power off the system.
To restart menu operations
Power on the control panel once more.
hAdd Favorite button
Pressing this button allows the currently
displayed menu to be registered to the
Shortcut menu.
Registering a menu to the
Shortcut menu
1
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut
menu, select the desired group.
2
Display the menu you want to register,
and then press the [Add Favorite]
button.
The currently displayed menu is
automatically registered to a blank
button.
Use of the color palette window
When a parameter is assigned to the knobs
as a combination of luminance, saturation,
and hue, pressing a knob parameter button
displays a color palette window.
334 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
aColor palette buttons
Press one of these to enter the
corresponding color in the display.
By default the following settings are
available.
First row: white, yellow, cyan, green
Second row: magenta, red, blue, black
Third row: all black
bOperation buttons
Set: If you press any color palette button
with this button held down, the color
shown in the color display is assigned
to the color palette button.
Copy: If you press a color palette button
with this button held down, the color is
used as the source for copying. Next
press a different color palette button to
copy to that button.
Swap: If you press two color palette
buttons in sequence with this button
held down, the two colors are swapped.
Default: If you press any color palette
button with this button held down, the
color palette button is set to the default
color.
cColor display
This shows the setting color, and the
parameters (LUM, SAT, and HUE).
By adjusting the parameters with the knobs,
you can create any color.
If a parameter value is outside the permitted
range for RGB (0 to 255), the indication
“Illegal Color” appears, and this is adjusted
to a value in range.
Cancel: Pressing this button returns to the
state when the color palette window
was opened.
dNumeric keypad
Use this to enter numeric values for
parameters.
For details of use, see page 330.
1Color palette
buttons
3Color display
4Numeric
keypad
2Operation
buttons
335Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Switching Between the
Main Menu Site and
Subsidiary Menu Site
For menu transitions, you can store two
separate versions in the main and subsidiary
menu sites.
By switching sites, and pressing the b
button and the B button you can trace the
history in each menu.
To switch the subsidiary menu
site on and off
Assign [SUB MENU SITE] to a menu
control block top menu selection button or
user preference button. To switch to the
subsidiary menu site, press this button,
turning it on.
For details of the assignment operation, see
“Assigning functions to the menu control
block Top menu and user preference
buttons” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Shortcut Menu
Recalling a menu using the
shortcut menu
1
In the Home menu, select VF2
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’
The following menu appears.
2
In the [Group Select] box, select the
group.
The group buttons appear.
3
Press the button for the desired menu.
Creating a shortcut menu
Assign frequently used menus to buttons, to
create a “Favorites” menu.
To create a menu group
1
In the Home menu, select VF2
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’
The following menu appears.
2
Press [Group Edit].
The following menu appears.
336 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
3
With the cursor, select the group name
(in this case a blank button) for the
operation.
4
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
5
Enter a group name (maximum 24
characters), and press Enter.
This confirms the group name.
To copy a menu group
1
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit
menu, press the button for the copy
source group.
2
Press [Copy].
3
Press the button for the copy
destination group.
4
Press [Paste].
This copies the menu group settings.
To delete menu group settings
1
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit
menu, select the group to be deleted.
2
Press [Clear].
A confirmation message appears.
3
Press [Yes].
This deletes the settings.
To register a menu on a button
You can register 15 buttons in one group.
1
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut
menu, press [Button Edit].
2
Move the cursor to the position where
you want to display the button. To
change the content of an already
displayed button, press the button to
select it.
3
Press [Page Set].
A page number input window appears.
4
Enter the page number for the menu
you want to register.
5
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
6
Enter the button name (maximum 24
characters).
Menu No.
Button name
337Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
7
To change the button color, press
[Color Set].
Button color samples appear.
8
Press the desired color.
This completes the assignment of the
menu to the button.
9
Repeat steps 2 to 8 to complete the
“Favorites” menu.
To copy button settings
1
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit
menu, press the copy source button to
select it.
2
Press [Copy].
3
Press the copy destination button to
select it.
4
Press [Paste].
This copies the button settings.
To delete button settings
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit
menu, press [Clear].
This deletes the button settings.
Note
The shortcut menu settings are handled as
part of the control panel setup. You can
recall and save them in the same way as
setup data.
338 Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Chapter 3 Transitions
Basic Operating Procedure ......................................................................340
Key Priority Setting ..................................................................................343
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block ..................343
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation ..................................345
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ..........................346
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ............................348
Super Mix Settings ...................................................................................349
Color Matte Settings .................................................................................350
Executing a Transition .............................................................................351
Transition Indicator Function ............................................................351
Setting the Transition Rate ................................................................352
Pattern Limit ......................................................................................355
Executing an Auto Transition ............................................................359
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition) ..359
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ................................360
Non-Sync State ..................................................................................360
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode .......................................361
Transition Preview ...................................................................................363
Independent Key Transitions ..................................................................364
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations ..................................364
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 365
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate ....................................366
Fade to Black .............................................................................................369
Fade to Black Operation ....................................................................369
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate .........................................369
Simple Transition .....................................................................................371
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions ...........................................371
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ..........................373
Split Fader .........................................................................................373
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module ......374
340 Basic Operating Procedure
Chapter 3 Transitions
Basic Operating Procedure
The positions of the principal buttons used for basic transition operation are as
follows.
Transition control block (for standard transitions)
1
In the cross-point control block, select the background video with the
background A row of cross-point buttons.
2
Select the way in which the transition will affect the image, using the next
transition selection buttons in the transition control block.
For an overview, see “Selecting the Next Transition” (page 34).
To change the background: Press the [BKGD] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key: Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons (or
[DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank), turning it on.
To enable the key priority setting, which determines the key overlay
order after the transition: Press the [KEY PRIOR] button, turning it
on.
You can press more than one button at the same time.
To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus
simultaneously: Press the [ALL] button.
To allocate a particular next transition button to the [ALL] button
function, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
AUTO
TRANS CUT
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Next transition
selection buttons
Transition type
selection buttons
Transition execution
section
341Basic Operating Procedure
Chapter 3 Transitions
3
For the transition to change the key priority, set the priority for after the
transition.
For details of the key priority, see “Selecting the key priority” (page 36).
For details of the key priority setting operation, see “Key Priority Setting”
(page 343).
4
Select the new video used for the transition.
• In the background B row of cross-point buttons, select the new
background video.
• When inserting a key, select the key signal, and make any required
settings.
For details of key settings, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 377).
To carry out a cut transition, skip to step 7; otherwise continue to step 5.
5
Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control
block.
To carry out a dissolve to the new video: Press one of the [MIX],
[NAM], [SUPER MIX], and [PST COLOR MIX] buttons, turning it
on.
To carry out a wipe: Press the [WIPE] or [DME] button, turning it on.
To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip:
Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used
(FM1&2CLIP, FM3&4CLIP, FM5&6CLIP, and FM7&8CLIP).
You can also use the Misc >Transition menu to select a desired transition
type for the M/E or PGM/PST bank. (See “Selecting the Transition Type
by a Menu Operation” (page 348).)
For an overview of the transition types, see “Transition Types” (page 41).
Note
The transition type selection buttons in the transition control block can be
interchanged in the setup menu.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
6
Make the required settings, according to the selected transition type.
For details of the settings, see the relevant section.
Super mix: “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)
Preset color mix: “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)
Wipe: “Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings” (page 438)
342 Basic Operating Procedure
Chapter 3 Transitions
DME Wipe: “Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings” (page 466)
Clip transition: “Clip Transition Operations” (page 524)
Using the transition preview function (page 363), you can check the
transition on the preview monitor.
7
Carry out the transition in the transition execution section.
For a gradual transition such as a mix (dissolve) or wipe: Press the
[AUTO TRANS] button, or operate the fader lever.
To execute a transition by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button, first
set the transition rate (specified as the duration of the transition).
(See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352).)
When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type,
you can also set the transition range. (See “Pattern Limit” (page 355).)
For an instantaneous transition: Press the [CUT] button.
For details, see “Executing a Transition” (page 351).
Transition linked to the audio mixer
If the video signal selected in the background B row is linked to the audio mixer
in setup, then the audio mixer sound changes with the transition. That is,
pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button gives a cross fade, and pressing the
[CUT] button gives an instantaneous sound switch.
For details of setup, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
Notes
• The audio mixer is not linked to a snapshot or key frame transition.
• The audio mixer is not linked to a transition using the fader lever.
• If the bus-fixed mode (see page 45) is selected in the setup menu, and the
fader lever is in the lowest position, there is a cross fade from the audio
selected on the B row to the audio selected on the A row.
• The audio mixer is not linked to a key transition.
• In the following cases, the audio and video may be out of sync.
– When carrying out a cross fade in some DME wipes (for example, “picture
in picture”)
– When executing a preset color mix in two-stroke mode
• For details of audio mixers that can be used, Sony service or sales
representative.
343Key Priority Setting
Chapter 3 Transitions
Key Priority Setting
You can select the key priority, that is, the order in which the keys are laid over
each other, in the current video and after the transition. There are two ways of
setting the priority: either using the [PRIOR SET] button in the transition
control block, or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for the
M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Note
When the operating mode is set to multi program, the key priority setting
cannot be made.
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block
The positions of the buttons used for the operation are as follows.
Transition control block (standard type)
Changing the currently inserted key priority
1
If the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, press another
next transition selection button to turn the [KEY PRIOR] button off.
(When the [KEY PRIOR] button is on, the transition control block
switches to the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition.)
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
AUTO
TRANS CUT
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Next transition
selection buttons
KEY PRIOR button
PRIOR SET button
344 Key Priority Setting
Chapter 3 Transitions
2
Holding down the [PRIOR SET] button, press the one of the next transition
selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the
PGM/PST bank) for the key to appear on top.
The selected key now appears on top, on the program monitor.
The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change.
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat this operation as
required.
Changing the key priority for after the transition
When executing a transition, turning on the next transition selection button
[KEY PRIOR] causes the keys to be rearranged based on the set priority.
To set the key priority for after the transition, use the following procedure.
1
In the transition control block, hold down the [PRIOR SET] button and
press the [KEY PRIOR] button to turn it on. Do not release the [PRIOR
SET] button before advancing to step 2.
The [KEY PRIOR] button lights green, and it becomes possible to change
the key priority setting for after the transition.
2
Hold down the [PRIOR SET] button, and press the one of the next
transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4]
buttons in the PGM/PST bank) for the key you want to bring to the front
after the transition.
To set the priority to be the same as before the transition, press the [BKGD]
button.
Note
The [BKGD] button is only effective when in the mode for changing the
key priority for after the transition.
Key 1 selected.
Key priority: 3, 1, 4, 2 Key priority: 1, 3, 4, 2
345Key Priority Setting
Chapter 3 Transitions
When the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, the selected
key appears on top on the preview monitor. The priority of keys other than
the selected one does not change.
3
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat the previous operation
as required.
4
Execute the transition.
The keys are rearranged based on the set priority.
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation
Changing the priority of the currently inserted keys
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF3 ‘Key
Priority.’
The Key Priority menu appears.
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.
The keys are inserted in the key priority sequence with priority 1 at the
front.
Note
It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers.
The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor.
1
2
3
4
Priority 1
Priority 2
Priority 3
Priority 4
346 Key Priority Setting
Chapter 3 Transitions
Changing the key priority for after the transition
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF4 ‘Next
Key Priority.’
The Next Key Priority menu appears.
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.
For details of the key priority sequence, see the figure shown for step 2 in
the previous item (see page 345).
The keys appear in the set order on the preview monitor.
3
Execute the transition.
The keys are rearranged in the set order on the program monitor.
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority
You can check whether keys are currently output, and the key priority setting,
using the key status display in the transition control block of the M/E or PGM/
PST bank.
The display is above the next transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4]
([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank).
Display of the key output status
When a key is included in the output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank, the
corresponding ON indicator lights.
Key priority display
The key priority is indicated by numerals 1 to 4 lighting.
The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1, and the keys
underneath are numbered 2, 3, 4 away from the viewer (see page 345).
To display the key priority for after the transition, press the [KEY PRIOR]
button in the transition control block, turning it on. For keys for which the
priority after the transition is different from the current priority, the
corresponding numerals 1 to 4 flash. For a key with the same priority, the
indication remains on.
Example key status display given when the [KEY PRIOR] button is pressed:
Current key priority: 1, 2, 3, 4
347Key Priority Setting
Chapter 3 Transitions
Key priority after the transition: 3, 2, 1, 4
Indicators: 1, 3 (flashing), 2, 1 (flashing), 3, 4
Example key status display (showing the key priority after the transition)
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Lit
Flashing Flashing
LitLit
Lit
348 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation
Chapter 3 Transitions
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu
Operation
You can also select the required transition type by a menu operation.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to
the selected transition type.
For details, see the following.
• “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)
• “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)
•“Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352)
Note
When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for
Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), there
may be cases in which two or more transition types have been selected.
349Super Mix Settings
Chapter 3 Transitions
Super Mix Settings
For an overview of the super mix, see page 42.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
Select [Super Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.
3
Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 A Gain Background A output level 0.00 to 100.00%
3 B Gain Background B output level 0.00 to 100.00%
350 Color Matte Settings
Chapter 3 Transitions
Color Matte Settings
To set the color matte of a preset color mix, use the following procedure.
For an overview of the preset color mix, see page 42.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
Select [Preset Color Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.
3
In the <Preset Color Mix Fill> group, select one of the following.
Flat Color: monochrome color matte
Utility 2 Bus: signal selected on the utility 2 bus
Note
The utility 2 bus cannot be selected on the MVS-8000.
4
When “Flat Color” is selected, turn the knobs to adjust the color matte.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
3 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
4 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
351Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Executing a Transition
There are two ways of executing a transition: as an auto transition by a button
operation, and as a manual transition using the fader lever. You can also use a
combination of these two modes.
For an overview of the auto transitions and manual transitions, see “Executing
a Transition” (page 44).
Transition Indicator Function
In each of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, to the left of the fader lever is a
transition indicator composed of multiple LEDs. This indicator shows the state
of the transition, whether auto or manual, by which LEDs are lit.
Transition indicator
For example, in the previous illustration, it can be seen that the transition is
more than half completed.
When the transition is completed, all of the LEDs go off.
Lit
352 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Setting the Transition Rate
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the Flexi Pad control
block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value, or using the
Misc menu to access the Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and
change the settings. (See “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing
the Settings” (page 553).)
Note
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to set
the transition rate.
Frame input mode and timecode input mode
For numeric input of the transition rate value, there are two modes: frame input
mode and timecode input mode. You select one of these modes using either the
Flexi Pad control block (page 353) or the numeric keypad control block (page
354).
Frame input mode: The entered value is a number of frames.
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames
Timecode input mode: The entered value is a timecode value.
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 1 second 23 frames.
Note
Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode, a value not
smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode.
Frame display mode and timecode display mode
For the transition rate display in the transition control block, there are two
modes: frame display mode and timecode display mode. You can select one of
these modes in setup. (See “Operation Settings” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
Note
The setting is common to all banks of the switcher.
Frame display mode: Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames. In this
display mode, a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for
display as a number of frames.
Timecode display mode: Values are shown as timecode values, consisting of
seconds and frames. In this display mode, a value entered in frame input
353Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
mode is converted for display as a timecode value. If the value consists of
four or more digits, the last digit is not shown.
Example: A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as “9.23” and a value
of 10 seconds 1 frame appears as “10.0.”
Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block
Note
In the PGM/PST bank or when using a simple-type transition control block,
you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate.
1
In the M/E bank Flexi Pad control block, press the [TRANS RATE]
button.
The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered
transition rate.
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)
2
Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad.
If required, press the [TC] button to toggle the input mode (frame input or
timecode input).
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To cancel the entry, press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column
([WIPE], [DME], ...) or the [TRANS RATE] button.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
SHOT
BOX
MCRO
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
ENTR button
TRANS RATE button
Memory recall section
TC button
354 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
3
Press the [ENTR] button.
This confirms the entry, and the new setting appears in the transition
control block display.
Setting the transition rate in the numeric keypad control block
Numeric keypad control block
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [TRANS RATE] button.
2
Press the region selection button for the M/E or PGM/PST bank for which
you want to set the transition rate, turning it on.
The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region
name and the current transition rate setting for the region.
3
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.
If required, press the [TC] button to toggle the input mode (frame input or
timecode input).
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To clear the entry, press the [CLR] button.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
P-BUS
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
XPT
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
ENTER
TRANS RATE button
Region selection buttons
Display Numeric keypad
ENTER buttonTC button
355Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.
The transition control block display of the same bank (M/E or PGM/PST)
also shows the setting.
To enter a difference from the current value
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]
button.
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.
Setting the transition rate by a menu operation
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
3
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.
Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the
settings
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can display the transition rate,
independent key transition rate and fade-to-black transition rate, and change
the settings.
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings” (page 553).
Pattern Limit
There are two ways of setting a pattern limit: either by operating the fader lever
to save the fader position, or by using the Wipe menu or DME Wipe menu to
access the Edge/Direction menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
For an overview of the pattern limits, see page 46.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Transition Rate 0 to 999 (frame count)
356 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Notes
• A pattern limit only applies when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the
transition type.
• A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition (see page
364).
Transition control block (standard type)
Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever
1
Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern
size.
• First make sure that the [PTN LIMIT] button is off.
• To check the pattern size on the preview monitor, first press the [TRANS
PVW] button, to select the transition preview mode (see page 363).
2
Press the [LIMIT SET] button.
This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit.
Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation
1
When a wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/PST
menu, select first VF5 ‘Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/
PST menu, select first VF6 ‘DME Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
BKBD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
AUTO
TRANS CUT
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
TRANS PVW button
PTN LIMIT button
LIMIT SET button
357Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
2
Press the [Pattern Limit] button, turning it on.
3
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
a) 0.00%: Executing the transition does not change the video output at all.
b) 100.00%: The transition is the same as when no pattern limit is set, but the cross-point
button selections of the background A and B buses do not interchange when the transition
completes.
Executing a pattern limit transition
1
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it on.
The button you pressed lights amber.
2
Carry out the transition.
The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit. Even if the
transition completes, the cross-point button assignments of the background
A and B buses do not interchange.
3
Carry out the transition once again.
The status before the previous transition is restored.
To cancel the pattern limit
To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure,
press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it off.
If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure, the pattern limit has been
reached, carry out the following procedure.
1
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button.
The button you pressed lights green.
2
Carry out the transition.
The [PTN LIMIT] button goes off, and the pattern limit state is released.
Depending on the way in which the transition was executed, the action will
be as follows.
• When you press the [CUT] button, the pattern limit is immediately
released, and the image switches instantaneously.
• When you press the [AUTO TRANS] button, until the state of the next
transition, the transition is carried out over the duration given by the
transition rate.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Pattern Limit Pattern limit 0.00 a) to 100.00% b)
358 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
• When you move the fader lever, the transition is carried out from the
pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was
carried out.
Moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position
with the transition state, and you can move the fader lever either in the
forward direction or in the reverse direction.
Depending on the Setup settings, the transition may be executed at the
instant you press the [PTN LIMIT] button, and the button goes off. In this
case, execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition
rate in the menu setting, as far as the state of the next transition.
For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame
Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released
1
In the <Pattern Limit Release> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select
one of the following.
Auto Trans Rate: Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control
block
Independ Trans Rate: Independent transition rate
2
If you selected “Independ Trans Rate” in step 1, adjust the following
parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Independent transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
359Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Executing an Auto Transition
Transition control block (standard type)
To execute a transition on the M/E or PGM/PST bank by a button operation,
use the following procedure in the transition control block.
For an overview of the auto transition, see page 45.
To carry out an instantaneous cut transition: Press the [CUT] button.
To carry out a gradual transition: Press the [AUTO TRANS] button.
This executes the transition at the preset transition rate (see page 352).
While the transition is executing, the [AUTO TRANS] button lights
amber. When it completes the button goes off.
To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously: Press the
[CUT] button.
The [AUTO TRANS] button goes off.
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual
Transition)
To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever, use
the following procedure.
For an overview of the manual transition, see page 45.
BKBD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4
KEY
PRIOR MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
NAM
WIPE
SUPER
MIX
DME
PRIOR
SET NORM NORM
/REV REV TRANS
PVW
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
AUTO
TRANS CUT
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Fader lever
AUTO TRANS button
CUT button
360 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
To carry out the transition completely: Move the lever over the full range of
its travel.
To pause a partly executed transition: Stop moving the fader lever.
To resume a paused transition: Resume moving the fader lever.
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions
Using the [AUTO TRANS] button, the [CUT] button, and the fader lever, use
the following procedures.
Moving the fader lever during an auto transition
During an auto transition started by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button,
operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever, and the [AUTO
TRANS] button goes off. Thereafter, the fader lever controls the progress of
the transition.
Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever
• Press the [CUT] button to instantaneously complete the transition.
• Press the [AUTO TRANS] button to complete the rest of the transition at the
preset transition rate.
If the transition rate is set to 100 frames, and the fader lever has moved
through 1/4 of the transition, then the remaining 3/4 of the transition is carried
out in 100 frames.
Non-Sync State
If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed
as an auto transition, then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition
state. This is termed a non-sync state.
In a non-sync state, two lit LEDs indicate the position from which a normal
transition can be carried out. This is either at one end position or both end
positions of the fader lever travel.
Moving the fader lever toward the position of the lit LEDs does not carry out a
transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non-sync state
is released, and it is now possible to carry out the next transition.
361Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
• If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs, this
carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader lever
travel.
• Even in a non-sync state, you can carry out an auto transition by pressing the
[AUTO TRANS] button. During the auto transition, the indicators show the
transition progress in the usual way, but when the transition completes, they
once again indicate the non-sync state.
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode
In the bus fixed mode there is a fixed relationship between the position of the
fader lever and the signal output on each bus. Depending on the direction of the
transition, the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular
direction, as shown in the following table. This does not affect an auto
transition, which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction.
For an overview of the bus fixed mode, see “Flip-flop mode and bus fixed
mode” (page 45).
Fader lever operating direction in bus fixed mode
Manual transition completed as auto
transition when moving the fader
lever upward: Top two LEDs light.
Manual transition completed as
auto transition when moving the
fader lever downward: Bottom two
LEDs light.
Once the fader lever is moved
to this position, the non-sync
state ends, and the next
transition (direction shown by
the arrow) is possible.
Next transition Transition direction Fader lever movement
Background A t B Downward
B t A Upward
362 Executing a Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
• When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the
background and keys 1, 2, 3, and 4, then the transition for all of these must
be in the same direction complying with the above table.
• If as a result of an auto transition, for example, the fader lever position does
not agree with the signal output, this is a non-sync state (see page 360) and
LEDs light at both end positions of the fader lever travel. Moving the fader
lever does not carry out a transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end
position the non-sync state is released, and it is now possible to carry out the
next transition. If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit
LEDs, this carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader
lever travel.
Keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 On t Off (deletion) Downward
Off t On (insertion) Upward
Next transition Transition direction Fader lever movement
363Transition Preview
Chapter 3 Transitions
Transition Preview
Carrying out a transition preview
For an overview of the transition preview, see page 46.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST bank transition control block, press the [TRANS
PVW] button.
The [TRANS PVW] button lights green, and the switcher is now in the
transition preview mode. At this point, the preview output is the same as
the program output before the [TRANS PVW] button was pressed.
2
Operate the fader lever, or press the [AUTO TRANS] button or [CUT]
button.
On the preview monitor, you can check the effect of the transition.
To terminate a transition preview
There are three modes for a transition preview. To terminate a transition
preview, carry out the operation which depends on the mode, and press the
[TRANS PVW] button, turning it off.
Lock: Toggling the [TRANS PVW] button on and off switches between the
transition preview mode and the normal mode.
Hold: The preview mode obtains only while the [TRANS PVW] button is held
down.
One Time: Each time a transition ends, it reverts to the normal mode.
Set the transition preview mode in the following combinations. For details, see
Chapter 16 “Engineering Setup” (Volume 2).
Notes
• During a transition, whether executed with the [AUTO TRANS] button or
the fader lever, it is not possible to press the [TRANS PVW] button.
• In bus fixed mode (see page 45), transition previews are not available.
• When using the simple-type transition control block (see page 371),
transition previews are not available.
Transition Preview
mode
Switcher setup
(Transition menu)
<Transition Preview> group
Panel setup
(Operation >Custom Button
menu)
<Trans Pvw> group
Lock Normal Lock
Hold Normal Hold
One Time One Time –
364 Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 3 Transitions
Independent Key Transitions
Independent key transition control block (standard type)
To set independent transitions for the keyers on the M/E or PGM/PST bank,
use the independent key transition control block.
For an overview of the independent key transitions, see page 37.
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations
1
Select one or more of the delegation buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1]
to [DSK4] in the PGM/PST bank), turning them on.
You can press more than one button at the same time.
2
Select the transition type.
To fade a key in or out: Press the [MIX] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern: Press the
[WIPE] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern: Press
the [DME] button, turning it on.
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion and deletion as independent
modes, make the settings for the next transition in the independent key
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 K-MOD
EMBL K-SS
K-TR
ENBL
K-SS
STORE
MIX WIPE DME
KEY1
ON
AUTO
TRANS
KEY2
ON
AUTO
TRANS
KEY3
ON
AUTO
TRANS
KEY4
ON
AUTO
TRANS
Independent key transition type
selection buttons
Independent key transition
execution section
Key delegation buttons
Key source name display/key
snapshot buttons
365Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 3 Transitions
transition control block.
Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting
it. For example, with the key not inserted, if you select the transition type
and carry out a transition, this will be the setting when inserting a key.
You can also use the Transition menu to select a desired independent key
transition type for each key (see the next section).
For details of the wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions” (page 455). For details of DME wipe settings, see “DME
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).
3
Execute the transition.
To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition:
Press the [AUTO TRANS] button.
For details of the transition rate, see “Setting the Independent Key
Transition Rate” (page 366).
For details of operation together with a common transition, see
“Combining other transitions with independent key transitions” (page
38).
To cut the key in or out instantaneously: Press the [KEY ON] button on
the keyer.
Note
In an independent key transition, the pattern limit function is not available.
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu
Operation
You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu
operation.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu for the selected appears.
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.
366 Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 3 Transitions
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the Flexi Pad control
block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value, or using the
Key menu to access the Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and
change the settings. (See “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing
the Settings” (page 553).)
When the setup selection is for separate transition rates for inserting or deleting
a key, you can set both rates independently. For example, with the system in
the state with the key not inserted, the transition rate setting applies to key
insertion.
Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi Pad
control block
Note
In the PGM/PST bank or when using a simple-type transition control block,
you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E bank, hold down the [TRANS
RATE] button, and in the independent key transition control block, press
the delegation button [KEY1] to [KEY4] for the key for which you want
to set the transition rate.
The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered
independent key transition rate.
2
Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad.
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To cancel the entry, press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column
([WIPE], [DME], ...) or the [TRANS RATE] button.
For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode, see page 352.
3
Press the [ENTR] button.
367Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 3 Transitions
Setting the independent key transition rate in the numeric
keypad control block
Note
You cannot use the numeric keypad control block to set the transition rate for
a simple transition.
1
In the numeric keypad control block, hold down the [TRANS RATE]
button, and in the independent key transition control block, press the
delegation button [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/PST
bank) for the key for which you want to set the transition rate.
The numeric keypad control block changes to the mode for inputting the
independent key transition rate, and its display now shows the
corresponding region name and the current transition rate set for the
region.
2
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To clear the entry value, press the [CLR] button.
For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode, see page 352.
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.
To enter a difference from the current value
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]
button.
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.
Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu for the selected key appears.
2
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.
368 Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 3 Transitions
3
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.
Independent key transition rate display
To check the set independent key transition rate, press the key source name
display/key snapshot button above the corresponding delegation button when
the [K-SS] button is off.
Displaying the independent key transition rates in a menu and
changing the settings
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can also display the transition
rate, independent key transition rate and fade-to-black transition rate, and
change the settings.
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings” (page 553).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 (frame count)
369Fade to Black
Chapter 3 Transitions
Fade to Black
Fade to Black Operation
Fade to black control block
Carrying out a fade to black
To carry out a fade to black, press the [FTB] button in the fade to black control
block.
The fade to black is carried out with the transition rate set for the program
output of the PGM/PST bank.
During the transition, the [FTB] button lights amber. When the transition
completes (the video is completely black), the button lit color changes to red.
For an overview of the fade to black, see page 47.
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate
Setting the fade to black transition rate
1
In the PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
AUTO PST P/P
FTB
DME
K
DME
V
M/E
3
M/E
2
M/E
1
M/E
3K
M/E
2K
M/E
IK
P/P
K
FTB button
370 Fade to Black
Chapter 3 Transitions
2
Select [FTB].
3
Turn the knob to set the fade to black transition rate.
Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the
settings
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and
change the settings.
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings” (page 553).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 (frame count)
371Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Simple Transition
The “simple transitions” refer to the transitions carried out using the simple-
type transition control block (or simple-type independent key transition control
block).
Transition control block (simple right-hand type)
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions
Carrying out a transition using a simple-type transition control
block
1
With the background A row of cross-point buttons in the cross-point
control block, select the background video.
KEY1
NORM
/REV
REV
KEY2
LIMIT
SET
PTN
LIMIT
TAKE
MIX
NAM
WIPE
DME
ON
OVER
ON
OVER
Key status display
Key transition selection buttons
Transition type selection buttons
Transition execution section
372 Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
2
Using one of the following methods, select the way in which the transition
will affect the image.
Use a combination of the transition type selection buttons ([MIX], [NAM],
[WIPE] and [DME]) and the next transition selection buttons ([KEY1] and
[KEY2]).
For an overview of the mix, NAM, wipe, and DME wipe transition types,
see “Transition Types” (page 41).
To change the background only: Press one of the [MIX], [NAM],
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons.
The [KEY1] and [KEY2]buttons go off, and the system changes to the
background transition mode.
To insert or delete key 1: Hold down the [KEY1] button and press one of
the [MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons.
To insert or delete key 2: Hold down the [KEY2] button and press one of
the [MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons.
To insert or delete key 1 and key 2 simultaneously: Hold down the
[KEY1] and [KEY2] buttons, and press one of the [MIX], [NAM],
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons.
To use a super mix or preset color mix: Select [Super Mix] or [Preset
Color Mix] in the Misc >Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST
bank.
To set the key priority, use the Misc >Key Priority menu for the M/E or
PGM/PST bank. For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu
Operation” (page 345).
Note
The transition type selection buttons ([MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and
[DME]) can be assigned to other transition types in setup.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
3
Select the new background for after the transition.
• Select the background video with the background B row of cross-point
buttons.
• To insert a key, select the key signal, and make various settings as
required.
For details of key settings, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 377).
4
Depending on the transition type selected in step 2, make the required
settings.
For details of the settings, see the following sections:
373Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Super mix: “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)
Preset color mix: “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)
Wipe: “Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings” (page 438)
DME Wipe: “Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings” (page 466)
Clip transition: “Clip Transition Operations” (page 524)
5
Carry out the transition in the transition execution section.
For a gradual transition such as a mix or wipe: Press the [TAKE]
button, or operate the fader lever.
See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352) and “Pattern Limit” (page
355) as required.
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority
You can check the output status of keys 1 and 2 and the key priority setting, in
the key status display in the transition control block.
The key status display includes two ON indicators corresponding to keys 1 and
2.
Display of the key output status
When the key is inserted in the output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank, the
indication “ON” lights, and when it is not inserted, the indication goes off.
Key priority display
The key lying in front on the program monitor has an indication “OVER” lit.
To set the key priority, use the Misc >Key Priority menu for the M/E or PGM/
PST bank. For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation”
(page 345).
Split Fader
What does “split fader” mean?
The term “split fader” refers to the function of carrying out a transition with the
fader lever split into left and right halves, so that the background A and
background B buses can be manipulated separately.
To use the split fader, the following conditions must be met.
• The fader lever is in bus fixed mode. (See “Settings Relating to Video
Switching (Transition Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
374 Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
• The necessary settings have been made in a Setup menu to enable the split
fader (See “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
• A background is selected for the next transition.
• For the transition type, [MIX] or [NAM] is selected.
Split fader operation
The two halves of the split fader lever correspond to the buses as follows.
Right fader lever: Background A bus
Left fader lever: Background B bus
The relationship between the positions of the two fader levers and the image
output in a mix is as follows.
• When the transition type is NAM, the outputs of the A bus and B bus in the
above table are the outputs subjected to NAM.
• The transition indicators always show the progress of the background A bus.
• The operation of the left lever and that of the right lever can be swapped. (See
“Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition
Module
You carry out independent key transition operations using the independent key
transition control block (simple type). This controls only keys 3 and 4.
However, each key button can be assigned to any key in setup (see Chapter 16
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).
Left lever position Right lever
position
A bus output B bus output
Top Top 100% 0%
Bottom Top 100% 100%
To p B o t t o m 0 % 0 %
Bottom Bottom 0% 100%
Center Center 50% 50%
375Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
Independent key transition control block (simple type)
Carrying out a transition using a simple-type independent key
transition control block
1
Select the transition type for key 3 or key 4 using the independent key
transition type selection buttons.
To fade a key in or out: Press the [MIX] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern: Press the
[WIPE] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern: Press
the [DME] button, turning it on.
For details of wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions” (page 455). For details of DME wipe settings, see “DME
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).
To cut the key instantaneously in or out: Press the [CUT] button, turning
it on.
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY3
ON
TAKE
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY4
ON
TAKE
Key 3 control block Key 4 control block
Independent key transition type
selection buttons
Independent key transition
execution section
The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same.
376 Simple Transition
Chapter 3 Transitions
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion and deletion as independent
modes, make the settings for the next transition in the independent key
transition control block.
Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting
it. For example, with the key not inserted, if you select the transition type
and carry out a transition, this will be the setting when inserting a key.
2
Carry out the transition in the independent key transition execution
section.
To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition:
Press the [TAKE] button.
To set the independent key transition rate using a simple-type transition
control block, use the key 3 and key 4 Transition menus. For details, see
“Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate” (page 366).
To cut the key in or out instantaneously: Press the [KEY 3 ON] button
or [KEY 4 ON] button.
Note
In an independent key transition, the pattern limit function is not available.
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Setting Operations Using Menus .....................................................378
Key Setting Menus ............................................................................378
Key Type Setting ...............................................................................379
Chroma Key Composition .................................................................381
Chroma Key Adjustments .................................................................382
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source ...................................................387
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................390
Masks .................................................................................................397
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................400
Specifying the Key Output Destination .............................................403
Key Modify Clear ..............................................................................404
Blink Function ...................................................................................404
Video Processing ...............................................................................405
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block ...........................406
Operations in the Key Control Block ................................................406
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................410
Masks .................................................................................................414
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................415
Other Key Setting Operations ...........................................................417
Resizer .......................................................................................................419
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys .....................................419
Resizer Interpolation Settings ...........................................................424
Resizer Crop/Border Settings ............................................................424
Applying Resizer Effects ...................................................................427
Key Snapshots ...........................................................................................433
Key Snapshot Operations ..................................................................433
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module ..........435
378 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
There are two ways of making key settings: either using menus, or using the
key control block.
This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the
menus, taking the M/E-1 >Key1 menu as an example.
Operations in the Key menus are the same for all banks (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and
PGM/PST).
For details of the method of using the key control block, see “Key Setting
Operations With the Key Control Block” (page 406).
Key Setting Menus
The key setting menus for each bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST) are as
follows.
Accessing a key setting menu
For example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, carry out any of the following
procedures.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], then
press VF1 ‘Key1.’
• In the M/E-1 bank transition control block, press the KEY1 next transition
selection button twice in rapid succession.
• In the M/E-1 bank independent key transition control block, press the key
delegation button [KEY1] twice in rapid succession.
• In the key control block, press the M/E delegation button [M/E1], then press
the key delegation button [KEY1] twice in rapid succession.
Any of the above operations displays the M/E1 >Key1 menu.
Note that you can access the DSK menus by pressing the button for the
corresponding key in the downstream key control block twice in rapid
succession.
Bank Keys set Menus
M/E-1 Keys 1 to 4 M/E-1 >Key1 to 4
M/E-2 Keys 1 to 4 M/E-2 >Key1 to 4
M/E-3 Keys 1 to 4 M/E-3 >Key1 to 4
PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 PGM/PST >DSK1 to 4
379Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Type Setting
Setting the key type in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
The Type menu appears.
2
In the <Key Type> group, select the key type.
Luminance: luminance key
Linear: linear key
Chroma: chroma key
Color Vector: color vector key
Wipe Pattern: wipe pattern key
Key Wipe Pattern: key wipe pattern key
For the selected key type, you can now set the parameters.
For an overview of the key types, see page 48.
3
Carry out the following settings as required, depending on the key type
selected in step 2.
To enable clean mode (see page 49) for a luminance key, linear key or
color vector key: Select [Clean Mode] so that it is set on.
When clean mode is enabled, key fill is added to the background
without cutting out with key source.
When chroma key is selected: Select [Chroma Adjust] to access the
Chroma Adjust menu (see page 382), and make the required settings.
When a wipe pattern key is selected: In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu (see
page 438), select the pattern and set any modifiers, then return to the
M/E-1 >Key1 menu.
When a key wipe pattern key is selected: In the M/E-1 >Key1 >
Transition >Wipe Adjust menu (see page 455), carry out pattern
selection and modifier setting, then return to the M/E-1 >Key1 >Type
menu.
Note
For a wipe pattern selected for a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key,
the [Edge] and [Direction] modifier settings are not available.
4
Set the parameters.
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected
380 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
a) Setting this value to 1, produces the “through” state in which no filter is applied. The larger
the value, the more strongly the filter applies.
• When a chroma key is selected
• When a color vector key is selected
• When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected
5
Make the following settings as required.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for generating the
key signal
+109.59 to –7.31
2 Gain Key sensitivity –100.00 to +100.00
3 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
4 Filter Filter coefficient 1 to 9 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Y Clip Reference level for creating
luminance signal
+109.59 to –7.31
2 Y Gain Luminance signal sensitivity –100.00 to +100.00
3 C Clip Reference level for creating
chrominance signal
100.00 to 0.00
4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity –100.00 to +100.00
5 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Y Filter Luminance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9
2 C Filter Chrominance signal filter
coefficient
1 to 9
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Degree of edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
381Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
To invert the black and white sense of the key source: Press [Key
Invert], turning it on.
To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key: Press [Key Position], turning it on,
and set the parameters.
To set the key priority: Press [Key Priority] or select VF7 ‘Misc’ and
HF3 ‘Key Priority’ to access the Key Priority menu.
For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation” (page
345).
Chroma Key Composition
Composing an image by chroma keying
There are two types of composition for chroma keying: normal mix, and
additive mix.
For an overview of the chroma key composition, see page 49.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
2
Select [Chroma] in the <Key Type> group.
It becomes possible to adjust the key density (see page 380).
3
Select [Chroma Adjust].
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.
4
Carry out auto chroma key adjustments.
Also carry out manual adjustments if necessary to obtain an optimum
chroma key image.
For the adjustment procedures, see page 382.
5
In the <Mix Mode> group, select [Normal Mix] or [Additive Mix]
depending on the desired type of chroma key composition.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Phase Key horizontal position –4.00 to +4.00
2 Left Key left edge position –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Key right edge position –4.00 to +4.00
382 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
When using an additive mix for chroma keying, the (typically blue)
background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black. For this,
use the color cancel function (see page 383).
Using the plane function
In an additive mix, since no key is applied to the foreground, any variations in
the (typically blue) background may appear in the composite image. To avoid
this, a particular luminance level can be set for the (blue) background, and
regions of lower luminance forcibly cut.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Plane] on.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
Chroma Key Adjustments
There are two ways of making chroma key adjustments: automatically, using
the auto chroma key function, or manually, making individual adjustments
such as color cancel adjustments and window adjustments.
Making auto chroma key adjustments
Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to
specify a part of the foreground video (for example, the blue background color)
and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type,’ then select [Chroma] in the
<Key Type> group.
2
Select [Chroma Adjust].
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.
3
Select [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group.
The foreground video only appears on the monitor, with a white box-
shaped sample selector.
4
Adjust the position and size of the sample selector, to specify the color to
be used as the basis of chroma keying (typically a blue background).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance level 0.00 to 100.00
383Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
a) The setting ranges depend on the signal format, screen aspect ratio, and size settings.
5
Select [Auto Start] in the <Auto> group.
This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the
sample selector, and displays the composite image on the monitor.
Making key active adjustments
When the key active function is on, the composite image is output to the
monitor, and you can watch the monitor while manually adjusting the keying.
When the key active function is off, only the foreground image appears. Set
this off when manually adjusting color cancel (see the next section).
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Key Active] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Making color cancel adjustments
If the background color is leaking into the foreground video, turning the color
cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, turn [Key Active] off.
Only the foreground image appears on the monitor.
2
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Color Cancel] on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –100.00 to +100.00 a)
3 Size Size 1.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Chroma key reference level 0.00 to 100.00
2 Gain Key gain –100.00 to +100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
4 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
5 Filter Filter coefficient 1 to 9
384 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
4
Set [Key Active] on.
The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor.
Making key signal adjustments for color cancel
When the color cancel function is set on, you can adjust the key signal for color
cancel.
1
In the <Color Cancel> group of the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Color
Cancel] on.
2
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Cancel Key] on.
The cancel key is now on, and you can now adjust the key signal for color
cancel.
3
Make the following settings, as required, in the <Color Cancel> group.
• When setting [Key Position] on and adjusting the color cancel key
edge position
• When setting [Window] on and adjusting the detection range of the
color cancel key
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
5 Filter Filter coefficient 1 to 9
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Color cancel key reference level 0.00 to 100.00
2 Gain Color cancel key gain –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Phase Move left and right edges of the
color cancel key simultaneously
Left edge position
value shown
2 Left Move left edge of the color cancel
key
–3.00 to +3.00
3 Right Move right edge of the color
cancel key
–3.00 to +3.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Crop Crop value 100.00 to 0.00
385Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
For details of the crop and angle parameters, see “Chroma key window”
(page 50).
• When setting [Y Balance] on and adjusting the ratio in which Y
balance is added to the color cancel key
Adjusting the window
Setting the window function on allows you to adjust the detection range used
to determine the key signal. When this function is off, the default range is used
for the key.
For an overview of the window, see “Chroma key window” (page 50).
After making sure that the values of Clip, Gain, and Hue are adjusted
appropriately, use the following procedure to make the window adjustment.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Window] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Adjusting the Y balance
Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that, even if the hue is the same,
only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background.
For an overview of the Y balance, see page 51.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Y Balance] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
2 Angle Angle value 180.00 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mixture Ratio of Y balance key 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Crop Crop value 100.00 to 0.00
2 Angle Angle value 180.00 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Luminance range 0.00 to 100.00
2 Gain Key gain –100.00 to +100.00
386 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Adjusting the chroma key shadow
This function allows a shadow falling on the (typically blue) background color
to be rendered more realistically. Since portions of the (blue) background of
less than a certain luminance are treated as shadows, there is no effect on
cutting out of the foreground.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Shadow] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Note
When chroma key shadow is on, key edge is changed to normal, and soft edge
is switched off.
Adjusting the video signal
You can change the gain of the foreground signal, or vary the Hue. There are
separate adjustments for the gain of the whole video signal, or Y and C
individually.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [FRGD CCR] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
3 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Reference luminance for shadows 0.00 to 100.00
2 Gain Shadow key gain –100.00 to +100.00
3 Density Shadow opacity 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Shadow softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Overall gain of video signal –100.00 to +100.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –100.00 to +100.00
3 C Gain C signal gain –100.00 to +100.00
4 Hue Hue offset amount –180.00 to +180.00
387Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source
Selecting key fill and key source
To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
The Type menu appears.
2
In the <Key Fill> group, select either of the following for use as key fill.
Key Bus: signal selected on the key 1 fill bus
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator
3
If you selected [Key Bus] in step 2, select the key fill signal on the key 1
row in the cross-point control block.
To select key fill for key 3 or key 4 in the cross-point control block, press
the [KEY3] button or [KEY4] button to the right of the key bus buttons,
turning it on, to allocate the key 1 row or key 2 row to the key 3 fill or key
4 fill, then press the desired cross-point button.
4
If you selected [Matte] in step 2, in the same Type menu, press the [Matte
Adjust] button to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the single-
color or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a single-
color matte or a two-color combination in the <Fill Matte> group.
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.
Mix Color: Carry out a color mix. Adjust color 1 and color 2, and select a
mix pattern (see the next section).
5
In the <Key Source> group, specify the key source selection mode.
Self: The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source.
When the key type is selected as chroma key, select [Self].
Auto Select: The signal allocated, being paired with the key fill bus signal,
to a cross-point button is automatically selected as the key source. The
setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in the Setup menu.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
388 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
(See “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).)
Split: You can select a key source signal independently of the key source
automatically selected in Auto Select mode.
6
When [Split] was selected in step 5, hold down the [SPLIT] button in the
key control block, then in the cross-point control block key 1 row, select
the key source signal. Alternatively, hold down the key delegation button
in the transition control block and press a cross-point button in the key 1
row to select the key source signal.
Notes
• In the above-stated key 1 row operation, you can only select a key signal
assigned to a cross-point button. For the method of selecting a video
signal, see “To select a video signal assigned to a cross-point button”
below.
On the MVS-8000, the video signal selection operation is not supported.
• When [Split] is selected, the key memory function (see page 56) is
disabled.
To select a video signal assigned to a cross-point button
By selecting the key source bus with an auxiliary bus control block AUX
delegation button, and pressing the cross-point button, it is possible to select
the video signal assigned to the cross-point button.
(If you press the cross-point button with holding down [KEY], the key signal
assigned to the cross-point button.)
Note
In the above operation, the following settings must have been made.
• Assigning the key source bus to an AUX delegation button
For details, see “Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)”
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
• Setting the [KEY] button operating mode
For details, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
This operation is not supported on the MVS-8000.
Carrying out a color mix for key fill
When [Matte] is selected for key fill, you can combine color 1 and color 2. For
the combination, you can use not only a key wipe generator pattern, but also
the dedicated pattern for key edge color mix.
389Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
1
In the <Key Fill> group of the Type menu, select [Matte] and press [Matte
Adjust].
The Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
Select [Mix Color] in the <Fill Matte> group.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
4
Select the combining pattern in the <Mix Pattern> group.
Key Wipe: The wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition is
used for combination. You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern
Select] to open the menu for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select
menu), and make adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the
menu for pattern adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).
Key Edge Pattern: Combine using the dedicated pattern selected for the
color mix in the key edge fill. You can change this pattern by pressing
[Pattern Select] to open the menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe
pattern selection (Mix Pattern Select menu), and make adjustments by
pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern adjustment
(Matte Adjust menu).
For details, see “Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte”
(page 394).
5
In the Type menu, adjust color 1 and color 2.
To adjust color 1, select [Color1], and to adjust color 2, select [Color2],
then adjust the following parameters.
6
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Softness of the edge of the
pattern
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
390 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Edge Modifications
To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF2 ‘Edge.’
The Edge menu appears.
2
Select the edge type in the <Edge> group.
For an overview of the key edge modifications, see “Edge modifiers”
(page 52).
Normal: unadorned edge
Border: edge with border applied
Drop Border: edge with drop border applied
Shadow: edge with shadow applied
Outline: edge used as outline
Emboss: embossing effect applied to edge
If you select [Normal], skip to step 7.
3
Set the border width and other parameters.
When border or outline is selected: The setting parameters depend on
the key type and whether the separate edge function is enabled or not.
To enable the separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it
on.
• Separate edge off
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
• Separate edge on
The left, right, top, and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1WidthWidth 0.00 to 8.00 a)
(0.00 to 100.00) b)
3 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
391Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
independently. The separate edge function is only valid when a
luminance key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
When drop border or shadow is selected: The setting parameter values
depend on the on/off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode/
8H mode (see page 54).
• “Key drop OFF” mode
• “Key drop ON” mode
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
When emboss is selected:
a) The Density adjustment only affects the key edge. This can be adjusted separately from
Key Density, and if Key Density is set to 0.00, the embossed edge effect only can be
applied.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top edge width 0.00 to 8.00 a)
2 Left Left edge width 0.00 to 8.00 a)
3 Right Right edge width 0.00 to 8.00 a)
4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0.00 to 8.00 a)
5 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width 0.00 to 8.00
2 Position Position 359.99 to 180.00
3 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1Width Width 0.00 to 8.00 a)
2 Position Position 359.99 to 0.00
3 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width 0.00 to 4.00
2 Position Position 359.99 to 0.00
3Density a) Density 0.00 to 100.00
392 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
To make edge fill adjustments, carry out the settings in step 6.
4
Select the edge fill signal in the <Edge Fill> group.
Utility 1 Bus: signal selected on the utility 1 bus
Matte: signal from dedicated color matte generator.
It becomes possible to adjust color 1.
When the edge type is outline, in place of the edge fill signal, the selected
key fill signal fills the outline, and elsewhere remains as the background.
5
Carry out the following operation, depending on the selection in step 4.
When [Utility 1 Bus] is selected: Hold down the [UTIL] button in the
cross-point control block, and select the signal in the background A
bus row.
While the [UTIL] button is held down, the background A bus changes
to the utility 1 bus.
Note
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).)
When [Matte] is selected: Press [Matte Adjust] in the same EDGE menu,
to display the Matte Adjust menu, and adjust a single color or two-
color combination color matte.
You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two-color
combination color matte in the <Edge Matte> group.
For the color mix operation, see “Carrying out a color mix for the key edge
fill matte” (page 394).
6
When emboss is selected for the edge type, adjust the color in the <Emboss
Fill> group.
To adjust matte 1 press [Matte1], and to adjust matte 2 press [Matte2], then
adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
393Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
7
To make the edge soft, press [Soft Edge] to set it on, and adjust the
softness.
For a normal edge, when [Soft Edge] is enabled, [Key Drop] is kept on.
8
To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left, right, top,
and bottom of the source edge, press [Fine Key], to set it on, and adjust the
following parameters.
Note
In the emboss function it is not possible to set [Fine Key] on.
• When the edge type is normal, drop border or shadow, enabling the [Fine
Key] function keeps [Key Drop] on.
• When applying a border to the key edge, enabling the [Fine Key]
function halves the border width setting range.
To fix key fill and key source in key drop off mode
1
In the Edge menu, press [Key Delay Mode].
The Key Delay Mode menu appears.
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Key top edge position –2.00 to +2.00
2 Left Key left edge position –2.00 to +2.00
3 Right Key right edge position –2.00 to +2.00
4 Bottom Key bottom edge position –2.00 to +2.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Phase Key horizontal position Left edge position
value shown
2 V Phase Key vertical position Top edge position
value shown
394 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
This function is only supported on the MVS-8000G.
2
Press [Frame Delay], setting it to On.
Note
This function uses the resizer, and therefore the expected result of the
setting may not be obtained if conditions do not allow the resizer to be
used.
Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte
When you select ‘Matte’ for the edge fill of a border, drop border, or shadow,
you can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern
generated by the dedicated pattern generator.
1
In the <Edge Fill> group of the Edge menu, select [Matte], then press
[Matte Adjust].
The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
a) The patterns are the same as standard wipes. (For details, see “Wipe Pattern List” in
Appendix (Volume 1) (page 560).)
To select the pattern, display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing
[Mix Pattern] in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu. After selecting one of the
patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the Mix Pattern
Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.
4
Adjust color 1 and color 2.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0.00 to 100.00
3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0.00 to 100.00
395Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
To adjust color 1 press [Color 1], and to adjust color 2 press [Color 2],
turning it on respectively, and adjust the following parameters.
5
If required, set the pattern modifiers.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See page 65.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
a) See page 68.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See page 67.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and inclining the
pattern
a) See page 66.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
396 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant speed
a) See page 66.
6
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press [Color Invert], turning it on.
Applying the zabton effects
1
In the Edge menu, press [Zabton], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Note
If in the pattern selection described below you select “Mask Pattern,” and
“Box” for the main mask, the “Size” parameter here cannot be adjusted.
Set “Size” in the Main Mask menu.
3
To adjust the pattern and color, press [Zabton Adjust].
The Zabton Adjust menu appears.
4
In the <Zabton Pattern> group, select the pattern.
Key Wipe: Use a key wipe.
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the
menu for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select menu), and make
adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern
adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).
Key Edge Pattern: Use a color mixing pattern for key edge.
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the
menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection (Mix Pattern
Select menu), and make adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to
open the menu for pattern adjustment (Matte Adjust menu).
Mask Pattern: Use the main mask Box or Pattern.
You can also press [Pattern Select], and in the corresponding pattern
adjustment menu, change the pattern.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Pattern edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
397Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
5
To adjust the color, press [Zabton Color] and adjust the following
parameters.
Masks
There are two masks, which can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key
or background, or to remove defects, and these are known as the main mask and
subsidiary mask. You can either use the main mask and subsidiary mask
independently, or at the same time.
For an overview of the masks, see page 55.
Using the main mask
For example, to use the main mask for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF3 ‘Main Mask.’
The Main Mask menu appears.
2
In the <Mask Type> group, select the mask type.
Key Mask: Masks a part of a key.
Bkgd Mask: Masks a part of a background.
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.
Box: signal from the dedicated box generator
Pattern: signal from the dedicated pattern generator
4
Set the mask source parameters.
• When a box is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
4 Density Density 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top position –100.00 to +100.00
398 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
• When a pattern is selected
a) The pattern is the same as a standard wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume
1) (page 560).)
To select the pattern, display the Mask Ptn Select menu by pressing the
[Mask Ptn Select] button in the Main Mask menu. After selecting one of
the patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the Mask Ptn
Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.
5
To invert the black and white sense of the mask source, press the [Mask
Invert] button, turning it on.
6
When a pattern is selected as the mask source, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See page 65.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
2 Left Left position –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Right position –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Bottom position –100.00 to +100.00
5 Soft Box softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
399Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
a) See page 68.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See page 67.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the
angle of the pattern rotation
a) See page 66.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the
rate of pattern rotation
a) See page 66.
Using the subsidiary mask
For example, to use the subsidiary mask for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF4 ‘Sub Mask.’
The Sub Mask menu appears.
2
In the <Mask Type> group, select the mask type.
Key Mask: Masks a part of a key.
Bkgd Mask: Masks a part of a background.
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.
Wipe: wipe pattern selected for a transition
If you select [Wipe], select the pattern and make modifier settings in
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Pattern angle –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rate of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
400 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
the M/E-1 >Wipe menu (see page 438), then return to this M/E-1
>Key1 menu.
In the case of a wipe pattern selected for a mask, the modifier [Edge]
and [Direction] settings are not available.
Utility 1 Bus: signal selected on the utility 1 bus
When you selected [Utility 1 Bus], hold down the [UTIL] button in the
M/E-1 bank cross-point control block, and select the signal with the
background A bus buttons. While the [UTIL] button is pressed, the
background A bus switches to the utility 1 bus.
Note
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).)
4
Set the mask source parameters.
• When wipe is selected
• When utility 1 bus is selected
5
To invert the black and white sense of the mask source, press the [Mask
Invert] button, turning it on.
Applying a DME Effect to a Key
Note
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in up to
two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface
simultaneously.
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for creating mask
signal
+109.59 to –7.31
2 Gain Gain –100.00 to +100.00
401Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Assigning a DME to a key
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF5 ‘Processed Key.’
The Processed Key menu appears.
2
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1 to DME8) to
be used.
The lit colors of [DME1] to [DME8] indicate the DME assignment.
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently
selected key.
Off: DME is not assigned.
To select a DME being used by another keyer
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.
Using two or three DME channels on one keyer
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.
1
Select the DME for the first channel (see the previous item, “Assigning a
DME to a key”), then select the successive channel for the second channel.
For the third channel select the channel after that.
2
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1
row (DME external video bus).
3
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4, turn off the [KEY4]
button in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME
utility 1 bus).
• If the selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8, turn on the [KEY4] button
in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2
bus).
402 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Using four DME channels on one keyer
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.
1
Select the DME channel 1 (or channel 5) for the first channel (see
“Assigning a DME to a key” (page 401)). In the same way, select the DME
channel 2 (channel 6) for the second channel, the DME channel 3 (channel
7) for the third channel, and the DME channel 4 (channel 8) for the fourth
channel.
2
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1
row (DME external video bus).
3
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 3, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).
• If the selected DME is channel 7, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).
4
To select the video signal for the fourth channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 4, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).
• If the selected DME is channel 8, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).
When using the SDI interface
The operations to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels
differ from those in the previous procedure: select the video signals on the
AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device
Interface >DME Type Setting >DME SDI Interface menu).
Note
In setup (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device Interface menu), if “Up to
3Keys” is selected, the second channel video signal is also selected on the AUX
bus.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 556).
403Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal
1
In the Processed Key menu, press [Monitor].
The Monitor menu appears.
2
Press [Monitor Set], turning it on.
3
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1 to DME8) to
be used.
This assigns the selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K.
The colors with which [DME1] to [DME8] are lit show the key assignment
status.
Lit green: DME currently being monitored
Lit amber: DME that can be monitored
Off: Unassigned DME
Specifying the Key Output Destination
Using the key processed keyer signals (external processed key)
To select the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX
buses, press [Ext Proc Key], turning it on, in the Processed Key menu.
This assigns the key fill and key source signals for M/E-1 key 1 to reentry
signals PROC V and PROC K.
Note
You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross-point
selection buttons of the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Using the key processed keyer signals or signals to which a DME
effect is applied in frame memory (frame memory feed)
To use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the frame
memory source buses, in the Processed Key menu, press [FM Feed]. [Ext Proc
Key] turns on, and the key fill and key source signals processed on the
currently selected keyer are automatically assigned to frame memory source
buses 1 and 2. When a DME is selected on the keyer, the key fill and key source
signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned.
404 Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Modify Clear
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press the corresponding VF button (VF1 to VF4) to return the key settings to
their initial status.
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).
Blink Function
With the blink function, you can obtain the following effects.
Key blink: The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals. You
can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each cycle for which
the key is inserted.
Edge blink: The key fill and key edge fill signals are interchanged at regular
intervals. You can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each
cycle for which the original state holds.
Using the blink function
For example, to make the required settings for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use
the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
In the <Blink> group, select [Key Blink] or [Edge Blink] to set it on.
3
Set the blink parameters.
• When key blink is selected
• When edge blink is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100
2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which key
inserted
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100
2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which
original state holds
0.00 to 100.00
405Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chapter 4 Keys
Video Processing
You can adjust the luminance and hue of the selected key fill signal.
For example, to apply video processing to the signal selected on the M/E-1
bank key 1 fill bus, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF7 ‘Video Process.’
The Video Process menu appears.
2
Press [Video Process], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
To return adjustment values to their defaults
Press [Unity].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Luminance gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Luminance black level –7.31 to +109.59
406 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Setting Operations With the Key
Control Block
This section describes the basic procedures for key settings using the key
control block.
Key control block
Operations in the Key Control Block
Parameter adjustment with the knobs
When the button for a function requiring parameter settings is pressed (that is,
on), you can set the parameters with the four knobs. If there are more than four
values to be assigned to the knobs, the [MORE] button lights amber. At this
point, press the [MORE] button, which turns green, to assign the fifth and
subsequent parameters to the knobs, so that the parameter settings can be made.
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
RE
SIZER
P/P
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS
LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN
AUTO
SEL SPLIT MATTE
FILL
KEY
DROP
SOFT
EDGE
BDR DROP
BDR SHDW EMBOS
OUT
LINE
SHOW
KEY
MAIN
MASK
SUB
MASK ZABTN MORE
MON FM
FEED
OVER
RIDE TRACE PROC
KEY
AUTO
DELEG
DME
5
DME
6
DME
7
DME
8
M/E delegation buttons
Key type selection buttons
Key fill/key source selection buttons
Knobs
Key delegation buttons
Displays
Edge type selection buttons
MORE button
407Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
Selecting the bank and keyer
To make key settings, first select the bank (from M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/
PST) and keyer, then assign them to the key control block.
For example, to set key 1 on M/E-1 with the key control block, use the
following procedure.
1
Using the M/E delegation buttons in the key control block, press the [M/
E1] button, setting it on.
2
Using the key delegation buttons in the key control block, press the
[KEY1] button, setting it on.
This assigns the key control block to M/E-1 key 1.
Selecting the key type
To select the key type, press one of the key type selection buttons in the key
control block.
[LUM] button: luminance key
[LIN] button: linear key
[CRK] button: chroma key
[CVK] button: color vector key
[PTN] button: key wipe pattern key
When using a wipe pattern key as the key type, in the <Key Type> group
of the Type menu for the keyer, select [Wipe Pattern] and make the
settings.
For an overview of the key types, see page 48.
The button you pressed lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters
with the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the
parameter name and the three-digit setting value.
• When the [LUM] or [LIN] button is lit green
• When the [CRK] button is lit green
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for generating the
key signal
+109 to –7
2 Gain Key sensitivity –100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3 Density Key density 0 to 100
4 Filter Filter coefficient 1 to 9
408 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
• When [Key Active] is off, only the parameters Hue and Density are
displayed.
• When both [Key Active] and [Color Cancel] are off, only the parameter
Density is displayed.
• When the [CVK] button is lit green
• When the [PTN] button is lit green
Selecting key fill
Select whether to use a color matte as key fill, or the signal on the key fill bus.
When using a color matte: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, setting it on. The
button lights green, and you can now set the parameters with the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Chroma key reference level 0 to 100
2 Gain Key sensitivity –100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3 Hue Hue 0 to 359
4 Density Key density 0 to 100
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Y Clip Reference level for Y signal +109 to –7
2 Y Gain Y signal sensitivity –100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3 C Clip Reference level for chrominance
signal
100 to 0
4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity –100 (shown as –00)
to +100
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Y Filter Y signal filter coefficient 1 to 9
2 C Filter Chrominance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9
4 Density Key density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100
2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100
3 Density Key density 0 to 100
409Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
When [Mix Color] is selected in the key fill Matte Adjust menu, you can
further adjust color 2.
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit amber
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit green
When using the key fill bus signal: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, turning
it off.
To select the key fill signal, use the key 1 or key 2 bus buttons in the cross-
point control block.
To select the key fill signal for key 3 or key 4 in the cross-point control
block, press the [KEY3] button or [KEY4] button to the right of the key
bus buttons, turning it on, to allocate the key 1 bus row or key 2 bus row
to the key 3 fill bus or key 4 fill bus, then press the desired cross-point
button.
Selecting key source
• To use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill
bus, press the [AUTO SEL] button, turning it on. The pairing of the cross-
point buttons for key fill and key source is carried out in the Setup menu. (See
“Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
• To select key source independently of the key fill signal selected on the key
fill bus and paired with key source, hold down the [SPLIT] button, turning it
on, then press the desired Key 1 or Key 2 button in the cross-point control
block.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100
3 Hue Color 1 hue 359 to 0
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100
3 Hue Color 1 hue 359 to 0
4 Size Pattern size 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Color 2 luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Color 2 saturation 0 to 100
3 Hue Color 2 hue 359 to 0
4 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100
410 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
• To use as key source the same signal as the key fill signal selected on the key
fill bus, select the SELF mode by pressing the [AUTO SEL] button and
[SPLIT] button simultaneously so that both are off. When chroma key is
selected as the key type, select the SELF mode.
Key Edge Modifications
To apply a modification to the key edge, press one of the edge type selection
buttons in the key control block.
[BDR] button: border
[DROP BDR] button: drop border
[SHDW] button: shadow
[OUTLINE] button: outline
[EMBOS] button: emboss
For an overview of the edge modifications, see page 52.
The pressed button lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters with
the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter
name and the three-digit setting value.
Setting the border parameters
When the [BDR] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the key
type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the separate
edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu for the
key.
• Separate edge off
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
•Separate edge on
The border width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0 to 8 a)
(0 to 100) b)
4 Density Border density 0 to 100
411Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
To adjust the edge fill color
When [BDR] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber. Pressing the
[MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color
parameters with the knobs.
Setting the drop border or shadow parameters
When the [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] button is lit green, the parameter settings
differ between the “key drop OFF” and “key drop ON” modes (see page 54) as
shown below. Switching between these two modes is made by turning the
[KEY DROP] button on or off.
• “Key drop OFF” mode
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
• “Key drop ON” mode
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top edge width 0 to 8 a)
2 Left Left edge width 0 to 8 a)
3 Right Right edge width 0 to 8 a)
4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 to 8 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100
3 Hue Hue 359 to 0
4 Density Density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1Width Width 0 to 8 a)
2 Position Position 359 to 180
4 Density Density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1Width Width 0 to 8 a)
2 Position Position 359 to 0
4 Density Density 0 to 100
412 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
To adjust the edge fill color
When [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber.
Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge
fill color parameters with the knobs.
Setting the outline parameters
When the [OUTLINE] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the
key type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the
separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu
for the key.
• Separate edge off
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
•Separate edge on
The outline width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
When [Outline] is selected with separate edge on, the [MORE] button lights
amber. Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust
the key fill density parameter with a knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100
3 Hue Hue 359 to 0
4 Density Density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Outline width 0 to 8 a)
(0 to 100) b)
4 Density Outline density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top edge width 0 to 8 a)
2 Left Left edge width 0 to 8 a)
3 Right Right edge width 0 to 8 a)
4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 to 8 a)
413Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
Setting the embossing parameters
When the [EMBOS] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.
Selecting a normal edge
When all five edge type selection buttons are off, a normal edge is selected. If
one of the buttons is lit, press it, turning it off.
Softening the edge
Press the [SOFT EDGE] button, turning it on. The button lights green, and you
can now adjust the softness with the knob.
• For a normal edge, when [SOFT EDGE] is enabled, “Key Drop” mode turns
on.
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type, and clean
mode is enabled, enabling [SOFT EDGE] ends the clean mode.
Applying the zabton effects
When the [ZABTN] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.
Press the [MORE] button lit amber, changing it to green, then adjust the
following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Density Outline density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Setting values
1 Width 0 to 4
2 Position 359 to 0
4 Density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100
2 Soft Pattern edge softness 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100
2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100
414 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
Masks
Using the main mask
In the key control block, press the [MAIN MASK] button, turning it on. The
parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as [Box] or [Pattern] in
the <Mask Source> group of the Main Mask menu for the key.
• When box is selected
When box is selected and the [MORE] button is lit amber, there are more
settings. Press the [MORE] button, so that it changes from amber to green to
make the extra setting.
• When pattern is selected
a) The pattern is the same as a standard wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1)
(page 560).)
Using the subsidiary mask
In the key control block, press the [SUB MASK] button, turning it on. The
parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as [Wipe] or [Utility 1
Bus] in the <Mask Source> group of the Sub Mask menu for the key.
3 Hue Hue 359 to 0
4 Density Density 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top position –100 (shown as –00) to +100
2 Left Left position –100 (shown as –00) to +100
3 Right Right position –100 (shown as –00) to +100
4 Bottom Bottom position –100 (shown as –00) to +100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Box softness 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100
2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100
3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
415Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
• When wipe is selected
• When utility 1 bus is selected
Applying a DME Effect to a Key
Note
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in up to
two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface
simultaneously.
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)
Assigning a DME to a key
1
In the key control block, press the delegation buttons [M/E1] and [KEY1].
2
Using the DME channel selection buttons, select the DME channel (DME1
to DME8) for applying the effect.
The lit colors of the [DME1] to [DME8] buttons indicate the DME
assignment.
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently
selected key.
Off: DME is not assigned.
To select a DME being used by another keyer
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.
Using two or three DME channels on one keyer
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100
2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for
creating mask signal
+109 to –7
2 Gain Gain –100 (shown as –00) to +100
416 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
1
Select the DME for the first channel (see the previous item, “Assigning a
DME to a key”), then select the successive channel for the second channel.
For the third channel select the channel after that.
2
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1
row (DME external video bus).
3
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4, turn off the [KEY4]
button in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME
utility 1 bus).
• If the selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8, turn on the [KEY4] button
in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2
bus).
Using four DME channels on one keyer
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.
1
Select the DME channel 1 (or channel 5) for the first channel (see
“Assigning a DME to a key” (page 415)). In the same way, select the DME
channel 2 (channel 6) for the second channel, the DME channel 3 (channel
7) for the third channel, and the DME channel 4 (channel 8) for the fourth
channel.
2
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1
row (DME external video bus).
3
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 3, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).
• If the selected DME is channel 7, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).
4
To select the video signal for the fourth channel, hold down the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following
operation.
• If the selected DME is channel 4, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).
417Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
• If the selected DME is channel 8, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).
When using the SDI interface
The operations to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels
differ from those in the previous procedure: select the video signals on the
AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device
Interface >DME Setting >DME SDI Interface menu).
Note
When using a second key in combination with a dedicated interface, select the
signal to be used on the AUX bus.
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 556).
Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal
1
Holding down the output destination specification button [MON] in the
key control block, use the DME channel selection buttons to select the
DME channel (DME1 to DME8) you want to use.
The selected DME output is assigned to DME MON V and DME MON K.
2
To check the DME assignment status, hold down just the [MON] button.
While it is held down, the lit color of the [DME1] to [DME8] buttons
shows the key assignment status.
Lit green: Shows the DME currently being monitored.
Lit amber: Shows a DME which can be monitored.
Off: DME is not assigned.
Other Key Setting Operations
Using an external processed key
You can select and use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals
on the AUX buses.
1
Select the keyer to be allocated.
2
In the key control block, press [PROC KEY], turning it on.
The button lights amber, and on the currently selected keyer, the key fill
and key source are assigned to reentry signals PROC V and PROC K.
418 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross-point
selection buttons of the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Using a frame memory feed
When you press the [FM FEED] button in the key control block, it lights
momentarily amber, then the key fill and key source signals processed in the
currently selected keyer are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2.
If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer, then the key fill and key
source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory
sources 1 and 2.
Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the [PROC KEY] button to light
amber.
Using the show key function
While the [SHOW KEY] button is held down, the key-processed key source
signal appears on the specified output. (Show key mode)
Even when the [SHOW KEY] button is released, for a preset time the show key
mode is maintained. You can specify the output to which the show key function
is applied and set the time for which the show key mode is maintained after
releasing the button in a Setup menu.
For details see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame Memory (Key/
Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Using the auto delegation function
To couple the selection in the key delegation buttons of the independent key
transition control block so that the key control block delegation selection is
automatically switched, in the key control block press the [AUTO DELEG]
button, turning it on.
Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults
Holding down a key type button ([LUM], [LIN], [CRK], [CVK], or [PTN])
recalls the key default values (page 57).
Key modify clear
When an M/E delegation button is held down, holding down a key delegation
button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings.
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
419Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Resizer
Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking,
magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the
processed key.
Notes
• The resizer function is supported on the MVS-8000G only.
• The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay.
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys
Note
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer is used to
shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen including the added
video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function as required to extract the
4:3 image.
Menu operations for key shrinking, magnification and movement
For example, to shrink, magnify or move key1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Location X Move key
horizontally
HD –99.9999 to
+99.9999
SD 4:3 –33.3333 to
+33.3333
SD 16:9 –24.9999 to
+24.9999
420 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
2 Location Y Move key vertically HD –99.9999 to
+99.9999
SD 4:3 –33.3333 to
+33.3333
SD 16:9 –24.9999 to
+24.9999
3 Size Magnify or shrink
key
0.0000 to 99.9999
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect X Change aspect
ratio horizontally
0.0000 to 99.9999
2 Aspect Y Change aspect
ratio vertically
0.0000 to 99.9999
3 Aspect Ratio Change aspect
ratio horizontally
and vertically at a
time
0.0000 to 2.0000
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
421Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Key control block operations for key shrinking, magnification
and movement
1
Use the delegation buttons to select the key to which you want to apply a
resizer function.
2
Press the [RESIZER] button, turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
(To switch between displaying parameter group 1/2 and 2/2, press the
[MORE] button.)
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1X Move key
horizontally
HD –99 to +99
SD 4:3 –33 to +33
SD 16:9 –24 to +24
2 Y Move key vertically HD –99 to +99
SD 4:3 –33 to +33
SD 16:9 –24 to +24
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
RE
SIZER
P/P
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS
LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN
AUTO
SEL SPLIT MATTE
FILL
KEY
DROP
SOFT
EDGE
BDR DROP
BDR SHDW EMBOS
OUT
LINE
SHOW
KEY
MAIN
MASK
SUB
MASK ZABTN MORE
MON FM
FEED
OVER
RIDE TRACE PROC
KEY
AUTO
DELEG
DME
5
DME
6
DME
7
DME
8
Delegation buttons
RESIZER button
MORE button
Knobs
422 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Device control block operations for key shrinking, magnification
and movement
1
Press the [RSZR CTRL] button, turning it on.
3 S Magnify or shrink
key
0.0 to 99
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Change aspect
ratio horizontally
0.0 to 99
2 Y Change aspect
ratio vertically
0.0 to 99
3 R Change aspect
ratio horizontally
and vertically at a
time
0.0 to 2.0
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
DEVUSER
M/E1
DME1
DME5
MENU
SHIFT
M/E2
DME2
DME6
ASP
PERS
SUB
LOC
SIZE
ASP
AXIS
LOC
MAIN
LOCAL
K1
CB1
GLB
K2
CB2
CLR
WORK
BUFR
M/E3
DME3
DME7
LOC
XYZ
LOC
ROT
POS
RSZR
X
P/P
DME4
DME8
Y Z CTR
RUN
CTRL
SRC
K3
TRGT
K4
RSZR
CTRL
Delegation buttons
RSZR CTRL button
Trackball
ASP button
LOC button
RSZR button Z-ring
423Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
2
Press the delegation button to select the key.
3
Press the [RSZR] button, turning it on.
4
• To change the aspect ratio, turn on the [LOC SIZE(ASP)].
• To shrink, magnify, or move the key , turn on the [LOC XYZ(LOC)].
Hold these buttons down while carrying out the operation of step 5 to
enable fine adjustment (fine mode).
5
Use the trackball and joystick for the operation.
For details of parameters, see step 3 of “Key control block operations for
key shrinking, magnification and movement” (page 421).
For details of parameters, see step 3 of “Key control block operations for key
shrinking, magnification and movement” (page 421).
Entering parameters
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter input.
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter
11 (Volume 2).
Resetting parameters
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter resetting.
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter
11 (Volume 2).
Clearing resizer effects
To clear two-dimensional transform parameters only and set the
initial state
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the
operation buttons.
To clear all resizer parameters, and set the initial state
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the
operation buttons, twice in rapid succession.
For the initial state, you can select either the factory default settings or user
settings.
For details of how to make this selection, see “Selecting the State After
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
424 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Resizer Interpolation Settings
For example, to make the interpolation settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Resizer Process].
The Resizer Process menu appears.
3
In the <Video Field/Frame Mode> and other groups, make the
interpolation settings.
These settings are the same as those for input video signals. For details,
see “Interpolation Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Resizer Crop/Border Settings
Making a crop setting for a key for which resizer is on
For example, to make the crop settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Border/Crop].
The Border/Crop menu appears.
3
Press [Crop], turning it on.
This enables the adjustment of crop.
4
Set the parameters.
These settings are the same as those for crop of DME. For details, see
“Crop Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
425Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
If mosaic or defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you
select Video/Key, then the crop is disabled.
Applying a border to a key for which resizer is on
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Border/Crop].
The Border/Crop menu appears.
3
Press [Boreder], turning it on.
This enables the adjustment of crop.
4
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
•SD format
•HD format
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right borders
0.00 to 4.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom borders
0.00 to 3.00 (4:3)
0.00 to 2.25 (16:9)
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four borders
Value of H shown
5 Density Density of the borders 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right borders
0.00 to 12.00 (4:3)
0.00 to 16.00 (16:9)
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom borders
0.00 to 9.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four borders
Value of H shown
5 Density Density of the borders 0.00 to 100.00
426 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
To apply color to a border
1
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Flat Color].
2
Adjust the following parameters.
To soften the inner edge of a border
1
In the Border/Crop menu, press [Border Soft].
2
Adjust the following parameters.
To apply a beveled light edge
1
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled
Light Edge].
2
Adjust the following parameters.
3
Press [Border Soft].
4
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 Top Top edge –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Left edge –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Right edge –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Bottom edge –100.00 to +100.00
5 All Four edges Value of Left shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values
1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
2 Bound Soft Border boundary softness 0.00 to 100.00
427Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
To apply a beveled color edge
1
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled
Color Edge].
2
In the <Color Adjust> group, select the edges for adjustment among the
[Top], [Left], [Right], and [Bottom] edges. To select all the four edges,
press [All].
3
Set the color parameters.
For details, see “To apply color to a border” (page 426)
4
Press [Border Soft].
5
Adjust the following parameters.
Applying Resizer Effects
For example, to apply effects to key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Enhanced Effect].
The Enhanced Effect menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
2 Bound Soft Border boundary softness 0.00 to 100.00
428 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Applying a wide key border
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual
Rszr Effect], turning it on.
2
Press [Wide Key Border], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
a) Shared with the drop shadow “Soft” value.
4
To add an outline, press [Out Line], turning it on.
5
To adjust the border color, press [Border Color].
6
Set the color parameters.
For details, see “To apply color to a border” (page 426)
Applying a drop shadow
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual
Rszr Effect], turning it on.
2
Press [Drop Shadow], turning it on.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
•SD format
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust border
width of left and right edges
0.00 to +100.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust border
width of upper and lower edges
0.00 to +100.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust border
width of all four edges
Value of H shown
4Soft a) Softness of border 0.00 to +100.00
5 Density Density of border 0.00 to +100.00
429Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
a) Shared with the wide key border “Soft” value.
•HD format
a) Shared with the wide key border “Soft” value.
Edge enhancement
Adjusting the gain sharpens the image.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Edge
Enhance], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Applying a mosaic
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press
[Mosaic], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position of shadow –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Vertical position of shadow –6.00 to +6.00 (4:3)
–4.50 to +4.50 (16:9)
3 Size Shadow size 0.00 to 2.00
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position of shadow –24.00 to +24.00
(4:3)-32.00 to +32.00
(16:9)
2 V Vertical position of shadow –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size Shadow size 0.00 to 2.00
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal gain adjustment 0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical gain adjustment 0.00 to 100.00
3 All Both horizontal and vertical
adjustment
H value is displayed
430 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
2
Set the parameters.
This operation is the same as the DME mosaic setting. For more details,
see “Mosaic Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
3
In the < Mosaic/Defocus Mode > group, select the signal to which to apply
the mosaic effect.
Video/Key: Video signal and key signal
Video: Video signal only
Note
If mosaic is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you select
Video/Key, then the crop and mask are disabled.
4
Set the parameters.
To make the mosaic like a relief pattern
1
With [Mosaic] on, press [Relief], turning it on.
2
In addition to the mosaic parameters, set the following parameters.
Defocusing
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press
[Defocus], turning it on.
2
Set the parameters.
This operation is the same as the defocusing setting when using the DME
with the DME dedicated interface. However, <Mosaic/Defocus Mode>
appears in place of <Defocus Mode>. For more details, see “Defocus
Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal defocusing 0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing 0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical defocusing H value shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Gain Relief depth of mosaic cells 0.00 to 100.00
4 Angle Light source direction –8.00 to +8.00
431Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
If defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you select
Video/Key, then the crop and mask are disabled.
Applying a mask to mosaic or defocus
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual
Rszr Effect], turning it on.
2
Press [Mask], turning it on.
This enables the mask function.
To make the mask settings, continue with steps 3 and following.
3
Press [Mask Menu].
The Mask menu appears.
4
In the <Mask Source> group, select either of [Box] and [Circle].
Box: Use a box pattern as the mask signal.
Circle: Use a circle pattern as the mask signal.
5
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
The parameters are the same as for drop shadow. For more details, see
“Applying a drop shadow” (page 428), except that knobs 3 and 5 are as
follows.
The rotation and inversion operations are the same as for a DME mask
setting. For more details, see Chapter 11 “Mask Settings” (Volume 2).
Notes
• When a mask effect is applied to a border, the boundary becomes
discontinuous, giving an unnatural effect. Avoid applying a mask to a
border.
• If mosaic or defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode>
group you select Video/Key, then the mask is disabled.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Size Size 0.00 to 100.00
5 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00
432 Resizer
Chapter 4 Keys
Restrictions on resizer effects
Restrictions on the use of effects
Of the resizer effects, using mask, drop shadow, or wide key border requires
two units of hardware for the resizer function.
These are called “dual resizer effects”.
In a dual resizer effect, predetermined combinations, key 1 and key 2, or key 3
and key 4 are used.
For example, if either of key 1 and key 2 has resizer set to On, the other key
cannot be used for a dual resizer effect.
The same restriction applies when using a resizer DME wipe in place of resizer.
Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer
The following combinations of resizer effects cannot be simultaneously on.
• Mosaic and edge enhance
• Defocus and wide key border
• Mask and drop shadow
• Mask and wide key border
433Key Snapshots
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Snapshots
Using the key snapshot function, you can instantaneously save all of the key
settings, except the key insertion state (on/off) and key priority, in dedicated
registers for later recall as required.
For an overview of the key snapshots, see page 57.
Key Snapshot Operations
Key snapshot operations are carried out in the independent key transition
control block or downstream key control block. Each keyer is provided with
four dedicated key snapshot registers.
Independent key transition control block (standard type)
Saving a key snapshot
For example, the following procedure saves the state of the M/E-1 key 1
settings.
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the key
delegation button [KEY1], turning it on.
2
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 K-MOD
EMBL K-SS
K-TR
ENBL
K-SS
STORE
MIX WIPE DME
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET KF
DSK1
ON
AUTO
TRANS
DSK2
ON
AUTO
TRANS
DSK3
ON
AUTO
TRANS
DSK4
ON
AUTO
TRANS
Key source name display/key snapshot buttons
Key delegation buttons
Key snapshot setting
buttons
434 Key Snapshots
Chapter 4 Keys
The system switches to key snapshot mode, and the key source name
display/key snapshot buttons show the status of registers 1 to 4 for key 1.
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.
For a register holding a snapshot, the register name is shown as up to eight
characters.
3
Hold down the [K-SS STORE] button, and press the key source name
display/key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you
want to save the snapshot.
The key source name display/key snapshot button which you pressed lights
yellow.
Note
If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or
yellow, the existing contents of the register are overwritten.
Recalling a key snapshot
For example, the following procedure recalls the state of the M/E-1 key 1
settings.
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the key
delegation button [KEY1], turning it on.
2
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.
3
Set the following buttons on or off, depending on the information you want
to recall.
(These buttons are not provided in the downstream key control block.)
[K-MOD ENBL] button: When this is on, the key settings and key
modifiers are recalled. When this is off, they are not recalled.
[K-TR ENBL] button: When this is on, the independent key transition
settings are recalled. When this is off, they are not recalled.
If both buttons are off, the key memory function is enabled and only the
saved selection of key fill and key source signals is recalled.
4
Press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to
the register you want to recall.
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the key snapshot.
To cancel a recall carried out in the downstream key control block, press
the [UNDO] button in the downstream key control block.
435Key Snapshots
Chapter 4 Keys
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition
Module
When using a simple transition module, the key snapshots hold the settings for
key 3 and key 4. However, each key control block can be assigned to any key
in setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)”
(Volume 2)).
You can carry out key snapshot operations in the independent key transition
control block (simple type) and Flexi Pad control block (simple type).
There are two dedicated key snapshot registers for each of keys 3 and 4.
Independent key transition control block (simple type)
Saving a key snapshot
For example, to save the settings of M/E-1 key 3, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the [K-SS]
button in the key 3 control block, turning it on.
This switches to key snapshot mode, and the key source name display/key
snapshot button shows the state of registers 1 and 2 for key 3.
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.
For a register holding a snapshot, the register name is shown as up to eight
characters.
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY3
ON
TAKE
K-SS WIPE DME
SHIFT MIX CUT
KEY4
ON
TAKE
The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same.
K-SS button
Key 3 control block Key 4 control block
Key source name display/key
snapshot buttons
436 Key Snapshots
Chapter 4 Keys
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [SNAPSHOT] button and
press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to
the register in which you want to save the snapshot.
The key source name display/key snapshot button which you pressed lights
yellow.
Note
If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or
yellow, the existing contents of the register are overwritten.
Recalling a key snapshot
For example, the following procedure recalls the state of the M/E-1 key 3
settings.
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the [K-SS]
button in the key 3 control block, turning it on.
2
Press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to
the register you want to recall.
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the key settings
(excluding the key insertion state (on/off) and key priority).
Chapter 5 Wipes
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings .........................................................438
Wipe Settings Menu ..........................................................................438
Wipe Pattern Selection ......................................................................438
Pattern Mix ........................................................................................441
Setting Wipe Modifiers .....................................................................443
Wipe Modify Clear ............................................................................454
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...................................455
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings ......455
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .......................456
Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................................460
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .................................460
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................463
438 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
You carry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each
of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.
This section describes the basic procedures for wipe settings, taking the M/E-
1 >Wipe menu as an example.
For details of independent key transition wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for
Independent Key Transitions” (page 455).
Wipe Settings Menu
Accessing the wipe settings menu
To access the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, use any of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
press VF5 ‘Wipe.’
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type
selection button [WIPE] twice in rapid succession.
• In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the [WIPE] button
twice in rapid succession.
Any of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >Wipe menu.
Wipe Pattern Selection
You can select a wipe pattern in the Wipe menu, or by entering a pattern
number from the Flexi Pad control block.
For how to use the Flexi Pad control block, see “Selecting a wipe pattern in
the Flexi Pad control block” (page 440).
Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘Main Pattern.’
The Main Pattern menu appears.
2
Select the wipe pattern group with the pattern group selection button.
Standard: standard wipes
439Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
Enhanced: enhanced wipes
Rotary: rotary wipes
Mosaic1 to Mosaic3: mosaic wipes
Random/Dust: random/diamond dust wipes
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.
For details of wipe patterns, see “Types of Wipe Pattern” (page 60) and
“Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page 560).
3
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
4
The parameters change according to the selected pattern, and you can
adjust the pattern.
•When a polygon wipe is selected (pattern number 49)
a) A value of –100.00 completely removes the star “rays,” leaving a circle; at +100.00 the
“rays” are at their sharpest.
•When a mosaic wipe is selected (pattern numbers 200 to 203, 206 to
213, 224 to 247, 250 to 257, 260 to 269)
•When a karaoke wipe is selected (pattern numbers 220 to 223)
a) At –100.00 tiles appear from the top (or left edge) of the screen; at +100.00 from the
bottom (or right edge) of the screen.
b) At –100.00 all rows appear simultaneously; at +100.00 until one row of tiles is completely
displayed, the next row does not start to appear.
•When a random wipe is selected (pattern number 273)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Number of points 3 to 64
2 Star Rate Angularity of star –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Tile No Number of tiles horizontally 2 to 36
2 V Tile No Number of tiles vertically 2 to 18
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Start Position of start tile –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Row No Number of rows of tiles 1 to 36
3 Phase Delay for next row –100.00 to +100.00 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Size Tile width 0.00 to 100.00
440 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
•When a diamond dust wipe is selected (pattern number 274)
Note
When Flash Rate is set to 0.00, you cannot change the pattern. In this state,
adjusting H Size or V Size has no effect on the pattern.
For details of a pattern mix, see the next section.
For details of applying pattern modifiers, see “Setting Wipe Modifiers”
(page 443).
Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block
To select a pattern with a standard type Flexi Pad control block, use the
following procedure. (It is not possible to select a wipe pattern with a simple
type Flexi Pad control block.)
1
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, press the [WIPE] button.
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode.
2
In the memory recall section, press the [PTN NO] button.
2 V Size Tile height 0.00 to 100.00
3 Volatility Rate of tile generation 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Size Particle width 0.00 to 100.00
2 V Size Particle height 0.00 to 100.00
3 Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0.00 to 100.00
441Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe pattern number recall
mode, and the memory recall section display changes as shown in the
following figure.
3
Use the buttons in the memory recall section to enter the pattern number
consisting of up to three digits, and press the [ENTR] button.
The entry is confirmed, and now the numeric display shows the pattern
number.
For the pattern numbers, see “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1)
(page 560).
Pattern Mix
Combining two patterns
You can combine two selected patterns (referred to as main and “sub”) to form
a new pattern. Select a main pattern in the Main Pattern menu, then use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF3 ‘Sub Pattern.’
The Sub Pattern menu appears.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
ENTR
PTN
NQ
WIPE button Numeric display
Memory recall section
442 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
2
In the same way as for the main pattern, select the sub pattern.
The patterns that can be selected for the sub pattern depend on the pattern
selected for the main pattern (see the following table).
Possible combinations of main pattern and sub pattern
Yes: Combination possible No: Combination not possible
3
Select HF2 ‘Pattern Mix.’
The Pattern Mix menu appears.
4
In the <Pattern Mix> group, select the type of pattern mix.
Mix: mix
+Nam: positive Nam
–Nam: negative Nam
Morphing: morphing
For an overview of types of pattern mix, see page 61.
5
Depending on the selection in step 4, set the following parameters.
• When mix, positive Nam, or negative Nam is selected
•When morphing (see page 61) is selected
Main
pattern
Sub pattern
Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random/
diamond
dust
Standard Ye s Ye s N o Ye s Ye s
Enhanced Ye s Ye s N o Ye s Ye s
Rotary No No No No No
Mosaic Yes Yes No No Yes
Random/
diamond
dust
Ye s Ye s N o Ye s N o
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Ratio Proportion of sub pattern to the
main pattern
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Start Point in transition at which main
pattern is at 100%
–50.00 to +150.00
3 End Point in transition at which sub
pattern is at 100%
–50.00 to +150.00
443Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
6
In the <Main/Sub Link> group, make the main/sub modifier link function
settings. (See “Main and sub modifier link function” (page 63).)
Full: fully linked mode
Semi: semi-linked mode
Applying the effect of a diamond dust wipe to the selected
pattern (Dust mix)
1
In the Pattern Mix menu, press [Dust Mix], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters as required.
You can also apply the dust mix function to the pattern generated by a
pattern mix.
Note
When a random/diamond dust wipe (pattern numbers 270-274) is selected,
the dust mix function is not available.
Setting Wipe Modifiers
You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern: setting the wipe direction,
pattern position, and so on.
For an overview of the wipe modifiers, see “Wipe Pattern Variation and
Modifiers” (page 63).
Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using. For
details, see “Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers” (page
454).
Main pattern and sub pattern modifiers
You can make independent settings of the modifiers for the main pattern and
sub pattern.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Ratio Proportion of diamond dust
pattern in mix
0.00 to 100.00
2 H Size Particle width 0.00 to 100.00
3 V Size Particle height 0.00 to 100.00
4 Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0.00 to 100.00
444 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
• To set the modifiers for the main pattern, in the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select
HF5 ‘Main Modify,’ and make the settings in the Main Modify menu.
• To set the modifiers for the sub pattern, select HF6 ‘Sub Modify,’ and make
the settings in the Sub Modify menu.
Operations in the Main Modify menu and Sub Modify menu are the same.
Independently set modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern
• Positioner
• Rotation
• Aspect ratio
• Pattern replication (MULTI)
•Pairing
• Modulation
•Spring
•Spiral
The following sections show examples of modifying the main pattern.
Specifying the wipe direction (Direction)
You can specify the wipe direction (normal/reverse).
To specify the wipe direction in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Direction> group, specify the wipe direction.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control
block
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.
NORM: Normal
NORM/REV: Normal/reverse
REV: Reverse
Splitting the wipe pattern
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
445Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
2
Press [Split], turning it on.
3
Set the following parameters.
Modifying the wipe pattern edge
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.
Border: border
Soft: soft edge
Soft Border: soft border
For an overview of the edge types, see “Edge” (page 65).
3
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2.
• When border is selected
• When soft edge is selected
• When soft border is selected
4
When you selected border or soft border, select the edge fill signal in the
<Edge Fill> group.
Utility 2 Bus: signal selected on the utility 2 bus
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Split No Number of splits 1 to 4 (integer)
2 Spacing Spacing between adjacent
patterns
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Outer Soft Border outer softness 0.00 to 100.00
446 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
5
Depending on the operation in step 4, carry out the following operation.
When ‘Utility 2 Bus’ is selected: Hold down the [UTIL] button in the
cross-point control block, and select the signal on the background B
bus.
While the [UTIL] button is held down, the background B bus changes
to the utility 2 bus.
Note
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).)
When ‘Matte’ is selected: In the same Edge/Direction menu, press [Matte
Adjust] to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the single-color
or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a single-
color matte or a two-color combination in the <Edge Matte> group.
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.
When you select [Mix Color] for a two-color combination, see the next
paragraph.
Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte
When you selected [Matte] for the border or soft border edge fill, you can
combine color 1 and color 2.
For the combination, you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern, but
also the dedicated color mix pattern.
1
In the <Edge Fill> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select [Matte], and
press [Matte Adjust].
The Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.
3
In the <Mix Pattern> group, make one of the following selections.
Wipe: Use the wipe pattern selected for the transition.
Pattern: Use the dedicated pattern.
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
447Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
• When Wipe is selected
• When Pattern is selected
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix
(Volume 1) (page 560).
If you selected Pattern, you can also carry out the pattern selection by
pressing the [Mix Ptn Select] button in the Matte Adjust menu, to display
the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn
Select menu (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) by pressing the appropriate
button, and you can then adjust the following parameters.
5
If you selected Pattern in step 4, if required, the following modifiers can
be added. After selecting a wipe mix, skip to step 6.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See page 65.
• When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
448 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 68.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See page 67.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
a) See page 66.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant rate
a) See page 66.
6
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,
then adjust the parameters.
7
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)
You can set the position independently for the main pattern and sub pattern.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on, and set the pattern
position.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
449Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 65.
To return the pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through
the course of a transition
In the <Position> group, press [Auto Center], turning it on.
To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device
control block.
1
In the device control block, press the [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], or [P/P]
button, turning it on.
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position
setting as follows.
Table 1: Buttons and assigned settings
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions
2
Press the [MAIN] button or [SUB] button, turning it on.
3
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.
4
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to
the vertical direction.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Button name Setting
MAIN Wipe position for common transition (main pattern)
SUB Wipe position for common transition (sub pattern)
Button name Function
POS Toggle Position on or off.
X, Y Fix the operating direction.
CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.
450 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)
You can apply rotation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Rotation> group, select the rotation type.
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.
Speed: Rotate at a fixed rate.
Magnitude: Rotate through a particular angle during the course of the
transition.
For an overview of the rotation, see page 65.
3
According to the selection in step 2, set the following parameters.
• When Angle is selected
a) See page 66.
• When Speed is selected
a) See page 66.
• When Magnitude is selected
a) See page 67.
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)
You can set the aspect ratio independently for the main pattern and sub pattern.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation at start of
transition –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course
of transition –200.00 to +200.00 a)
451Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
2
Press [Aspect], turning it on.
3
Set the following parameter.
a) See page 67.
Setting the wipe pattern replication (Multi)
You can set pattern replication independently for the main pattern and sub
pattern.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
Press the [Multi] button, turning it on.
3
Set the following parameters.
a) See page 68.
4
To make more adjustments, press the [Multi Adjust] button.
The Multi Adjust menu appears.
5
Make the following settings, as required.
H Invert: When this is on, alternate tiles are inverted left-to-right.
V Invert: When this is on, alternate tiles are inverted top-to-bottom.
Non-Mask: When this is on, even if the positioner function is used to
move the pattern position, the pattern is always present on the screen.
Position: By adjusting the following parameters, move the pattern position
within the divisions determined in step 3.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Shift Replication layout –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position of pattern –200.00 to +200.00 a)
452 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 65.
Making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind (Pairing)
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Pairing> group, select the slit direction.
H: Create slits in the horizontal direction.
V: Create slits in the vertical direction.
3
Set the following parameters.
a) See page 68.
Applying modulation to the wipe pattern (Modulation)
You can apply modulation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern.
Note
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is not
available.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on the desired effect, in the <Modulation> group select one of
the following.
H: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the horizontal direction to
edges.
V: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the vertical direction to
edges.
Fringe: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the radial direction to
edges.
2 Position V Vertical position of pattern –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width of the slits 1 to 128 (integer)
2 H Offset Spacing in the horizontal direction –100.00 to +100.00 a)
3 V Offset Spacing in the vertical direction –100.00 to +100.00 a)
453Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
3
Set the following parameters.
.
a) See page 69.
b) See page 69.
Applying barrel or pincushion distortion to the edge of the wipe
pattern (Spring)
You can set the spring function independently for the main and sub patterns.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Spring], turning it on.
3
Set the following parameters.
a) See page 71.
Applying a spiral effect to the wipe pattern (Spiral)
You can set the spiral function independently for the main and sub patterns.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Spiral], turning it on.
3
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Speed Speed of waves –100.00 to +100.00 a)
4 Shape Form of the modulation 1 to 3 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Gain Degree of barrel distortion –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Magnitude Size and direction of the spiral –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Wave Speed Speed of the lateral waves –100.00 to +100.00 a)
454 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 71.
Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers
Yes: Can be used No: Cannot be used
a) Not patterns 1 to 16, 19, and 20
b) Not patterns 300 to 303
c) Not patterns 100 to 103, 150, 151, 516, 518, 604, and 606
d) Not patterns 1 to 8, 17, and 18
e) Not patterns 220 to 223
f) Not patterns 19 and 20
g) But patterns 21, 23 and 24 are possible
h) But patterns 21 and 23 are possible
Wipe Modify Clear
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press VF5 ‘Wipe’ to return the wipe settings to their initial status.
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).
Modifiers Type of wipe
Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random/
diamond dust
Direction Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s
Split Ye s Ye s N o Ye s N o
Edge Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s
Positioner Ye s a) Ye s b) Ye s c) No No
Rotation Ye s Ye s Ye s c) No No
Aspect ratio Ye s d) Ye s N o N o N o
Pattern
replication
Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s e) No
Pairing Ye s f) Ye s N o N o N o
Modulation
(H/V)
Ye s Ye s Ye s N o N o
Modulation
(Fringe) No g) Ye s N o N o N o
Spring No g) Ye s N o N o N o
Spiral No h) Ye s N o N o N o
455Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions
You carry out independent key transition wipe setting operations using the
Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.
For an overview of independent key transitions, see page 37.
This section describes the independent key transition wipe settings, taking the
M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu as an example.
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe
Settings
Accessing the independent key transition wipe settings menu
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu,
carry out either of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1] and
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for
key 1, then press [Wipe Adjust].
• In the independent key transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the
key delegation button [KEY1], then press the independent key transition type
selection button [WIPE] twice in rapid succession.
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition
>Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1 Wipe
Adjust menu).
Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern
You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed
in the menu.
Note
In an independent key transition, you can only use the standard wipe patterns
(pattern numbers 1 to 24).
To select a wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
456 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
1
In the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select [Pattern Select].
The Pattern Select menu appears.
2
Press the button for the desired pattern.
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers
Available modifiers
You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe.
Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using.
• Direction
• Edge
• Positioner
• Rotation
• Aspect ratio
• Pattern replication
Setting the wipe direction (Direction)
In the <Direction> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, make any of the
following selections.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
Softening the wipe pattern edge (Soft edge)
1
Press [Soft] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)
There are two methods of setting the wipe position: using the device control
block, or in a menu.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
457Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device
control block.
1
In the device control block, press the [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], or [P/P]
button, turning it on.
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position
setting as follows.
Table 1: Buttons and assigned settings
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions
2
Press one of the buttons in Table 1 above, to select the wipe position to
which the operation applies. Multiple selection is possible.
3
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.
4
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to
the vertical direction.
To set the wipe position by a menu operation
1
Press [Position] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Button name Setting
K1 CB1 Wipe position for independent key 1 transition
K2 CB2 Wipe position for independent key 2 transition
K3 FM1 Wipe position for independent key 3 transition
K4 FM2 Wipe position for independent key 4 transition
Button name Function
POS Toggle Position on or off.
X, Y Fix the operating direction.
CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
458 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 65.
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through
the course of a transition
Press [Auto Center] in the <Position> group, turning it on.
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)
1
In the <Rotation> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select the rotation
type.
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.
Speed: Rotate at a speed rate.
Magnitude: Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course of
the transition.
2
According to the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.
• When Angle is selected
a) See page 66.
• When Speed is selected
a) See page 66.
• When Magnitude is selected
a) See page 67.
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)
1
Press [Aspect] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation at start of
transition –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course
of transition –200.00 to +200.00 a)
459Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
a) See page 67.
Replicating the wipe pattern (Multi)
1
Press [Multi] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) See page 68.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
460 Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Wipe Snapshots
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad
Buttons used
You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of
its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required.
In a standard transition system there are ten wipe snapshot registers for each of
the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks, and in a simple transition module
eight registers for each bank.
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
8 9
456
123
0
AUTO
TRAN
EFF
DISS
WIPE button STORE STATS button
UNDO button
Numeric display
Memory recall buttons
461Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Flexi Pad control block (simple type)
Saving a wipe snapshot
1
Make the wipe settings that you want to save.
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [WIPE] button, and press the
memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you want to
save.
Notes
• If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow, the existing contents
of the register are overwritten.
• If you carry out a pattern mix, and both the main pattern and sub pattern
are selected, then the memory recall button shows the main pattern.
The pattern appears on the button you pressed, which lights yellow.
The numeric display shows the number of the corresponding pattern.
It is also possible to display the register name using a Setup menu (see
“Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
UNDO
1 2
3 4
5 6
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
78
WIPE button
Numeric display
UNDO button
Memory recall buttons
462 Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Meaning of the state of buttons
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.
Lit yellow: The most recently recalled register.
Canceling the saving of a wipe snapshot
To cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot immediately after performing it, hold
down the [STORE STATS] button, and press the [UNDO] button. The
[STORE STATS] button changes from amber to green.
Note
On a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to cancel the saving
of a wipe snapshot.
Recalling a wipe snapshot
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [WIPE] button.
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to the mode for recalling a wipe
snapshot.
2
Press the memory recall button for the register from which you want to
recall the wipe snapshot.
The button lights, and the saved wipe snapshot is recalled. At this point,
the numeric display shows the pattern number or register name.
Canceling the recall of a wipe snapshot
To cancel the recall of a wipe snapshot, press the [UNDO] button.
Deleting a wipe snapshot
When the [WIPE] button is lit in the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the
[STORE STATS] button and press the memory recall button for the register in
which you want to delete the wipe snapshot.
The indication of the memory recall button reverts from the wipe pattern or
register name to the register number.
Note
In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to delete a wipe
snapshot.
463Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus
Menus used
As an example, when operating on M/E-1, select M/E-1 >Wipe >Wipe
Snapshot.
The Wipe Snapshot menu appears.
Button displays
In setup you can select whether the memory recall buttons show the pattern
number or register name.
See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Saving a wipe snapshot from the menu
1
Set up the wipe you want to save.
2
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Store], lighting it amber.
3
Press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to save.
Memory recall buttons
464 Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Notes
• If you press a button which is already lit, this overwrites the contents of
the register.
• When both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected for a pattern
mix, the button in the memory recall section shows only the main
pattern.
Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press the memory recall button for the wipe
snapshot you want to recall.
This recalls the wipe snapshot, and the button you pressed lights amber.
In the upper left is shown the currently recalled register name or number.
Note
The Flexi Pad and menu settings are linked.
A setting in setup determines whether register names or pattern numbers
appear.
Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu
1
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Delete].
2
Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to delete.
This deletes the wipe snapshot.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings ...............................................466
DME Wipe Settings Menu ................................................................466
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ............................................................466
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers ...........................................................469
DME Wipe Modify Clear ..................................................................476
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .........................477
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings ..
477
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers ..............478
Resizer DME Wipe Setting ......................................................................481
DME Wipe Snapshots ..............................................................................482
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .......................482
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................482
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .......................................483
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .....................................483
466 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
You carry out DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe
menu for each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.
This section describes the basic procedures for DME wipe settings, taking the
M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu as an example.
For details of independent key transition DME wipe settings, see “DME Wipe
Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).
For details of resizer DME wipe (for MVS-8000G only), see page 481.
Note
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including external processed keys) can be
used in up to two places on the DME dedicated interface and in only one place
on the SDI interface simultaneously.
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)
DME Wipe Settings Menu
Accessing the DME Wipe menu
To access the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, use any of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe.’
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type
selection button [DME] twice in rapid succession.
• In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the [DME] button
twice in rapid succession.
Any of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu.
DME Wipe Pattern Selection
You can select a DME wipe pattern in the DME Wipe menu, or by entering a
pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block.
467Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘1ch’ for one-channel mode,
HF2 ‘2ch’ for two-channel mode or HF3 ‘3ch’ for three-channel mode.
2
Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following
buttons.
•Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze
•Split/Door: split and door
•Flip Tumble: flip tumble
•Mirror/Sphere: mirror and sphere
•Character Trail: character trail
•Wave/Ripple: wave and ripple
•Page Turn/Roll: page turn and page roll
•Frame I/O/PinP: frame in/out and picture-in-picture
•2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D trans and 3D trans
•Sparkle/Split Slide: sparkle and split slide
•Mosaic/Defocus: mosaic and defocus
•Brick: brick
•User Program: user programmable DME
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in one-channel mode: All of the
above groups except for Brick.
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in two-channel mode: Slide/
Squeeze, Page Turn/Roll, Frame I/O, PinP, 3D Trans, Brick and User
Program.
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in three-channel mode: User
Program and Brick.
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”
(page 72) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
566).
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.
3
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
Note
For a key transition, the page turn, page roll and picture-in-picture cannot
be used.
Adjusting DME wipe pattern parameters
Of the DME wipe patterns, the following have parameters that can be adjusted.
468 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
When Brick (for two channels) is selected (pattern numbers 2801
to 2804, 2811 to 2814)
a) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the left
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.
b) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.
When Frame in-out (for two channels) is selected
• Pattern numbers 2851 to 2854
• Pattern numbers 2861 to 2864
When Brick (for three channels) is selected (pattern number 3601)
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Side V Size X Horizontal magnification 0.01 to 8.00
2 Side V Size Y Vertical magnification 0.01 to 8.00
3 Height Height of brick 0.01 to 100.00
4 Center X Horizontal center position –100.00 to +100.00 a)
5 Center Y Vertical center position –100.00 to +100.00 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Delay Timing for video selected on
a utility bus to appear on the
screen
–100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Rot X Rotation about the Y axis
(horizontal direction)
–100.00 to +100.00
2 Rot Y Rotation about the X axis
(vertical direction)
–100.00 to +100.00
3 Rot Z Rotation about the Z axis –100.00 to +100.00
5 Delay Timing for video selected on
a utility bus to appear on the
screen
–100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Side V Size X Side V horizontal
magnification
0.01 to 8.00
2 Side V Size Y Side V vertical
magnification
0.01 to 8.00
3 Height Height of brick 0.01 to 100.00 a)
4 Side V Center X Side V horizontal center
position –100.00 to +100.00 b)
469Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
a) Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 2
b) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the left
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.
c) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.
a) Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 1
b) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side H. At –100.00 the center is at the left
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.
c) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side H. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.
Selecting a DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block
In the standard type Flexi Pad control block, enter a 4-digit pattern number,
using the [DME] button.
For details, see “Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block” (page
440).
Note
You cannot select a DME wipe pattern in the simple type Flexi Pad control
block.
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers
You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern: setting the DME
wipe direction, pattern position, and so on.
5 Side V Center Y Side V vertical center
position –100.00 to +100.00 c)
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Side H Size X Side H horizontal
magnification
0.01 to 8.00
2 Side H Size Y Side H vertical
magnification
0.01 to 8.00
3 Height Height of brick 0.01 to 100.00 a)
4 Side H Center X Side H horizontal center
position –100.00 to +100.00 b)
5 Side H Center Y Side H vertical center
position –100.00 to +100.00 c)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
470 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
For an overview of the DME wipe modifiers, see “DME Wipe Pattern
Variation and Modifiers” (page 80).
Specifying the DME wipe direction (Direction)
You can specify the DME wipe direction (normal/reverse).
To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Direction>group, specify the DME wipe direction.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition
control block
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.
NORM: Normal
NORM/REV: Normal/Reverse
REV: Reverse
Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-
channel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.
Border: border
Soft Border: soft border
4
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3.
471Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
• When border is selected
• When soft border is selected
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.
4
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
3 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
4 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
5 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
4 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
5 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00
472 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern
(position select)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
In the <Position Select> group, the one of the [Top Left], [Top Right],
[Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right] buttons that is on indicates the current
display position of the DME wipe pattern.
2
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.
3
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.
In one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
In two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select the
corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at the
same time.
4
To move the position of the DME wipe pattern, press the button where you
want to move to, turning it on.
The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of
the specified button.
Setting relative positions to move the DME wipe pattern
In two-channel mode, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2 V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
473Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
2
In the <Ch Select> group, select the target channels.
3
Press [Position] in the <Position> group, turning it on.
4
Set the following parameters.
For details of the method of DME wipe pattern selection, see “DME Wipe
Pattern Selection” (page 466).
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-
channel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
Press [Size], turning it on.
4
Set the following parameters.
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Relative H Relative movement in the
horizontal direction
–400.00 to +400.00
5 Relative V Relative movement in the vertical
direction
–400.00 to +400.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Set size of effect 0.00 to 200.00 a)
474 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping
Note
When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-
channel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time. Some patterns need no selection which is fixed in the
<Ch Select> group.
3
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop], turning it on.
4
Set the following parameters.
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
In 16:9 mode, to crop to 4:3 aspect ratio
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3], turning it on.
To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-
channel mode, proceed as follows.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Crop the top of the image –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Crop the left of the image –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Crop the right of the image –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Crop the bottom of the image –100.00 to +100.00
475Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
For a pattern in one-channel mode: in the <Ch Select> group, press [1st
Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channels. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop from 16:9
to 4:3 aspect ratio), turning it on.
4
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
5
In the <Crop Transition> group, select the execution mode for the DME
wipe crop transition.
Cut: Cut mode. The cropping does not change during the transition, but at
the end point of the transition the cropping is removed (enlarges).
Last 5%: The cropping is maintained for the first 95% of the transition,
and is progressively removed during the last 5% of the transition
(enlarges).
Linear: The cropping is removed linearly through the whole course of the
transition (enlarges).
Setting the timing of transition completion
When the execution mode for a DME wipe crop transition is set to [Last 5%],
you can select the timing of transition completion from 70% ([Last 30%]), 95%
([Last 5%]), and 100% ([Off]).
0100 (%)
y
t
(%)
100
0100 (%)95
y
t
(%)
100
95
0100 (%)
[Cut] [Last 5%] [Linear]
y
t
(%)
100
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
t: transition execution time
y: change in transition and cropping amount
476 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
1
In the M/E 1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify’.
The Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Crop Mode> group select [Remove From Begin].
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
3
In the <Release Transition> group, select the timing of transition
completion.
Last30%: The transition completes at the end of 70% of the transition
execution time. The transition has a dead zone from 70% to 95% of the
transition time.
Last5%: The transition completes at the end of 95% of the transition
execution time. When the transition completes, the cropping is
removed during the last 5%.
Off: The transition completes at the end of the transition execution time.
During the last 5% of the transition, the transition and cropping
removal proceed together.
DME Wipe Modify Clear
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe’ to return the DME wipe settings to their initial status.
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).
0100 (%)95
[Last 30%]
y
t
(%)
100
70 0100 (%)95
[Last 5%]
y
t
(%)
100
70 0100 (%)95
[Off]
y
(%)
100
95
t
Transition
Cropping
t: transition execution time
y: change in transition and cropping amount
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
“Dead Zone”
477DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions
You carry out independent key transition DME wipe setting operations using
the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.
For an overview of independent key transitions, see page 37.
This section describes the independent key transition DME wipe settings,
taking the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust menu as an example.
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME
Wipe Settings
Accessing the independent key transition DME wipe settings
menu
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust
menu, carry out the following operation.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for
key 1. Next, press [DME Wipe Adjust].
• Press the key delegation button [Key1] in the independent key transition
control block of the M/E-1 bank, then press the independent key transition
type [DME] twice in quick succession.
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition
>DME Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1
DME Wipe Adjust menu).
Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern
You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns
displayed in the menu.
To select a DME wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[1ch] for one-channel mode or [2ch] for two-channel mode.
The Pattern Select menu appears.
478 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
2
Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following
buttons.
In two-channel mode, only Page Turn and Page Roll are selectable.
•Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze
•Split/Door: split and door
•Mirror/Sphere: mirror and sphere
•Character Trail: character trail
•Wave/Ripple: wave and ripple
•Page Turn/Roll: page turn and page roll
•Frame I/O: frame in/out
•2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D Trans and 3D Trans
•Sparkle/Split Slide: sparkle and split slide
•User Program: user programmable DME
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”
(page 72) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
566).
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.
3
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe
Modifiers
You can add modifiers such as pattern position and size for an independent key
transition DME wipe.
For introductory information, see “Positioner” (page 80) and “Size” (page
81).
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 80.
1
In the <Position> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00
2 V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00
479DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 81.
1
In the Key 1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Size], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.
Cropping a key DME wipe
1
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
To crop to 4:3 in 16:9 mode
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3 Crop], turning it on.
To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution
1
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
2
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop to 4:3 in
16:9 mode), turning it on.
3
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Set size of effect 0.00 to 200.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Cropping of the top of the image –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Cropping of the left of the image –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Cropping of the right of the image –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Cropping of the bottom of the
image
–100.00 to +100.00
480 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
For subsequent operations, see step 5 of “To set the action when a DME
wipe crop transition is executed” (page 474).
To set the timing of transition completion
1
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
2
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin]..
For subsequent operations, see “Setting the timing of transition
completion” (page 475).
Applying a border to a key DME wipe
In the <Edge> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Border],
turning it on.
For subsequent operations, use the same process as in step 4 of “Modifying the
DME wipe pattern edge” (page 470).
481Resizer DME Wipe Setting
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Resizer DME Wipe Setting
Notes
• This function is supported by the MVS-8000G.
• When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer DME
wipe is used to shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen
including the added video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function
as required to extract the 4:3 image.
Relation between DME wipes and other effects
The following relations hold between a resizer DME wipe and other effects.
Relation to processed keys
It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key with processed key
enabled.
Relation to resizer
It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key with resizer enabled.
It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key forming a pair with a key
with the dual resizer effect enabled. The key combinations forming pairs are
keys 1 and 2, and keys 3 and 4. For example, when a dual resizer effect is
enabled for key 1, it is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe on key 2.
Making resizer DME wipe settings
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[1ch], turning it on.
The 1ch Pattern Select menu appears.
2
Select [Resizer Slide/Squeeze] or [Resizer Frame I/O].
The patterns of the selected group appear.
The wipe patterns that can be used for a resizer DME wipe are as follows.
•Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)
•Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)
•Frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)
3
Press the desired pattern to select it.
For more about resizer DME wipe modifiers, see “Setting Independent
Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 478).
482 DME Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME Wipe Snapshots
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad
To carry out DME wipe snapshot operations, use the Flexi Pad control block.
You can save, recall and delete DME wipe snapshots using the procedures
similar to the procedures for wipe snapshot operations. In DME wipe snapshot
operations, use the [DME] button instead of the [WIPE] button used in wipe
snapshot operations.
Notes
• A button in the memory recall section in which a DME wipe snapshot is
saved shows the pattern, and lights yellow.
For a user-programmable DME, the register number (see page 483) appears.
Depending on the setting of the Setup menu (see “Operation Settings
(Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), you can also display a
register name.
• In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to delete a DME
wipe snapshot.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Wipe Snapshots” (page 460).
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus
In the same way as for wipe snapshots, you can save, recall, and delete DME
snapshots.
For details of the operations, see “Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus”
(page 463).
483Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
With a user programmable DME, you can use DME effects created through the
use of keyframes for a transition on the switcher system.
Note the following points when creating a keyframe effect for use as a user
programmable DME pattern.
Register numbers and pattern numbers
When saving a keyframe effect as a user programmable DME pattern, specify
the register number that corresponds to the pattern number as shown in the
following table.
For details of registers and keyframe effects, see “Registers” (page 166) and
Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2), respectively.
Keyframe effects in the global channel
When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on
the DME global (GLBL) channel, executing the user programmable DME will
also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously.
When executing a user programmable DME, take note of whether the effect is
present on the global channel.
User Programmable DME Transition Mode
To create a user programmable DME, it is necessary to set the transition mode
(the way in which the effect moves). To set the transition mode, use the Key
Frame >DME User PGM menu.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Transition Mode Settings for
User Programmable DME” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).
Execution mode Register number Pattern number
One-channel mode 101 to 199 1901 to 1999
Two-channel mode 201 to 299 2901 to 2999
Three-channel mode 301 to 399 3901 to 3999
484 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
The following transition modes are available.
a) Transition according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or 1204
b) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1201
c) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1251
For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 72).
Note
For the following group of effects available in two-channel mode, no user
programmable DME wipe patterns can be created.
Page turn, Page roll, Frame in-out, Brick
Notes on creating keyframe effects
When creating a keyframe effect to be used as a user programmable DME
pattern, note the following, depending on the transition mode used.
Notes on single transition mode (one-channel mode)
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the last keyframe to be a full-size image.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Single].
Notes on flip tumble (one-channel mode)
• Create the first keyframe image at full size. In the <Back> group of the DME
>Input/Output >Video/Key menu, depending on the direction of the rotation
you want during the transition, press [H Invert] or [V Invert], turning it on.
Channels Transition mode Effect group
One-channel mode Single transition mode Slide, Split, Door, Page turn,
Page roll, Squeeze, Mirror,
Sphere, Character Trail, Wave,
Ripple, 2D Trans, 3D Trans,
Sparkle, Split Slide
Flip Tumble Flip Tumble, Mosaic, Defocus
Frame in-out Frame in-out
Frame in-out H a) Frame in-out
Frame in-out V Frame in-out
Picture-in-picture b) Picture-in-picture
Compress c) Picture-in-picture
Two-channel mode Dual transition mode Slide, Squeeze, 3D Trans
Two-channel picture-in-picture Picture-in-picture
485Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
• Create the last keyframe with the image inverted so the back side is visible,
and with the size at full size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Flip Tumble].
Notes on frame in-out (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O].
Notes on Frame in-out H (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image
horizontally to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the
[PAUSE] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause
for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe move the image horizontally to place it outside the
screen area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible
within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O H].
Notes on frame in-out V (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image vertically
to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button
in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe move the image vertically to place it outside the screen
area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible within the
screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O V].
Notes on picture-in-picture (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
486 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [P In P].
Notes on compress (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Create the first keyframe with the image at full size.
• In the state at completion of the first transition, create the image to be visible
within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe
control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe, once again set the image size to full size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Compress].
Notes on dual transition mode (two-channel mode)
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: create the image full-size.
Channel 2: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
Channel 2: create the image full-size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Dual].
Notes on picture-in-picture (two-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: create the image full-size.
Channel 2: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so
no particular restrictions apply.
In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch4 >Combiner menu, when setting the priority
of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 1 priority higher.
• In the intermediate part of the transition, create the two images so that both
are visible within the screen. In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch4 >Combiner
menu, when setting the priority of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 2
priority higher.
487Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Note
It is recommended to make the priority settings at a keyframe point at which
the two images are not overlapping.
• During the course of a transition, there is a “dead zone” corresponding to the
intermediate point of the whole effect (see following figure), during which
the image does not change. Therefore, it is necessary to create the effect so
that the image in the intermediate part of the transition is the keyframe for
the mid-point of the whole effect. The range of this “dead zone” corresponds
to the central one-third of the range of the transition indicator. This also
applies to an auto transition.
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so
no particular restrictions apply.
Channel 2: create the image full-size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [P In P].
ABC
Keyframe effect
First keyframe Last keyframe
Mid-point of effect
Change in image through transition
Image at point C
appears
Image at point B
appears
(dead zone)
Image at point A
appears
Transition indicator
Fader lever
488 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Still Image Operations .............................................................................490
Preparations .......................................................................................490
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ..............................................490
Selecting an Input Image ...................................................................494
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ..................................495
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze) ....................................................496
Recalling Still Images .......................................................................500
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field Invert Function)
501
Image Processing ...............................................................................502
Image Output .....................................................................................507
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) .................................508
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation) ........509
Frame Memory Clip Operations .............................................................512
Preparations for Operation ................................................................512
Recalling Clips ..................................................................................512
Clip Playback ....................................................................................514
Clip Creation .....................................................................................518
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders ................................520
Clip Output ........................................................................................521
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data .......................................522
Clip Transition Operations ......................................................................524
Image Data Management .........................................................................527
Pair File Processing ...........................................................................527
Moving Files ......................................................................................528
Deleting Files ....................................................................................529
Renaming Files ..................................................................................530
File Backups ......................................................................................531
Restoring Files ...................................................................................531
External Hard Disk Drive Access ...........................................................532
Hard Disk Formatting ........................................................................533
Saving Files .......................................................................................533
Recalling Files ...................................................................................535
490 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Still Image Operations
For an overview of frame memory concepts, see “Frame Memory” (page 85).
Notes
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after
stopping clip playback.
• The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS-8000A
system and MVS-8000G system.
The MVS-8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5.30. For
its operating procedures, see the User’s Guide of Version 6.00 or earlier.
Preparations
Allocating the frame memory outputs (FM1 to FM8) to cross-
point buttons
To output a frame memory image to a monitor, for example, the output signal
from the frame memory (FM1 to FM8) must be allocated to a cross-point
button. Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu.
Accessing the Frame Memory menu
Most frame memory operations are carried out using the Frame Memory menu.
To access the Frame Memory menu, use either of the following procedures.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [FRAME
MEM].
• Press the cross-point button to which the frame memory output is allocated
twice in rapid succession.
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu
The menu screen consists of the following principal parts.
The frame memory selection area display is the same for all except the Pattern
Adjust/Pattern Select/Field Invert/File (excluding Pair Recombination menu)/
Folder/External HDD menus.
491Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Frame Memory menu
aAuto store status display
Depending on the setup settings, this appears when the auto store function is
enabled.
bDisplay of available image capacity
This shows the remaining number of frames. When no more frames can be
stored, in pair mode “1” or “0” appears in red, and in single mode “0” appears
in red.
The lower figure shows the remaining number of frames that can be used as
extended clips.
2 Display of available image capacity
4
Pair selection button
6 File selection area
3Target FM
selection buttons
5 Pair button
1 Auto store status display
Frame memory
selection area
7Frame
memory
folder
selection
area
8Direct
Recall
button
492 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
cTarget FM selection buttons
Press one of these to select which of the selected outputs (FM1 and FM2 in the
example shown) the operation applies to.
The following information appears on the button.
Status display
File name (e.g. image001) and thumbnail: when a file is output
Black: when a black signal is output
Through: when the input image is output
Freeze: when a freeze is output
Composite: when a composite image is processed
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)
Still/duration display
When a still image is selected, “Still” is shown. When a clip is selected, a
duration indication such as “00:00:10” is shown.
Reposition/Lock status display
This shows “R” when the reposition function (see page 507) is on, and shows
“L” when the lock function (see page 508) is on.
Extended clip display
For an extended clip, an “E” appears.
Status display
Still/duration display Reposition/Lock status display
The border color shows the status as follows:
Blue: selected as the reference channel
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel
Black: not selected
Extended clip display
Ancillary data-attached clip display
493Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Ancillary data-attached clip display
For an ancillary data attached clip, an “A” appears.
dPair selection button
Select the pair to be displayed in the target FM selection buttons.
(in the following figure, the pair of FM1 and FM2 is selected.)
The following information appears on the button.
Status display
For a pair, shows the status for the reference.
Thumbnail: when a file is output
Black: when a black signal is output
Through: when the input image is output
Freeze: when a freeze is output
Compos: when a composite image is processed
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)
ePair button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable pair mode.
fFile selection area
You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files.
The border color shows the status as follows:
Blue: selected as the reference channel
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel
Black: not selected
Status display
494 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Thumbnail indications
Still image files and clip files: Still image files are displayed as gray buttons
and clip files are displayed as yellow buttons.
Single files and pair files: Single files are displayed with shadow and pair files
are displayed with no shadow.
Selected file: Pale blue border. When more than one file is selected, only the
first is pale blue, and the remainders are amber. If the pair file was selected,
each press switches the front and the back.
File information detail display
For the selected file, this shows the file name, “P” if a pair file, “E” if an
extended clip, “A” if an ancillary data attached clip, and the duration.
gFrame memory folder selection area
Select the frame memory folder to be displayed.
hDirect Recall button
Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail
immediately recalls the file.
Selecting an Input Image
For the input image to frame memory, you can use either the signal selected on
one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal.
Selected file.
When a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back.
File information detail display
495Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
When using the signal on frame memory source bus 1 or 2 for the input image,
select the signal as described below.
For the method of using a color matte signal, see “Freezing an image and
writing it to memory” (page 496).
Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus
As an example, to select a signal on frame memory source bus 1, use the
following procedure.
1
In the auxiliary bus control block, press the AUX delegation button to
which frame memory source bus 1 is allocated, turning it on.
For allocation of buses to the AUX delegation buttons, see “AUX
Delegation Buttons Settings (Aux Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume
2).
2
In the auxiliary bus control block cross-point buttons, select the signal to
be used for the input image.
To select a signal with a key or DME effect applied on the frame
memory source bus
In the key control block, press the [FM FEED] button, turning it on.
This automatically assigns the key fill and key source signals being keyed by
the currently selected keyer to frame memory source buses 1 and 2.
When DME is selected on the keyer, the key fill and key source signals to
which a DME effect is applied are assigned.
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory
Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame memory
The following description applies to the case of settings for FM1&2, but the
procedures are similar for the other cases.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, press one of VF1 to VF4, and select the
required HF menu.
The current status of frame memory appears. (See page 490).
2
From the pair selection buttons, press the buttons corresponding to FM1
and FM2.
This assigns the signals to FM1 and FM2.
496 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To the right of the target FM selection buttons, the FM1 and FM2 output
status appears (see page 492).
3
If required, press [Pair], to select the FM operation mode (pair mode).
On: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) as a pair.
Off: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) individually.
For more details, see “Pair mode” (page 87).
Note
In the Pair Recombination menu, the [Pair] operation is not possible.
4
Press the target FM selection button [FM1] or [FM2] (see page 492) to
select the FM operations apply to.
When [Pair] is On: Whichever of FM1 and FM2 you press, the pair is
selected.
When [Pair] is Off: One of the targets must be selected. However, in the
Clip >Play menu you can also select both FM1 and FM2.
Selecting a frame memory folder
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area (see page 494).
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum of
12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze)
Freezing an image and writing it to memory
To freeze the signal selected as input material, and write it to memory, use the
following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF2 ‘Freeze/Store.’
The Freeze/Store menu appears.
2
Select the target frame memory.
For the procedure, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame
memory” (page 495).
3
To enable V/K mode, press [V/K Mode] turning it on.
497Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
4
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 496.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Freeze Enable], turning it on.
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, a freeze is now possible.
6
If necessary, make the video process settings (see page 498) or mask
settings (see page 499) for application to the selected signal.
7
In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.
Frame: Freeze one frame.
Field: Freeze one field.
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.
Notes
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system
is powered off.
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame
memory selection is changed.
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/29.97, 720P/
50, 720P/59.94
498 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Saving a freeze image
To save a captured still image in a file, use the following procedure in the Still
>Freeze/Store menu.
1
Press [Store].
The keyboard window (see page 331) appears.
2
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum 8 characters).
Note
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,
LPT9
3
In the keyboard window, press the [Enter] button.
This saves the still image file in memory.
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Freezing an image
and writing it to memory.”
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting
appears.
When the system is powered off, the file saved in memory is erased.
However, you can recall a backed up file in the Frame Memory menu.
For details, see “File Backups” (page 531), and “Restoring backed up
files” (page 531).
Carrying out a freeze and store simultaneously
Press [Freeze & Store], turning it on.
The system enters the freeze and store mode.
In this state, if you press [Frame] or [Field], this carries out a freeze, and
simultaneously stores in a still image file.
Setting video processing
To set video processing for the signal selected on a frame memory source bus,
use the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.
1
In the <Video Process> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.
2
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
499Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To return the settings to the default values, press [Unity] in the <Video
Process> group.
Note
When a pair setting is active, it is coupled to the video process on/off
setting, but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory
source bus 1. The pair setting cannot be used to set the frame memory
source bus 2. If you want to set video process for frame memory source bus
1 only with the pair setting when old settings for frame memory source bus
2 remain, return the frame memory source bus 2 settings to their default
values. When setting video process for the frame memory source bus 2,
disable the pair setting.
Setting a mask
Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2. To apply
a mask to the signal selected on frame memory source bus 1, for example, use
the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.
1
Press [Box Mask] turning it on.
2
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
3
To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2, press [Mask
Link], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Overall gain of the video signal –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Y signal black level –7.31 to +109.59
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top position –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Left position –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Right position –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Bottom position –100.00 to +100.00
500 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Recalling Still Images
Recalling a still image
To recall a still image file saved in memory using the thumbnails, and assign it
to an FM output, use the following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’
The Recall menu appears.
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (pairs of main file and sub file) are
displayed.
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files appear.
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See
page 495.)
Main file
Sub file
Single file
501Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
If [Direct Recall] is on, press and turn it off.
4
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
5
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.
6
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.
7
Press [Recall].
This recalls the still image file, which is assigned to the FM you selected
in step 2.
To recall in direct recall mode
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.
1
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].
2
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.
This immediately recalls the file.
To display the subsidiary file in front
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field
Invert Function)
Note
This function is valid when the signal format is HD (excluding 720P).
However, it is not valid if the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with
ancillary data.”
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
502 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To invert the field polarity of a saved still image
1
In the Frame Memory >Still menu, press HF7 ‘Field Invert.’
The Field Invert menu appears.
This automatically switches pair mode off, and the status area shows
thumbnails of all images currently saved in frame memory.
2
Press the arrow keys or turn the knob to scroll the thumbnail display.
3
Select the thumbnail of the still image on which you want to carry out field
inversion. You can also select more than one image.
To select all still images, press [Select All].
The file names for the selected still images appear in reverse video.
To cancel the selection, press once more, returning to the normal display.
The last still image selected is automatically recalled, and a pale blue
border appears around the thumbnail.
You can now select thumbnails while checking the still images.
4
To carry out field inversion, press [Field Invert].
Field inversion starts, and a popup window shows the progress of the
operation.
Note
When the system is powered off, files held in memory are lost, but backed-up
files can be recalled in the Frame Memory menu.
For details, see “File Backups” on page 531 and “Restoring Files” on page
531.
Image Processing
Combining the background image and input signal
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF3 ‘Composite.’
The Composite menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Scroll thumbnail display 1 and upwards
503Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See
page 495.)
3
To select V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.
4
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 496.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Edit Enable], turning it on.
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, and the combining of the background signal (the
signal providing the background for combination) and the input signal (the
signal providing the foreground for combination) is now possible.
Note
The input signal is lowered by one line, but when you apply a freeze, the
freeze image is returned to the correct position.
6
To use a color matte signal for the input signal, press [Frgd Color], turning
it on.
Even when pair mode is enabled, you can make separate settings for each
FM.
7
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
8
If you turned [Frgd Color] off in step 6, if required press [Input Adjust] to
display the Input Adjust menu, and make the video process (see page 498)
and mask (see page 499) settings for the input signal.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
504 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
9
To set the background signal to black, press [Bkgd Black], turning it on.
Notes
• When the background signal is originally black, [Bkgd Black] remains
on.
• When the background signal is a freeze image (an image frozen, but not
saved), turning [Bkgd Black] on erases the unsaved freeze image and, as
a result, [Bkgd Black] remains on.
10
In the <Type> group, set the type of combination (see page 505).
11
In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.
Frame: Freeze one frame.
Field: Freeze one field.
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.
Notes
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system
is powered off.
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame
memory selection is changed.
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/29.97, 720P/50,
720P/59.94
Saving a processed freeze image
To save a processed freeze image as a file, in the Still >Composite menu use
the following procedure.
1
Press [Store].
The keyboard window appears.
2
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum eight characters).
3
In the keyboard window press [Enter].
505Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
This saves the freeze image as a still image file in memory.
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Combining the
background image and input signal” (page 502).
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting
appears.
Selecting the way in which images are combined
To select the way in which the background image and input signal are
combined (see page 90), use the following procedure.
1
In the <Type> group of the Still >Composite menu, select one of the
following methods of combination.
•Pattern Key: pattern key
•Ext Key: external key
(This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled. The signal
selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal.)
•Mix: mix
•Nam: non-additive mix
If none of the above is selected, image combination is not carried out.
2
Depending on the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.
• When [Pattern Key] is selected
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix
(Volume 1) (page 560).
• When [Ext Key] is selected
• When [Mix] is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Size of pattern 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness of pattern 0.00 to 100.00
3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for key
signal generation
+109.59 to –7.31
2 Gain Key sensitivity –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Rate Mix proportion 0.00 to 100.00
506 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
When you selected a pattern key, press [Pattern Adjust].
The Pattern Adjust menu appears. In the menu, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See page 65.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
a) See page 68.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See page 67.
• When turning [Rotation Angle] on and inclining the pattern
a) See page 66.
To select the pattern, display the Pattern Select menu by pressing [Pattern
Select] in the Pattern Adjust menu. You can change the pattern selected in
step 2 here. After selecting one of the patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to
24) displayed in the Pattern Select menu, you can adjust the following
parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –100.00 to +100.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of
pattern horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of
pattern vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
507Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
4
When you selected a pattern key or external key, if required press [Key
Invert] in the Still >Composite menu to invert the key.
Image Output
There are two functions related to image output: the reposition function for
moving the output image, and the lock function for fixing the output image.
For an overview of the image output, see page 90.
Moving the output image (reposition function)
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF1
‘Reposition.’
The Reposition menu appears. In this menu, you can also enable the V/K
mode (see page 496).
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output. (See page 495.)
3
In the <Reposition> group, select the movement mode (see page 90).
Normal: Move in normal mode.
Black&White: Move in black & white mode.
4
With the knobs, adjust the parameters to move the image.
a) See page 65.
The surroundings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black.
5
To return the image moved by the reposition function to the center
position, in the <Reposition> group press [Center].
Note
It is not possible to write the image moved by the reposition function
directly to frame memory.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Move in horizontal direction –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Move in vertical direction –200.00 to +200.00 a)
508 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Fixing the output image selection (lock function)
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF2
‘Lock.’
The Lock menu appears.
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output. (See page 495.)
3
Press [Lock], turning it on.
This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image.
To release the lock, set [Lock] to off.
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record)
Continuously freezing input images and writing to memory
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF4 ‘Animation
Record.’
The Animation Record menu appears.
2
Select the desired frame memory.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and
target frame memory” (page 495).
3
To use V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.
4
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 496.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Record Enable], turning it on.
509Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, the recording function is now possible.
6
Input the file name if required.
Pressing [File Name] displays the keyboard window and you can enter the
first character string (up to four characters) of the file name.
7
Set the recording time if required.
Pressing [Duration] displays the numeric keypad window, in which you
can enter the recording time in the form of timecode.
If you set the recording time to zero, this uses all frame memory in which
storing is possible for recording.
8
If required, set video processing for the selected signal.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Setting video processing”
(page 498).
9
Press [Record], to start recording.
When the recording time is set, recording stops once the time has elapsed.
10
Press [Stop] to stop recording.
Even if the recording time is set, you can still stop recording before the set
time has elapsed.
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images
(Animation)
To recall a continuous sequence of still images, create an effect in the user
region with the still image files as a keyframe, and run the created effect.
Note
With the 720P format, you can continuously recall images using the frame
memory in units of two frames only.
Creating an effect with still image files as a keyframe
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF5 ‘Create Key
Frame.’
The Create Key Frame menu appears.
510 Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• A thumbnail appears for each group of files having the same characters,
except for the last three characters, in the file name.
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (each pair comprising a main file and
a sub file) appear.
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files all appear.
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the frame memory to be
assigned.
This creates the effect in the user region to which the selected frame
memory is assigned.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and
target frame memory” (page 495).
3
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
4
Turn the knob to select the register number in the user region.
Note
To search for an empty register in the user region, use the numeric keypad
control block (see step 3 of “Recalling a Register” in Chapter 13
(Volume 2)).
5
Use the arrow keys or turn the knobs to scroll the thumbnail display of the
files.
6
Select the thumbnail of the files to be used for the keyframe.
7
If necessary, turn the knob to check the animation effect in the thumbnail
display.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Register Effect register number 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Viewer Animate thumbnail display
of files
00:00:00 and upwards
511Still Image Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
8
Using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block,
select one of the regions (User1 to User8) to which the frame memory
output signals have been assigned.
9
Carry out either of the following.
• To clear the effect register selected in step 4, and create a new effect:
press [Create Key Frame].
• To add to the end of the effect register selected in step 4, press [Append
Key Frame].
A confirmation message for creating the effect appears.
If there is an inappropriate condition for creating the effect, an error
message appears.
For details of error messages, see “Error Messages” in the Appendix
(Volume 2).
10
Press [OK].
This creates the effect in the selected user region register.
To cancel creating the effect
Press [Cancel].
Notes
• The effect is built with the selected files, in increasing order of the last three
characters of the file name. If you do not want to include some of these files
in the effect, first delete or rename them.
• A maximum of 99 keyframes can be included in a single effect.
Recalling a sequence of still images
Run the effect created by the foregoing procedure.
The procedure for doing this is the same as for any other effect.
For details, see “Executing Effects” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).
512 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Frame Memory Clip Operations
For an overview of frame memory clip concepts, see “Frame Memory Clip
Function” (page 92).
Notes
• The frame memory clip function is supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G
only.
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after
stopping clip playback.
Preparations for Operation
The preparations for using a frame memory clip (hereafter, a “clip”) are the
same as for a still image operation. See “Preparations” (page 490) and
“Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory” (page 495).
Recalling Clips
Recalling a clip
You can recall a clip from each of frame memories 1 to 8.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’
The Recall menu appears. (See following figure)
• When [Pair] is set to On, only pair files (sets of main file and sub file)
are shown.
• When [Pair] is set to Off, both of single files and pair files are shown.
513Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
In the frame memory selection area, select an assigned target FM. (See
page 495)
Note
For the MVS-8000A, if other than FM1 and FM2 is selected, extended
clips are not displayed.
3
If [Direct Recall] is on, press the button, turning it off.
4
In the folder selection area, select the desired folder.
By pressing [More] to switch the displays, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
5
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.
Target selection buttons
Pair selection buttons
Clip file selection area
Frame memory
selection area
Frame memory
folder selection area
Direct Recall button
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
514 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
6
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.
7
Press [Recall].
This recalls the clip file, which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2.
In pair mode, if a clip is selected, the main file is output to FM1, and the
sub file to FM2. In single mode, when only one of FM1 and FM2 is
selected, the front file on the thumbnail is output.
To recall in direct recall mode
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.
1
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].
2
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.
This immediately recalls the file.
To display the subsidiary file in front
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.
Clip Playback
You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control
block.
Note
With a pair file recalled, it is possible to set [Pair] to Off and carry out a single
file operation, but if you then set [Pair] to On again, the output of frame
memory may be black. In such cases it is necessary to recall the pair file once
more.
Playing a clip using the menu
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF2 ‘Play.’
The Play menu appears. The status of the clip shown in the current target
FM selection buttons appears here.
515Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
When [Pair] is Off, press a target FM selection button to select the target.
3
To set loop playback, press [Loop], turning it on.
4
To start playback, press [Play]. During playback, to stop, press [Stop].
To cue up
Press [Cue].
To play the image at the beginning of the clip (Clip Begin)
Press [Rewind].
To play the image at the end of the clip (Clip End)
Press [FF].
Playback start point
(pale blue bar)
Current position
(red bar)
Playback end point
(yellow bar)
Status buttons
These show the timecode values for
the start point, current position, and
end point.
516 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To specify the playback start point
To set the current position as the playback start point, in the <Start TC> group,
press [Set]. To set a different position, press the [Start] status button, and enter
a timecode value from the numeric keypad window.
To specify the playback stop point
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop
playback, then in the <Stop TC> group, press [Set]. To set to any position,
press the [Stop] status button, and enter a timecode value from the numeric
keypad window.
To change the current position
To change the current position, press the [Current] status button, and enter a
timecode value from the numeric keypad window.
Using the device control block (search dial) to play back clips
Carry out the following operation with the device control block (search dial).
Note
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.
1
With the device selection buttons, select the frame memory clip to be
played (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.
2
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.
For details of the buttons in the device control block (search dial), see
“Device Control Block (Search Dial)” (page 278) in Chapter 2.
To specify the playback start point
To make the current position the playback start point, press the [START TC]
button. To set a different position, press the [SET START TC] button, then
enter the timecode from the numeric keypad control block.
To specify the duration
Press the [SET DUR] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad
control block. If the playback start point is already set, this automatically sets
the playback stop point. If the playback stop point is already set, this
automatically sets the playback start point. (The duration setting is not
displayed in the device control block.)
517Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To specify the playback stop point
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop
playback, then press the [STOP TC] button. To set to any position, press the
[SET STOP TC] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad control
block.
To carry out the variable speed playback
Use the search dial.
For details on using the search dial, see “Controlling the Tape/Disk
Transport” in Chapter 12 (Volume 2).
To apply a loop to a frame memory clip
Press the [LOOP] button.
Using the device control block (trackball) or device control block
(joystick) to play back clips
Carry out the following operation with the device control block (trackball) or
device control block (joystick).
Note
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.
1
Press the [DEV] button in the region selection buttons, and select the frame
memory clip for playback (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.
2
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.
For details of the buttons in the device control block (trackball) or device
control block (joystick), see “Device Control Block (Trackball)” (page 271) in
Chapter 2.
For details of the playback start point, stop point, and duration settings, see the
previous item, “Using the device control block (search dial) to play back clips”
(page 516).
To carry out the variable speed playback
Press any of the [SHTL], [JOG], and [VAR] buttons, then turn the Z-ring or
move the joystick. The image changes in the forward direction when you turn
the Z-ring clockwise, and in the reverse direction when you turn it
518 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
counterclockwise. Move the joystick to the right for the forward direction and
to the left for the reverse direction.
When you pressed the [JOG] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the turning speed of the Z-ring or the movement speed of the joystick.
When you pressed the [SHTL] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick.
When you pressed the [VAR] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick,
in the range –1 to +3 times normal speed.
Clip Creation
You save a movie as a clip.
Note
If the number of frame memory clips exceed 100 single files (50 pair files), an
error appears.
Using the menu to record clips
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF3 ‘Record.’
The Record menu appears.
519Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
With [Pair] off, press the operation target selection button, to select the
operation target.
3
In the folder selection area, select the folder containing the clip to be
recorded.
4
In the <Record Enable> group, select the clip type.
• To record a normal clip, press [Clip].
• To record an extended clip, press [Ext Clip].
5
To set the clip name, press [Name].
A keyboard window appears.
6
Enter the clip name, and press Enter.
7
To start recording, press [Record Start].
8
To end recording, press [Record Stop].
Frame memory
selection area Operation target
selection buttons
Pair selection
buttons
Folder selection
area
520 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
To set the clip duration
1
Press [Clip Duration].
A numeric keypad window appears.
2
Enter a timecode value or number of frames, and press Enter.
This confirms the clip duration.
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders
You can create, rename, and delete frame memory folders.
Creating a new folder
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF5 ‘Folder.’
The Folder menu appears. The status area shows a list of the current folder
settings.
2
Select [New].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter the folder name, and press Enter.
This confirms the folder name.
Changing the folder name
1
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys
or by turning the knobs.
2
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter the new folder name, and press Enter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No. Folder selection 1 to 12
2 Num Number of files to select
consecutively from selected file
1 to 12
521Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
The following names cannot be used for folders:
Default, Flash1, Flash2
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,
LPT9
This changes the folder name.
Deleting a folder
1
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys
or by turning the knobs.
To select all folders, select [All].
2
Press [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
3
To carry out the deletion select [Yes], and to cancel the deletion select
[No].
Note
It is not possible to delete the default folder (named “Default”).
Clip Output
As for still image operation, you can use the reposition and lock functions.
For details of the operation, see “Image Output” (page 507).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No. Folder selection 1 to 12
2 Num Number of files to select
consecutively from selected file
1 to 12
522 Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data
Preparations
To record ancillary data, it is first necessary in the Setup menu to select “save
with ancillary data” as the frame memory saving mode (see “Saving a frame
memory clip including ancillary data” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
Recording ancillary data
To record ancillary data in a frame memory clip, use the Frame Memory >Clip
>Record menu.
For details of the operating sequence, see “Clip Creation” (page 518).
To check ancillary data during recording
If the ancillary data to be recorded is embedded audio, by first setting the signal
output to through mode, you can listen while recording.
For the method of setting the signal output to through mode, see “Signal
Output Settings (Output Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Note
For [Freeze Enable] or [Record Enable], in the <Record Enable> group,
pressing [Clip] or [Ext Clip] to turn them on or off may result in noise. Also,
with these buttons in the On state, selecting the signal on the frame memory
source bus may result in noise.
Playing back ancillary data
You can play ancillary data recorded in a frame memory clip by normal
playback or an auto transition of the clip transition.
To play the ancillary data, you must use the following procedure to enable
playback of the ancillary data. For the subsequent playback operation, see
“Clip Playback” (page 514).
Notes
• After recording a frame memory clip, the ancillary data state is enabled for
playback.
• To play back the clip, set the signal output to through mode. For the method
of setting through mode, see “Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
• When the reposition function is on, ancillary data cannot be played back.
• Switching reposition function between on and off may cause noise.
• Only the AUX bus and edit preview bus can output ancillary data.
523Frame Memory Clip Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• On the MVS-8000A playing back ancillary data is only possible for FM1,
FM3, FM5, and FM7. For FM2, FM4, FM6, and FM8, ancillary data cannot
be played back. On the MVS-8000G there are no such restrictions.
• For loop playback of clips in the following video formats, the loop playback
range must be at least 5 frames, and set to a multiple of 5 frames.
– 480/59.94i
– 720/59.94P
– 1080/59.94i
– 1080/29.97PsF
• Recalling operations of still images or clips can cause noise.
• Carrying out file operations on a frame memory clip may result in the
ancillary data being discontinuous, or in noise occurring. However, if the
first or last frame of the clip is deleted, noise will not occur.
• The audio sampling frequency is always 48 kHz.
• When you play back the recorded embedded audio, depending on the device
to be used, noises are produced at the playback start point and end point. For
details of devices that are used for playback, contact your Sony service or
sales representative.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 “Clip”, HF5 “Ancillary Enable.”
2
Select the frame memory folder and file to be played back.
3
Set the [Ancillary Enable] button to On.
524 Clip Transition Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Clip Transition Operations
For an overview of clip transitions, see “Frame Memory Clip Function” (page
92).
Notes
• The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS-8000A/8000G.
• When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, if one of the wipe
direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit, it indicates the
direction of clip playback.
Setting a clip transition
The following example describes the case of a clip transition using FM 1&2
Clip on the M/E-1 bank.
Note
To use a clip transition effectively, the image from the frame memory clip
being played back during the clip transition should be seen in the M/E-1
program output. For example, inserting a key using frame memory output 1 and
frame memory output 2.
1
Display the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu, and in the <Transition Type>
group select “FM1&2 Clip.”
2
Press [Clip Transition].
The Clip Transition menu appears.
525Clip Transition Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
Press the [Clip] button.
The Clip menu appears, and the status area shows a list of clips.
4
Select the clip to use in the clip transition.
5
Return to the Clip Transition menu, and in the <BKGD Transition Type>
group, select the background transition type.
Note
For details of the background transition selected here, see the various
adjustments in the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu.
6
In the <Select> group, press [BKGD Transition].
7
Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start
point independently of the clip playback timing.
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD
Transition Set Timing> group press [Start].
Clip display area
Background transition display area Clip transition display area
526 Clip Transition Operations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)
8
Using either of the following methods, set the end point of the background
transition.
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD
Transition Set Timing> group press [Stop].
• Turn knob 2 to set the number of frames.
9
If Wipe or DME Wipe is selected in the <BKGD Transition Type> group,
in the <BKGD Transition Direction> group, select the background
transition direction.
10
In the <Select> group, press [FM 1&2 Clip].
11
Using either of the following methods, set the start point of the clip.
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <Clip Transition
SetTiming> group press [Start].
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)
Note
It is not possible to set the end point.
12
In the <Clip Transition Direction> group, select the playback direction of
the clip.
To reset the start point and end point
Press [Timing Reset].
The background transition start point and end point, and the clip start point are
all reset.
Position of frame 0 Reference axis
527Image Data Management
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Image Data Management
You can carry out the following operations on the files in which images are
saved.
• Pair file processing
•Move
• Delete
• Rename
• Backup
•Restore
For an overview of file management, see page 94.
Notes
• The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS-8000A
system and MVS-8000G system.
The MVS-8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5.30. For
its operating procedures, see the User’s Guide of Version 6.00 or earlier.
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after
stopping clip playback.
Pair File Processing
You can create a pair file from two single files. In the reverse direction, you
can split a pair file into two single files.
Creating a pair file from two single files
Note
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to On.
The following description applies to the case of FM1&2, but the procedures are
similar for the other cases.
1
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip
>Recall menu, recall the two single files you want to convert to a pair file,
to FM1 and FM2.
2
Select the folder in which the file to be moved is stored.
528 Image Data Management
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF1 ‘Pair
Recombination.’
The Pair Recombination menu appears.
4
Press [Couple].
This converts the files output to FM1 and FM2 to a pair.
Splitting a pair file into two single files
Note
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to Off.
The following description applies to the case of FM1and FM2, but the
procedures are similar for the other cases.
1
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip
>Recall menu, recall the pair file.
2
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’and HF1 ‘Pair
Recombination.’
The Pair Recombination menu appears.
3
Press [Separate].
The FM1 and FM2 pair file is split into separate single files.
Moving Files
Moving files
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Move.’
The Move menu appears. The status area shows files to be moved in the
upper area, and destination files in the lower area.
2
Select the folder which contains the file to be moved.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the file to be moved.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
529Image Data Management
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
4
Select the destination folder and file.
5
Press [Move].
A message for confirming the move appears.
6
To confirm the move press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].
Deleting Files
Deleting files
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Delete.’
The Delete menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.
2
Select the folder which contains the file to be deleted.
3
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be deleted. If
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
• To delete all files, press [Select All], turning it on.
• When a clip thumbnail is selected, the still image files making up the clip
are also selected for deletion.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No File selection 1 and upwards
2 Num Selection of number of files in
sequence
1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No File selection 1 and upwards
2 Num Selection of number of files in
sequence
1 and upwards
530 Image Data Management
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
4
If necessary, turn the knob to check the contents of the frame memory clip
through the thumbnail display.
5
Press [Delete].
A message for confirming the deletion appears.
6
To confirm the deletion press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].
Renaming Files
Renaming a file
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF6 ‘Rename’
The Rename menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be renamed. If
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
3
If necessary, turn the knob check the contents of the frame memory clip
through the thumbnail display.
4
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
5
Enter the new name, then press [Enter] in the keyboard window.
This renames the file.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Viewer For a movie, the current frame
position. For a still image, no effect.
00:00:00 and
upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No File selection 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Viewer For a movie, the current frame
position. For a still image, no effect.
00:00:00 and
upwards
531Image Data Management
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
File Backups
To back up a file saved in memory to hard disk, use the following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF7 ‘Backup/Restore.’
The Backup/Restore menu appears.
2
Press [Backup].
This backs up the saved file.
Restoring Files
Restoring backed up files
To recall files backed up on the hard disk, use the following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF7 ‘Backup/Restore.’
The Backup/Restore menu appears.
2
Press [Restore].
This recalls the backed up file.
532 External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
External Hard Disk Drive Access
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, you can connect a hard
disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor, and save and recall
image data from frame memory.
Since image data saved in memory is lost when the system is powered off,
using an external hard disk drive allows required data to be preserved.
Notes
• This function is only available on an MVS-8000A/8000G system.
• Only one hard disk drive can be connected to a single switcher processor.
• While the hard disk is being accessed, frame memory operations are not
possible.
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after
stopping clip playback.
Consult your Sony service representative or sales representative about the
hard disk drives that can be connected.
Selecting the switcher
When the system is operating in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher on which
to carry out formatting, file saving, and file recall operations.
For details of Dual Simul mode, see “System configuration (System Config)”
(page 187).
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF1
‘Format’ or HF2 ‘Backup/Restore.’
The Format menu or Backup/Restore menu appears.
2
In the region selection area (see page 323), press [SWR].
A popup window for selecting the switcher appears.
3
Press [SWR1] or [SWR2] to select the switcher.
The button for the selected switcher lights.
You can select two switchers simultaneously. In this case, the last operated
button lights green, and the other lights amber. The menu shows the
information for the switcher lit green.
533External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
4
Press [OK].
Hard Disk Formatting
When you connect a hard disk drive for the first time, it is necessary to format
the hard disk. This partitions the disk, creating five logical drives (FMHDD1
to FMHDD5).
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF1
‘Format.’
The Format menu appears.
If in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher to operate (see page 532).
To get the hard disk drive information
In the button area press [Refresh Status].
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk
drive.
2
Press [Format].
A popup window for confirming formatting appears.
Note
Carrying out formatting erases any existing data on the hard disk.
3
Press [Yes].
This starts the hard disk formatting. A progress bar and numerical
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Success!!”
appears.
4
Press [OK].
Saving Files
You can save all of the files from frame memory to the external hard disk drive.
Note
Before carrying out this operation for the first time, it is necessary to format the
hard disk (see previous item, “Hard Disk Formatting”).
534 External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF2
‘Backup/Restore.’
The Backup/Restore menu appears.
If in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher to operate (see page 532).
To get the hard disk drive information
Press [Refresh Status].
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk
drive, and the names of directories within the logical drives.
2
Using any of the following methods, select a logical drive (FMHDD1 to
FMHDD5).
• Press directly on the list to select.
• Press a button in the <Partition> group.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Backup].
A popup window for confirming file saving appears.
Note
When you save the files, all of the saved files in the logical drive is erased
immediately before the saving operations.
4
Press [Yes].
This starts the file saving operation. If there is no directory in the logical
drive, a directory is automatically created, and the files are saved within it.
A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the
operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”
appears.
5
Press [OK].
To rename a directory
Select a directory in the list, and in the button area press [Rename].
In the keyboard window that appears, enter the new directory name, and press
[Enter]. The name of a directory is limited to eight characters.
Note
The following names cannot be used:
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Partition Logical drive selection 1 to 5
535External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
Recalling Files
You can recall all of the saved files on the hard disk drive into frame memory.
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the procedure “Saving Files” (page 533).
Note
It is not possible to select a directory (logical drive) on which files are not
saved.
2
Press [Restore].
A popup window for confirming file recall appears.
Note
When you recall the files, any existing data in frame memory is lost
immediately before the recalling operations.
3
Press [Yes].
This starts the file recall operation. A progress bar and numerical
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”
appears.
4
Press [OK].
536 External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
Color Background Setting Operations ...................................................538
Color Background Settings Menu .....................................................538
Basic Color Background Setting Operations .....................................538
538 Color Background Setting Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
Color Background Setting Operations
You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu. This section
describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example.
For an overview of the color background, see page 97.
Color Background Settings Menu
Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu
Use either of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [COLOR
BKGD], and press VF1 ‘Color Bkgd1.’
• Press a cross-point button assigned to color background 1 twice in rapid
succession.
The above operation displays the Color Bkgd1 menu.
Basic Color Background Setting Operations
Making a single-color matte (Flat Color)
If you are not using the “color mix” function to combine two colors, use the
following procedure.
1
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd 1 menu, press [Flat Color], turning
it on.
You can now adjust color 1.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
539Color Background Setting Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
Making a color combination (color mix)
To combine color 1 and color 2, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd1 menu, press [Mix Color], turning
it on.
2
Set the following parameters as required.
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix
(Volume 1) (page 560).
You can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the [Mix Ptn
Select] button, to display the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern
appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24), and
you can then adjust the following parameters.
3
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,
then adjust the parameters.
4
If required, set the pattern modifiers.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See page 65.
•When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Degree of softening of edge 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
540 Color Background Setting Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
a) See page 68.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See page 67.
• When turning [Pairing] on and making a wipe pattern like a
Venetian blind
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
a) See page 66.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant rate
a) See page 66.
• When selecting H (horizontal) or V (vertical) in the <Modulation>
group and applying waviness to the pattern
(The modulation is always a sine wave.)
Note
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is
not available.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width of the slits 1 to 128 (integer)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
541Color Background Setting Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
a) See page 70.
5
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Speed Speed of waves –100.00 to +100.00 a)
542 Color Background Setting Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap
Basic Copy and Swap Operations ...........................................................544
Copy and Swap Menu Operations .....................................................544
Copy by Button Operation ................................................................545
544 Basic Copy and Swap Operations
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap
Basic Copy and Swap Operations
Copy and Swap Menu Operations
There are two ways of carrying out a copy operation: by using the menus or by
a simple button operation. Swap operations, and operations on DME data can
only be done with a menu operation.
Accessing the Copy/Swap menu
In the menu operation section top menu selection buttons, press the [Copy/
Swap] button, then press VF1 ‘Copy/Swap.’ The Copy/Swap menu appears.
Here a copy/swap operation on wipe data is described by way of example,
using the Copy/Swap >Wipe menu, but the same general procedure applies to
all of the following menus.
• M/E: Copying and swapping M/E data
• Key: Copying and swapping key data
• Wipe: Copying and swapping wipe data
• DME Wipe: Copying and swapping DME wipe data
• Matte: Copying and swapping matte data
• Color: Copying and swapping color data
• DME: Copying and swapping data by DME channels
• Format Converter: Copying format converter data (for MVS-8000G only)
For details, see “Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)” in Chapter
16 (Volume 2).
For an overview of the concepts involved, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).
For details of color corrector copy and swap, see Chapter 19 “Color
Corrector” (Volume 2).
Copying and swapping wipe data
As an example, to copy or swap wipe data, use the following procedure.
1
In the Copy/Swap menu, select HF3 ‘Wipe.’
The Copy/Swap >Wipe menu appears.
The status area shows lists for the copy/swap source on the left, and the
copy/swap destination on the right.
2
In the <Data Select> group, select either of the following.
Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the transition control block.
545Basic Copy and Swap Operations
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap
Key Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the independent key
transition control block.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the data to be copied or
swapped.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.
a) Transition control block wipe data
b) Independent key transition control block wipe data
For details of the data affected, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).
4
To copy, press [Copy], and to swap, press [Swap].
This carries out the copy or swap.
To undo a copy or swap
Press [Undo], to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out.
Copy by Button Operation
You can carry out the following copy operations by a simple button operation.
• M/E copy
• Keyer copy
• Wipe copy
• DME wipe copy
For an overview of the copy function, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).
Basic button operation
The basic button operation is to hold down the copy source button, then press
the destination button.
You can undo the last operation using [Undo] in the menu (see page 545).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Select data for copy/swap
source 1 to 4 a)
1 to 16 b)
2 Right No Select data for copy/swap
destination 1 to 4 a)
1 to 16 b)
546 Basic Copy and Swap Operations
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap
M/E copy button operation
In the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank, use the [SNAPSHOT] button.
To copy from M/E-1 to M/E-2
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [SNAPSHOT] button,
then press the [SNAPSHOT] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.
Keyer copy button operation
To specify the copy source, use the key delegation buttons in the key control
block, and to specify the copy destination, use the key delegation buttons in the
independent key transition control block.
To copy from M/E-1 key 1 to M/E-2 key 2
In the key control block M/E delegation buttons, press [M/E1], turning it on,
then hold down the [KEY1] button, and in the M/E-2 independent key
transition control block, press the [KEY2] button.
Wipe copy button operation
Use the [WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank.
To copy the M/E-1 wipe to the M/E-2 wipe
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [WIPE] button, then press
the [WIPE] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.
DME wipe copy button operation
Use the [DME] button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank.
To copy the M/E-1 DME wipe to the M/E-2 DME wipe
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [DME] button, then press
the [DME] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Misc Menu Operations .............................................................................548
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ..........................548
Editing Keyboard Settings .................................................................549
Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................550
Safe Title Settings .............................................................................552
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings .....553
AUX Menu Operations ............................................................................555
AUX Bus Settings .............................................................................555
Status Menu ..............................................................................................556
Video Process Settings ..............................................................................557
548 Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Misc Menu Operations
In the Misc menu, you can carry out the following operations.
• Enabling and disabling operation from an external device, System Manager,
or an editing keyboard.
• Enabling and disabling side flags on the background bus of each of the M/E-
1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.
• Switching the safe title function on or off for each switcher output.
• Displaying the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and fade-to-
black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and changing
the settings.
Port Settings for Control From an External Device
Enabling or disabling control from an external device
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears with the status area
showing the settings of the following ports.
• Switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)
• Switcher GPI port (parallel, 25-pin)
• DME1/DME2 Editor ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)
• DME1/DME2 GPI ports (parallel, 25-pin)
2
In the <Switcher> or <DME> group, press on the name of the port for
which you want to disable control from an external device, turning it off.
To re-enable control for the port, press on its name once more.
Note
For the AUX bus operation from the Remote1 to Remote4 ports of the
switcher, the setting (Enable/Disable/Manual) in the Setup menu takes
precedence. Only when the setting is “Manual,” the settings made in the
Port Enable menu apply.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)” under “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
549Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
DME override
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.
2
In the <DME Override> group, select the DME override mode.
DME Override: When a switcher snapshot or effect using a DME is
recalled, forcibly select the DME that was used when saving.
On Air Protect: The operation is the same as the DME override function,
except that a DME being used by an M/E bank or P/P bank that is on
air will not be forcibly selected.
Note
If effects using the same DME channel are selected simultaneously in two
or more regions, the DME is selected with the order of precedence P/P >M/
E1 >M/E2 >M/E3.
Enabling or disabling control from System Manager
By installing the BZPS-8000 System Management Software (System
Manager), you can use a computer connected on a network for management of
some switcher data and control operations.
To enable or disable this function, use the following procedure.
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.
2
Press [System Manager].
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.
Editing Keyboard Settings
Note
The following operations are only possible when a license for the BZS-8050
Editing Control Software is activated. For details of license registration, see
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2).
550 Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Enabling or disabling control from the editing keyboard
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF2 ‘Plug-In Editor.’
The Misc >Enable >Plug-In Editor menu appears.
2
In the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group, press [Editor Enable].
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.
To enable control of the preview bus only
When control from the editing keyboard is disabled (when [Editor Enable] is
set to Disable), to enable control of the preview bus only, press [PVW Bus
Enable] in the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group.
Side Flag Settings
Note
The side flag function is only supported on an MVS-8000A system and MVS-
8000G system.
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a
selected image from the utility 1 bus.
For details of the side flag function, see “Side Flags” on page 102.
Enabling and disabling side flags with a menu operation
You can enable or disable side flags for the backgrounds (A and B) of each of
the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
As an example, to enable side flags for background B row on the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF3 ‘Side Flags.’
The Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu appears.
The status area shows the buttons for Bkgd A and Bkgd B for each of the
M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST (P/P) banks.
2
In the <M/E-1 Side Flags> group, press [Bkgd B].
Each time you press the button toggles between Enable and Disable.
551Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
To display a menu for the aspect ratio 4:3, auto side flags, and auto
crop settings
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Setup >SWER >Side Flags].
To display a menu for assigning the side flags on/off function to a
cross-point button
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].
Enabling and disabling side flags with a button operation
For example, to enable side flags for the background B row of the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
First, in the Setup menu assign the rightmost cross-point button to the
[SIDE FLAG] button.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt
Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
2
Press the [SIDE FLAG] button at the right end of the background B row of
the M/E-1 bank.
The button you pressed lights amber, and this enables the side flags.
Notes
• The operations of enabling or disabling the side flags by menu operation
and by control panel button operation are linked.
• When the auto side flags are on, selecting a 4:3 video material
automatically lights the [SIDE FLAG] button, but if you press this
button, turning it off, the side flags are temporarily disabled.
However, when you select a different 4:3 video material, the [SIDE
FLAG] button automatically lights once again, enabling the side flags.
Creating an image with side flags
For example, to create an image with side flags in the background B row of the
M/E-1 bank, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 bank cross-point control block, hold down the [UTIL] button,
and in the background A row select the signal (utility bus 1 signal) you
want to insert in the side flag areas.
2
In the background B row, press the cross-point button corresponding to the
4:3 video material.
552 Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
At this point, if auto side flags are on, this automatically adds side flags to
the 4:3 video material. (See “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)
3
Use either of the following methods to turn the side flags on.
• Use the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu. (See page 550)
• Use a cross-point button operation. (See previous item.)
This adds side flags to the 4:3 video material.
Safe Title Settings
Switching the safe title function on or off
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC] and
select VF2 ‘Safe Title.’
The Misc >Safe Title menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the signal to which the settings
apply.
• Directly press the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob to make the setting.
Notes
• It is not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe
title is set off in a Setup menu.
• The safe title function cannot be used for output signals for which
through mode is set to Enable in a Setup menu.
For more information about the Setup menu settings referred to above, see
“Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)” and “Signal Output Settings (Output
Menu)” in Chpater 16 (Volume 2).
3
Press [Safe Title] to set it on or off.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Output Signal to which the settings
apply
1 to 48
553Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings
In the Transition menu, for each bank you can display a list of the M/E (or
PGM/PST) transition rates and independent key (or DSK) transition rates, and
change the settings.
These settings are linked to the other transition rate setting operations.
You can also display and set the fade-to-black transition rate.
Displaying the Transition menu
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC], then
select VF3 ‘Transition.’
The Misc >Transition menu appears.
About the Transition menu display
The display of the independent key transition rate in the Misc >Transition
menu depends on the selection in the <Key Transition> group of the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Transition menu for each of the M/E and PGM/
PST banks.
When [Same] (On direction and Off direction settings the same) is selected
in the <Key Transition> group: Only “Key” (or “DSK” in the PGM/PST
bank) appears.
When [Independ] (On direction and Off direction settings independent) is
selected in the <Key Transition> group: “Key(On)” and “Key(Off)”
each appear. In the case of the PGM/PST bank, “DSK(On)” and
“DSK(Off)” appear.
For more details, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
Setting the transition rate in the Transition menu
For example, to make the settings for the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
To set the M/E transition rate
1
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press
[Transition].
2
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.
554 Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Note
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to
change the transition rate in this menu.
To set the independent key transition rate
1
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press
[Key].
To set the key On direction or Off direction independently, press Key(On)
or Key(Off).
2
Turn the knobs to set the number of frames.
To set the fade-to-black transition rate in the Transition menu
1
In the Misc >Transition menu, press [FTB].
2
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Key1 Trans Rate Key 1 transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
2 Key2 Trans Rate Key 2 transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
3 Key3 Trans Rate Key 3 transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
4 Key4 Trans Rate Key 4 transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 (frames)
555AUX Menu Operations
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
AUX Menu Operations
AUX Bus Settings
Making video process settings for an AUX bus
Make the settings as follows.
1
In the Aux/Mon >Aux Bus menu, using any of the following methods,
select the AUX bus to which the settings apply.
• Directly press the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob to make the setting.
2
Press [Video Process], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
To return adjustment values to their defaults
Press [Unity].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 AUX Bus AUX bus selection 1 to 48
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –7.31 to +109.59
556 Status Menu
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Status Menu
The Status menu shows the following information.
• Operating status of the DME
Viewing the DME operating status
To view the DME operating status, press the top menu selection button
[STATS] in the menu control block.
This selects VF1 ‘DME Status’ and the Status menu appears.
For each DME channel, you can see how the DME is being used in the
corresponding operation block.
The display background color also indicates the following differences in the
way in which a DME is being used.
Blue: The DME is currently being used in other than the final program output.
Red: The DME is currently being used in the final program output.
DME status display
557Video Process Settings
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Video Process Settings
This section describes operations on the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST
background A and B buses, and utility buses 1 and 2.
For these operations, use the Misc >Video Process menu in the respective
operating bank.
For video process settings on other buses, see the following.
• Settings for a particular input signal: “Signal input settings” in Chapter 16
(Volume 2)
• Key fill bus settings: “Video Processing” (page 405)
• Settings for frame memory source buses 1 and 2: “Setting video processing”
(page 498)
• Settings for Aux 1 to 48 buses: “Making video process settings for an AUX
bus” (page 555)
• Overview of video process: “Video Process” (page 107)
This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M/E-1 bank.
For the background B bus or utility bus 1 or 2, make the adjustment with a
similar procedure.
Making video process settings for each bus
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [M/E1] and
select VF7 ‘Misc’ and HF2 ‘Video Process.’
2
In the <Bkgd-A> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
To return the parameter settings to the defaults
Press [Unity] in the <Bkgd-A> group.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –7.31 to +109.59
558 Video Process Settings
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.
Appendix (Volume 1)
Wipe Pattern List .....................................................................................560
Standard Wipes ..................................................................................560
Enhanced Wipes ................................................................................561
Rotary Wipes .....................................................................................562
Mosaic Wipes ....................................................................................563
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes ..........................................................565
DME Wipe Pattern List ...........................................................................566
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .....................566
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode .....................575
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode ...................579
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................580
Appendix (Volume 1)
560 Wipe Pattern List
Wipe Pattern List
Standard Wipes
1234
5678
9101112
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
561Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Enhanced Wipes
26 27 29 49
300 301 302 303
304
Appendix (Volume 1)
562 Wipe Pattern List
Rotary Wipes
100 101 102 103
104 105 106 107
150 151 156 158
160 162 516 518
604 606 624 661
563Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Mosaic Wipes
200 201 202 203
206 207 208 209
210 211 212 213
220 221 222 223
224 225 226 227
228 229 230 231
232 233 234 235
Appendix (Volume 1)
564 Wipe Pattern List
236 237 238 239
240 241 242 243
244 245 246 247
250 251 252 253
254 255 256 257
260 261 262 263
264 265
268 269
266 267
565Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes
270 271 272 273
274
Appendix (Volume 1)
566 DME Wipe Pattern List
DME Wipe Pattern List
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode
Slide
Split
1001 1002 1003 1004
1005 1006 1007 1008
1011 1012 1013
567DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Squeeze
Door
1021 1022 1023 1024
1025 1026 1027 1028
1029 1030 1031
1041 1042 1043 1044
1045 1046 1047 1048
Appendix (Volume 1)
568 DME Wipe Pattern List
2D trans
3D trans
1051 1052 1053 1054
1055 1056 1057 1058
1061 1062 1063 1064
1068
1071 1072 1074 1076
1077 1088 1091 1092
1093 1094
569DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Flip tumble
Frame in-out
1101 1102 1103 1104
1124 1131 1132 1133
1135
1109 1110 1121 1122
1201 1202 1203 1204
1221 1222 1223 1224
1205 1206 1207 1208
Appendix (Volume 1)
570 DME Wipe Pattern List
Picture-in-picture
Page turn
1251
1301 1302 1303 1304
1318 1341 1342 1343
1313 1315 1316 1317
1344 1345
1309 1310 1311 1312
1305 1306 1307 1308
571DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Page roll
Mirror
1338 1346 1347 1348
1335 1336 1337
1349 1350
1321 1322 1323 1324
1329 1330 1331 1332
1333
1325 1326 1327 1328
1355 1356 1357 1358
Appendix (Volume 1)
572 DME Wipe Pattern List
Sphere
Character trail
Wave
Ripple
1365
1371 1372
1378 1379
1381
573DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Split slide
Sparkle
Mosaic
Defocus
1384 1385 1386 1387
1388 1389
1391 1393 1394 1396
1398 1399
1701
1702
Appendix (Volume 1)
574 DME Wipe Pattern List
User programmable DME
The illustrations for patterns 1901 to 1999 show an effect register number or
register name.
1901 1999
575DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode
Slide
Squeeze
3D trans
2601 2602 2603 2604
2605 2606 2607 2608
2621 2622 2623 2624
2625 2626 2627 2628
2631 2632 2633 2634
2642 2644
Appendix (Volume 1)
576 DME Wipe Pattern List
Picture-in-picture
Page turn
2651 2652
2713 2715 2716 2717
2718 2741 2742 2743
2744 2745
2705 2706 2707 2708
2709 2710 2711 2712
2701 2702 2703 2704
577DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Page roll
2733 2735 2736 2737
2738 2746 2747 2748
2749 2750
2725 2726 2727 2728
2729 2730 2731 2732
2721 2722 2723 2724
Appendix (Volume 1)
578 DME Wipe Pattern List
Brick
Frame in-out
User programmable DME
The illustrations for patterns 2901 to 2999 show an effect register number or
register name.
2801 2802 2803 2804
2811 2812 2813 2814
2851 2852 2853 2854
2861 2862 2863 2864
2901 2999
579DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode
Brick
User programmable DME
The illustrations for patterns 3901 to 3999 show an effect register number or
register name.
3601
3901 3999
Appendix (Volume 1)
580 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
Slide
Squeeze
7001 7002 7003 7004
7005 7006 7007 7008
7021 7022 7023 7024
7025 7026 7027 7028
7029 7030 7031
581Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
Frame in-out
7201 7202 7203 7204
7221 7222 7223 7224
7205 7206 7207 7208
582 Index
Index
Index
A
Additive mix 49
Ancillary data 92, 522
Angle 66
Art Edge 124
Aspect ratio 67, 450, 458
Attributes 184
Audio mixer 33
Auto
chroma key adjustments
382
transition 45, 183, 359
AUTO button 287
AUTO DELEG button 270
AUTO INS button 284
AUTO TRANS button 262,
263, 311
Auto/manual transition
combination 360
Autoload function 208
AUX
bus settings 555
delegation buttons 288
menu operations 555
Auxiliary bus control block
for AUX buses 288
for router control 291
settings 196
Axis location 118
B
Background 150
A/B row 257
changing 34
mask 56
Bank selection buttons 298
Basic menu operations 313
Beveled edge 124
Blind 134
Blink 57
function 404
Blur 124
Border 53, 123
parameters 410
Brick 156
Broken glass 134
BS button 331
Bus fixed mode 45
fader operation 361
wipe direction 363
Bus selection 26
Button
assignment settings 197
numbers 30, 31
C
Caps Lock button 331
Channel ID 121
Character trail 139
Chroma key 49
adjustments 382
composition 381
shadow 51
shadow adjustment 386
window 50
Circle 136
Clean mode 49
Clear button 330, 332
Clip function 92
Clip transition 44
operations 524
Close button 330, 331
Color
combination 97, 539
matte settings 350
vector key 48
Color background 97
selection 97
setting operations 538
settings menu 538
Color cancel 50
adjustments 383
Color corrector 223
Copy and swap 226
Input video processing
223
Luminance processing
224
Output video processing
226
Primary color correction
223
RGB clip 224
Secondary color correction
224
Spot color adjustment 226
YUV clip 226
Color data
copy 100
swap 100
Color mix 97, 127, 539
for edge fill matte 446
for key fill 388
Color palette window 333
Combine Shadow 141
Combiner 152
Contrast 128
Control panel 251
configuration 1 251
configuration 2 252
configuration 3 255
Coordinate axes 120
Copy 98, 544
Crop 123
Cross-point
button numbers 257
button settings 196
buttons 256
control block 256
hold 183
Custom mode 192
Cut 44
CUT button 262, 312
Cylinder 138
583Index
Index
D
Dead zone 487
Default recall button 323
Defocus 123
Del button 332
Delay setting 174
Delegation buttons 267
DEST button 289
Detents 115
Device
management 193
DEVICE connectors 295
Device control block
joystick 277
search dial 278
trackball 271
Device Interface 202
Digital multi effects 109
Dim and Fade 130
Direction 64, 444, 456, 470
Disk recorder control 161
Display 269, 286
DME 109, 261, 263, 311
applying to a key 400,
415
channel selection buttons
269
setup 202
special effects 122
DME channel
copy 101
swap 101
DME monitor 270, 287, 309
DME override 549
DME patterns
user programmable 483
DME Wipe Modify Clear 83
DME wipe pattern 72
edge modification 470
groups 72
selection 466
DME wipe pattern list
for one-channel mode 566
for two-channel mode
575
DME wipe settings 466
for independent key
transitions 477
DME wipes 72, 465
copy 99, 100
direction 470
modifiers 469
modify clear 476
position 471, 478
resizer 481
snapshot 82, 482
swap 99, 100
Door 567
Downstream key control block
306
Drop border 53
parameters 411
dual resizer effects 432
Duration
effect 171
keyframe 171
modes 170
setting buttons 283
Dust mix 62, 443
E
Edge 65
fill 55
modifiers 52
EDIT ENBL button 282
Edit point specification
buttons 282
Editing buttons 283
EFF LOOP button 284
Effect 168
attributes 169
dissolve 169, 183
duration 171
editing 169
execution 180
resizer 427
saving/recalling 169
Effect execution direction
selection buttons 284
Emboss 54
Enhanced wipes 561
Enter button 330, 332
Explosion 138
Extended VTR control 161
External
key 90
processed key 270, 403,
417
External devices 158
connections 197
disk recorder control 161
Extended VTR control
161
GPI device control 160
P-Bus device control 159
shared control functions
158
VTR control 161
External hard disk drive 532
F
Fade to black 47, 369
control block 287
transition rate 369
Fader lever 261, 307, 311
Files 205
autoload function 208
backups 531
deleting 529
operations 205
renaming 530
restoring 531
Flag 132
Flex Shadow 125
Flexi Pad control block
simple type 299
standard type 264
Flip tumble 569
Flip-flop mode 45
Flying bar 134
Format converter 190
Frame
in-out 569, 581
Frame input mode 352
Frame memory
clip function 92
continuously capturing
still images (record) 91,
508
feed 270, 403, 418
584 Index
Index
overview 85
pair file processing 527
recalling a continuous
sequence of still images
(animation) 91, 509
settings 200
Frame memory operations
490
capturing an input image
496
clip 512
input image selection 494
menu display 490
preparations 490
selecting frame memory
495
selecting outputs 495
Freeze 89, 131, 496
Fringe 70
FTB button 287
FULL LINK 63
Function
button area 322
selection buttons 286
G
Global
coordinate space 111
effects 152
Glow 130
GPI Device control 160
GPI output 183
Graphics display 120
Grid 121
H
HF buttons 322
I
Image
capturing 89
data management 94, 527
data transfer 94
output 90
processing 90
recalling 90
saving 89
Image file
deletion 529
renaming 530
Independent key transition
37, 364
DME wipe settings 477
simple transitions 374
type 365
type selection buttons
263, 304, 306
wipe modifiers 456
wipe settings 455
Independent key transition
control block
simple type 304
standard type 364
Independent key transition
execution section 263, 305,
307, 312
Independent key transition rate
366
display 368
setting by a menu
operation 367
setting in the Flexi Pad
control block 366
setting in the numeric
keypad control block
367
Input
signal settings 199, 202
string 331
value 330
Installation 192
Installation and device settings
192
Interpolation 151
Invert 151
Item display 330, 331
J
Joystick 277
K
Kaleidoscope 136
Key 48
1/2 row 256
bus selection buttons 258
control block 267
default 57
delegation buttons 263,
306
deleting 35
density adjustment 152
disable 183
edge modifications 390,
410
inserting 35
mask 55
memory 56
modifier buttons 268
modifiers 52
modify clear 58, 404
output destination 403
output status display 346,
373
settings 200
signal adjustments 384
source selection 152
status display 263, 303,
312
Key active 50
adjustment 383
Key Border 124
KEY button 289
Key fill
selection 387
selection buttons 268
Key priority 343
display 346, 373
selecting 36
setting by a menu
operation 345
setting in the transition
control block 343
Key setting
using menus 378
Key snapshot 433
buttons 264, 307
recalling 434, 436
saving 433, 435
setting buttons 264, 307
585Index
Index
using simple transition
module 435
Key source
name display 264, 307
selection 387
selection buttons 268
Key transition
selection buttons 302
Key type
selection buttons 268
setting 379
Keyboard window 331
Keyer
copy 99
swap 99
Keyframe 168
control block 281
duration 171
effect registers 166
status 323
strobe 143
KF button 263
Knob 269, 294
parameter buttons 323
K-SS button 305
L
Left button 332
Lens 136
Level selection buttons 290
Lighting 140
Line feed button 332
Linear key 48
Local coordinate space 111
Location
size 118
XYZ 116
Lock function 508
Luminance key 48
M
M/E
bank display 259
copy 98
swap 98
Macro 210
attachment 218
creating 213
editing 212, 214, 218
events 210
execution 215
menu macro 222
overview 210
registers 210
timeline 216
Magnitude 66
MAIN and SUB delegation
button 235
Main mask 56
using 397, 414
Main menu site 335
Main/sub modifier link 63
Maintenance 193
Manual transition 45, 359
Mask (DME) 130
Masks 55, 397, 414
Master
region 166
snapshot registers 167
timeline registers 167
timelines 181
Matte data
copy 100
swap 100
Max./min. value indication
330
Melt 139
Memory
card slot 295
initialization 192
recall buttons 298
Memory card/USB adaptor
block 295
“Memory Stick”/USB
connections block 296
“Memory Sticks” 296
Menu
accessing 314, 321
control block 294
display 294
operations 323
organization 313
page number button 322
screen 322
shortcut menu 335
shutting down 333
switching between the
main menu sites 335
title button 322
top menu list 313
MENU button 276
Menu macros 222
Metal 129
Minus button 330
Mirror 135
Misc menu operations 548
MIX 90, 261, 263, 311
Mix 41, 61
Mode selection buttons 265,
285, 303
Modulation 69, 452
Mono 127
MORE button 269
Morphing 61
Mosaic 128
glass 132
wipes 563
Motion decay 142
Multi 67, 451, 459
mirror 135
move 127
Multi Program 2 230
basic operation 232
restriction 243
MVE-8000A 109
MVE-9000 109
N
NAM 42, 90, 261, 311
Nega 128
Negative NAM 61
Network configuration 187
Next transition 34
selecting 34
selection buttons 261, 310
Non-additive mix 42, 261,
311
Nonlinear effects 131
Non-Sync state 360
Normal
edge 413
586 Index
Index
mix 49
Numeric display 266, 303
Numeric keypad 286
control block 284
window 330
O
ON AIR indicators 270
One-stroke mode 42
One-time mode 42
Operation
buttons 272
modes 88
settings 197
Outline 54
parameters 412
Output
destination specification
buttons 270
signal settings 200
OVERRIDE button 270
P
Page Roll 571
Page turn 137, 570
Pair file processing 94, 527
Pair mode 87
Pairing 68, 452
Panel setup 195
Panorama 137
Parameter group button 322
Paths 174
DME 176
switcher 174
types 179
Pattern key 90
Pattern limit 46, 355
buttons 262, 302
setting by a menu
operation 356
setting with the fader lever
356
transition 357
Pattern mix 61, 441
types 61
Pattern replication 67
P-Bus devices 158
control 159
Perspective 119
Picture-in-picture 570, 576
Plane function 50
Positioner 65, 448, 456, 471,
478
Positive NAM 61
Posterization 128
Preset color mix 42
Preview 46, 363
selection buttons 287
Previous page button 323
PRIOR SET button 263, 312
PST COLOR MIX 261, 311
R
Random/diamond dust wipes
565
Reentry buttons 26, 257
Reference region 166
Regions 165
selection buttons 285
Registers 166
Related manuals 20
Replication 459
Resizer 58
Resizer DME wipe 481
Resizer DME wipe patterns
580
Resume mode 192
Right button 332
Rings 133
Ripple 133
Roll 137
Rotary wipes 562
Rotation 65, 117, 450, 458
Router interface setup 203
RTR button 290
S
Screen saver 198
Search dial 278
Second (2ND) button 289
Selected
bus display 289
source name displays 289
SEMI LINK 63
Separate sides 150
Sepia 127
Setup 187
DCU input/output 202
overview 187
panel 195
router interface 203
switcher 198
system 187
Setup data saving/recalling
194
Shadow 53, 157
parameters 411
Shaped Video 150
SHIFT button 259
Shift button 332
Shortcut 335
Shotbox 186
SHOW KEY button 269
Show key function 418
Side flags
DME wipe action 104
MISC menu 550
overview 102
settings 102
wipe action 103
Signal
assignment to buttons 29
name display 33
selection 25
Simple
transition 371
Simple P/P Software 227
Sketch 129
Skew 120
Slide 566, 575, 580
Snapshot 182
attributes 183
registers 167
Soft edge 54, 456
Softening
edge 413
wipe pattern edge 456
Solarization 128
Source
coordinate space 110
587Index
Index
name displays 290
Space button 332
Speed 66
Sphere 138
Spin 117
Spiral 71, 453
Split 64, 135, 444, 566
fader 373
slide 135
Spotlighting 143
Spring 70, 453
Squeeze 567, 575, 580
Standard wipe patterns 60
Standard wipes 560
Start up state 192
Status area 322
Status menu 556
STOP NEXT KF button 284
Sub (subsidiary) mask 56
using 399, 414
Subsidiary menu site 335
SUPER MIX 261, 311
Super mix 42
settings 349
Swap 98, 544
Swirl 139
Switcher setup 198
System
configuration 187
features 22
reset 192
setup 187
T
Tally interface setup 203
Target coordinate space 110
TC button 330
Temporary attributes 169,
184
Three-dimensional
coordinate space 110
parameter display 122
parameters 112
transformations 110
Time offset execution 39
Timecode input mode 352
Top menu list 313
Top menu selection buttons
294
Top menu window 332
TRACE button 270
Trail 142
TRANS PVW button 262,
312
Transformation operation
modes 116
Transition
auto 45
execution 44, 351
indicator 307
manual 45
mode 171
next 34
operating procedure 340
preview 46, 363
Transition control block
simple type 299
standard type 260
Transition execution
section 261, 302, 311
with the fader lever 359
Transition indicator 261, 311
function 351
Transition rate 352
display 262, 311
setting by a menu
operation 355
setting in the Flexi Pad
control block 353
setting in the MISC menu
553
setting in the numeric
keypad control block
354
Transition type 41
selecting by a menu
operation 348
selection buttons 261,
301, 311
Trim button 330
Twist 133
U
UNDO button 266, 303
User preference button 294
User programmable DME
574, 578
Notes on keyframe
creation 484
patterns 483
transition mode 75, 483
User regions 165
User texture pattern 149
UTIL button 258
Utility 185
Utility/shotbox control block
298
V
V/K mode 88
VF buttons 322
Video
processing 24, 405
signal adjustment 51
switching 200
Video process 107
memory 108
settings 557
VTR control 161
W
Wave 131
Wind 143
Window adjustment 51, 385
WIPE 261, 263, 311
Wipe 44, 60
copy 99
enhanced 60
modify clear 454
mosaic 60
pattern list 560
random/diamond dust 60
rotary 60
standard 60
swap 99
Wipe crop 126
Wipe direction 444, 456
selection buttons 262,
302, 312
Wipe modifiers 443
588 Index
Index
Wipe Modify Clear 71
Wipe pattern
aspect ratio 450, 458
edge modification 445
key 52
modifiers 63
modulation 452
replication 451, 459
rotation 450
selection 438
types 60
variation 63
Wipe pattern/modifier
combinations 454
Wipe position 448, 456
Wipe settings 200, 438
for independent key
transitions 455
Wipe snapshot 71, 460
deleting 462
recalling 462
saving 461
Wire frames 120
X
XPT HOLD
buttons 258, 289
status display 303
Y
Y balance 51
adjustment 385
Z
Zabton 54, 396, 413
Z-ring 275
The material contained in this manual consists of infor-
mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip-
ment described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur-
pose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
MVS-8000/8000SF
System (SY)
3-206-016-12 (1)
Printed in Japan
2008.05.13
©2001
Sony Corporation
Printed on recycled paper

Navigation menu